Ra00823 0706 SPC

Hydraulics Product Catalog With Preferred & Spotlight Delivery Programs Section
Authorized Distibution Network
The Drive & Control Company
Full-line Bosch Rexroth Hydraulic Distributors

Bosch Rexroth is proud to work with the highest qualied Distributors in the hydraulics industry. These distributors add value by extending the level of technical and industry expertise available to users of uid power across the country. They work closely with our applications engineering personnel to deliver innovative, effective, and reliable solutions to your most challenging needs. Following is the list of our authorized full-line Hydraulic Distributors:
A & L Hydraulics, Inc. 4412 South 87th Street Omaha, NE 68127 (402) 339-3873 Airline Hydraulics, Inc. Expressway 95 Business Ctr. 3557 Progress Drive Bensalem, PA 19020 (215) 638-4700 Catey Controls, Inc. 3102 West Broadway Missoula, MT 59808 (406) 728-7860 Flodyne/Hydradyne, Inc. 1000 Muireld Drive Hanover Park, IL 60103 (630) 563-3600 FPS Technologies, Inc. 1417 Forestdale Boulevard Birmingham, AL 35214 (205) 798-9440 Fluid System Components, Inc. 1700 Suburban Drive DePere, WI 54115 (920) 337-0234 Gulf Controls Company, LLC 5201 Tampa West Boulevard Tampa, FL 33634 (813) 884-0471 Hydraulic Controls, Inc. 4700 San Pablo Avenue Emeryville, CA 94608 (510) 658-8300 Hydrotech, Inc. 10052 Commerce Park Drive Cincinnati, OH 45246 (513) 881-7000 Innotek Engineered Products 9140 Zachary Lane North Maple Grove, MN 55369 (763) 488-9910 Interstate Hydraulics, Inc. 426 West 9160 South Sandy, UT 84070 (801) 566-4333 Iowa Fluid Power, Inc. 1610 Blairs Ferry Road NE Cedar Rapids, IA 52402 (319) 395-7000 John Henry Foster, Co. 4700 Lebourget Drive St. Louis, MO 63134 (314) 427-0600 Livingston & Haven, Inc. 11616 Wilmar Boulevard Charlotte, NC 28273 (704) 588-3670 Morrell, Inc. 3333 Bald Mountain Road Auburn Hills, MI 48326 (248) 373-1600 Pacic Power Tech, LLC 18977 NE Portal Way Portland, OR 97230 (503) 667-9222 Womack Machine Supply Co. 2010 Shea Road Dallas, TX 75235 (214) 357-3871
For more information on distributor coverage in your local area, go to our Web site www.boschrexroth-us.com and enter Web code US0017.
Electric Drives and Controls
Hydraulics
Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies
Pneumatics
Service
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
To our valued Bosch Rexroth Customer; The Bosch Rexroth Corporations Hydraulic Technology Group, is pleased to provide a Hydraulics Product Program Catalog including a specific listing of Preferred and Spotlight products. Purpose: This catalog represents an overview of the North American Bosch Rexroth Hydraulic product portfolio, and an identified, focused range of Rexroth Preferred & Spotlight Products to guide selections for a wide range of typical applications. The focus on a range of Preferred & Spotlight products allows us to offer a higher service level including: Delivery of Preferred items not to exceed four weeks Delivery of Spotlight items not to exceed two weeks* Simplied pricing Enhanced customer service * See Hydraulics Preferred Products Component List for specific Preferred and Spotlight product identification, in Section XX. Nine (9) pieces per material number, per order, is the maximum quantity permitted. We reserve the right to limit quantities; however, will acknowledge all orders and the quantity which will be delivered to Preferred and Spotlight lead times. If quantities greater than (9) pieces per material number are required, please consult us for price and delivery. Material numbers listed in the Preferred and Spotlight section of this catalog for quantities (9) or less will be considered preferred product orders, unless specied under another agreement. Delivery, Preferred products will be delivered in (4) weeks or less, Spotlight products will be delivered in (2) weeks or less.
Distributed by:
Please visit our website at www.boschrexroth-us.com and select the Sales Locator for the name of your nearest Bosch Rexroth Distributor or call 1-800-REXROTH.
All items subject to prior sale. It is advisable to conrm critical delivery requirements at time of order.
WARNING!
FAILURE, IMPROPER SELECTION OR IMPROPER USE OF THE PRODUCTS AND/OR SYSTEMS DESCRIBED HEREIN OR OF RELATED ITEMS CAN CAUSE DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE.
This document and other information from Bosch Rexroth Corporation and its divisions provide products and/or system options for further investigation by users having technical expertise. It is important that you analyze all aspects of your application and review the information concerning the products or systems in Rexroths Technical Data Sheets & Catalogs. Due to the variety of operating conditions and applications for these products or systems, the user, through his own analysis and testing, is solely responsible for making the nal selection of the products and systems and assuring that all performance, safety andwarning requirements are met. The products described herein, including without limitation, product features, specications, designs, and prices are subject to change at any time without notice.
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Table of Contents
For a complete copy of the data sheets in this catalog, visit our website at: www.boschrexroth-us.com u Products and Solutions u Industrial Hydraulics u Products and Catalogs u Preferred Product Catalog
Section 1. Pumps and Motors ............................... 1 Section 2. Check Valves .................................... 127 Section 3. Directional Valves............................. 147 Section 4. Mobile Controls ................................ 181 Section 5. Pressure Control Valves ................. 219 Section 6. Flow Control Valves......................... 257 Section 7. Proportional Valves .......................... 275 Section 8. Proportional Electronics ................. 361 Section 9. Mobile Electronics ........................... 411 Section 10. Accessories .................................... 461 Section 11. Manifolds ......................................... 481 Section 12. Tie Rod Cylinders .......................... 489 Section 13. Power Packs ................................... 497 Section 14. Gear Drives ..................................... 503 Section 15. Seal Kits........................................... 543 Section 16. Preferred & Spotlight Delivery Programs Section.................................................. 547
iii
iii
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 1 Pumps and Motors
External gear pump F, N & G ......................................... 2 External gear motors F & N ............................................ 8 Internal gear pump, xed displacement PGF....................................................................................11 PGH ...................................................................................14 Fixed displacement vane pump PVV..........................17 Variable displacement vane pumps PSV ..................19 Radial piston pump R4 .................................................21 Radial piston pump R4 mini .........................................23 Variable vane pumps VPV ............................................25 Radial piston motor, low speed, high torque MCR 03 ............................................................................28 MCR 05 ............................................................................33 MCR 10 ............................................................................37 MCR 15 ............................................................................41 MCR 20 ............................................................................44 Fixed displacement motor, open and closed AA2FM (A2FM) ..................................................................47 Fixed displacement motor, open and closed A10FM, standard version; A10FE, plug-in version.....52 Fixed displacement pump, open AA2FO (A2FO) ..................................................................56 Variable displacement motor, open and closed AA6VM (A6VM) ..................................................................60 Dual displacement motor, open and closed A10VM; A10VE, plug-in version .....................................64 Variable displacement pump, closed AA4VG .........68 1
1
Variable displacement pump, open A4VSO ............73 Axial piston variable pump for HFC uids (water-glycol) AA4VSO ................................................78 Variable displacement pump, closed A4VSG .........82 Axial piston-compact unit AA4CSG (A4CSG) .......87 Variable displacement pump, open AA11VO ..........91 Variable displacement pump, open A10V(S)O .......95 Variable displacement pump, open A10VO ............99 Variable displacement pump, open AA10VSO (A10VSO: sizes 10 & 18) ........................ 103 Variable displacement pump, open A10VSO....... 107 Variable displacement pump, open A10VNO ...... 111 Variable displacement pump, closed AA10VG ............................................................................ 114 Closed loop pressure and ow control system SYDFE1 ............................................................................ 118 Pressure and ow closed loop SYDFEE ............... 121 Pressure-ow closed loop control SYHDFEE ...... 124
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

Page 1 of 6 Issue: 06.06
See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price.
External gear pumps Series F, N, & G

Fixed displacement pumps Sizes 4.1...63.0 cm3 (0.26...3.84 in3)
Displacements of 4cc to 63cc Plain bearings for heavy duty applications Drive shafts SAE or ISO Multiple Pump Assemblies Port connections: ange or threaded Optimized pressure pulsation, which reduces noise levels and vibration excitation in the system Consistent high quality Considerably longer life due to reinforced shaft and housing
Series G
Series N
Series F
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code F series pump
* Common S0 Codes: S0022 Long Keyed Shaft Contact factory for additional codes. Pumps and Motors 3 Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code N series pump
* Common S0 Codes: S0075 Tapered Shaft Contact factory for additional codes. Pumps and Motors 4 Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code G series pump
Note: Consult factory for availability
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code for multiple pumps
* Contact factory for availability of units with no ordering number listed. ** Refer to page 18 for SAE O-Ring Boss specifications and dimensions.
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Performance ratings
F Series Performance Ratings Size Displacement Inlet pressure max. continuous pressure p1 max. intermittent pressure p2 max. peak pressure p3 min. rotational speed (RPM) % 100 max. rotational speed at (RPM) max. Drehzahl bei N Series Performance Ratings Size Displacement Inlet pressure max. continuous pressure p1 max. intermittent pressure p2 max. peak pressure p3 min. rotational speed (RPM) % 100 max. rotational speed at (RPM) p1 0 max. Drehzahl bei p2 0 G Series Performance Ratings Size Displacement: Range Speed: Pressure - Rated: p1 Intermittent: p2 Max Peak: p3 Inlet Pressure: RPM
cm3/rev bar bar psi bar psi bar psi RPM p10 p 20
004 4.1
005 5.6
600
500 3500 4000
011 014 016 019 11.3 14.3 16.5 19.5 min. 0.7 max. 3 (absolute) 250 210 3625 3045 280 230 4060 3335 300 250 4350 3625 500 500 500 500 500 3000 2500 2000 2000 3500 3500 3500 3000
008 8.2
022 22.9 180 2610 210 3045 230 3335 500 2000 2750
025 25.4 200 2900 220 3190 240 3528 500 2000 2500
028 28.5 170 2465 190 2755 210 3045 500 2000 2500
cm3/rev bar bar psi bar psi bar psi
020 20.4 230 3335 250 3625 270 3915 500 2500 3000
022 23.1 230 3335 250 3625 270 3915 500 2500 3000
025 028 25.8 28.4 min. 0.7 max. 3 (absolute) 230 210 3335 3045 250 230 3625 3335 270 250 3915 3625 500 500 2500 2300 3000 2800
032 32.4 180 2610 200 2900 220 3190 500 2300 2800
036 36.4 160 2610 180 2610 200 2900 500 2100 2600
cm3/rev cu in/rev Min RPM Max RPM (Bar) (PSI) (Bar) (PSI) (Bar) (PSI) Continuous Intermittent
32 36 45 56 32 36 45 56 2.20 2.75 3.42 1.95 400 400 400 400 2800 2600 2300 2800 250 250 250 195 3625 3625 3625 2828 280 280 280 225 4060 4060 4060 3263 300 300 250 300 4350 4350 4350 3625 0.7 - 3.0 bar absolute (9in Hg vacuum to 29 PSIG 0.1 - 10 bar absolute (26in Hg vacuum to 130 PSIG
63 63 3.84 400 2300 170 2465 200 2900 230 3335
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

External gear motors Series F & N

Fixed displacement motors Sizes 8.2...36.4 cm3 (0.51...2.28 in3)
Plain bearings for heavy duty applications Drive shafts SAE or ISO Port connections: ange or threaded Consistent high quality Considerably longer life due to reinforced shaft and housing
Ratings and specications
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code F series motor
* Common S0 Codes: S0018 = Cross check valve in rear cover (internal case drain), S0022 = Long keyed shaft, S0030 = S0018 + S0022, S0028 = Pressure relief valve and anti-cavitation valve. Pumps and Motors 9 Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code N series motor
* Common S0 Codes: S0018 = Cross check valve in rear cover (internal case drain), S0022 = Long keyed shaft, S0030 = S0018 + S0022, S0028 = Pressure relief valve and anti-cavitation valve. Pumps and Motors 10 Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RE 10213/04.05

Internal gear pump, xed displacement Model PGF

Frame sizes 1, 2 and 3 Component series: 2X (FS1 and 2) 3X (FS3) Max. operating pressure up to 250 bar (3626 PSI) Max. displacement 1.7 to 40 cm3 (0.10 to 2.44 in3)
Fixed displacement Low operating noise Low ow pulsation High efciency even at low viscosity due to sealing gap compensation Long service life due to plain bearings and sealing gap compensation Suitable for a wide viscosity and speed range Excellent suction characteristics All frame sizes can be combined with each other Can be combined with PGH internal gear pumps, PV7 vane pumps and axial piston pumps Valve technology can be integrated in the cover plate on inquiry
Model PGF1... for direct mounting
Model PGF3... for direct mounting
Pumps and Motors
11
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code PG F
Series Medium-pressure pump =F N= D= K=
*
Further details in clear text Options Anti-cavitation valve Pressure relief valve Cover plate for mounting the next smaller size
Frame size component series FS1 component series 2X = 12X (component series 20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) FS2 component series 2X = 22X (component series 20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) FS3 component series 3X = 33X (component series 30 to 39: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Size Size FS1 1.7 2.2 2.8 3.2 4.1 5.0 6.3 8.0 11.0 13.0 16.0 19.0 22.0 20.0 22.0 25.0 32.0 40.0 Displacement/ revolution 1.7 cm3 (0.10 in3) 2.2 cm3 (0.13 in3) 2.8 cm3 (0.17 in3) 3.2 cm3 (0.20 in3) 4.1 cm3 (0.25 in3) 5.0 cm3 (0.31 in3) 6.5 cm3 (0.40 in3) 8.2 cm3 (0.50 in3) 11.0 cm3 (0.67 in3) 13.3 cm3 (0.81 in3) 16.0 cm3 (0.98 in3) 18.9 cm3 (1.15 in3) 22.0 cm3 (1.34 in3) 20.6 cm3 (1.26 in3) 22.2 cm3 (1.35 in3) 25.4 cm3 (1.55 in3) 32.5 cm3 (1.98 in3) 40.5 cm3 (2.47 in3) = 1.7 = 2.2 = 2.8 = 3.2 = 4.1 = 5.0 = 006 = 008 = 011 = 013 = 016 = 019 = 022 = 020 = 022 = 025 = 032 = 040 V=
Mounting flange centering Special flange to ISO 7653-1985 (for truck PTO) E4 = 4-hole mounting flange to ISO 3019/2 and VDMA 24560 part 1 U2 = SAE 2-hole mounting flange M= 2-hole mounting, centering 32 mm (1.26 in.) FS1, centering 52 mm (2.05 in.) FS2 and 3 2 hole mounting, P= centering 50 mm (1.97 in.) 2-hole mounting, P1 = centering 45.24 mm (1.78 in.) 2-hole mounting, P2 = centering 63 mm (2.48 in.) K4 = Seal material FKM seals Please observe our regulations to data sheet RE 07075! Suction and pressure port BSP to ISO 228/1 SAE flange connection Square flange connection to DIN 3901 or DIN 3902, metric mounting thread Shaft versions Cylindrical Cylindrical with output Involute splines Involute splines with output Two flats for claw coupling Two flats for claw coupling with output Conical 1 : 5 Conical with output 1 : 5 Direction of rotation (viewed to shaft end) Clockwise Counter-clockwise
FS2
FS3
01 = 07 1) = 20 =
A= E= T= J= N= L= S= O= R= L=
1)
Part code 07 is only available on FS3 option
Pumps and Motors
12
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Frame Size 1 Nominal Displacement Actual Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Inlet Pressure Range Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Rotation Nominal Displacement Actual Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Inlet Pressure Range Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Rotation Nominal Displacement Actual Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Inlet Pressure Range Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Rotation cc/rev. in3/rev. psig psia 8.9 to 29.0 SUS 55 to 1450 F 4 to +212 rpm 500 rpm 3600 3400 3200 3000 2500 RH or LH possible (not capable of bi-directional rotation) cc/rev. in /rev. psig psia 8.9 to 29.0 SUS 55 to 1450 F 4 to +212 rpm 600 rpm 3600 RH or LH possible (not capable of bi-directional rotation) Frame Size 3 20 1.26 22 1.35 3045 25 1.55 32 1.98 40 2.47 2610 3000
3
cc/rev. in /rev. psig

3
1.7 0.10 2610
2.2 0.13
2.8 0.17 3045
3.2 0.20
4.1 0.25
5.0 0.31 2610
psia 11.8 to 29.0 SUS 55 to 1450 F 4 to +212 rpm 600 rpm 4500 3600 4000 Frame Size 2 6.3 0.40 8 0.50 11 0.67 3045 13 0.81 16 0.98 19 1.15 22 1.34 2610 3600 RH or LH possible (not capable of bi-directional rotation)
Pumps and Motors
13
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Internal gear pump, xed displacement Model PGH

Frame sizes 2, 3, 4 and 5 Component series: 2X Max. operating pressure up to 350 bar (5076 PSI) Max. displacement 250 cm3 (15.26 in3)
Fixed displacement Low operating noise Low ow pulsation High efciency even at low speed and viscosity due to sealing gap compensation Suitable for wide viscosity and speed ranges All frame sizes and nominal sizes can freely combined with each other Can be combined with PGF internal gear pumps, vane pumps and axial piston pumps Suitable for operation with HFC uids (seal version W)
Model PGH... with SAE 2-hole mounting ange
Double pump model PGH4 + PGH3
Pumps and Motors
14
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code PG H
Series High pressure pump Frame size FS2 FS3 FS4 FS5 Component series: Component series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Size Size 5.0 6.3 8.0 11 13 16 20 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 63 80 100 125 160 200 250 Displacement/ revolution 5.2 cm3 (0.32 in3) 6.5 cm3 (0.40 in3) 8.2 cm3 (0.50 in3) 11.0 cm3 (0.67 in3) 13.3 cm3 (0.81 in3) 16.0 cm3 (0.98 in3) 20.1 cm3 (1.23 in3) 25.3 cm3 (1.54 in3) 32.7 cm3 (2.00 in3) 40.1 cm3 (2.45 in3) 50.7 cm3 (3.09 in3) 65.5 cm3 (4.00 in3) 80.3 cm3 (4.90 in3) 101.4 cm3 (6.19 in3) 64.7 cm3 (3.95 in3) 81.4 cm3 (4.97 in3) 100.2 cm3 (6.11 in3) 125.3 cm3 (7.65 in3) 162.8 cm3 (9.93 in3) 200.4 cm3 (12.23 in3) 250.5 cm3 (15.29 in3) =H U2 = E4 = 1)
2X /
*
Further details in clear text Mounting flange SAE 2-hole mounting flange ISO 4-hole mounting flange to ISO 3019/2 and VDMA 24560 part 1 Seal material FKM seals Shaft seal ring made of NBR (other seals made of FKM) Suction and pressure port to SAE 3) Pressure port for standard pressure series Pressure port for high pressure series Shaft version Cylindrical SAE involute splined shaft Direction of rotation (viewed to shaft end) Clockwise Counter-clockwise
=2 =3 =4 =5 = 2X
V= W = 2)
07 = 11 = = 005 = 006 = 008 = 011 = 013 = 016 = 020 = 025 = 032 = 040 = 050 = 063 = 080 = 100 = 063 = 080 = 100 = 125 = 160 = 200 = 250 R= L=
1)
FS2
E= R=
FS3
FS4
2) 3)
FS5
Only in conjunction with cylindrical shaft (to VDMA), frame sizes 4 and 5 only, clockwise rotation only FS4 and FS5 only for operation with HFC uid A type of connection 07 or 11 is determined for each size: 07: PGH2-2X/005/006/008 PGH3-2X/011/013/016 PGH4-2X/063/080/100 PGH5-2X/160/200/250 11: PGH4-2X/020/025/032/040/050 PGH5-2X/063/080/100/125 The suction ports are standard pressure series ports (for the dimensions, see page 17).
Pumps and Motors
15
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Frame Size 2 Nominal Displacement Actual Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Inlet Pressure Range Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Rotation Nominal Displacement Actual Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Inlet Pressure Range Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Rotation Nominal Displacement Actual Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Inlet Pressure Range Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Minimum Speed Maximum Speed Rotation cc/rev. in /rev. psig psia 11.5 to 29.0 SUS 55 to 1450 F 14 to 176 rpm rpm 2600 400 2200 300 1800
3
Frame Size 3 8 0.50 11 0.67 13 0.81 16 0.98
cc/rev. in /rev.
3
5 0.32
6 0.40
psig 4570 psia 11.5 to 29.0 SUS 55 to 1450 F 14 to 176 rpm 600 rpm 3000 RH or LH possible (not capable of bi-directional rotation) Frame Size 4 cc/rev. in /rev. psig psia 11.5 to 29.0 SUS 55 to 1450 F 14 to 176 rpm rpm 3000 500 2600 Frame Size 5 63 3.95 80 4.97 3625 100 6.11 125 7.65 160 9.93 3045 200 12.23 2320 250 15.29 1810 400 2200
3
20 1.23
25 1.54
32 2.00 3625
40 2.45
50 3.09
63 4.00
80 4.90
100 6.19 2320
3045
RH or LH possible (not capable of bi-directional rotation)
RH or LH possible (not capable of bi-directional rotation)
Pumps and Motors
16
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fixed displacement vane pump Model PVV

Series 1X Max. pressure up to 210 bar (3050 PSI) Max. displacement 18193 cm3 (1.0911.78 in3)
4 frame sizes single pumps double pumps Standard, right hand rotation SAE dimensions Direct replacement capability to other manufacturers product Fixed displacement Long bearing life due to minimal shaft loading Low wear due to minimal vane tip loading Low operating noise Easy to service due to exchangable pump cartridges Good efciency Optional positioning of the pressure connection Keyed or splined drive shafts available Double pump: Very compact design The position of the pressure connections is separately selectable Industrial version PVV
Single pump model PVV2-1X/...A15D..
Double pump model PVV21-1X/...A15DD..
Technical data
Design Type Mounting style Pipe connections Direction of rotation Direction of ow Drive Frame size (pump cartridge) Nom. displacement vane pump, xed PVV ange mounting to SAE J744 SAE ange version (UNC mounting bolts) clockwise or counter-clockwise inlet and outlet are independent of the direction of rotation direct, radial and axial forces are not permitted 1 2 4 5 V cm3 18 27 36 40 46 40 45 55 60 68 69 82 98 113 122 139 154 162 183 193 in3 1.09 1.64 2.19 2.44 2.80 2.44 2.74 3.35 3.66 4.14 4.21 5.00 5.97 6.89 7.44 8.48 9.39 9.88 11.1 11.7
Max. ow (qv) L/min 26 39 53 59 70 59 66 80 89 100 101 120 141 167 177 203 223 234 267 285 at n = 1500 RPM, GPM 6.8 10.3 14.0 15.5 18.5 15.5 17.4 21.1 23.5 26.4 26.6 31.7 37.2 44.1 46.7 53.6 58.9 61.8 70.5 75.2 p = 0.7 bar (10.2 PSI) and n = 25 mm2/s (119 SUS) Outlet continuous for PVV pmax peak pmax nmin nmax for PVV bar 210 210 210 160 140 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 175 PSI 3000 3000 3000 2400 2000 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 2500 a max. of 10 % above the max. continuous output pressure; not longer than 0.5 seconds RPM RPM 2700 600 2000 600 1800 600 1800 600 1800
RPM:
at 1 bar (14.5 PSI)
Pumps and Motors
17
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code PV
Pump type Industrial version Frame size Single pumps =V 1 2 4 5 21 41 42 51 52 54 = 1X D= D= =R
1X /
15
*
Further details to be written in clear text B= Flange version SAE-B-2 hole ange (Frame sizes 1; 2; 21) SAE-C-2 hole ange (Frame sizes 4; 5 and Frame sizes 41 to 54) Seals NBR seals Only for double pump pressure connection (as viewed from cover) Frame sizes 21 to 52 Top (45 to the right of the inlet) Frame size 54 Top (0 from the inlet)
Double pumps
C=
M=
Series Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19, unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Nominal Displacement(For codes please see table on next page)
Direction of rotation (viewed on the shaft end) Clockwise Shaft end Drive shaft (keyed) Splined drive shaft (SAE)
Ordering example, single pump: PVV2-1X/055RA15DMB = A = J = 15 Ordering example, double pump: PVV52-1X/154-068RB15DDMC
Connections SAE suction and pressure connections, UNC mounting bolt Position of the pressure connection (as viewed from rear) (Front pump or single pump, ange end) Top (0 from the inlet)
=D
Technical data (continued from page 1)

Alternative pressure uids: Max. perm. operating pressure bar (PSI) Water in oil emulsion 70 (1015) Water glycol uids 140 (2030)
Only in conjunction with a return lter, retention efciency b10 100 or higher. The permissible pressure uid temperature range is 15 C to 50 C (59 F to 122 F). Maximum permissible RPM: 1200. Please consult us before applying xed displacement vane pumps with alternative uids! Weight Frame size kg (lbs.) 1 12 (26.45) 2 14.8 (32.62) 4 23 (50.69) 5 34 (74.94) 21 20 (44.08) 41 34 (74.94) 42 34.5 (76.04) 51 43 (94.77) 52 54 46 54 (101.38) (119.02)
Pumps and Motors
18
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9535233084, 9535233089, See Section 16 for applicable 9535233090, & Preferred/Spotlight part numbers 9535233091
and unit price.
Vane pumps Model PSV

Series 5X and 6X Max. pressure up to 140 bar (2000 PSI) Max. displacement 164 cm3 (10 in3)
The PSV product is a variable displacement vane pump from the Racine Fluid Power legacy. The success of the PSV pump over the years has created a large installed base of satisfied customers. Bosch Rexroth is pleased to continue the support of this product in the market for both new and replacement business. In most cases, current production is backwards compatible with previous designs and can be upgraded with little or no rework by the end user. A complete array of spare parts and kits also remain available for service requests. Complete details on the PSV product line can be retrieved from the product datasheets online in the Bosch branded product section.
PSV10/15 PSV20/25 PSV40 PSV80/100
Datasheet number 9535233084 Datasheet number 9535233089 Datasheet number 9535233090 Datasheet number 9535233091
Ordering code PSV

Model designation Compensator type Pressure comp. with remote capability Solenoid two pressure Volume control Volume control No volume control Mounting type Subplate Pilot (flange) with threaded ports Pilot (flange) with flanged ports Seal type Viton Displacement 1.0 cid 1.5 cid 2.0 cid 2.6 cid 4.0 cid 8.0 cid 10.0 cid =P =S =S =N =S =A =C =F = 10 = 15 = 20 = 25 = 40 = 80 = 100 M= D= L= S= 5X = 6X = Shaft type Keyed/combination Thru Long Short Rotation RH only H= G= E= D= Pressure rating 2000 PSI 1500 PSI 1000 PSI 750 PSI
Design series
Pumps and Motors
19
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9535233084, 9535233089, See Section 16 for applicable 9535233090, & Preferred/Spotlight part numbers 9535233091
and unit price.
Technical data
PSV10 Displacement Max. Outlet Pressure Max. Inlet Vacuum Pressure Max. Case Pressure Viscosity Bulk Fluid Temperature Speed Range Rotation Fluid Compatibility Mounting Types S = Subplate P = Pilot / Flanged SUS F 130 Max. RH Only (CW as viewed from shaft end) Mineral Oil and Esters OK, Water Glycol Prohibited S&P S&P S&P S&P P Only P Only P Only rpm 750 to 1800 in /rev PSI
3
PSV15 1.5 1000
PSV20 2.0 2000
PSV25 2.6 1000
PSV40 4.0 2000
PSV80 8.0 1500
PSV100 10.0 1000
1.0 2000 6 in. of Hg
PSIG 10 100 - 1000 150 - 1000
Pumps and Motors
20
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Radial piston pump Model R4

Sizes 1.6 to 20, Series 3X Max. pressure up to 700 bar (10,000 PSI) Max. displacement to 19.43 cm3 (1.19 in3)
Self-priming, check valve operated 14 sizes, with overlapping displacements with varying pressure capacity Hydro-dynamically lubricated bearings for long bearing life Cylinder outlets can be connected in various combinations
Ordering code PR
Series Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: installation and connection dimensions remain unchanged) Size Displacement 1.51 cm3 (0.092 in3) 2.14 cm3 (0.131 in3) 2.59 cm3 (0.158 in3) 3.57 cm3 (0.218 in3) 4.32 cm3 (0.264 in3) 7.14 cm3 (0.527 in3) 8.63 cm3 (0.207 in3) 3.39 cm3 (0.294 in3) 5.83 cm3 (0.356 in3) 8.03 cm3 (0.490 in3) 16.07 cm3 (0.981 in3) 19.43 cm3 (1.186 in3)
4 3X /
A 12 M /
*
Further details to be written in clear text Code No. of output ports 1 NBR seals, suitable for mineral oil (HLP) petroleum oils SAE threaded outlet port parallel shaft end
= 3X
(3) (3) (3) (5) (5) (10) (3) (3) (3) (5) (10) (10)
Sizepmax = 1.60 700 = 2.00 700 = 2.50 700 = 3.15 700 = 4.00 700 = 8.00 700 = 3.15 700 = 5.00 500 = 6.30 500 = 8.00 500 = 16.00 500 = 20.00 500
01 M= 12 = A=
(3), (5), (10) Radial piston pump with 3, 5, 10 pistons
Pumps and Motors
21
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Speed range Operating pressure inlet outlet Max. torque (drive shaft) Mounting position Shaft loading Mounting Connection ports Direction of rotation Fluid Fluid temperature range Viscosity range
2
rpm 1000 to 2000 bar (PSIA) 0.8 to 2.5 absolute (12 to 35) Cylinder I.D. bar (PSI) optional radial- and axial forces may not be transmitted face mounting threaded ports clockwise HLP mineral oils to DIN 51 524 part 2 Also, please observe the fluid specifications in RA 07 075! C (F) 10 +70 (14 158) mm /s (SUS) 10 to 200 (45 930) 3 pistons 5 pistons 8.6 (19) 10 pistons 12.7 (28) 10 mm (0.394 in) 700 (10,150) 15 mm (0.591 in) 500 (7250)
Nm (lb-ft) 160 (118)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of uid to NAS 1638 Class 9. Weight kg (lbs.) 6.8 (15)
Pumps and Motors
22
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Radial piston pump Model R4 mini

Series 1X Operating pressure up to 700 bar (10,000 PSI) Sizes 0.40 to 2.00 mm3 (0.024 to 0.122 in3)
Self-priming, valve controlled Very low noise High bearing life due to hydro-dynamically lubricated plain bearings Very compact design, therefore installation-friendly dimensions Can be combined with xed and variable displacement vane pumps Five nominal sizes
Ordering code
PR4 1X /
Series Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions remain unchanged) Size Displacement 0.40 mm3 (0.024 in3) 0.63 mm3 (0.038 in3) 1.00 mm3 (0.061 in3) 1.60 mm3 (0.098 in3) 2.00 mm3 (0.122 in3)
01
01
*
Further details to be written in clear text
= 1X 01 = M= Sizepmax = 0.40 700 = 0.63 700 = 1.00 450 = 1.60 250 = 2.00 175 =W V= 01 = G= A=
Number of pressure ports 1 pressure port NBR seals, suitable for mineral oil HLP to DIN 51 524, part 2 FKM seals Suction and pressure ports Pipe threads to ISO 228/1
Direction of rotation Counter- and clockwise Note: All ve sizes of pump have 3 pistons
Splined shaft end (for use as combination pump with vane pumps) Cylinderical shaft end
Pumps and Motors
23
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Size Speed range Operating pressure range Inlet (absolute) Outlet (max. permissible) Installation bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 0.801.5 (11.621.8) 700 (10,000) 0.801.5 (11.621.8) 700 (10,000) 0.801.5 (11.621.8) 450 (6527) 0.801.5 (11.621.8) 250 (3626) 0.801.5 (11.621.8) 175 (2538) mm3 (in3) rpm 0.40 (0.024) 10003400 0.63 (0.038) 10003000 1.00 (0.061) 10002000 1.60 (0.098) 10002000 2.00 (0.122) 10002000
Size: 0.024 in3 10,000 PSI Horizontal: The suction port should lie vertically above the pressure port. This improves the bleeding of the pump Vertical: No limitation All other sizes have no installation limitations. Nm (lb-ft) 10 (7.38) Radial and axial forces are not permitted. Face mounting Threaded connections Clockwise and counter-clockwise, does not affect the direction of ow HLP mineral oil to DIN 51 524 part 2, other pressure uid upon request. Also, please observe the fluid specifications in RA 07 075! C (F) mm /s (SUS) kg (lbs.)
2
Max. permissible torque (drive shaft) Shaft loading Mounting style Pipe connections Direction of rotation Pressure uid Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Required ltration Weight
10 +70 (14 158) 10 200 (45 930) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of uid to NAS 1638 Class 9. 2.6 (5.7)
Pumps and Motors
24
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9 535 233 724/10.03

Vane pumps Model VPV

Sizes 16 to 164, Pressure to 210 bar (3050 PSI)
Rexroth is leading the way in advanced variable vane pump technology. Market conditions favor hydraulic components that operate at low noise levels without sacricing efciency or durability while keeping pricing competitive. VPV pumps feature an outstanding response to the needs of the market today and for the future. Flows from 30 to 287 L/min (7.6 to 75.8 GPM) in single pumps Available in combination with other VPV pumps and Rexroth gear pumps Through-drive horsepower transfer is 100% to the second pump VPV pumps are available with through shaft versions for quick combinations Pressures to 210 bar (3050 PSI) Continuous speeds from 1000 to 1800 rpm Overall efciencies to 89% A variety of uids can be used: mineral oil, phosphate ester, and environmentally friendly uids Controls include standard pressure compensation, remote pressure compensation, load sense, solenoid 2-pressure, and solenoid vented
w SAE Size in3/rev (cc/rev) Flow

1)
1.0 (16) 30 (7.6) 210 (3000)
1.5 (25) 43 (11.4) 210 (3000)
2.0 (32) 57 (15.1) 210 (3000)
2.75 (45) 3.84 (63) 4.88 (80) 6.0 (100) 79 (20.8) 210 (3000) 110 (29.1) 210 (3000) 140 (37.0) 210 (3000) 172 (45.4) 210 (3000)
7.93 (130) 227 (60.0) 210 (3000)
10.0 (164) 287 (75.8) 210 (3000)
L/min GPM bar (PSI)
Max. Pressure Speed range Mounting Mount Position Rotation
1000 to 1800 rpm Flange to ISO 3019/1 Any RH

2)
Sound Pressure Level
67
69
69
68
69
71
74
76
77
1) 1750 rpm in GPM. 2) dB(A) at 3000 PSI, 1750 rpm, full ow in a hemi-anechoic chamber with microphone placed 1 meter away at 7 discrete locations. Sound pressure levels are spacially and time weighted averaged.
Pumps and Motors
25
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9 535 233 724/10.03

VPV Whisper Pumps Size in3/rev Mount (cc/rev) 1.00 (16) 1.00 (16) 1.50 (25) 1.50 (25) 2.00 (32) 2.00 (32) 2.75 (45) 2.75 (45) 3.84 (63) 3.84 (63) 4.88 (80) 4.88 (80) 6.00 (100) 6.00 (100) 7.93 (130) 7.93 (130) 10.0 (164) 10.0 (164) Maximum L/min (GPM) Pressure Rotation @ 1750 bar (PSI) 30 (7.6) 30 (7.6) 43 (11.4) 43 (11.4) 57 (15.1) 57 (15.1) 79 (20.8) 79 (20.8) 110 (29.1) 110 (29.1) 140 (37.0) 140 (37.0) 172 (45.4) 172 (45.4) 227 (60.0) 227 (60.0) 287 (75.8) 287 (75.8) R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R R Description 0513R18C3VPV16SM21HYB03 0513R18C3VPV16SM21HYB03P1 0513R18C3VPV25SM21HYB03 0513R18C3VPV25SM21HYB03P1 0513R18C3VPV32SM21HYB03 0513R18C3VPV32SM21HYB03P1 0513R18C3VPV45SM21HYB05 0513R18C3VPV45SM21HYB05P1 0513R18C3VPV63SM21HYB05 0513R18C3VPV63SM21HYB05P1 0513R18C3VPV80SM21HYB05 0513R18C3VPV80SM21HYB05P1 0513R18C3VPV100SM21HYB04 0513R18C3VPV130SM21HYB04 0513R18C3VPV164SM21HYB04 Matl. No. 0 513 300 212 0 513 300 246 0 513 400 212 0 513 400 248 0 513 500 220 0 513 500 254 Weight kg (lbs) 17.7 (39.0) 20.9 (46.0) 30.4 (67.0) 33.6 (74.0) 30.4 (67.0) 33.7 (74.0)
SAE A 210 (3050) SAE A 210 (3050) SAE B 210 (3050) SAE B 210 (3050) SAE B 210 (3050) SAE B 210 (3050) SAE C 210 (3050) SAE C 210 (3050) SAE C 210 (3050) SAE C 210 (3050) SAE C 210 (3050) SAE C 210 (3050) SAE D 210 (3050) SAE D 210 (3050) SAE D 210 (3050) SAE D 210 (3050) SAE D 210 (3050) SAE D 210 (3050)
0 513 600 214 57.6 (127.0) 0 513 600 234 61.2 (135.0) 0 513 700 218 57.6 (127.0) 0 513 700 242 61.2 (135.0) 0 513 800 248 57.6 (127.0) 0 513 800 238 61.2 (135.0) 0 513 850 216 111.1 (245.0) 0 513 860 250 111.1 (245.0) 0 513 870 226 111.1 (245.0)
0513R18C3VPV100SM21HYB04P1 0 513 850 214 115.7 (255.0) 0513R18C3VPV130SM21HYB04P1 0 513 860 258 115.7 (255.0) 0513R18C3VPV164SM21HYB04P1 0 513 870 216 115.7 (255.0)
See catalog #9 535 233 724 for complete description and performance specications.
Adaptor Kits for Combinations VPV 16 to VPV 16 SAE VPV 16 to F Gear Pump SAE Key VPV 25/32 to VPV 25/32 SAE VPV 25/32 to VPV 16 SAE VPV 45/63/80 to VPV 45/63/80 SAE VPV 45/63/80 to VPV 16 SAE VPV 45/63/80 to VPV 25/32 VPV 45/63/80 to F Gear Pump SAE Key VPV 45/63/80 to G Gear Pump SAE Key VPV 100/130/164 to VPV 100/130/164 VPV 100/130/164 to VPV 45/63/80 VPV 100/130/164 to VPV 25/32 VPV 100/130/164 to VPV 16 VPV 100/130/164 to F Gear Pump SAE Key VPV 100/130/164 to G Gear Pump SAE Key
Old Number 9 511 230 518 9 511 230 521 9 511 230 523 9 511 230 525 9 511 230 528 9 511 230 532 9 511 230 530 9 511 230 533 9 511 230 534 9 511 230 536 9 511 230 538 9 511 230 540 9 511 230 542 9 511 230 543 9 511 230 594
Matl. No. 9 511 230 518 R978711779 9 511 230 523 9 511 230 525 9 511 230 528 9 511 230 532 9 511 230 530 R978711781 R978711782 9 511 230 536 9 511 230 538 9 511 230 540 9 511 230 542 R978711783 R978711808
Pumps and Motors
26
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9 535 233 724/10.03

VPV Whisper Pumps TM (continued) Pump Repair Kits SAE 210 bar (3050 PSI) VPV 16 Standard Pump VPV 16 P1 Pump VPV 25/32 Standard Pump VPV 25/32 P1 Pump VPV 45/63 Standard Pump VPV 45/63 P1 Pump VPV 80 Standard Pump VPV 80 P1 Pump VPV 100/130 Standard Pump VPV 100/130 P1 Pump VPV 164 Standard Pump VPV 164 P1 Pump Seal Kits for VPV SAE VPV 16 VPV 25/32 VPV 45/63/80 VPV 100/130/164 Old Number 9 511 230 606 9 511 230 608 9 511 230 598 9 511 230 623 9 511 230 639 9 511 230 642 9 511 230 641 9 511 230 643 9 511 230 650 9 511 230 652 9 511 230 651 9 511 230 653 Old Number 9 511 230 605 9 511 230 597 9 511 230 658 9 511 230 659 Matl. No. R978711812 R978711814 R978711809 R978711825 R978711838 R978711841 R978711840 R978711842 R978711849 R978711851 R978711850 R978711852 Material No. 9 511 230 605 9 511 230 597 9 511 230 658 9 511 230 659
Pumps and Motors
27
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RE 15 205/02.98

Hydraulic motor Radial piston, low speed, high torque Model MCR 03
Sizes 160 to 400 Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 6500 psi (450 bar) Maximum displacement volume 24.4 in3 (400 cm3) Maximum output torque 1702 lb-ft (2307 Nm)
Compact, sturdy construction Smooth running even at very low speeds Low noise Reversible Sealed taper roller bearings High radial forces permitted on the output shaft Shaft seal up to 10 bar Freewheeling Available with optional built-on holding (multi-disc) brake or dynamic (drum) brake
Function
Closed circuit Minimum inlet pressure must be adapted to suit operating conditions; the following must be taken into consideration: Idling pressure. flow resistances. pump operation. Minimum flow of the feed pump must be adapted to suit operating conditions. Open circuit Minimum inlet pressure must be adapted to suit operating conditions; the following must be taken into consideration: Idling pressure. flow resistances. pump operation. The outlet pressure must be at least 2 bar greater than the pressure in the housing. Note: If the motor circuits are in series please consult the manufacturer.
Pumps and Motors
28
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
MCR 03
Frame size Size 3 Flange housing Compact version Flange motor Wheel motor Hydrobase Nominal size, displacement V Size 160 = 160 cm3 Size 225 = 225 cm3 Size 255 = 255 cm3 Size 280 = 280 cm3 Size 325 = 325 cm3 Size 365 = 365 cm3 Size 400 = 400 cm3 Single shaft end Splined to DIN 5480 Parallel with key 40 mm With flange 172 mm Without 2nd shaft end
1 2 3
Z 3X /
*
further information in clear text
= 03 =A =D =F =H = 160 = 225 = 255 = 280 = 325 = 365 = 400 = W40 = L40 = F180
1 2
No code = /S = 01 = 12 = No code = 2W = M=
Wheel stud without wheel stud with wheel stud Ports pipe thread to ISO 228/1 UNF-SAE-thread Two speed operation not switchable switchable operation
Seals NBR seals suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL,HLP) (except dynamic brake see p.10)
) ) 3 ) =Z
) only with flange housing A ) only with flange housing D ) only with flange housing F
maximum torque 1500 Nm maximum torque 1500 Nm 3X =
Brake mounting without brake hydraulic release holding brake (spring pressure disc brake) 3 ) C2R = dynamic brake (drum brake) for right hand side of vehicle (see Fig., p.10) 3 ) C2L = dynamic brake (drum brake) for left hand side of vehicle (see Fig., p.10) A0 B2 = = Series Series 32 to 39 (30 to 39: externally interchangeable)
Pumps and Motors
29
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters please consult us)
Description Frame size Type of mounting Cable connections Mounting position Shaft load Direction of rotation Frame size Nominal size Displacement volume Flow at n =100 rpm/100bar Output torque 1; 7) specic torque (at p = 100 bar) peak torque Output speed 1; 7) min. speed max. continuous speed max. peak speed freewheeling speed Output power 1; 7) continuous power cont. power half displacement Weight Polar moment of inertia Hydraulic Nominal pressure Pressure differential, xed 2; 6) with mineral oil (HL, HLP) Pressure differential, peak 3; 6) with mineral oil (HL, HLP) Inlet pressure 6) Port A or B Summated pressure 4; 6) Port A + B Case drain pressure max. Hydraulic uid 5) Hydraulic uid temperature range Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Brake Holding brake (disc brake) Holding torque Release pressure volume to operate brake
1 2
V qV T T n n n n P P Jm p p p p p p
Radial piston multi-disc motor with xed displacement MCR 03... Flange mounting; face mounting Threaded or anged Optional See page 7 Right/left reversible 3 160 225 255 280 325 365 160 225 255 280 325 365 cm3 L/min 16 22.5 25.5 28 32.5 36.5 Nm Nm 225 1022 358 1386 405 1570 445 1760 517 1875 580 2105
400 400 40 636 2307
rpm 5 to 10 when running smooth, dependent on application rpm 320 320 280 260 240 240 rpm 400 400 360 330 310 280 rpm 900 kW kW kgmm2 18 18 18 18 22 22 12 12 12 12 14 14 see unit dimensions pages 8 to 10 see unit dimensions pages 8 to 10 (rotating mass only)
240 260
22 14
bar 250 bar 250 bar 450 400 bar 450 420 400 bar 450 420 400 bar 10 Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 C 20 to +80 mm2/s 10 to 2000 Max. degree of contamination of the uid to NAS 1638 class 9. We recommend a lter with a min retention rate of 10 75.
T p V
Nm 2200 bar min. 15; max. 30 cm3 23 friendly uids HETG. HEPG. HEE to RE 90 221 ) For connection in series. consult the technical sales department. 7 ) Warning! During the running-in time of the motor (min. 20 hours) motors should not be run unloaded at greater than 50% of maximum speed.
6
) The data given apply after 100 hours running-in time ) Continuous operation 3 ) Peak values may occur for a maximum duration of one second within an operating minute. 4 ) In the return line we recommend pmin = 15 ba 5) Environmentally Pumps and Motors 30
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Mean values, measured at = 46 mm2/s and = 45 C)

Pressure diff. p in bar T q qVL T 200 q qVL T 300 q qVL T 400 q qVL T 450 q qVL Charge pressure p Pressure 100 diff. p in bar 100 T q qVL T q qVL T q qVL T q qVL T q qVL Nm L/min L/min L/min L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min 215 0.3 0.15 466 0.3 0.15 752 0.4 0.20 1003 0.6 0.3 1128 1.0 0.5 308 5.9 0.15 630 5.9 0.15 946 6.0 0.20 1261 6.2 0.3 1386 7.0 0.7 Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min bar 147 0.3 0.15 321 0.3 0.15 519 0.4 0.20 693 0.6 0.30 779 1.0 0.5 1 0 214 4.3 0.15 438 4.3 0.15 659 4.4 0.20 876 4.6 0.30 985 5.4 0.7 2 25 0 25 Speed n in rpm 50 100 200 MCR 03 . 160 219 224 8.3 16.3 0.15 0.15 453 463 8.3 16.6 0.15 0.30 680 695 8.4 16.8 0.20 0.40 908 926 8.8 17.0 0.40 0.5 1022 9.8 0 2 3 Speed n in rpm 50 100 315 11.6 0.15 651 11.6 0.15 978 11.7 0.20 1304 12.1 0.4 322 22.8 0.15 666 23.1 0.3 999 23.3 0.40 222 32.6 0.30 463 32.8 0.40 213 48.7 0.35 208 52.0 0.40 284 0.8 0.40 672 2.0 1.00 1086 3.6 1.80 1489 4.4 2.20 447 8.9 0.40 917 10.1 1.00 1397 11.3 1.60 1875 12.1 2.00 Speed n in rpm 50 100 150 MCR 03. 325 467 17.1 0.40 952 18.3 1.00 1432 19.5 1.60 452 33.3 0.40 952 34.5 1.00 1440 35.9 1.70 429 49.6 0.40 937 51.2 1.20 412 66.0 0.50 79.0 0.50
300
320
25
200
240
6 150 318 45.6 0.3 651 45.8 0.4
9 220 305 68.2 0.35
10
1 0 320 0.8 0.4 755 2.0 1.0 1219 3.6 1.80 1673 4.4 2.2
2 25 503 9.9 0.4 1030 11.1 1.0 1570 12.3 1.60 2105 13.1 2.0
3 4 6 Speed n in rpm 50 100 150 MCR 03 . 365 524 19.1 0.4 1069 20.3 1.0 1609 21.5 1.60 507 37.3 0.4 1068 38.5 1.0 1617 39.9 1.70 495 55.6 0.4 1053 57.2 1.2
8 200 483 74.0 0.5
10 240 462 88.6 0.5
MCR 03 . 225
200
300
400
450
All torques given apply to run-in motors (see page 4. footnote 7 of complete data sheet.) For half displacement operating mode multiply the torques and Qvalues by 0.5. For maximum case leakage multiply QL by 2
T = torque in Nm Q = input flow in L/min QL = mean case leakage in L/min p = min. charge pressure in pump mode
Pumps and Motors
31
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Charge pressure p Pressure diff. p in bar T 100 q qVL T 200 q qVL T 300 q qVL T 400 q qVL T 450 q qVL Charge pressure p Pressure diff. p in bar Nm 239 L/min 0.4 L/min 0.2 Nm 517 L/min 0.4 L/min 0.2 Nm 836 L/min 0.6 L/min 0.3 Nm 1114 L/min 0.8 L/min 0.4 Nm 1253 L/min 1.6 L/min 0.8 bar 1 0 342 6.8 0.2 700 6.8 0.2 1051 7.0 0.3 1401 7.2 0.4 1575 8.4 1.0 2 25 bar 1 0 2 25 2 3 6 Speed n in rpm 50 100 150 MCR 03 . 255 350 13.2 0.2 724 13.2 0.2 1087 13.4 0.3 1449 14.0 0.6 358 25.9 0.2 740 26.3 0.4 1110 26.7 0.6 354 51.8 0.4 724 52.2 0.6 338 72.4 0.5 350 0.8 0.4 828 2.0 1.0 1337 3.6 1.8 1834 4.4 2.20 551 10.8 0.4 1129 12.0 1.0 1721 13.2 1.6 2307 14.0 2.00 9 220 1 0 3 25 3 5 6 Speed n in rpm 50 100 150 MCR 03 . 400 575 20.8 0.4 1171 22.0 1.0 1762 23.2 1.6 556 40.8 0.4 1171 42.0 1.0 1772 43.4 1.7 543 60.8 0.4 1153 62.4 1.20 529 81.0 0.5 506 97.0 0.5 9 11
2 4 6 Speed n in rpm 50 100 200 MCR 03. 280
9 300
11
100
200
300
400
450
T q qVL T q qVL T q qVL T q qVL T q qVL
Nm L/min L/min L/min L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min
bar
287 383 392 401 0.6 7.6 14.6 28.6 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.30 579 784 811 829 0.6 7.6 14.6 28.8 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.40 936 1177 1217 1243 0.6 7.6 14.6 29.2 0.30 0.30 0.30 0.60 1248 1569 1623 0.8 7.8 15.2 0.40 0.40 0.60 1404 1764 1.6 9.0 0.8 1.0
1 2 2 4
397 56.8 0.40 811 57.2 0.60
365 85.0 0.50
Charge pressure p
10
All torques given apply to run-in motors (see page 4. footnote 7 of complete data sheet.) For half displacement operating mode multiply the torques and Qvalues by 0.5. For maximum case leakage multiply QL by 2
T = torque in Nm Q = input flow in L/min QL = mean case leakage in L/min p = min. charge pressure in pump mode
Pumps and Motors
32
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Sizes 380 to 820 Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 6500 psi (450 bar) Maximum displacement volume 50 in3 (820 cm3) Maximum output torque 3573 lb-ft (4844 Nm)
Compact, sturdy construction Smooth running even at very low speeds Low noise Reversible Sealed taper roller bearings High radial forces permitted on the output shaft Shaft seal up to 10 bar Freewheeling Available with optional built-on holding (multi-disc) brake or dynamic (drum) brake Model MCR 05 C...F180Z-3X/B4M/..
Function
Pumps and Motors
33
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
MCR 05
Frame size Size 05 Flange housing Short motor Compact version Flange motor Wheel motor Hydrobase Nominal size, displacement V Size 380 = 380 cm3 Size 470 = 470 cm3 Size 520 = 520 cm3 Size 565 = 565 cm3 Size 680 = 680 cm3 Size 750 = 750 cm3 Size 820 = 820 cm3 Single shaft end Splined to DIN 5480 Parallel with key 50 mm With flange 180 mm Without shaft Without 2nd shaft end
1 2
Z 3X /
*
Further information in clear text
= 05 =A =C =D =F =H = 380 = 470 = 520 = 565 = 680 = 750 = 820 = W50 = L50 = F180 =Z
1
Wheel stud No code = without wheel stud /S = with wheel stud 01 = 12 = No code = 2W = M= Ports Pipe thread to ISO 228/1 UNF-SAE-thread Two speed operating not switchable switchable operation
Seals NBR seals suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL,HLP) (except drum brake see p.12)
) 2 ) 3 ) 5 ) =Z
) ) 3 ) 4 ) 5 )
only with flange housing A only with flange housing D only with flange housing C or F only with flange housing F only with Hydrobase
maximum torque 3000 Nm maximum torque 3000 Nm 3X =
Brake mounting without brake hydraulic release holding brake (spring pressure disc brake) 4 ) C4R = dynamic brake (drum brake) for right hand side of vehicle (see Fig., p.12) 4 ) C4L = travel brake (drum brake) for left hand side of vehicle (see Fig., p.12) A0 B4 = = Series Series 32 to 39 (30 to 39: externally interchangeable)
Pumps and Motors
34
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (For applications outside these parameters please consult us!)
Radial piston multi-disc motor with xed displacement Frame size Type of mounting Pipe connections Mounting position Shaft loading Direction of rotation Frame size Nominal size Displacement V cm3 Flow at n = 100 rpm/100 bar qV L/min Output torque 1; 7) specic torque (at p = 100 bar) T Nm peak torque T Nm Output speed 1; 7) min. speed n rpm max. speed n rpm freewheeling speed n rpm Output power 1; 7) cont. power at full displacenent P kW cont. power at half displacement P kW Weight m kg Polar moment of inertia Jm kgmm2 Hydraulic Nominal pressure p bar Pressure differential, cont. 2; 3) p with mineral oil (HL, HLP) bar Pressure differential, peak 4; 3) p with mineral oil (HL, HLP) bar Inlet pressure Port A or B p bar Summated pressure 5; 3) ports A + B p bar Case drain pressure,max p bar Hydraulic uid 6) Hydraulic uid temperature range C Viscosity range mm2/s Fluid cleanliness MCR 05... Flange mounting; face mounting Threaded or anged optional see page 7 Right/left - reversible 05 380 470 520 565 380 470 520 565 38 47 52 56.5 604 2528 748 3127 827 3459 899 3759
680 680 70 1082 4017
750 750 77 1194 4430
820 820 84 1305 4844
5 to 10 when running smoothly, dependent on application 220 220 220 220 200 170 600 29 29 29 29 19 19 19 19 see unit dimensions pages 8 to 12 see unit dimensions pages 8 to 12 250 250 450 470 470 400 420 420 35 23 35 23
150
35 23
10 Mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 20 to +80 10 to 2000 Maximum degree of contamination of the uid to NAS 1638 class 9. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. B2 B4 2200 5000 15 30 15 30 23 46 5 ) Environmentally friendly uids HETG. HEPG. HEE to RE 90 221 6 ) For connection in series. consult the technical sales department. 7 ) Warning! During the running-in time of the motor (min. 20 hours) motors should not be run unloaded at greater than 50% of maximum speed. 35 Section 1
Brake Holding brake (disc brake) Holding torque T Nm Release pressure, min max p bar Volume to operate brake V cm3 1 ) The data given apply after 100 hours running-in time 2 ) Continuous operation 3 ) Peak values may occur for a maximum duration of one second within an operating minute. 4 ) In the return line we recommend pmin = 15 bar Pumps and Motors
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure diff. p in bar T qV qV L T 200 qV qVL T 300 qV qVL T 400 qV qVL T 450 qV qVL Charge pressure p Speed n 100 T qV qV L T 200 qV qV L T 300 qV qV L T 400 qV qV L T 450 qV qV L Charge pressure p Speed n 100 T qV 100 qV L T 200 qV qV L T 300 qV qV L T 400 qV qVL T 450 qV qV L Charge pressure p Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min bar rpm Nm L/min L/min L/min L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min bar min-1 Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min bar 0 393 0.3 0.15 846 0.7 0.35 1268 0.9 0.45 1691 1.5 0.75 1903 2.2 1.1 1 0 484 0.40 0.20 1042 0.80 0.40 1562 1.2 0.60 2083 2.0 1.0 2344 3.0 1.5 1 0 538 0.4 0.20 1158 0.80 0.40 1735 1.2 0.60 2314 2.0 1.00 2604 3.0 1.5 1 25 513 9.8 0.15 1075 10.2 0.35 1613 10.4 0.45 2150 11.0 0.75 2419 11.7 1.1 4 25 632 12.2 0.20 1324 12.6 0.40 1986 13.0 0.60 2649 13.8 1.0 2980 14.8 1.5 5 25 702 13.4 0.20 1472 13.8 0.40 2207 14.2 0.60 2942 15.0 1.00 3310 16.0 1.5 6 Speed n in rpm 50 100 150 220 MCR 05 . 380 538 544 525 507 19.3 38.6 57.7 84.4 0.15 0.30 0.35 0.40 1123 1111 1087 19.7 38.9 58.0 0.35 0.45 0.50 1685 1667 19.9 39.2 0.45 0.60 2247 20.5 0.75 2528 21.2 1.1 4 6 9 14 50 100 150 220 MCR 05 . 470 662 670 647 625 23.9 47.8 71.5 105.0 0.20 0.40 0.50 0.80 1384 1369 1339 24.3 48.2 71.9 0.40 0.60 0.70 2076 2053 24.7 48.6 0.60 0.80 2768 25.5 1.0 3114 26.5 1.5 5 7 10 16 50 100 150 220 MCR 05 . 520 737 744 683 620 26.4 52.8 79.0 116.0 0.20 0.40 0.50 0.80 1537 1520 1487 26.8 53.2 79.4 0.40 0.60 0.70 2305 2281 27.2 53.6 0.60 0.80 3074 28.0 1.00 3459 29.0 1.5 6 7 11 17 0 5.95 0.88 0.44 1407 2.4 1.20 2338 3.7 1.85 3116 4.34 2.17 25 989 17.64 0.47 1938 18.55 1.22 2964 19.24 1.91 3939 19.91 2.35 Speed n in rpm 50 100 150 220 MCR 05. 680 995 908 821 698 34.93 70.01 102.76 139.54 0.50 0.57 0.64 0.64 2017 1973 1862 36.09 72.17 103.61 1.24 1.30 1.41 3026 3013 36.82 71.98 1.97 2.14 4017 38.18 2.33
1 0 657 0.88 0.44 1551 2.40 1.20 2578 3.7 1.85 3438 4.34 2.17
2 25 1091 19.39 0.47 2137 20.30 1.22 3270 20.99 1.91 4345 21.66 2.35
7 12 100 150 MCR 05 . 750 1098 1002 906 38.43 77.01 113.26 0.50 0.57 0.64 2224 2176 39.59 79.17 1.24 1.30 3338 40.32 1.97 4430 41.73 2.37
3 50
23
1 0 718 0.88 0.44 1697 2.40 1.20 2819 3.70 1.85 3758 4.34 2.17
3 25 1192 21.14 0.47 2337 22.05 1.22 3573 22.74 1.91 4750 23.35 2.35
9 15 100 150 MCR 05 . 820 1200 1095 990 41.93 84.01 123.76 0.50 0.57 0.64 2432 2380 43.09 86.17 1.24 1.30 3649 43.82 1.97 4844 45.18 2.37
4 50
11
19
All torques given apply to run-in motors (see page 4. footnote 7 of complete data sheet.) For half displacement operating mode multiply the torques and Qvalues by 0.5. For maximum case leakage multiply QL by 2 Pumps and Motors 36
T = torque in Nm Q = input flow in L/min QL = mean case leakage in L/min Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Sizes 780 to 1340 Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 6500 psi (450 bar) Maximum displacement volume 81.8 in3 (1340 cm3) Maximum output torque 5920 lb-ft (8027 Nm)
Compact, robust construction Smooth running even at very low speeds Low noise Reversible Sealed taper roller bearings High radial forces permitted on the output shaft Shaft seal up to 10 bar Available with optional built-on holding (multi-disc) brake or dynamic (drum) brake switchable free-running half displacement volume for open and closed circuit operation Model MCR 10 F...F250Z-3X/A0M...
Function
Model MCR 10 F...F250Z-3X/B7M...
Model MCR 10 F...F250Z-3X/C7.M...
Pumps and Motors
37
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
MCR 10
Frame size Frame size 10 Flange housing Short motor Wheel motor Flange motor = 10 =C =F =D = 780 = 940 = 1120 = 1250 = 1340 = F250 1) = L60 2; 3) =Z
Z 3X
*
No code = /S =
Further details in clear text Studs without studs with studs for wheel mounting
Size/displacement volume V Size 780 = 780 cm3 Size 940 = 940 cm3 Size 1120 = 1120 cm3 Size 1250 = 1250 cm3 Size 1340 = 1340 cm3 Single shaft end With flange 250 Parallel with key 60 Without 2nd shaft end Series nos. Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39, externally interchangeable)
1
/11 = /42 = No code = 2W = M=
Connections Pipe thread to ISO 228/1 UNF-SAE-thread Switchable displacement not switchable switchable operation
Seals NBR seals suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL, HLP) Brake mounting no brake hydraulically released holding brake (spring pressure disc brake) travel brake (drum brake) for right hand side of vehicle, see fig., p. 9 travel brake (drum brake) for left hand side of vehicle, see fig., p. 9
= 3X
4
A0 = B7 = ) C7R = ) C7L =
) Only with flange housing C or F 2 ) Only with flange housing D 3 ) Max. permitted pressure differential p = 250 bar
4
) Only with flange housing F
Pumps and Motors
38
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Description Model description Type of mounting Connections Mounting position Shaft loading Rotation Frame size Size Displacement Flow n = 100 rpm/100 bar Output torque 1; 7) specic torque (at p = 100 bar) peak torque Output speed 1; 7) min. speed max. speed freewheeling speed Output power 1; 7) continuous power Weight motor motor with holding brake motor with travel brake Hydraulic Nominal pressure Pressure differential, cont. 2; 6; 7; 8) for mineral oil (HL, HLP) Pressure differential, peak 3; 6; 7; 8) for mineral oil (HL, HLP) Inlet pressure 6) Port A or B Summated pressure 4; 6) Port A + B Case drain pressure, max. Switching pressure (displacement switching) Hydraulic uid 5) Hydraulic uid temperature range Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness: Radial piston multi-disc motor, switchable displacement MCR 10... Flange mounting; face mounting Threaded or anged Optional See page 6 clockwise/anti-clockwise - reversible 10 780 940 1120 1250 1340 780 940 1120 1250 1340 cm3 L/min 79 95 113.5 126.5 136.5 Nm Nm 1240 5134 1494 6187 1783 6659 1990 7432 2130 8027
V qV T T n n n P m m m p p p p p pmax
rpm 5 to 10 for smooth running, depending on application rpm 170 150 150 140 120 rpm 400 kW kg kg kg 44 69 81 92 44 50 50 50
bar 250 bar 250 bar 450 400 bar 470 420 bar 470 420 bar 10 bar 10 to 30 Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 C 20 to +80 mm2/s 10 to 2000 Maximum permissible degree of contamination of uid to NAS 1638 Class 9. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. Nm 7000 bar min. 15; max. 30
6 7
Brake Holding brake (disc brake) Holding torque Release pressure

1
T p
) The data given apply after 100 hours running-in time 2 ) Continuous operation 3 ) Peak values may occur for a maximum duration of one second within an operating minute. 4 ) In the return line we recommend pmin = 15 bar 5 ) Environmentally friendly uids HETG. HEPG. HEE to RE 90 221 Pumps and Motors 39
) For connection in series. consult the technical sales department. ) Warning! During the running-in time of the motor (min. 20 hours) motors should not be run unloaded at greater than 50% of maximum speed. 8 ) For single shaft end L60 max. permissible pressure differential p = 250 bar Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Nominal Size Speed n in rev/min T Nm 100 qV L/min qVL L/min T Nm L/min 200 qV qVL L/min T Nm L/min 300 qV qVL L/min T Nm L/min 400 qV qVL L/min T Nm L/min 450 qV qVL L/min Nominal Size Speed n in rev/min T Nm 100 qV L/min qVL L/min T L/min L/min 200 qV qVL L/min T Nm L/min 300 qV qVL L/min T Nm L/min 400 qV qVL L/min T Nm L/min 450 qV qVL L/min Nominal Size Speed n in rev/min T Nm 100 qV L/min qVL L/min T Nm L/min 200 qV qVL L/min T Nm 300 qV L/min qVL L/min T Nm L/min qV 400 qVL L/min Pumps and Motors 0 806 0.3 0.15 1736 0.60 0.30 2604 0.80 0.40 3472 1.40 0.70 3906 1.6 0.8 0 971 1.00 0.15 2091 0.60 0.30 3137 0.80 0.40 4183 1.40 0.70 4706 1.60 0.80 0 980 1.00 0.50 2317 2.86 1.43 3743 4.08 2.04 5134 5.68 2.84 25 994 19.8 0.15 2232 20.10 0.30 3348 20.30 0.40 4464 20.90 0.70 5022 21.10 0.8 25 1198 23.80 0.15 2690 24.10 0.30 4035 24.30 0.40 5380 24.90 0.70 6052 25.10 0.80 25 1629 28.82 0.56 3287 29.76 1.44 4973 30.76 2.10 6660 31.76 2.92 780 50 1049 39.47 0.24 2282 39.80 0.40 3422 40.00 0.50 4563 40.80 0.90 5134 41.00 1.00 940 50 1264 47.47 0.24 2750 47.80 0.40 4124 48.00 0.50 5500 48.80 0.90 6187 49.00 1.00 1120 50 1547 57.19 0.63 3301 58.07 1.45 4994 59.49 2.16 6645 60.87 3.00 100 1029 79.00 0.50 2232 79.50 0.75 3348 80.00 1.00 150 911 118.20 0.60 2158 118.8 0.9 0 1094 1.00 0.50 2586 2.86 1.43 4178 4.08 2.04 5730 5.68 2.84 25 1818 32.09 0.56 3669 33.03 1.44 5550 34.08 2.10 7432 35.11 2.92 1250 50 1726 63.73 0.63 3684 64.63 1.45 5574 66.16 2.16 7416 67.35 3.00 100 1517 126.69 0.76 3497 127.82 1.46 150 1309 189.30 0.90
100 1240 95.00 0.50 2689 95.50 0.75
150 1098 142.20 0.60
0 1182 1.00 0.50 2793 2.86 1.43 4512 4.08 2.04 6188 5.68 2.84
25 1964 34.61 0.56 3962 35.56 1.44 5994 36.64 2.10 8027 37.67 2.92
1340 50 1865 68.78 0.63 3979 69.68 1.45 6020 71.24 2.16 8010 72.50 3.00
100 1639 136.76 0.76 3777 137.93 1.46
100 1360 113.62 0.76 3134 114.71 1.46
150 1173 169.80 0.90
Notes on the technical data

T = torque in Nm Q = input flow in L/min QL = mean case leakage in L/min All torques given apply to run-in motors (see page 4. footnote 7 of complete data sheet.) For half displacement operating mode multiply the torques and Qvalues by 0.5. For maximum case leakage multiply QL by 2
40
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

compact. sturdy construction smooth running even at very low speeds low noise reversible sealed tapered roller bearing high radial forces permitted on output shaft shaft seal up to 10 bar optional integral holding brake (multi-disc brake) or wheel brake (drum brake) switchable freewheeling half displacement for open and closed circuits
Function
Closed circuit Minimum inlet pressure must be adapted to suit operating conditions; the following must be taken into consideration: Idling pressure. flow resistances. pump operation. Min. flow of the pump must be adapted to suit operating conditions. Open circuit Minimum inlet pressure must be adapted to suit operating conditions; the following must be taken into consideration: Idling pressure. flow resistances. pump operation. The outlet pressure must be at least 2 bar greater than the pressure in the housing. Note: If the motor circuits are in series please consult the manufacturer.
Ordering code
MCR 15
Z 3X
*
no code = /S =
Flange housing Wheel version Sizes/Displacement V Size 1130 = 1130 cm3 Size 1250 = 1250 cm3 Size 1500 = 1500 cm3 Size 1780 = 1780 cm3 Size 2150 = 2150 cm3 1st shaft end with flange 280 without 2nd shaft end Series Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39. externally interchangeable)
=F = 1130 = 1250 = 1500 = 1780 = 2150 = F 280 =Z = 3X AO = B11 = M= 11 = 42 = no code = 2R = 2L =
Ports BSP thread to ISO 228/1 UNF-SAE threads not switchable. anti-clockwise rotation preferred
switchable. clockw. rotation preferred switchable. anti-clw. rotation preferred Seals NBR seals. suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL. HLP) Brake mounting without brake hydraulic holding brake (spring pressure disc brake) Section 1
Pumps and Motors
41
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Type Model Type code Type of mounting Type of connection Mounting position Shaft load Direction of rotation Frame size Nominal size Displacement Displacement ow at n = 100 rev/min/100 bar Output torque 1), 7) spec. torque (at p = 100 bar) max. torque Output torque 1; 7) min. speed max. speed freewheeling Output power 1) continuous power Weight motor motor with holding brake motor with wheel brake Hydraulic Nominal pressure Pressure difference, cont. 2), 6), 7) with mineral oil (HL, HLP) Pressure difference, peak 3), 6), 7) with mineral oil (HL, HLP) Inlet pressure port A or B Summated pressure 4; 6) port A + B Case drain pressure Fluid 5) Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Piston machine Radial piston multi-stroke motor, switchable displacement MCR 15... Flange mounting; face mounting Threaded, ange Optional See pages 6, 7 Right / left - reversible 15 1130 1250 1500 1780 2150 1130 1250 1500 1780 2150 114 126 151 179 216 1799 8095 1990 8955 2388 9552 2833 11332 3422 13688
V Q T T n n n P m m m p p p p p p
cm3 L/min Nm Nm rev/min rev/min rev/min kW kg kg kg bar bar bar bar bar bar C mm2/s
5 to 10 when running smooth, depending on application 150 150 150 125 125 300 55 93 120 135 250 250 450 470 470 400 420 420 55 55 60 60
10 Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 20 to +80 10 to 2000 Max. permissible degree of contamination of the uid to NAS 1638 class 9. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
Brake Holding brake (multi-disc brake) Holding torque Brake release pressure, min max Wheel brake (drum brake)
1 2
T p
Nm bar
11 000 Min. 15 max. 30 See table page 8

5 6
) The data given apply after 100 hours running-in time ) Continuous operation 3 ) Peak values may occur for a maximum duration of one second within an operating minute. 4 ) In the return line we recommend pmin = 15 bar Pumps and Motors 42
) Environmentally friendly uids HETG. HEPG. HEE to RE 90 221 ) For connection in series. consult the technical sales department. 7 ) Warning! During the running-in time of the motor (min. 20 hours) motors should not be run unloaded at greater than 50% of maximum speed. Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Nominal Size Speed n in rev/min T Nm 100 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 200 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 300 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 400 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 450 Q L/min L/min QL Nominal Size Speed n in rev/min T Nm 100 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 200 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 300 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 400 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 450 Q L/min QL L/min Nominal Size Speed n in rev/min T Nm 100 Q L/min QL L/min T Nm 200 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 300 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 400 Q L/min L/min QL T Nm 450 Q L/min L/min QL Pumps and Motors 0 1133 0.72 0.20 2447 2.18 0.40 3670 4.04 0.50 4892 5.84 1.00 5503 6.90 1.10 0 1253 0.74 0.20 2707 2.18 0.40 4060 4.04 0.50 5411 5.82 1.00 6088 6.90 1.10 0 1504 0.40 0.20 3248 0.80 0.40 4872 1.00 0.50 6494 2.00 1.00 7305 2.20 1.10 1130 25 1529 28.95 0.20 3166 29.59 0.40 4749 30.10 0.50 6331 31.00 1.00 7122 31.46 1.10 1250 25 1692 31.95 0.20 3503 32.59 0.40 5254 33.10 0.50 7003 34.00 1.00 7878 34.46 1.10 1500 25 2030 37.90 0.20 4203 38.30 0.40 6304 38.50 0.50 8403 39.50 1.00 9454 39.70 1.10 50 1583 57.40 0.30 3238 58.09 0.50 4858 59.02 0.70 6474 59.81 1.00 7284 60.59 1.30 50 1751 63.40 0.30 3582 64.09 0.50 5373 65.02 0.70 7162 65.81 1.00 8057 66.59 1.30 50 2101 75.60 0.30 4298 76.00 0.50 6448 76.40 0.70 8594 77.40 1.00 9669 77.60 1.30 100 1493 114.19 0.50 3166 114.98 0.60 4694 115.52 0.70 150 1397 171.31 0.90 3133 172.16 1.00 0 1558 0.74 0.37 3683 2.18 1.09 5949 4.04 2.02 8160 5.82 2.92 1780 25 2456 45.41 0.41 5049 46.55 1.11 7692 48.00 2.15 10335 49.46 3.21 50 2420 90.05 0.45 5116 91.22 1.13 7794 93.10 2.28 10425 94.81 3.50 100 2043 179.22 0.53 4833 180.55 1.17 150
100 1691 126.19 0.50 3503 126.98 0.60
150 1512 189.31 0.90
0 1882 0.72 0.37 4448 2.18 1.09 7186 4.04 2.02 9855 5.84 2.92
2150 25 2967 54.66 0.41 6098 55.80 1.11 9290 57.25 2.15 12483 58.71 3.21
50 2922 108.55 0.45 6180 109.72 1.13 9414 111.60 2.28
100 2467 216.22 0.53
100 1983 151.00 0.50 4203 151.20 0.60
150 1719 226.80 0.90

43
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

compact, sturdy construction smooth running even at very low speeds low noise reversible sealed tapered roller bearing high radial forces permitted on output shaft shaft seal up to 10 bar optional integral holding brake (multi-disc brake) switchable freewheeling half displacement for open and closed circuits Closed circuit Minimum inlet pressure must be adapted to suit operating conditions; the following must be taken into consideration: Idling pressure. flow resistances. pump operation. Min. flow of the pump must be adapted to suit operating conditions. Open circuit Minimum inlet pressure must be adapted to suit operating conditions; the following must be taken into consideration: Idling pressure. flow resistances. pump operation. The outlet pressure must be at least 2 bar greater than the pressure in the housing. Note: If the motor circuits are in series please consult the manufacturer.
Function
Ordering code
MCR 20 C
Z 3X
*
no code = /S =
Sizes/Displacement V Size 1750 = 1750 cm3 Size 2100 = 2100 cm3 Size 2500 = 2500 cm3 Size 3000 = 3000 cm3 1st shaft end with flange 280 without 2nd shaft end Series Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39, externally interchangeable)
= 1750 = 2100 = 2500 = 3000 = F 280 =Z = 3X AO = B19 = M=
11 = 42 = no code = 2W =
Ports BSP thread to ISO 228/1 UNF-SAE threads not switchable, switchable displacement
Seals NBR seals, suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL, HLP) Brake mounting without brake hydraulic holding brake (spring pressure disc brake) Section 1
Pumps and Motors
44
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Type Model Type code Type of mounting Type of connection Mounting position Shaft load Direction of rotation Frame size Nominal size Displacement Displacement ow at n = 100 rev/min/100 bar Output torque 1), 7) spec. torque (at p = 100 bar) max. torque Output speed min. speed max. continious speed max. intermitent speed freewheeling Output power 1) Weight continuous power motor motor with holding brake Hydraulic Nominal pressure Pressure difference, cont. 2), 6), 7) with mineral oil (HL, HLP) Pressure difference, peak 3), 6), 7) with mineral oil (HL, HLP) Inlet pressure port A or B Summated pressure 4; 6) port A + B Case drain pressure Fluid 5) Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Piston machine Radial piston multi-stroke motor, switchable displacement MCR 20... Flange mounting; face mounting Threaded, ange Optional See page 6 Right / left - reversible 20 1750 2100 2500 3000 1750 2100 2500 3000 cm3 L/min 176 211 252 302 Nm Nm 2785 11 531 3342 13 762 3979 14 244 4775 17 093
V Q T T n n n n P m m p p p p p p
rev/min 5 to 10 when running smoothly, depending on application rev/min 125 125 115 115 rev/min 160 160 115 115 rev/min 500 kW 70 kg 110 kg 140 bar 250 bar 250 bar 450 400 bar 470 420 bar 470 420 bar 10 Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 C 20 to +80 mm2/s 10 to 2000 Max. permissible degree of contamination of the uid to NAS 1638 class 9. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. 70 85 85
Brake Holding brake (multi-disc brake) Holding torque Brake release pressure, min max
1 2
T p
Nm 19 000 bar Min. 15

6 7
Max. 30
) The data given apply after 100 hours running-in time ) Continuous operation 3 ) Peak values may occur for a maximum duration of one second within an operating minute. 4 ) In the return line we recommend pmin = 15 bar 5 ) Environmentally friendly uids HETG, HEPG, HEE to RE 90 221 Pumps and Motors 45
) For connection in series, consult the technical sales department. ) Warning! During the running-in time of the motor (min. 20 hours) motors should not be run unloaded at greater than 50% of maximum speed.
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Pressure Differential p bar 100 T Q QL T Q QL T Q QL T Q QL T Q QL n T Q QL Q QL T Q QL T Q QL T Q QL n T Q QL T Q QL T Q QL T Q QL Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min rpm Nm L/min L/min T L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min rpm Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min Nm L/min L/min 1950 1.6 0.8 3899 2.4 1.2 5850 3.4 1.7 7799 4.4 2.2 8774 4.8 2.4 0 2335 1.6 0.8 Nm 2.4 1.2 7006 3.4 1.7 9341 4.4 2.2 10508 4.8 2.4 0 2188 1.6 0.8 5173 2.4 1.2 8356 3.4 1.7 11459 4.4 2.2 0 25 Speed in RPM 50 100 MCR20. 1750 Speed in RPM 50 100 MCR20. 3000 4011 151.8 0.9 8403 152.8 1.4 12891 153.8 1.9 3247 301.8 0.9
125 2111 221.0 1.1
0 2626 1.6 0.8 6207 2.4 1.2 10027 3.4 1.7 13751 4.4 2.2
25
115 2435 347.0 1.0
200
300
400
450 Speed
2423 45.4 0.8 5013 46.2 1.2 7520 47.2 1.7 10028 48.2 2.2 11281 48.6 2.4 25
100
200
300
400
450 Speed
100
200
300
400
2507 2206 89.3 176.8 0.9 0.9 5124 5013 90.3 178.0 1.4 1.5 7688 91.3 1.9 10251 92.1 2.3 11531 92.6 2.6 50 100 MCR20. 2100 2902 3002 2570 54.1 106.8 211.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 4670 6005 6138 54.9 107.8 213 1.2 1.4 1.5 9007 9207 55.9 108.8 1.7 1.9 12010 12276 56.9 109.6 2.2 2.3 13510 57.3 2.4 25 50 100 MCR20. 2500 3263 3342 2706 64.1 126.8 251.8 0.8 0.9 0.9 6844 7003 6605 64.9 127.8 253 1.2 1.4 1.5 10504 10743 65.9 128.8 1.7 1.9 14165 14244 66.9 129.6 2.2 2.3 46
3915 76.6 0.8 8212 77.4 1.2 126052 78.4 1.7 16998 79.4 2.2
125 2390 269.7 1.1 6005

115 2594 289.5 1.0
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fixed displacement motor for open and closed circuits, Axial piston, bent axis design Model AA2FM (A2FM)
Sizes 5, Series 6 Nominal pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum pressure 350 bar (5100 PSI) Size 10 to 200, Series 6 Nominal pressure 400 bar (5800 PSI) Maximum pressure 450 bar (6500 PSI) Size 250 to 1000, Series 6 Nominal pressure 350 bar (5100 PSI) Maximum pressure 400 bar (5800 PSI)
Fixed displacement motor AA2FM of axial piston, bent axis design, suitable for hydrostatic drives in open and closed circuits Use in mobile and industrial applications The output speed depends on the ow capacity of the pump and the displacement of the motor The torque increases with the pressure differential between the high and low pressure side and with increasing displacement Careful selection of the displacements offered, permit sizes to be matched to practically every application High power density Compact design High overall efciency Excellent starting torque efciency Economical conception One piece pistons with piston rings
Pumps and Motors
47
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Pressure fluid Mineral oil, HFD for sizes 250-1000 only in combination with long-life bearing L (no code) HFB-, HFC pressure fluid Sizes 10...200 (no code) Sizes 250...1000 (only in combination with long-life bearing L) Axial piston unita 10...180 200 250 355...1000 l l Bent axis design, Version SAE fixed displacement l l Version ISO Drive shaft bearing Mechanical bearing (no code) Long-life bearing Mode of operation Motor (plug-in motor A2FE see RE 91008) Size Size displacement Vg cm3/rev. Series
Size in3/rev. Size in3/rev. 10 0.63 107 6.51 12 0.73 125 7.63
E-
AA2F A2F
10...200 l
250...500 l l
710...1000 l
L
M
90 5.49
16 0.98 160 9.79
23 28 32 45 56 63 80 1.40 1.71 1.95 2.78 3.42 3.84 4.91 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000 10.98 12.20 15.25 21.66 30.51 43.33 61.02
6 Index sizes 10...180 size 200 sizes 250...1000 Direction of rotation Viewed on shaft end Seals FKM (flour-caoutchouc) Shaft end SAE Version SAE Splined shaft (AA2F) 10 l l 12 l l 16 l l 23 l l 28 l l 32 l l alternating 1 3 0 W
V
Cylindrical shaft with key DIN 6885 SAE cyl. shaft with key ISO Version Splined shaft DIN 5480
45 56 l l l l l 200
l l
63 80 l l l l l 355 l l 63 80 l l 355 l
90 107 125 160 180 250 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 500 710 1000 l l l l l l
S T U Q B P K Z A P B C D DN
B H
Cylindrical shaft with key DIN 6885 Mounting flange SAE Version SAE 2-bolt (AA2F) SAE 4-bolt 10 l 12 l 16 l 23 l 28 l 32 l
ISO Version (A2F)
ISO 4-bolt ISO 8-bolt
45 56 l l 200 l
90 107 125 160 180 250 l l l l l l 500 710 1000 l l l
Pumps and Motors
48
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

M
Pressure fluid Axial piston unita Drive shaft bearing Mode of operation Size Series Index Direction of rotation Seals Shaft end Mounting flange
Service line connections AA2F 1) SAE ports A and B, rear SAE ports A and B at side, opposite side Threaded ports A and B at side, opposite side Threaded ports A and B at side and rear 2) SAE ports A and B bottom Port plate for fitting a counterbalance valve 3) Port plate with integrated pressure relief valves 3) A2F 3) SAE ports A and B rear SAE ports A and B, bottom 10 l 12 l 16 l 23 l l l l 28 l l l l l l l 32 l l l l l l l 45 l l l l 56 l l l l 63 l l l l 80 l l l l
/6
W V
6)
51 0 52 0 7 53 0 54 0 60 0 18 1 19 1 2 01 0 7 10 0
90 107 125 160 180 250 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l 500 l l l l l l l l l 710 l l
510 520 527 530 540 600 181 191 192 010 017 100
l l l l 200 l 0 1 2 7 23...180 l l l
l l l l 355 l l l
l l 1000 l
Valves without valves with pressure relief valves (without pressure sequence range) with pressure relief valves (with pressure sequence range) with flushing and boost pressure valve Speed measurement 10...16 l without speed measurement (no code) prepared for speed measurement with ID sensor 4) prepared for speed measurement with HDD sensor 4) Special design Standard design (no code) Special design for slew drive applications (standard for port plate 19)
1) 2)
200 l l
250 l 5)
355...1000 l
D F
sizes 23...180
= available = in preparation = not available
3) 4) 5) 6)
Threads of xing screws and service lines are SAE (UN/UNF) Threaded ports at side are plugged with locking screw Threads of xing screws are metric Complete order recommended (AA2FM inc. speed sensor) See RE 91001 (ISO-Version) No code = standard version, S = special version (sizes 5...200), SO = special version (sizes 250...1000), K = combination with mounting part or mounting pump (sizes 5...200)
Pumps and Motors
49
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Operational pressure range Maximum pressure on port A or B (pressure data according to DIN 24312)
AA2F Sizes Shaft end: S S Q Q T U B P K A2F Sizes Shaft end: Z A P B B C 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 Nominal pressure 400 bar (5800 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) 300 bar (4350 psi) 280 bar (4000 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) Nominal pressure 350 bar (5100 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) 210 bar (3000 psi) 315 bar (4600 psi) Peak pressure 450 bar (6500 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi) 315 bar (4600 psi) 450 bar (6500 psi) 450 bar (6500 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) Peak pressure 400 bar (5800 psi) 450 bar (6500 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 400 bar (5800 psi) 250 bar (3600 psi) 350 bar (5100 psi)
200
355
500
710
1000
With pulsating loads over pN = 315 bar (4600 psi) (pmax = 350 [5100 psi]); we recommend the use of a splined shaft (AA2FM 10...250: S, T or U / A2FM 200: A / A2FM 355...1000: Z) The sum of the pressure at ports A and B may not exceed 700 bar (10000 psi) (A2F5: 630 bar (9000 psi)) Attention: shaft end with drives of radial force loads at the drive shaft (pinion, V-belt drives) necessitate reduction of the nominal pressure to pN = 315 bar (4600 psi)! Sizes 250...1000 please contact us.x
Permissible radial and axial loading on the drive shaft These are maximum values and do not apply to continous operation.
Size Radial force, max. at distance a (from shaft collar)
1)
Fq a Fax +
Fq max a +Fax max Fax max
Axial force, max. 3)
Permissible axial force/bar (psi)Fax per./ operating pressure bar (psi) Size
N (lbf) mm (in) N (lbf) N (lbf) N/bar (lbf/psi)
5 10 12 710 2100 2500 (160) (472) (562) 12 16 16 (0.47) (0.63) (0.63) 180 320 320 (40) (72) (72) 180 320 320 (40) (72) (72) 1.5 3.0 3.0 (0.023) (0.05) (0.05) 90 11450 (2574)2) 20 (0.79) 1000 (225) 1000 (225) 10.6 (0.16)
16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 3250 3850 4800 5400 7250 8150 9150 10250 (730) (865) (1079) (1214) (1630) (1832) (2057) (2304)2) 16 16 16 16 18 18 18 20 (0.63) (0.63) (0.63) (0.63) (0.71) (0.71) (0.71) (0.79) 320 500 500 500 630 800 800 1000 (72) (112) (112) (112) (142) (180) (180) (225) 320 500 500 500 630 800 800 1000 (72) (112) (112) (112) (142) (180) (180) (225) 3.0 5.2 5.2 5.2 7.0 8.7 8.7 10.6 (0.05) (0.08) (0.08) (0.08) (0.11) (0.13) (0.13) (0.16)
107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000 12100 14100 16300 18300 22900 12004) 15004) 19004) 30004) 26004) (2720) (3170) (3664) (4114) (5148) (270) (337) (427) (674) (584) 20 20 25 25 25 41 52.5 52.5 67.5 67.5 (0.79) (0.79) (0.98) (0.98) (0.98) (1.61) (2.07) (2.07) (2.66) (2.66) 1250 1250 1600 1600 1600 2000 2500 3000 4400 4400 (281) (281) (360) (360) (360) (450) (562) (674) (989) (989) 1250 1250 1600 1600 1600 2000 2500 3000 4400 4400 (281) (281) (360) (360) (360) (450) (562) (674) (989) (989) 12.9 12.9 16.7 16.7 16.7 5) 5) 5) 5) 5) (0.20) (0.20) (0.26) (0.26) (0.26) 1) When considering the permissible axial force, the force-transfer during intermittent operation (sizes 5...200) 2) direction must be taken into account. value for Q-shaft: Fq max = 9000 N (2023 lb-ft) 3) max. permissible axial force when stopped or when axial piston unit Fax max = increase in sevice life of bearings working in pressureless conditions. + Fax max = reduction in service life of bearings (avoid if at all possible) 4) when stopped or when axial piston unit working in pressureless conditions. Higher forces are permitted when under pressure, please contact us. 5) please contact us N Fq max Radial force, max. Fq (lbf) at distance a mm a (from shaft collar) a (in) N +F ax max (lbf) F ax 3) Axial force, max. + N Fax max (lbf) Permissible axial force/bar (psi) Fax per./bar N/bar operating pressure (psi) (lbf/psi)
1)
Pumps and Motors
50
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Table of values (theoretical values, ignoring mh and vi; values rounded)
Size Diplacement Speed max. Flow max. Torque constants p = 5100 psi p = 350 bar p = 5800 psi p = 400 bar Rotary stiffness Mass moment of inertia around output shaft Filling capacity Mass (approx.) Torque at Vg nmax nmax intermit.1) qV max TK T T T T in3 cm3 rpm rpm gpm L/min lb-ft/psi Nm/bar lb-ft Nm lb-ft Nm lb-ft/ Nm/ lbs-ft2 kgm2 gal L lbs kg 5 0.30 4.93 10000 11000 13 49 0.004 0.076 18 2) 24.7 2) 40 54 0.0019 0.00008 10 0.63 10.3 8000 8800 21.8 82 0.0084 0.164 42 57 48 65 89 120 0.0095 0.0004 0.045 0.17 12 5.4 12 0.73 12.0 8000 8800 25.3 96 0.0097 0.19 49 67 56 76 89 120 0.0095 0.0004 0.045 0.17 12 5.4 16 0.98 16.0 8000 8800 33.9 128 0.013 0.25 66 88 75 100 89 120 0.0095 0.0004 0.045 0.17 12 5.4 23 1.40 22.9 6300 6900 38.2 144 0.019 0.36 94 126 107 144 170 230 0.0285 0.0012 0.053 0.20 21 9.5 28 1.71 28.1 6300 6900 46.6 176 0.023 0.445 115 156 131 178 170 230 0.0285 0.0012 0.053 0.20 21 9.5 32 1.95 32.0 6300 6900 52.2 201 0.026 0.509 132 178 150 204 170 230 0.0285 0.0012 0.053 0.20 21 9.5 45 2.78 45.6 5600 6200 67.4 255 0.037 0.725 188 254 213 290 243 330 0.0569 0.0024 0.087 0.33 30 13.5 56 3.42 56.1 5000 5500 74.0 280 0.045 0.89 231 312 263 356 325 440 0.0997 0.0042 0.119 0.45 40 18 63 3.84 63.0 5000 5500 83.1 315 0.051 1.0 259 350 295 400 325 440 0.0997 0.0042 0.119 0.45 40 18 80 4.91 80.4 4500 5000 95.6 360 0.065 1.27 332 445 377 508 494 670 0.1708 0.0072 0.145 0.55 51 23
5.5 2.5
90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000 in3 5.49 6.51 7.63 9.79 10.98 12.20 15.25 21.66 30.51 43.33 61.02 cm3 90 106.7 125 160.4 180 200 250 355 500 710 1000 Speed max. rpm 4500 4000 4000 3600 3600 2750 2700 2240 2000 1600 1600 nmax 5000 4400 4400 4000 4000 3000 nmax intermit.1) rpm Flow max. gpm 106.9 112.7 132.1 152.5 171.1 145.2 178 210 264 300 422 qV max L/min 405 427 500 577 648 550 675 795 1000 1136 1600 lb-ft/psi 0.073 0.086 0.101 0.130 0.146 0.162 0.202 0.287 0.405 0.575 0.809 Torque constants TK Nm/bar 1,43 1,70 1,99 2,54 2,86 3,18 3,98 5,65 7,96 11,3 15,9 lb-ft 371 440 516 662 742 825 1030 1465 2063 2930 4127 Torque at p = 5100 psi T Nm 501 595 697 889 1001 1114 1393 1978 2785 3955 5570 p = 350 bar T lb-ft 422 500 587 753 844 938 p = 5800 psi T Nm 572 680 796 1016 1144 1272 p = 400 bar T Rotary stiffness lb-ft/ 494 649 649 996 996 2146 2753 3756 6069 13832 13832 Nm/ 670 880 880 1350 1350 2910 3733 5092 8228 18753 18753 lbs-ft2 Mass moment of inertia J 0.1708 0.2753 0.2753 0.5221 0.5221 0.8970 1.4475 2.4205 4.2240 13.052 13.052 around output shaft kgm2 0.0072 0.0116 0.0116 0.0220 0.0220 0.0378 0.061 0.102 0.178 0.55 0.55 Filling capacity gal 0.145 0.211 0.211 0.291 0.291 0.713 0.660 0.925 1.110 2.113 2.113 L 0.55 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.1 2.7 2.5 3.5 4.2 8 8 Mass (approx.) lbs 51 71 71 99 99 145 161 242 342 715 741 m kg 23 32 32 45 45 66 73 110 155 325 336 1) intermittent maximum speed: overspeed at discharge and over-running travel operations, t < 5 sec. and p < 150 bar (2200 psi) 2) p = 315 bar (4600 psi) Vg Pumps and Motors 51 Section 1
Size Displacement
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fixed displacement motor for open and closed circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A10FM, Standard version Model A10FE, Plug-in version
Size 10...63 Series 5 Nominal pressure 4060 psi (280 bar) Peak pressure 5100 psi (350 bar)
Output speed proportional to inlet ow Output torque increases with the pressure gradient between high and low-pressure sides For mobile and industrial use Long service life High permissible output speeds Well proven A10-rotary group High power to weight ratio- compact size Low noise levels Mechanical and hydraulic connections acc. to SAE standards Optional speed pickup Integrated anti cavitation valve optional, i.e. fan drives Plug-in version for space saving installation
Model A10FM, size 23 to 63
A10FE, size 10 to 45 (2-hole ange)
A10FE, size 11 to 18 (8-hole ange)
Pumps and Motors
52
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code A10F M

Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (without prefix) Axial piston motor Swashplate design fixed displacement, nominal pressure 4060psi (280 bar) peak pressure 5000 psi (350 bar) Operating mode Motor Size Displacement Vg in cm3 18 23 in3/rev 1.10 1.43 cm3/rev 18 23.5 Series Index 2 Direction of rotation (Looking at shaft end) with valve option 2 only with valve option 2 only Seals FPM fluororubber Shaft end 18 23 28 37 45 58 SAE splined shaft with runout SAE splined shaft with runout Tapered with woodruff key Mounting flange SAE 2-hole Ports for service lines 18 23 28 37 Ports A/B on side - same side; SAE flange, UNC threaded bolt holes Threaded ports A/B on side - same side; UNF thread Ports A/B at rear - SAE flange, UNC threaded bolt holes SAE threaded ports at rear - UNF thread Valves 18 23 28 37 Without valves Integrated flushing valve Integrated anti-cavitation valve Speed pickup Without speed pickup (no code) Prepared for speed pickup (for inductive sensor ID) 1 ) Integrated anti-cav valve requires selection of R- or L hand rotation 2 = available ) with port for service lines option 60N00 and 66N00 Pumps and Motors 53 changing right 1) left 1) W R L
A10F
M 28 37 45 58 1.73 2.23 2.71 3.53 28.5 36.7 44.5 58 63 3.84 63.1 5
V 63
R W C C 58

45 45
63

60N00 66N00 61N00 64N00 0 7 2) 2 1,2)
58
63
D = not available Section 1
= in preparation
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code A10F M

Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil (without prefix) Axial piston motor Swashplate design fixed displacement, nomiA10F nal pressure 4060psi (280 bar) peak pressure 5000 psi (350 bar) Operating mode Motor E Size Displacement Vg in cm3 10 11 14 16 18 23 28 37 45 0.65 0.70 0.86 0.98 1.10 1.43 1.73 2.24 2.71 in3/rev 10.6 11.5 14.1 16.1 18.0 23.5 28.5 36.7 44.5 cm3/rev Series Index 2 Direction of rotation (Looking at shaft end) changing W with valve option 2 only right 1) R with valve option 2 only left 1) L Seals FPM fluororubber V Shaft end 10 11 14 16 18 23 28 37 45 58 63 SAE splined shaft with runout R SAE splined shaft with runout W Tapered with woodruff key C Mounting flange SAE 2-hole C Special 2-hole flange F Special 8-hole flange H Ports for service lines 10 11 14 16 18 23 28 37 45 58 63 Ports A/B on side - same side; SAE flange, UNC threaded bolt holes 60N00 66N00 Threaded ports A/B on side - same side; UNF thread 61N00 Ports A/B at rear - SAE flange, UNC threaded bolt holes 64N00 SAE threaded ports at rear - UNF thread Valves 10 11 14 16 18 23 28 37 45 58 63 Without valves 0 Integrated flushing valve 7 2) Integrated anti-cavitation valve 2 1,2) Speed pickup Without speed pickup (no code) Prepared for speed pickup (for inductive sensor ID) D 1 ) Integrated anti-cav valve requires selection of R- or L hand rotation 2 ) with port for service lines option 60N00 and 66N00 = in preparation = not available = available
58 63 3.53 3.84 58.0 63.1

Pumps and Motors
54
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering mh and v: values rounded) Size Motor displacement Max. speed 1) Max. inlet flow Max. power Max. torque at nmax at nmax at Vg max p = 4060 psi (280 bar) p = 4060 psi (280 bar) Vg max nmax qv max Pmax Tmax J rpm gpm (L/min) HP (kW) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft2 (kgm2) Filling volume. approx. Weight. approx. Max. perm. radial force Actual starting torque at n = 0 min1 p = 4060 psi (280 bar) m Fq max T Permissible load on output shaft. max. perm. axial force Fax max lbs (kg) 10 5000 14 (53) 33 (24.7) 34.6 (47) 0.014 (0.0006) 11 (5) 11 4200 12.7 (48) 30 (22.5) 37.6 (51) 0.022 (0.00093) 14.3 (6.5) 790 (350) 22.1 (30) 14 4200 15.6 (59) 37 (27.6) 46.5 (63) 0.022 (0.00093) 14.3 (6.5) 790 (350) 33.2 (45) 16 4200 17.9 (68) 42 (31.6) 53.1 (72) 0.022 (0.00093) 14.3 (6.5) 790 (350) 39.1 (53) 18 1.10 (18) 4200 20.1 (76) 47 (35.3) 59 (80) 0.022 (0.00093) 14.3 (6.5) 790 (350) 49.8 (67.5) in3 (cm3) 0.65 (10.6) 0.70 (11.5) 0.86 (14.1) 0.98 (16.1)
Mass moment of inertia (about the output shaft)
gal. (L) 0.026(0.1) 0.039(0.15) 0.039(0.15) 0.039(0.15) 0.039(0.15) lbf (N) 900 (400) 1570 (700) 1570 (700) 1570 (700) 1570 (700) lbf (N) 560 (250) lb-ft (Nm) 27.6 (37.5)
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering mh and v: values rounded) Size Motor displacement Max. speed 1) Max. inlet flow at nmax Max. power Max. torque at nmax Vg max nmax p = 4060 psi (280 bar) Pmax J rpm HP (kW) lb-ft2 (kgm ) Filling volume. approx. Weight. approx. Permissible load on output shaft. max. perm. axial force Max. perm. radial force Actual starting torque at n = 0 min1 p = 4060 psi (280 bar)
1
2
23 4900 71(53.6) 0.04 (0.0017) 0.16(0.6) 26.5(12)
28 4700 35.4(134) 83(62.5) 93.7(127) 0.04 (0.0017) 0.16(0.6) 26.5(12)
37 4200 40.7(154) 95(71.8) 120(163) 0.078 (0.0033) 37.5(17)
45 4000 47(178) 111(83.1) 146(198) 0.078 (0.0033) 37.5(17)
58 3.53(58) 3600 55.2(209) 190(258) 0.133 (0.0056) 0.21(0.8) 48.5(22)
63 3.84(63.1) 3400 56.8(215) 207(281) 0.133 (0.0056) 0.21(0.8) 48.5(22)
in3 (cm3) 1.43(23.5) 1.73(28.5) 2.24(36.7) 2.71(44.5)
qv max gpm (L/min) 30.4(115) lb-ft (Nm) 77.4(105)
130(97.4) 133(100.1)
at Vg max p = 4060 psi (280 bar) Tmax
Mass moment of inertia (about the output shaft)
gal. (L) m Fax max Fq max T lbs (kg)
0.185(0.7) 0.185(0.7)
lbf (N) 2250(1000) 2250(1000) 3370(1500) 3370(1500) 4500(2000) 4500(2000) lbf (N) 2700(1200) 2700(1200) 3370(1500) 3370(1500) 3820(1700) 3820(1700) lb-ft (Nm) 55.3(75) 77.4(105) 92.2(125) 125(170) 151(205) 169(230)
) Maximum speed depending on outlet pressure

1.00
Motor speed n/nmax
Applied force with shaft R and W

0.95 0.90 0.85 0.80 0 29 (2) 58 87 116 145 174 203 232 261 (4) (6) (8) (10) (12) (14) (16) (18) Outlet pressure PND in PSI (bar)
Applied force with shaft C

Fq Fax
Fq Fax X/2 X X/2
X/2 X
X/2
Pumps and Motors
55
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fixed displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, bent axis design Model AA2FO (A2FO)
Sizes 5 10...200 250...1000 Series 6 Nominal pressure/Peak pressure 4600/5100 psi (315/350 bar) 5800/6500 psi (400/450 bar) 5100/5800 psi (350/400 bar)
Fixed displacement pump AA2FO of axial piston, bent axis design, suitable for hydrostatic drives in open circuits Use in mobile and industrial applications Output ow is proportional to drive speed and displacement The drive shaft bearings are designed to give the service life expected in these areas of operation High power density Compact design High overall efciency Cost effective concept One piece pistons with piston rings
Ordering code for size 5
A2F
01
5
02
60
03 04
05
7
06
Additional instructions in text form Seals The xed pump A2F5 is equipped with Buna-N (NBR) seals in standard design. In case of need FKM- (uor-caoutchouc) seals please indicate when ordering in clear text: "with FKM-seals"
Axial piston unit 01 Bent axis design, xed displacement Size Size 02 Displacement Vg Series 03 Direction of rotation Viewed on shaft end clockwise counter-clockwise
A2F 5 0.30 4.93 60 R L
in3/rev. cm3/rev.
04
Shaft end Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885 05 Tapered shaft with threaded end and woodruff key per DIN 6888 Service line ports 06 Threaded ports A und B at side, metric
B C 7
Pumps and Motors
56
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
O
01 02 03 04 05
6
06 07 08
V
09 10 11 12
Hydraulic uid Mineral oil, HFD for sizes 250...1000 only in combination with long-life bearing L (no code) 01 HFB-, HFC hydraulic uid Sizes 10...200 (no code) Sizes 250...1000 (only in combination with long-life bearing L) Axial piston unit 02 Bent axis design, xed displacement Drive shaft bearing Mechanical bearing (no code) Long-life bearing Version SAE Version ISO 10...200 10...180 200 250 250...500 710...1000 L 355...1000 E-
AA2F A2F
03
Mode of operation 04 Pump, open circuits Size Size displacement Vg (cm3) Size 05 in /rev. Size in3/rev. Series 06 Index sizes 10...180 07 size 200 sizes 250...1000 Direction of rotation Viewed on shaft end 90 5.49
3
10 0.63 107 6.51
12 0.73 125 7.63
16 0.98 160 9.79
23 1.40 180 10.98
28 1.71 200 12.20
32 1.95 250 15.25
45 2.78 355 21.66
56 3.42 500 30.51
63 3.84 710 43.33
80 4.91 1000 61.02
1 3 0
08
clockwise counter-clockwise
R L
Seals 09 FKM (our-caoutchouc)
Pumps and Motors
57
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
O
01 02 03 04 05
6
06 07 08
V
09 10 11 12
Shaft end SAE Version (AA2F)
SAE Splined shaft
10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 200 10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 355 200 500 710 1000 1000
S T U Q B P K A Z B P
Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885 10 SAE parallel keyed shaft ISO Version (A2F) Splined shaft DIN 5480 Parallel keyed shaft DIN 6885 Mounting ange SAE Version (AA2F) 11 ISO Version (A2F) Service line ports AA2F 1) SAE flange ports A and B, at side and SAE flange port S, rear Threaded ports A and B, at side and SAE ange port S, rear 12 A2F 2) SAE flange ports A and B, at side and SAE flange port S, rear SAE flange ports A and B, rear and SAE flange port S, rear
1 2
355
500
710
2-bolt SAE 4-bolt SAE
C D DN B H
4-bolt ISO 8-bolt ISO
10 12 16 23 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 55 56
200
355
500
710
1000 05 11
) threads of fastening screws and service lines are SAE (UN/UNF) ) threads of fastening screws are metric = available = not available
Pumps and Motors
58
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (theoretical values, without considering mh and v; values rounded)

Size Diplacement Speed max. Flow max. Power at p = 5100 psi p = 350 bar p = 5800 psi p = 400 bar Torque at p = 5100 psi p = 350 bar p = 5800 psi p = 400 bar Mass moment of inertia around output shaft Case ll capacity Weight (approx.) in3 cm3 1 nmax ) rpm nmax limit 2) rpm qV max gpm L/min Pmax HP Pmax kW Pmax HP Pmax kW T lb-ft T Nm T lb-ft T Nm J lbs-ft2 kgm2 gal L m lbs kg Vg 5 0.30 4.93 5600 8000 7.3 27.6 19.53) 14.53) 18 3) 24.7 3) 0.0019 0.00008 10 0.63 10.3 3150 6000 8.6 32.4 25 18.9 30 22 42 57 48 65 0.0095 0.0004 0.045 0.17 12 5.4 12 0.73 12 3150 6000 10.0 37.8 30 22 34 25 50 67 56 76 0.0095 0.0004 0.045 0.17 12 5.4 16 0.98 16 3150 6000 13.2 50 39 29.2 45 34 65 88 75 101 0.0095 0.0004 0.045 0.17 12 5.4 23 1.40 22.9 2500 4750 15.1 57 44 33 51 38 94 126 107 145 0.0285 0.0012 0.053 0.20 21 9.5 28 1.71 28.1 2500 4750 18.5 70 55 41 63 47 116 156 131 178 0.0285 0.0012 0.053 0.20 21 9.5 32 1.95 32 2500 4750 21.1 80 63 47 71 53 132 178 150 203 0.0285 0.0012 0.053 0.20 21 9.5 45 2.78 45.6 2240 4250 27.0 102 80 59.5 91 68 189 254 214 290 0.0569 0.0024 0.087 0.33 30 13.5 56 3.42 56.1 2000 3750 29.6 112 88 65 100 75 232 312 263 356 0.0997 0.0042 0.119 0.45 40 18 63 3.84 63 2000 3750 33.3 126 99 73.5 113 84 260 350 295 400 0.0997 0.0042 0.119 0.45 40 18 80 4.91 80.4 1800 3350 38.0 144 113 84 129 96 331 445 377 511 0.1708 0.0072 0.145 0.55 51 23 1000 61.02 1000 950 1200 251.0 950 747 554 4141 5570 13.052 0.55 2.113 8 741 336
5.5 2.5
90 107 125 160 180 200 250 355 500 710 in3 5.49 6.51 7.63 9.79 10.98 12.20 15.25 21.66 30.51 43.33 Displacement 90 106.7 125 160.4 180 200 250 355 500 710 cm3 1 Speed max. nmax ) rpm 1800 1600 1600 1450 1450 1550 1500 1320 1200 1200 3350 3000 3000 2650 2650 2750 1800 1600 1500 1500 nmax limit 2) rpm Flow max. qV max gpm 42.8 44.9 52.8 61.2 69.0 81.9 99.1 123.9 158.5 218.2 L/min 162 170 200 232 261 310 375 469 600 826 Power at p = 5100 psi Pmax HP 127 134 157 183 205 244 295 368 472 670 p = 350 bar Pmax kW 95 100 117 135 152 181 219 273 350 497 p = 5800 psi Pmax HP 145 153 179 208 233 277 p = 400 bar Pmax kW 108 114 133 155 174 207 Torque at p = 5100 psi T lb-ft 372 442 517 664 746 828 1036 1470 2070 2940 p = 350 bar T Nm 501 594 696 893 1003 1114 1393 1978 2785 3955 p = 5800 psi T lb-ft 422 500 586 752 845 938 p = 400 bar T Nm 572 678 795 1020 1145 1272 lbs-ft2 0.1708 0.2753 0.2753 0.5221 0.5221 0.8970 1.4475 2.4205 4.2240 13.052 Mass moment of inertia J around output shaft kgm2 0.0072 0.0116 0.0116 0.0220 0.0220 0.0378 0.061 0.102 0.178 0.55 Case ll capacity gal 0.145 0.211 0.211 0.291 0.291 0.713 0.660 0.925 1.110 2.113 L 0.55 0.8 0.8 1.1 1.1 2.7 2.5 3.5 4.2 8 Weight (approx.) m lbs 51 71 71 99 99 145 161 242 342 715 kg 23 32 32 45 45 66 73 110 155 325 1 ) The values shown are valid for an absolute pressure (pabs) of 14.5 psi (1 bar) at the suction inlet S and when operated on mineral oil (with a specic mass of 7.36 lbs/gal (0.88 kg/L)). 2 ) By increase of the input pressure (pabs > 14.5 psi / 1 bar) the rotational speeds can be increased to the max. admissible speeds nmax limit (speed limits). 3 ) p = 4600 psi (315 bar) Vg Pumps and Motors 59
Size
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement motor for open and closed circuits, Axial piston, bent axis design Model AA6VM (A6VM)
Sizes 28...1000 Series 6 Nominal pressure 5800 psi (400 bar) Peak pressure 6500 psi (450 bar) Sizes 250...1000 Nominal pressure 5100 psi (350 bar) Peak pressure 5800 psi (400 bar)
Variable displacement axial piston motor of bent axis design for hydrostatic transmissions in open and closed circuits For use in mobile and stationary applications The wide control range enables the variable displacement motor to satisfy the requirement for high rotational speed and high torque. The displacement is continuously variable from Vg max to Vg min = 0. The output speed depends on the ow capacity of the pumps and the displacement of the motor. The torque increases with the pressure differential between the high and low pressure side and with increasing displacement. Wide control range with hydrostatic transmissions Wide selection of regulating and control devices Cost savings as no need for shiftable gearboxes and possibility to use smaller pumps Rugged, compact bearing system with long service life High power density Favorable start-up efciency Low moment of inertia Large swivel range
Pumps and Motors
60
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data Table of values (theoretical values, ignoring and ; values rounded)
mh v
Size Displacement 1)
Vg max Vg 0
Rotational speed max. nmax at Vg max nmax1 at Vg < Vg,1 (while adhering to max. permitted ow) Vg,1 nmax 0 at Vg 0 qV max Tmax at Vg max 2)
Flow max. Torque max. Torsional rigidity
Mass moment of inertia J around output shaft Filling capacity Mass (approx.) m
in cm3 in3 cm3 rpm rpm in3 cm3 rpm gpm L/min lb-ft Nm lb-ft/rad Nm/rad lbs-ft2 kgm2 L lbs kg
28 1.71 28.1 0 0 5550 8750 1.10 18 10450 41 156 132 179 266 360 0.033 0.0014 0.5 35 16
55 3.34 54.8 0 0 4450 7000 2.14 35 8350 64 244 257 349 516 700 0.100 0.0042 0.75 57 26
80 4.88 80 0 0 3900 6150 3.11 51 7350 82 312 ??? 509 848 1150 0.190 0.0080 1.2 75 34
107 6.53 107 0 0 3550 5600 4.15 68 6300 100 380 502 681 1151 1560 0.301 0.0127 1.5 104 47
140 8.54 140 0 0 3250 5150 5.37 88 5750 120 455 657 891 1545 2095 0.491 0.0207 1.8 132 60
160 9.76 160 0 0 3100 4900 6.16 101 5500 131 496 752 1019 1711 2320 0.600 0.0253 2.4 141 64
200 12.20 200 0 0 2900 4600 7.69 126 5100 153 580 939 1273 2146 2910 0.838 0.0353 2.7 176 80
250 15.25 250 0 0 2700 3600 11.47 188 3600 178 675 1026 1391 2753 3733 1.448 0.061 3.0 198 90
355 21.66 355 0 0 2240 2950 16.48 270 2950 210 795 1459 1978 3756 5092 2.420 0.102 5.0 375 170
500 30.51 500 0 0 2000 2650 23.00 377 2650 264 1000 2054 2785 6069 8228 4.224 0.178 7.0 463 210
1000 61.02 1000 0 0 1600 2100 46.5 762 2100 423 1600 4109 5571 13832 18753 13.05 0.550 16.0 948 430
) The minimum and maximum displacement are continuously variable, see model codes on page 2. (default setting sizes 250 to 1000 unless specified in order: Vg min = 0.2 Vg max , Vg max = Vg max). ) sizes 28 to 200: p = 5800 psi (400 bar); sizes 250 to 1000: p = 5100 psi (350 bar) Permitted displacement in relation to rotational speed
Displacement Vg / Vg max
Minimum inlet pressure on service line port A(B)

Inlet pressure pabs. min psi (bar)
230 (16) 200 (14) 175 (12) 145 (10) 115 (8) 90 (6) 60 (4) 30 (2) 15 (1) Vg 1 Vg max
1.0 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.2

sizes 250...1000 sizes 28...200
0.3 Vg max
0 1 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2 1.4 0.2 n / nmax 0 To prevent damage to the variable displacement motor, there has to be a minimum inlet pressure in the inlet area. The minimum inlet pressure depends on the speed and swivel angle (displacement) of the variable displacement motor.
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8
1.6 n / nmax
Please contact us if these conditions cannot be satisfied. Pumps and Motors 61 Section 1
Ordering Code Electric Drives

and Controls Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Pressure fluid Petroleum oil (no character), HFD for sizes 250-1000 only in combination with long-life bearing L HFB, HFC pressure fluid Sizes 28 to 200 (no character) Sizes 250 to 1000 (only in combination with long-life bearing L) E Axial piston unit 28 1655 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 See Section for applicable Preferred/Spotlight Bent-axis type, variable Version SAE part numbers AA6V 1 1 1 1 1 1 and unit price. Version ISO ) ) ) ) ) ) A6V 28...200 250 355 500 1000 Drive shaft bearing Standard bearing (no character) Long-life bearing L Operation mode Motor (A6VE plug-in motor, see RE 91606) M Size Displacement Vg max in3/rev 1.71 3.34 4.88 6.53 8.54 9.76 12.20 15.25 21.66 30.51 61.02 cm3/rev 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Control device 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Hydraulic control, p = 145 psi (10 bar) HD1 HD1 pilot pressure dependent p = 365 psi (25 bar) HD2 HD2 p = 508 psi (35 bar) HD3 HD3 Hydraulic two-point control HZ HZ HZ1 HZ1 HZ3 HZ3 Electrical control, with 12 V EP1 EP1 proportional solenoid (sizes 28 to 200) 2) 24 V EP2 EP2 Electrical two-point control, 12 V EZ1 EZ1 with solenoid 24 V EZ2 EZ2 12 V EZ3 EZ3 24 V EZ4 EZ4 Automatic control, without pressure rise HA1 HA1 high-pressure dependent with pressure rise p = 1450 psi (100 bar) HA2 HA2 Hydraulic control, speed dependent DA DA pSt/pHD = 3/100, hydraulic travel direction valve pSt/pHD = 5/100, hydraulic travel direction valve DA1 DA1 electrical travel direction valve 12 V DA2 DA2 + electrical Vg max switch 24 V DA3 DA3 pSt/pHD = 8/100, hydraulic travel direction valve DA4 DA4 electrical travel direction valve 12 V DA5 DA5 + electrical Vg max switch 24 V DA6 DA6 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Pressure control (for HD, EP only) without pressure control (no character) Pressure control direct D direct, with 2nd pressure setting 3) 3) 3) 3) E remotely controlled G Overriding HA control (for HA1, HA2 only) without override (no character) Hydraulic override T Electrical override 12 V U1 24 V U2 Electrical override 12 V R1 + electrical travel direction valve 24 V R2 Series Series 6, Index 3 63 Direction of rotation when viewing shaft end, alternating W 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Setting range for displacement 4) Vg min = 0 to 0.8 Vg max (no character) Vg min = 0 to 0.4 Vg max Vg max = Vg max to 0.8 Vg max 1 Vg min > 0.4 Vg max to 0.8 Vg max Vg max = Vg max to 0.8 Vg max 2
1 4 3 ) ISO-Version see RE 91604 2) with proportional valve (sizes 250 to 1000) ) supplied as standard with D version (sizes 250 to 1000) ) please specify precise values for Vg min and Vg max in plain text when placing your order: Vg min = ... cm3, Vg max = ... cm3
Pumps and Motors
62
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
/ 6 3Service W - V
Pressure fluid Axial piston unit Transmission shaft bearing Operation mode Size Control device Series/Index Direction of rotation Setting range for displacement Seals FKM (fluor-caoutchouc) V 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Shaft end SAE-Version (AA6VM) SAE-splined shaft S ISO-Version (A6VM) A Splined shaft DIN 5480 Z Cylindrical shaft with key DIN 6885 P Mounting flange SAE-Version SAE J744 2-bolt C (AA6VM) SAE J744 4-bolt D ISO-Version ISO 3019-2 4-bolt B (A6VM) ISO 3019-2 8-bolt H 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Service line connections SAE-Version Ports A, B: SAE rear 51 0 510 (AA6VM) (UN threads) 7 517 Ports A, B: SAE side, opposite 52 0 520 (UN threads) 7 527 Port plate with pressure relief valve, 37 0 370 for fitting a counterbalance valve ) 38 0 380 ISO-Version Ports A, B: SAE rear 01 0 010 (A6VM) (metric threads) 7 017 Ports A, B: SAE side, opposite 02 0 020 (metric threads) 7 027 Ports A, B: SAE side, opposite + rear 15 0 150 Valves no valves 0 with flushing and boost pressure valve 7 Speed measurement 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 no speed measurement (no character) prepared for speed measurement (ID) D prepared for speed measurement (HDD) F Swivel angle indicator no swivel angle indicator (no character) with optical swivel angle indicator V with electrical swivel angle indicator E EP1/2 EZ1/2 EZ3/4 HA.U. HA.R. DA. Connectors for solenoids (sizes 28 to 200 only) ) DEUTSCH DT04-2P-EP04 injection molded, without bidirectional quenching diode P 2-pin injection molded, with bidirectional quenching diode Q with lead, without bidirectional quenching diode ) ) T Hirschmann according to DIN EN 175 301-803-A, without bidirectional quenching diode ) H 28 55 80 107 140 160 200 250 355 500 1000 Start of control at Vg min (standard for HA) A at Vg max (standard for HD, HZ, EP, EZ, DA) B
1 2 3 4 4 1
) only possible in combination with HD, EP, HA control ) for sizes 250 to 1000, the DIN connector is a Hirschmann one as standard (no character) ) under development for size 28 ) not for new projects (sizes 28 to 200) 63
= available = under development = not available
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Electric Electric Drives Drives and Controls and Controls
Hydraulics Hydraulics
LinearLinear Motion Motion and and Assembly Assembly Technologies Technologies
Pneumatics Pneumatics
Service Service

Dual displacement motor for open and closed circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A10VM Model A10VE, Plug-in version
Dual displacement motor, axial piston swashplate design, for hydrostatic transmissions in open and closed circuits Output speed directly proportional to inlet ow and inversely proportional to motor displacement Output torque increases proportional to the pressure difference between high and low pressure sides and increasing displacement Heavy duty bearings for long service life High permissible output speed Well proven A10 rotary unit technology High power/weight ratio compact size Cost effective Low noise Control range 1 : 3.75 External direct control supply possible Minimum displacement can be set externally SAE 2-bolt mounting ange on A10VM Special 2-bolt mounting ange on A10VE
Model A10VM
Model A10VE
Pumps and Motors
64
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data Table of values (Theoretical values, without considering mh and v; values rounded)
Size Motor displacement Speed maximum1) at Speed minimum Inlet ow Power Torque constant at Torque Actual starting torque Angular acceleration Rotational stiffness of Filling volume Weight
1)
28 Vg max Vg min Vg max Vg min nmax

cont.
45 2.75 0.73 4000 4600 250 47.5 111 0,036 146 108 0.0783 4000 29800 25000 0.185 39.7
63 3.78 0.98 3300 3800 250 54 126 0,049 200 149 0.1329 3300 50500 39300 0.21 57.3
in3 in3 rpm rpm rpm gpm HP lb-ft/psi lb-ft lb-ft
1.71 0.49(VM)0.61(VE) 4700 5300 250 34.8 81 0,022 91 67 0.0403

2
nmax nmin at nmax cont. and Vg

max
qv max p = 4000 psi Pmax Tc p = 4000 psi p = 4000 psi J R W m Tmax
at nmax cont. and Vg

max
Vg max at Vg max at n = 0 rpm maximum Output shaft
Mass moment of inertia (about output shaft)
lb-ft
rad/s
5500 18900 14400 0.16 30.9
lb-ft/rad lb-ft/rad gal lbs
approx.
At max. speed the low pressure side must see at least 260 psi (18 bar).
Permissible displacement dependent on speed

nmax bei Vgmax 1,2 1,15 1,1 1,05 1,0
nmax
Speed
0,95 0,9 0 0,2 0,4 0,6 0,8 Vg Vgmax 1,0
Displacement
Permissible radial and axial force on output shaft

Size Max. perm. axial force Max. perm. radialforce on output shaft on output shaft
Fax X/2 X X/2 Fq
28 Fax max lfb (N) Fq max lfb (N) 225 (1000) 270 (1200)
45
63
337 (1500) 450 (2000) 337 (1500) 382 (1700)
Pumps and Motors
65
Section 1
Ordering code
A10V
Axial piston unit Swash plate design, variable, nom. press. 4000 psi (280 bar) peak press. 5100 psi (350 bar) Operating mode Motor Size Motor displacement Vg max Control devices Two-point direct control, external control supply, without pilot valve Two-point control, hydraulically operated Control voltage Two-point con12V trol ,electrically Control voltage operated, with 24V solenoid valve with stroking time orice Series Design index in3 / rev. cm3 / rev.
/ 5 2 W
A10V
M 28 45 63 1.71 2.75 3.78 28 45 62
DG HZ HZ EZ EZ EZ EZ
DG HZ HZ6 EZ1 EZ6 EZ2 EZ7
6 1 6 2 7
5 2 Direction of rotation bi-directional Min. displacement Vg min in3 (cm3) innitely variable from to from to 28 0.49 (8) 1.71 (28) 45 0.73 (12) 1.52 (25) 1.59 (26) 2.75 (45) W 63 0.98 (16) 1 2.32 (38) 2.44 (40) 2 3.78 (62)
Adjustment, please state in clear text Seal FKM uororubber (DIN ISO 1629) Shaft end SAE splined (for details see unit dimensions) SAE splined (for details see unit dimensions) Mounting ange SAE 2-hole
V R W C 60N00 66N00 61N00 64N00 0 7 D
Ports for service lines A/B at side-same side; SAE ange,UNC xing screws A/B at side-same side; UNF threaded ports A/B at rear, SAE ange; UNC xing screws A/B at rear, UNF threaded ports Valves without valves integrated ushing valve, only with side ports (60N00, 66N00) Speed pickup without speed pickup (no code) prepared for speed pickup(IDR 18/20-L250) = not available = in preparation = available
Pumps and Motors
66
Section 1
Ordering code
A10V
Axial piston unit Swash plate design, variable, nom. press. 4000 psi (280 bar) peak press. 5100 psi (350 bar) Operating mode Plug-in motor Size 28 Motor displacement Vg max Control devices Two-point direct control, external control supply, without pilot valve Two-point control, hydraulically operated Control voltage Two-point con12V trol ,electrically Control voltage operated, with 24V solenoid valve with stroking time orice Series in3 / rev. cm3 / rev. 28
/ 5 2 W
A10V
E 45 45 63 62
1.71 2.75 3.78
DG HZ HZ EZ EZ EZ EZ
DG HZ HZ6 EZ1 EZ6 EZ2 EZ7
6 1 6 2 7
5 Design index 2 Direction of rotation bi-directional Min. displacement Vg min in3 (cm3) innitely variable from to from to 28 0.61 (10) 1.71 (28) 45 0.73 (12) 1.52 (25) 1.59 (26) 2.75 (45) W 63 0.98 (16) 1 2.32 (38) 2.44 (40) 2 3.78 (62)
Adjustment, please state in clear text Seal FKM uororubber (DIN ISO 1629) Shaft end SAE splined (for details see unit dimensions) SAE splined (for details see unit dimensions) Mounting ange Special 2-hole Ports for service lines A/B at side-same side; SAE ange,UNC xing screws A/B at side-same side; UNF threaded ports A/B at rear, SAE ange; UNC xing screws A/B at rear, UNF threaded ports
V R W F 60N00 66N00 61N00 64N00 0 7 D
Valves without valves integrated ushing valve, only with side ports (60N00, 66N00) Speed pickup without speed pickup (no code) prepared for speed pickup(IDR 18/20-L250) = not available Pumps and Motors = in preparation = available 67
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for closed circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model AA4VG
Sizes 28...250 Series 3 Nominal pressure 5800 psi (400 bar) Peak pressure 6500 psi (450 bar)
Variable displacement axial piston pump of swashplate design for hydrostatic closed circuit transmissions Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement and is innitely variable Output ow increases with swivel angle from 0 to its maximum value Swivelling the pump over center smoothly changes the direction of ow Availability of a highly adaptable range of control and regulating devices The pump is equipped with two pressure relief valves on the high pressure ports to protect the hydrostatic transmission (pump and motor) from overloads These valves also function as boost inlet valves An integral auxiliary pump serves as boost and pilot oil pump The maximum boost pressure is limited by a built-in boost pressure relief valve The integral pressure cut-off is standard
Changes in ordering code from 02.04 issue

Control device - new standard: supply ltration at HD3, EP3 and EP4 control - not for new projects: HD1, EP1, EP2 Service line ports - new: sophisticated designation of the position of suction port S Filtration - new: contamination indicator with electr. signal and DEUTSCH male connector - not for new projects: M and L Range of male connectors for solenoids - not for new projects: H
Pumps and Motors
68
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
AA4V G
01 02 03 04
D
05 06 07 08 09
/ 32
10 11
N
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Axial piston unit 01 Variable swashplate design, nominal pressure 5800 psi (400 bar), peak pressure 6500 psi (450 bar) Operation 02 Pump in closed circuit Size Displacement Vg max Control device Without control unit Hydraulic control cm3 in3 28 40 56 71 90 125 180 250
AA4V G
03
1.71 2.44 3.42 4.33 5.49 7.63 10.9815.25
04 Electrical control
pilot pressure without supply ltration related with supply ltration mechanical servo direct operated speed related U = 12 V DC U = 24 V DC U = 12 V DC with proportional solenoid without supply ltration U = 24 V DC U = 12 V DC with proportional solenoid with supply ltration U = 24 V DC with switching solenoid U = 12 V DC U = 24 V DC
28 28 28 28 28
40 40 40 40 40 HW
56 56 56 56 56 DG
71 71 71 71 71 DA
90 90 90 90 90 EP
125 180 250 NV HD1 1) HD3 HW DG DA1 DA2 EP1 1) EP2 1) EP3 EP4 EZ1 EZ2 125 180 250 125 180 250 125 180 250 125 180 250 EZ 28...250 D
Pressure cut-off 05 With pressure cut-off (standard) Neutral position switch (only for HW) Without neutral position switch (no code) 06 With neutral position switch Mechanical stroke limiter Without mechanical stroke limiter (no code) 07 With mechanical stroke limiter, external adjustable Ports X3, X4 for positioning pressure Without ports X3, X4 (no code) 08 With ports X3, X4 DA control valve Without DA control valve With DA control valve, xed setting With DA control valve, mech. operating direction counter-clockwise adjust. with control lever operating direction clockwise 09 With DA control valve, xed setting and hydraulic inch valve built-on, control with brake uid With DA control valve, xed setting, connections for master controller With DA control valve, xed setting and hydraulic inch valve built-on, control with mineral oil NV
T 1 2 3L 3R 4 7 8
HD
Pumps and Motors
69
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
AA4V G
01 02 03 04
D
05 06 07 08 09
/ 32
10 11
N
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Series 10 Series 3, Index 2 Direction of rotation Viewed from shaft end clockwise counter-clockwise 28...250
32 R L N 28 2) 28 suction port S bottom suction port S top suction port S bottom suction port S top without through drive with through drive without through drive with through drive 28 28 40 40 56 56 71 71 40 2) 40 56 56 71 71 90 125 180 250 2) 90 28 90 90 125 180 250 40...180 250 S T U C D F 52 53 60 63 N00 K.. F00 F..
11
Seals 12 NBR (nitril-caoutchouc), shaft seal in FKM (uor-caoutchouc) Shaft end (permissible input torque see page X) Splined shaft for single pump ANSI B92.1a1976 for combination pump 1st pump only for combination pump 2nd pump Mounting ange SAE J744 2-hole 14 SAE J744 4-hole SAE J744 2+4-hole Service line ports SAE ange ports A and B top/bottom SAE ange ports A and B same side right left
15
Boost pump Without integral boost pump 16 With integral boost pump Through drive Flange SAE J744 3) 82-2 (A) 101-2 (B) 17 127-2 (C) 152-2/4 (D) 165-4 (E)
125 180 250 125 180 250
Splined shaft hub 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP 1 in 15T 16/32DP 1 in 15T 16/32DP 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP
) 4 ) 4 ) 4 ) 4 ) 4 ) 4 ) 4 )
.01 .02 .04 .09 .07 .90 .69 .72
Pumps and Motors
70
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
AA4V G
01 02 03 04
D
05 06 07 08 09
/ 32
10 11
N
12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Valves With high pressure relief valve, pilot controlled With high pressure relief valve, 18 direct controlled, (xed setting)
Setting range 1450...6100 psi with bypass (100...420 bar)
28
40 40 40 40
56 56 56 56
71 71 71 71
90 90 90 90
125 180 250 1 3 5 4 6
3900...6100 psi without bypass (270...420 bar) with bypass 1450...3600 psi without bypass (100...250 bar) with bypass
Filtration Filtration in the suction line of the boost pump Filtration in the pressure line of the boost pump port for external boost circuit lter, (Fe and Fa) and cold start valve 19 Filter built-on with contamination indicator and cold start valve window Filter built-on with contamination indicator lamp/electr. signal - HIRSCHMANN male connector and cold start valve electr. signal - HIRSCHMANN male connector electr. signal - DEUTSCH male connector External supply (model without integral boost pump - N00, K...) Swivel angle display Without swivel angle display (no code) Electrical swivel angle sensor
28 28 28
125 180 250
S D K F P M L B E
20
125 180 250 R
Range of male connectors for solenoids (only for EP, EZ and DA) DEUTSCH without quenching diode with quenching diode (only for EZ and DA) 21 male connector 2-pin
1
125 180 250
P Q
DIN male connector to HIRSCHMANN without quenching diode H ) The conversion for existing projects to HD3, EP3/4 is carried out automatically ________ sizes 28-71 starting May 1, 2006 ________ sizes 90-250: date in 2006 still open 2 ) standard for combination pumps 1st pump: shaft S 3 ) 2 = 2-hole; 4 = 4-hole 4 ) splined shaft hub to ANSI B92.1a-1976 (for mounting options and splined shaft allocation to SAE J744, see pages XX) = available = available on request = not for new projects = not available
Pumps and Motors
71
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Table of values (theoretical values, without considering mh and v: values rounded)

Size Displacement variable pump auxiliary pump Speed maximum Vg max limited maximum 1) intermittent maximum ) minimum Flow at nmax contin. and Vg max Power 3) at nmax contin. Torque 3) at Vg max p = 5800 psi p = 400 bar p = 5800 psi p = 400 bar p = 1000 psi p = 100 bar Moment of inertia (about drive axis) Angular acceleration, max. Speed variation, max. Rotary stiffness shaft end S shaft end T shaft end U Filling capacity of housing Weight approx. (without through drive)
1 2 2
28 Vg max Vg H in3 1.71 cm (at p = 290 psi / 20 bar) nmax contin. nmax limited nmax interm. nmin qv max Pmax Tmax Tmax T T J cm
3
40 2.44 40 0.52 8.6 4000 4200 5000 500 42.3 160 144 107 187 255 32.4 63.5 0.0902 0.0038 30000 81 50892 69000 37468 50800 1.1 68 31
56 3.42 56 0.71 11.6 3600 3900 4500 500 53.4 202 180 134 263 356 45.4 89.0 0.1566 0.0066 24000 72 59595 80800 70068 95000 1.5 64 38
71 4.33 71 1.20 19.6 3300 3600 4100 500 61.8 234 209 156 333 451 57.4 112.8 0.2302 0.0097 21000 69 72871 98800 89171 120900 1.3 110 50
90 5.49 90 1.20 19.6 3050 3300 3800 500 72.5 275 245 183 422 572 72.8 143.0 0.3536 0.0149 18000 64 116609 158100 79362 107600 1.5 145 60
125 7.63 125 1.73 28.3 2850 3250 3450 500 94.1 356 318 237 587 795 101.2 198.8 0.5505 0.0232 14000 55 161010 218300 185939 252100 2.1 176 80
180 10.98 180 2.43 39.8 2500 2900 3000 500 118.8 450 402 300 844 1144 145.6 286.0 1.0536 0.0444 11000 50 180334 244500 234840 318400 3.1 223 101
250 15.25 250 3.20 52.5 2400 2600 2700 500 158.4 600 536 400 1173 1590 202.2 398.0 2.3327 0.0983 6700 34 261466 354500 394079 534300 6.3 344 156
28 6.1
in3 0.37
3
rpm 4250 rpm 4500 rpm 5000 rpm 500 gpm 31.5 L/min 119 hp 106 kW 79 lb-ft 131 Nm 178 lb-ft 22.7 Nm 44.5 lbs-ft2 0.0522 kgm2 0.0022 rad/s2 38000 rpm 103 lb-ft/rad 23159 Nm/rad 31400 lb-ft/rad Nm/rad lb-ft/rad Nm/rad L 0.9
lbs 64 kg 29
) Limited maximum speed:
at half corner power (e.g. at Vg max and pN /2)
) Intermittent maximum speed: at high idling speed at engine overspeed: p = 1000...2200 psi (70...150 bar) and Vg max with reversing pressure peaks: p < 4350 psi (300 bar) and t < 5 sec. ) without auxiliary pump
Pumps and Motors
72
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A4VSO
Sizes 40 to 250, Series 1 and 3 Nominal pressure up to 350 bar (5100 PSI) Maximum pressure up to 400 bar (5800 PSI)
Swashplate design Innitely variable displacement Good self priming suction characteristics Continuous operating pressure of 350 bar (5100 PSI) Low noise level Excellent service life Drive shaft able to accept axial and radial loading Good power to weight ratio Compact modular design Short control times Over-center design (swallow circuits) Swivel angle indicator standard Installation positional optional
For the description and operation of the various controls, see relevant RA-sheets (see page 2).
Pumps and Motors
73
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Hydraulic fluid / version Mineral oil (no code) HF hydraulic uid (with the exception of Skydrol) High-speed version High-speed version for HF uids Version SAE Axial piston unit Swashplate design, variable, industrial design Charging pump Without charging pump (no code) Mode of operation Pump, open circuit Nominal size Displacement, Vg max Control and adjustment devices Constant pressure control Parallel pressure control Constant ow control (load sensing) Const. power control with hyperbolic oper. curve Manual control Electric motor control Hydraulic control, with rotary servo Hydraulic control, volume dependent Hydraulic control with servo/ proportional valve Electronic control Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent Hydraulic control, speed dependent Series Series 10 Series 30 Direction of rotation As viewed from drive shaft
40 l l
71 l l
125 l l
180 l l
250 l l l l
355 l l l l
500 l l l l
750 1000 l l E H K A A4VS
40 l
71 l
125 l
180 l
250 l
355 l
500 l
750 1000 l l
O 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 in3 2.44 4.33 7.63 10.98 15.26 21.66 30.51 45.77 61.02 (cm3) (40) (71) (125) (180) (250) (355) (500) (750) (1000) DR DP FR LR MA EM HW HM HS EO HD DS1 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l DR.. DP.. FR.. LR.. MA.. EM.. HW.. HM.. HS.. EO.. HD.. DS.. 10*) 30 R L P V l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l K S P Z see RA 92080 see RE 92055
see RA 92060 see RA 92064 see RA 92072 see RA 92068 see RA 92076
Seals NBR (Nitrile rubber to DIN ISO 1629) with shaft seal FPM FPM (Fluorocarbon rubber to DIN ISO 1629) Shaft end l l SAE parallel keyed shaft l l SAE splined shaft l l Metric keyed parallel shaft DIN 6885 l l Metric splined shaft DIN 5480
Pumps and Motors
74
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code A
Hydraulic fluid/version
A4VS
Version Axial piston unit Charging pump Mode of operation Nominal size Control options Series Direction of rotation Seals Shaft end Mounting flange 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 l l l l l l SAE 4-bolt D l l l l l l ISO 4-bolt B l l l ISO 8-bolt H Port Connections 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000 Connections B and S: SAE on side 90 l l l l l l 63 offset, UNC mounting bolts Connections B and S: SAE on side 90 offset, UNC mounting bolts l l l l l l 75 2nd pressure connection B1 opposite B when delivered blanked off with a ange Connections B and S: SAE on side 90 l l l l l l l l 13 offset, metric mounting bolts Connections B and S: SAE on side 90 offset, metric mounting bolts l l l l l l l l l 25 2nd pressure connection B1 opposite B when delivered blanked off with a ange Through drive l l l l l Without thru drive, without auxilliary pump l l l l N00 l l l l l With thru drive (For information, please K... refer to table on next page ) l l l l U... Filtration (only for control device HS- and DS-) Without ltration (no code) N Sandwich plate lter (with HS- and DS- controls, see RA 92076 and RE 92055) Z
Pumps and Motors
75
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Through-drive adapter kits to t U99 port plate for A4VSO
Through-drive Code U01 U52 U68 (K02) U04 U07 U24 U15 U16 U17 U78 U18
Mount-shaft Type SAE A, 2-bolt Mount SAE A, Spline 5/8 SAE A, 2-Bolt Mount SAE A-B Spline, 3/4 SAE B 2-Bolt Mount SAE B Spline, 7/8 SAE B 2-Bolt Mount SAE B-B Spline, 1 SAE C 2-Bolt Mount SAE C Spline, 1 1/4 SAE C 2-Bolt Mount SAE C-C Spline, 1 1/2 SAE C, 4-Bolt Mount SAE C Spline, 1 1/4 SAE C, 4-Bolt Mount SAE C-C Spline, 1 1/2 SAE D 4-Bolt Mount SAE D Spline, 1 3/4 SAE D 4-Bolt Mount SAE F Spline, 2 SAE E 4-bolt Mount SAE F Spline, 2
Through-Drive Kit Part Numbers 125 - 180 R902447030 R902447035 R902447040 R902447045 R902447050 R902447052 R902447054 R902447056 R902447062 R902447065 N/A 250 R902447032 R902447037 R902447042 R902447047 R902447051 R902447053 R902447055 R902447057 R902447063 R902447066 R902447067
U-type through drives are identical in mount and ange to K type. Kits consist of Adapter ange, Coupling, Mtg Bolts, O-Ring Seal.
Pumps and Motors
76
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering mh and v; values rounded)
Size Displacement Max. speed at pabs 14.5 psi (1 bar) at port S Max. perm. speed (speed limit) dependent on inlet pressure pabs or reduced displacement Vg < Vg max Max. ow at no max at nE = 1500 rpm Max. power at no max at nE = 1500 rpm Max. torque at Vg max p = 5100 psi (350 bar) Torque at Vg max p = 1450 psi (100 bar) Moment of inertia about drive axis Filling volume (case) Approx. weight (pump with press. control) Permissible loading of drive shaft max. axial force max. radial force m Fax max Fq max Vg max no max in /rev (cm3) rpm
3
40 2.44 (40) 2600
71 4.33 (71) 2200
125 7.63 (125) 1800
180 11.0 (180)
250/H* 15.26 (250/250)
355/H* 21.7 (355/355)
500/H* 30.51 (500/500)
750 45.8 (750)
1000 61.02 (1000) 1000
1800 1500/1900 1500/1700 1320/1500 1200
no max Qo max Q Po max P Tmax T J
perm.
rpm
3200
2700
2200
2100 1800/2100 1700/1900 1600/1800 1500
1000
gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) HP (kW) HP (kW) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft (Nm)
27.5 (104) 15.8 (60) 81 (61) 9.24 (35) 165 (223) 47 (64)
41.2 (156) 28.2 (107) 122 (91) 16.3 (62) 292 (395) 83 (113)
59.4 (225) 49.1 (186) 176 (131) 28.7 (109) 516 (696) 147 (199)
85.6 (324) 71.3 (270) 254 (189) 41.7 (158) 744 (1002) 211 (286)
99/125 (375/475) 99.0 (375) 294 (219/277) 57.8 (219) 1032 (1391) 294 (398) 2.276 (0.096) 2.6 (10) 406 (184) 405 (1800) 450 (2000)
140/159 (533/604) 140 (533) 419 (311/352) 82.1 (311) 1467 (1976) 417 (564) 4.509 (0.19) 2.1 (8) 456 (207) 450 (2000) 495 (2200)
174/198 (660/750) 153.41) (581)1) 518 (385/437) 89.51) (339)1) 2063 (2783) 586 (795) 7.890 (0.333) 3.7 (14) 705 (320) 450 (2000) 560 (2500)
237.9 264.1 (900) (1000) 203.41) (770)1) 708 (525) 118.61) (449)1) 781 (583)
3097 4104 (4174) (5565) 880 1172 (1193) (1590) 15.66 (0.66) 5.0 (19) 1014 (460) 28.47 (1.20) 7.13 (27) 1333 (605)
lb-ft2 0.116 0.287 0.712 1.305 (kgm2) (0.005) (0.012) (0.03) (0.055) gal (L) lbs (kg) lbf (N) 0.5 (2) 86 (39) 135 (600) 0.6 (2.5) 117 (53) 180 (800) 1.3 (5) 194 (88) 1.0 (4) 225 (102)
225 315 (1000) (1400)
495 495 (2200) (2200) 675 786 (3000) (3500)
lbf 225 270 360 450 (N) (1000) (1200) (1600) (2000)
1)
Vg < Vg max
Application of force
H* = High-Speed-Version
Fq Fax X/2 X X/2
Pumps and Motors
77
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Axial piston variable pump for HFC Fluids (Water-Glycol) Model AA4VSO
Sizes 125 to 355 Series 30 Nominal pressure up to 5100 PSI (350 bar) Peak pressure up to 5800 PSI (400 bar)
Variable displacement axial piston pump in swashplate design for open circuit hydrostatic drives Especially suitable for operation with HFC uids With the approved HFC uids the units can be operated with the same speeds and pressures as on mineral oil Innitely variable displacement Good suction characteristics Low noise level Long service life High power/weight ratio Drive shaft capable of absorbing axial and radial lloads Modular design Short control times Through drive and pump combinations possible Swivel angle indicator Optional mounting position
Model AA4VSO
Pumps and Motors
78
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating pressure range
Inlet Absolute pressure at port S pabs min ............................................................................ 14.5 PSI (1 bar) pabs max ...........................................................................435 PSI (30 bar) For further information see page 7 under item Filters. Outlet Pressuer at port B Nominal pressure pN ............................................5,100 PSI (350 bar) Peak pressure pmax ...............................................5,800 PSI (400 bar) (Pressure data to DIN 24312)
Case drain pressure

The permissible case drain pressure (housing pressure) depends on the drive speed (see diagram).
Case drain pressure PL abs in PSI (bar) (4) 58 180 Size 250 125
(3)
43.5
(2)
29
(1)
14.5 0 1000 2000 Speed n in rpm 3000 4000
Max. permissible case pressure (housing pressure) pL abs max .............................................................................58 PSI (4 bar) These are approximate values; under certain operating conditions a reduction in these values may be necessary. 125 7.63 (125) 1800 2200 59.4 (225) 49.1 (186) 176 (131) 146 (109) 516 (696) 147 (199) 0.712 (0,03) 1225 277,000 286,000 1 (4) 194 (88) 180 10.98 (180) 1800 2100 85.6 (324) 71.3 (270) 254 (189) 212 (158) 744 (1002) 211 (286) 1.305 (0,055) 1000 339,000 354,000 1.3 (5) 225 (102) 250 15.26 (250) 1800 1800 119 (450) 99.0 (375) 352 (262) 294 (219) 1032 (1391) 294 (398) 2.276 (0,0959) 775 542,000 558,000 2.6 (10) 406 (184)
Table of values 1)
Size Displacement in3/rev (cm3) Vg ma 2) Speed max. at Vg max rpm n0 max max. at Vg Vg max rpm n0 max zul Flow GPM (L/min) at n0 max qV0 max at nE=1500 min-1 GPM (L/min) qVE max Power p = 5100 PSI (p = 350 bar) HP (kW) at n0 max Po max at nE = 1500 rpm HP (kW) PE max Torque p = 5100 PSI lb-ft at Vg max Tmax (p = 350 bar) (Nm) lb-ft p = 1450 PSI T (Nm) (p = 100 bar) Moment of inertia (about drive axis) lb-ft2 (kgm2) J Angular acceleration, max. rad/s2 Torsional shaft K Nm/rad stiffness shaft S Nm/rad Case volume gal (L) Weight (with pressure control) lbs (kg) m
1) 2)
theoretical values, without considering mh and v, values rounded Values are valid with inlet pressure of 14.5 PSI (1 bar) absolute at port S. 79 Section 1
Pumps and Motors
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Axial piston unit Swashplate design, variable, SAE version Type of operation Pump, open circuit Size Displacement Vg max in in Control device Pressure control (see RA 92 060) Flow control (see RA 92 060) Power control with hyperbolic curve (see RA 92 064) Manual control (see RA 92 072) Electric motor control (see RA 92 072) Hydraulic control, volume dependent (see RA 92 076) Hydraulic control, with servo-proportional valve (see RA 92 076) Electronic control (see RA 92 076) Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent (see RA 92 080) Hydraulic control, operation in parallel with mutiple pumps (see RA 92 060) Electro-hydraulic control system (see RE 92 088) Series 30 Direction of rotation Viewed on shaft end Seals and fluid NBR nitrile rubber, shaft seal PTFE Teflon, special version for HFC-Fluids Shaft end Keyed parallel shaft SAE Splined shaft SAE Mounting flange SAE 4-hole Ports Pressure port B, inlet port S: SAE flange on side 90offset, UNC threads Pressure port B, inlet port S: SAE flange on side 90 offset, UNC threads, 2nd pressure port B1 opposite B (closed with blanking flange on delivery) 63 75 D K S F clockwise counter-clockwise R L
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
3
AA4VS
O 125 7.63 180 250 355 10.98 15.26 21.66
DR FR LR MA EM HM HS EO HD DP DFE1
Pumps and Motors
80
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

AA4VS
Axial piston unit
/ 30
Type of operation Size Control device Series Direction of rotation Seals and fluid Shaft end Mounting flange Ports Through drive Without through drive With universal through drive Flange SAE J744 Hub for splined shaft 82-2 (A) 82-2 (A) 101-2 (B) 101-2 (B) 127-2 (C) 127-2 (C) 127-4 (C) 127-4 (C) 152-4 (D) 152-4 (D) 165-4 (E) 5/8 in (A) 3/4 in (A-B) 7/8 in (B) 1 in (B-B) 1 1/4 in (C) 1 1/2 in (C-C) 1 1/4 in (C) 1 1/2 in (C-C) 1 3/4 in (D) 2 in (F) 2 in (F) Sealing axial axial axial axial axial axial axial axial axial axial axial
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
125
l
180
l
250
l
355
l
N00
U01 U52 U68 U04 U07 U24 U15 U16 U17 U78 U18 U99
with through drive, without coupling, without adapter flange, with cover plate for operation
Pumps and Motors
81
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for closed circuit axial piston, swashplate design Model A4VSG
Sizes 40 to 1000 Series 1 and 2 Nominal pressure up to 5100 PSI (350 bar) Peak pressure up to 5800 PSI (400 bar)
Swashplate design Innitely variable displacement Reversible ow Numerous control options Nominal pressure 5100 psi (350 bar) Low noise level Long service life Drive shaft capable of absorbing axial and radial loads Low power / weight ratio Modular design Short control times Tandem pumps possible, full thru drive Swivel angle indicator standard Installation position optional Operation on HF uids permitted at derated parameters
Model A4VSG
Pumps and Motors
82
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering hmh and hv; values rounded)
Size Displacement Max. speed Max. ow Vg max nmax Q max Q Q P max P P Tmax T J in /rev (cm3/rev) rpm gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) HP (kW) HP (kW) HP (kW) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft2 (kgm2) gal (L) lbs (kg) lbf (N) lbf (N)
3
at nmax at n E = 1200 rpm at n E 1800 rpm
Max. power at nmax p = 5100 PSI (350 bar) at n E = 1200 rpm at n E 1800 rpm Max. torque at Vg max p = 5100 PSI (350 bar) Torque at Vg max p = 1450 PSI (100 bar) Moment of inertia about drive axis Filling volume (case) Approx. weight (pump with press. control) Permissible max. axial force loading of drive Fax max shaft max. radial force Fq max
40 2.44 (40) 3700 39.1 (148) 12.7 (48) 19.0 (72) 116 (86) 37.8 (28) 56.5 (42) 165 (223) 32 (64) 0.116 (0.005) 0.5 (2) 104 (47) 135 (600) 225 (1000)
71 4.33 (71) 3200 60.0 (227) 22.5 (85) 33.7 (128) 178 (132) 66.9 (50) 100.3 (75) 293 (395) 57 (113) 0.287 (0.012) 0.6 (2.5) 132 (60) 180 (800) 270 (1200)
125 7.63 (125) 2600 85.9 (325) 39.6 (150) 59.4 (2259) 255 (190) 117.8 (88) 176.7 (131) 516 (696) 101 (199) 0.712 (0.03) 1.3 (5) 220 (100) 225 (1000) 360 (1600)
180 11.0 (180) 2400 114.1 (432) 57.0 (216) 85.6 (324) 339 (252) 169.6 (126) 254.7 (189) 743 (1002) 146 (286) 1.305 (0.055) 1.0 (4) 251 (114) 315 (1400) 450 (2000)
250 15.26 (250) 2200 145.3 (550) 79.3 (300) 118.9 (450) 432 (321) 236.0 (175) 353.8 (263) 1032 (1391) 202 (398) 2.276 (0.096) 2.6 (10) 472 (214) 405 (1800) 450 (2000)
355 21.7 (355) 2000 187.5 (710) 112.5 (426) 168.8 (639) 558 (414) 334.7 (248) 502.3 (373) 1465 (1976) 287 (564) 4.509 (0.19) 2.1 (8) 523 (237) 450 (2000) 495 (2200)
500 30.51 (500) 1800 237.7 (900) 158.5 (600) 237.7 (900) 707 (525) 471.6 (350) 707 (525) 2064 (2783) 405 (795) 7.890 (0.333) 3.7 (14) 772 (350) 450 (2000) 562 (2500)
750 45.8 (750) 1600 317.0 (1200) 237.8 (900) 943 (700) 707.6 (525) 3096 (4174) 607 (1193) 15.66 (0.66) 5.0 (19) 1102 (500) 495 (2200) 674 (3000)
1000 61.02 (1000) 1600 422.6 (1600) 317.0 (1200) 1257 (933) 943.2 (700) 4127 (5565) 809 (1590) 28.47 (1.20) 7.13 (27) 1389 (630) 495 (2200) 787 (3500)
Installation notes
Optional installation position. The pump housing must be lled with uid during commissioning and stay full when operating. In order to obtain the lowest noise level, all connections (suction, pressure, case drain ports) must be linked by exible couplings to tank. Avoid placing a check valve in the case drain line. This may be permissible in individual cases, but only after consultation with us.
Calculation of size
Flow Drive torque Power Q= T= P= Vg n v gpm 231 Vg p lb-ft 24 mh Q p HP 1714 t
( ( (
Q= T= P=
1000 Vg p 24 mh Q p 600 t
L/min Nm kW
) ) )
83
Vg n p Q T P v mh t
= Geometric displacement per rev. in3 (cm3) = Speed rpm (rpm) = Pressure differential PSI (bar) = Flow gpm (L/min) = Torque lb-ft (Nm) = Power HP (kW) = Volumetric efciency = Mechanical-hydraulic efciency = Total efciency (t = v mh)
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Fluid Petroleum oils (no code) HF-Fluids (except Skydrol) Version SAE version Metric version (no code) Axial piston unit Variable pump, swashplate design, industrial applications Mode of operation Pump, closed circuit Sizes 40 71 125 Displacement in3/rev. 2.44 4.33 7.63 cm3/rev. 40 71 125 Control and adjustment devices 40 71 125 MA Manual control l l l Hydraulic control, volume dependent HM l l l Hydraulic control, with servo valve HS l l l Hydraulic control, with proportional valve EO l l l Hydraulic control, pilot pressure dependent HD1) l l l Constant pressure control DR1) l l l Parallel pressure control DP1) l l l Const. power control w/ hyperb. operating curve LR1) l l l Hydraulic control, with rotary servo HW l l l Hydraulic control, speed dependent DS l l l Series l l l Direction of rotation As viewed from shaft drive
E A
A4VS G 180 10.98 180 180 l l l l l l l l l l l 250 15.26 250 250 l l l l l l l l l l l 355 21.66 355 355 l l l l l l l l l l l 500 30.51 500 500 l l l l l l l l l l l 750 45.77 750 750 l l l l l l l l 1000 61.02 1000 1000 l l
MA HM.. HS.. EO.. HD.. DR.. DP.. LR..N HW DS.. 10 1) 30 R L W P V
see RE 92072 see RE 92076 see RE 92076 see RE 92076 see RE 92080 see RE 92060 see RE 92060 see RE 92064 see RA 92068 see RA 92055
clockwise counter-clockwise bi-directional 1)
Seals Buna N/ Shaft seal: FPM (Fluorocarbon) FPM (Fluorocarbon) Shaft end 40 71 125 180 Parallel keyed shaft SAE l l l l Splined shaft SAE l l l l Metric keyed shaft per DIN 6885 l l l l Metric splined shaft per DIN 5480 l l l l Mounting flange 40 71 125 180 SAE 4-bolt l l l l ISO 4-bolt l l l l ISO 8-bolt Port connections Port A,B: SAE on the side, same side, UNC mounting threads Port A,B: SAE on the side, same side, metric mounting threads
250 l l l l 250 l l
355 l l 355 l
500 l l 500
750 1000 l l l l 750 1000
K S P Z D B H 60 10
Pumps and Motors
84
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fluids Version Axial piston unit Mode of operation Sizes Control and adjustment devices Series Direction of rotation Seals Shaft end Mounting flange Port connections Through drive Without auxilliary pump, withouth through drive
A4VS G
40
71
125 180
250
355
500
750 1000
N00 K...
With through drive (For information, please refer to table on next page) Auxiliary pump mounted and with boost circuit filter piped 1 Auxiliary pump for boost oil circuit 1 Auxiliary pump for a combined boost oil and pilot oil circuit (EO1 only) n < 2800 rpm n > 2800 rpm n < 2800 rpm n > 2800 rpm
l l l l
H02 H03 H04 H05
Auxiliary pumps mounted see RA 90139 (in preparation) Valves Without valve block With SDVB valve block built on Filtration Without filter Filter installed in the boost circuit Sandwich filter with HS and DS controls (see RE/RA 92076 and RA 92055) Filter mounted in the boost circuit and sandwich filter with HS and DS controls
*) 1)
0 9 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
l l l l
l l l l
l l l l
l l l l
l l l l
l l l l
l l l 2) l 2)
N F Z U
HD control is series 11. Depending on control type, alternating direction of rotation may not be possible, please note separate RA sheets on controls. 2) For sizes 500 (only available for DS control), HS/HS1 see RA 92076
Pumps and Motors
85
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Through drive ordering codes Without auxiliary pump, without through drive With through drive for mounting of axial piston unit, gear or radial piston pump Flange Hub/shaft to accept ISO 125, 4-bolt ISO 125, 4-bolt ISO 140, 4-bolt ISO 160, 4-bolt ISO 160, 4-bolt ISO 224, 4-bolt ISO 224, 4-bolt ISO 315, 8-bolt ISO 400, 8-bolt 127-4 (SAE C, 4-bolt) 127-4 (SAE C, 4-bolt) 152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt) 152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt) 165-4 (SAE E, 4-bolt) 82-2 (SAE A, 2-bolt) 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) 127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt) 127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt) 152-4 (SAE D, 4-bolt) 82-2 (SAE A, 2-bolt) 82-2 (SAE A, 2-bolt) 101-2 (SAE B) 101-2 (SAE B) 101-2 (SAE B) 127-2 (SAE C) 127-2 (SAE C) 152-4 (SAE D) 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) 101-2 (SAE B, 2-bolt) 127-2 (SAE C, 2-bolt) Splined shaft 32x2x30x14x9g splined 32x2x14x9g splined 40x2x18x9g splined 50x2x24x9g splined 50x2x24x9g splined 60x2x28x9g splined 70x3x22x9g splined 80x2x38x9g splined 90x3x28x9g splined 32-4 (SAE C) splined 38-4 (SAE C-C) splined 44-4 (SAE D) splined 50-4 (SAE F) splined 50-4 (SAE F) keyed 19-1 (SAE A-B) keyed 22-1 (SAE B) * keyed 25-1 (SAE B-B) * keyed 32-1 (SAE C) * keyed 38-1 (SAE C-C) * keyed 44-1 (SAE D) * splined 5/8" 16-4 (SAE A) splined 3/4" 19-4 (SAE A-B) 22-4 (SAE B) splined 25-4 (SAE B-B) splined 32-4 (SAE C) splined 32-4 (SAE C) splined 38-4 (SAE C-C) splined 44-4 (SAE D) A4VSO/H/G 40 A4VSO/H/G 40 A4VSO/H/G 71 A4VSO/H/G 125 A4VSO/G 180 A4VSO/H/G 250 A4VSO/G 355 A4VSO/G 500 A4VSO/G 750 AA4VSO/G 40 AA4VSO/G 71 AA4VSO/G 125 AA4VSO/G 180 AA4VSO/G 250 AA10VSO 18 AA10VSO 28 AA10VSO 45 AA10VSO 71 AA10VSO 100 AA10VSO 140 G2 / GC2/GC3-1X A10VSO 18 G3, G4, A10VSO 28 GC4-1X, A10VO 45 GC5-1X A10VO 71 GC6-1X, A10VO 100 A10VO 140 R4 A10VO 45...R 40 71 125 180 250 355 500 750 1000
N00
l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
l
l
l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l
l l l
63 (mm) metric, 4-bolt, keyed 25 (mm) splined 1" R-shaft (SAE BB)
splined 7/8" R-shaft (SAE B med.) A10VO 28...R, PVV 1 & 2 splined 1-1/4", R-shaft (SAE C) A10VO 71...R, PVV 4 & 5
with through drive shaft, without coupler, without intermediate flange, with cover
K31 K31 K33 K34 K34 K35 K77 K43 K76 K15 K16 K17 K78 K18 K40 K03 K05 K08 K38 K21 K01 K52 K68 K04 K06 K07 K24 K17 K57 KA3 KA4 KA5 K99
Through drive / Combination pumps 1. If a second Brueninghaus Hydromatik pump is to be mounted at the factory, the two ordering codes have to be connected with a "+". Ordering code of the rst pump + ordering code of the second pump SAE Example: AA4VSG 125 EO1/22R PSD60K16ON + AA4VSG 71 HM1/10R PSD60N000N Metric Example: A4VSG 125 EO1/22R PPB10K339F + A4VSG 71 HM1/10R PZB10N000N 2. Please check with the factory if a gear pump or radial piston pump is to be mounted at the factory. * Not for new projects. Permitted with reduced through drive torque only.
Pumps and Motors
86
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Axial piston-compact unit Model AA4CSG (A4CSG)

Sizes 250 to 750 Series 3 Nominal pressure up to 5100 PSI (350 bar) Peak pressure up to 5800 PSI (400 bar)
Axialpiston pump-variable displacement, swashplate design for hydrostatic drives in closed circuits. The ow is proportional to input speed and displacement. It can be innitely varied by adjustment of the swashplate. The necessary boostpump and all required controlvalves are integrated. One common auxiliary pump for boost and EP-control pressure Compact design (extremely short in length) Favorable power to weight ratio Low noise level Long service life High efciency New electro-hydr. control EP with proportional solenoid and zero displacement position at power loss (fail safe function) Throughdrive for multiple pumpcombinations also possible with integrated boost pump Full through drive capability, tandems of same size possible For further information on control- and regulating devices see separate data sheets RA 92 076 and RA 92 080
Model AA4CSG
Pumps and Motors
87
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Version SAE version Metric version (no code) Axial piston unit
250 l
355 l
500 l
750 l
Compact unit, swashplate design, variable displacement Nominal pressure 5100 psi (350 bar), peak pressure 5800 psi (400 bar) Type of operation Pump, closed circuit operation Size Displacement Vg max Control and adjustment devices Hydr. adjustment, control volume dependent Hydr. adjustment with servo-/ proportional valve Electronic control Hydr. control, pilot pressure dependent Electro-hydraulic control with proportional solenoid Series 250 355 500 750 in3 15.26 21.66 30.51 45.77 (cm3) (250) (355) (500) (750) HM HS EO HD EP l l l l l l
A4CS
HM.. HS.. EO.. HD.. EP.. 30
see RA 92076
see RA 92080 see RA 92084
Direction of rotation viewing at shaft end Seals FKM (Fluorcarbon rubber) Shaft end SAE parallel keyed shaft SAE splined shaft SAE splined shaft with run out spline Metric keyed parallel shaft DIN 6885 Metric splined shaft DIN 5480 Mounting flange 4-hole to SAE J744 (ISO 3019-1) 8-hole to ISO 3019-2 Port connections Ports A,B: SAE flanged opposite sides Port S: SAE flanged on side 90o offset Ports A,B: SAE flanged opposite sides Port S: SAE flanged on side 90o offset Boost pump with integrated boost pump without integrated boost pump threaded } UNC bolt holes threaded } metric bolt holes 250 l l l l 250 l
R L V
355 l l l l 355 l
500 l l l
750 l l l
K S R P Z D H
l 500 l l
l 750 l
85 35
F K
l Pumps and Motors
= available 88
= in preparation
= not available Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 92 105/05.04

A4CS G
Version Axial piston unit Type of operation Size Control and adjustment device Series Direction of rotation Seals Shaft end Mounting flange Port connections Boost pump
/ 30
Through drive prepared for through drive, no coupling, no adapter flange, closed with cover with through drive for mounting of second pump (for further options see page 18) Flange SAE J744 shaft coupling splined SAE J744 to mount 32-4 11/4 in 14T (C) AA4VSO/G 40 127-41) (C) 38-4 11/2 in 17T (C-C.) AA4VSO/G 71 127-41) (C) 44-4 13/4 in 13T (D) AA4VSO/G 125 152-41) (D) 152-41) (D) 50-4 2 in 15T (F) AA4VSO/G 180 50-4 2 in 15T (F) AA4CSG, AA4VSO/G 250 165-41) (E) 50-4 2 in 15T (F) AA4CSG, AA4VSO/G 355 165-41) (E) Flange ISO 3019-2 (metr.) shaft coupling splined DIN 5480 to mount 315, 8-hole W 0x3x30x25x9g A4CSG, A4VSO/G 500 400, 8-hole W 0x3x30x28x9g A4CSG, A4VSO/G 750 Flange SAE J 744 shaft coupling splined SAE J744 to mount 16-4 5/8 in 9T (A) AZPF, PGF2 82-21) (A) 19-4 3/4 in 11T (A-B) A10VSO 10, 18 82-21) (A) 22-4 7/8 in 13T (B) (A)A10V(S)O 28, PGF3, AZPN/G 101-21) (B) 25-4 1 in 15T (B-B) (A)A10V(S)O 45, PGH4 101-21) (B) 32-4 11/4 in 14T (C) (A)A10V(S)O 71 127-21) (C) 38-4 11/2 in 17T (C-C) (A)A10V(S)O 100, PGH5 127-21) (C) 44-4 13/4 in 13T (D) (A)A10V(S)O 140 152-41) (D) 1) 2 = 2-bolt; 4 = 4-bolt to SAE J744 Valves Integrated: boost-, control pressure relief- and flushing valve; direct operated mainline relief valves 2) Integrated: boost-, control pressure relief- and flushing valve; pilot operated mainline relief valves 2)
2)
250 355 500 750 l l l l 99
l l l l l l l
15 16 17 78 18 18 43 76 01 52 68 04 07 24 17
l l l l
l l l l
3 4
crossover relief valves

N D M Z U
Filtration without filter with threaded connection for filter in boost circuit with built on filter (optical-electr. dirt indicator) in boost circuit with threaded connection f. filter in boost circuit (D) a. sandwichplate filter for HS-control (see RA 92076) with built on filter in boost circuit (M) and sandwichplate filter for HS-control (see RA 92076)
Pumps and Motors
89
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Table of values (theoretical values, without considering hmh und hv; values rounded)
Size Displacement Variable pump integr. boost pump Drive speed Max. ow (variable pump) max. speed min. speed at nmax at nE = 1200 rpm at nE = 1800 rpm Max. power (variable pump, p = 5100 psi [350 bar] without boost pump) at nmax at nE = 1200 rpm at nE = 1800 rpm Max. torque at Vg max (variable pump without boost pump) Moment of inertia about drive axis Torsional stiffness Shaft end K / P Shaft end S / R / Z Case volume Weight approx.. (Pump with EP-control and integrated boost pump) m p = 5100 psi (350 bar) p = 1450 psi (100 bar) Vg max Vg H nmax nmin qv max qv 1200 qv 1800 Pmax P1200 P1800 Tmax T J in3 (cm3) in3 (cm3) rpm rpm gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) HP (kW) HP (kW) HP (kW) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft2 (kgm2) lb-ft/rad (kNm/rad) lb-ft/rad (kNm/rad) gal (L) lbs (kg) 250 15.26 (250) 3.84 (63) 2200 800 145.3 (550) 79.3 (300) 118.9 (450) 432 (321) 236 (175) 353.8 (263) 1032 (1391) 295 (398) 2.276 (0.96) 326491 (443) 271216 (368) 2.64 (10) 472 (214) Vg p n v mh t = = = = = = 355 21.7 (355) 4.88 (80) 2000 800 187.6 (710) 112.5 (426) 168.8 (639) 558 (414) 334.7 (248) 502.3 (373) 1465 (1976) 416 (564) 4.509 (0.19) 599918 (814) 350075 (475) 2.11 (8) 523 (237) 500 30.51 (500) 5.98 (98) 1800 800 237.8 (900) 158.5 (600) 237.7 (900) 707 (525) 471.6 (350) 707 (525) 2064 (2783) 586 (795) 7.890 (0.333) 843865 (1145) 891033 (1209) 3.70 (14) 772 (350) 750 45.8 (750) 8.72 (143) 1600 800 317.0 (1200) 237.8 (900) 943 (700) 707.6 (525) 3096 (4174) 879 (1193) 15.66 (0.66) 1370820 (1860) 1335444 (1812) 5.02 (19) 1102 (500)
Determination of size
Flow Drive torque Power qV = T= P= Vg n v gpm 231 Vg p lb-ft 24 mh qV p HP 1714 t
( ( (
qV = T= P=
Vg n v 1000 1.59 Vg p 100 mh 2 T n qV p = 60,000 600 t
L/min Nm kW
) ) )
geometr. displacement per revolution in in3 (cm3) Pressure differential in PSI (bar) Drive speed in rpm (min-1) Volumetric efficiency Mechanical-hydraulic efficiency Overall efficiency (t = v mh) Application of forces
Permissible forces on drive shaft

Size Permissible radial force Permissible axial force Fq max Fax max lbf (N) lbf (N) 250 450 (2000) 405 (1800) 90 355 495 (2200) 450 (2000) 500 562 (2500) 450 (2000) 750 674 (3000) 495 (2200)
Fax
Fq
X/2 X/2 X
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model AA11VO
Variable displacement axial piston pump of swashplate design for hydrostatic drives in open circuit hydraulic system Designed primarily for use in mobile applications The pump operates under self-priming conditions, with tank pressurization, or with an optional built-in charge pump (impeller) A comprehensive range of control options is available matching any application requirement Power control option is externally adjustable, even when the pump is running The through drive is suitable for adding gear pumps and axial piston pumps up to the same, i.e. 100% through drive The output ow is proportional to the drive speed and innitely variable between maximum and zero
Pumps and Motors
91
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Ordering code
Axial piston unit Swashplate design, variable displacement, SAE version Charge pump (impeller) without charge pump (no code) with charge pump Operation Pump, open circuit Size Displacement Vg max Control device Power control with override cm3/rev. in3/rev.
AA11V 40 60 75 95 130 145 190 260
L O
40 60 75 95 130 145 190 260 42 58.5 74 93.5 130 145 193 260
2.56 3.57 4.52 5.71 7.93 8.84 11.7815.87
cross-sensing high pressure related pilot pressure related electrical 12V 24V
negative negative negative positive negative negative
LR LR LR3 LG1 LG2 LE1 LE2
with pressure cut-off hydraulic 2-stage hydraulic remote controlled with load sensing electr. prop. override, 24V neg. hydr. prop. override, negative with stroke limiter negative p = 365 psi (25 bar) characteristic p = 145 psi (10 bar) positive p = 365 psi (25 bar) characteristic p = 145 psi (10 bar) positive characteristic U = 12 V U = 24 V DR Pressure control with load sensing DRS remote controlled DRG for parallel operation DRL Hydraulic control p = 145 psi (10 bar) HD1 pilot pressure related (pos. charac.) p = 365 psi (25 bar) HD2 with pressure cut-off with pressure cut-off, remote controlled Electrical control U = 12 V EP1 with proportional solenoid (pos. characteristic) U = 24 V EP2 with pressure cut-off with pressure cut-off, remote controlled
D E G S S2 S5 H1 H5 H2 H6 U1 U2
D G
D G
40
60
75
95
130 145 190 260 LR LR . C LR3 LG1 LG2 LE1 LE2 L . D.. L.E.. L..G. L...S L...S2 L . . . S5 L . . . H1 L . . . H5 L . . . H2 L . . . H6 L . . . U1 L . . . U2 DR DRS DRG DRL HD1 HD2 HD. D HD. G EP1 EP2 EP. D EP. G
In case of controls with several additional functions, observe the order of the columns, only one option per column is possible (e.g. LRDCH2). The following combinations are not available for the power control: LRDS2, LRDS5, L...GS, L...GS2, L...GS5, L...EC and the combination L...DG in connection with the stroke limiters H1, H2, H5, H6, U1 and U2. = available = available on request = not available
Pumps and Motors
92
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Axial piston unit Charge pump Operation Size Control device Series
AA11V
/ 1
62
6)
1 Index size 40...130 size 145...260 Direction of rotation viewed on shaft end clockwise counter-clockwise 0 1 R L N 75 95 1) 130 145 190 260 1) 1) S T P C D G 62
Seals NBR (Buna-N), shaft seal in FKM (uorocarbon) Shaft end (perm. input torques see page 7) 40 60 Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a1976 for single pump for combination pump Cylindrical shaft with key DIN 6885 Mounting ange SAE J744 2-hole SAE J744 4-hole SAE J617 2) (SAE 3) Service line ports Pressure and suction port on opposite sides (SAE), with UNC fastening threads
40 60 75 95 130 145 190 260 40 60 75 95 130 145 190 260
Through drive (see page 56 for attachments) Flange SAE J744 3) Splined shaft coupler 82-2 (A) 5/8in 9T 16/32DP (A) 3/4in 11T 16/32DP (A-B) 101-2 (B) 7/8in 13T 16/32DP (B) 1in 15T 16/32DP (B-B) 127-2 (C) 4) 1 1/4in 14T 12/24DP (C) 1 1/2in 17T 12/24DP (C-C) 152-4 (D) 1 1/4in 14T 12/24DP (C) 1 3/4in 13T 8/16DP (D) 165-4 (E) 1 3/4in 13T 8/16DP (D) Swivel angle indicator (page 57) without (no code) with optical swivel angle indicator with electrical swivel angle sensor Male connectors for solenoids 5) (page 58) DEUTSCH DT04-2P-EP04 (2-pole), molded to the solenoid coil Hirschmann according to DIN EN 175 301-803-A (not for new projects)
1 2
40
60
75
95 95
130 145 190 260 130 145 190 260
N00 K01 K52 K02 K04 K07 K24 K86 K17 K72
40 60 75
V R P H
40 60 75 95 130 145 190 260
4 ) S-shaft suitable for combination pump! ) Size 190 and 260 with 2 + 4-hole ange 5 ) To t the ywheel housing of the combustion engine ) Male connector without bidirectional surpressor diode 3 ) 2 2-hole; 4 4-hole 6 ) no code = standard version, S = special version, K = combination with mounting part or mounting pump
Pumps and Motors
93
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data Value table

(theoretical values, without efciencies and tolerances; values rounded)
Size AA11VO AA11VLO (with charge pump) Displacement Vg max In /rev. cm /rev. Vg min In3/rev. Speed maximum at Vg max 1) maximum at Vg Vg max 3) Flow 4) at nmax and Vg max Power at qV max and p = 5100 psi (350 bar) Torque at Vg max and p = 5100 psi (350 bar) Mass moment of inertia around drive axis Rotational vibration ) Angular acceleration, max. Speed variation, max. Frequency limit Rotary stiffness
4 3 3
40
60
75
95
130
145
190
260 130 145 8.84 145 0 190 11.78 193 0 260 15.87 260 0
2.56 42 0 3000 3500 33.3 126 99.2 74
3.57 58.5 0 2700 3250 41.7 158
4.52 74 0 2550 3000 49.9 189
5.71 93.5 0 2350 2780 58.1 220
7.93 130 0 2100 2500 72.1 273
8.84 145 0 2200 2500 84.3 319
11.78 15.87 193 0 2100 2500 107 405 260 0 1800 2300 123.6 468
7.93 130 0
nmax
rpm
2500 2) 2500 2) 2500 2) 23002) 2500 85.9 325 254.8 190 596 724 2500 95.9 363 283 211 2500 127.6 483 376.8 281 2300 158 598 468 349
nmax1 rpm qV max Pmax lb-ft Tmax J gpm L/min hp kW 172.6 Nm lbs-ft2 kgm2 rad/s2 rpm Hz lb-ft/rad
123.4 147.5 171.7 213.2 249.4 316.5 366.1 92 110 128 534 521 159 596 724 186 236 273 534 1448
240.4 303.9 384.3 234 326 412
792.9 1068 808 1075
792.9 1068 808 1075 1448 2.1238 0.0895 4800 28 518
0.1139 0.1946 0.2729 0.4105 0.7546 0.8092 1.3052 2.0835 0.0048 0.0082 0.0115 0.0173 0.0318 0.0341 0.055 0.0878 22000 17500 15000 13000 10500 85 788 73 731 68 675 63 626 57 563 9000 49 563 6800 37 563 4800 28 518
0.7997 0.8543 1.3692 0.0337 10500 57 563 0.036 0.0577 9000 49 563 6800 37 563
n flimit
Shaft end S
43035 63658 75173 128117 174700 174700 191599 259628
174700 174700 191599 259628 236861 236861 259773 352009 222691 418282 301928 567115
Nm/rad 58347 86308 101921 173704 236861 236861 259773 352009 Shaft end T lb-ft/rad 54931 75556 92640 222691 418282 301928 567115
Nm/rad 74476 102440 125603 Shaft end P lb-ft/rad
64512 79574 105548 14883 230417 230417 282702 482244
230417 230417 282702 482244 312403 312403 383292 653835 0.77 2.9 159 72 0.77 2.9 161 73 1.0 3.8 229 104 1.22 4.6 304 138
Nm/rad 87467 107888 143104 196435 312403 312403 383292 653835 Filling volume gal L Weight (approx.) m lbs kg 0.29 1.1 71 32 0.36 1.35 88 40 0.49 1.85 99 45 0.55 2.1 117 53 0.77 2.9 145 66 0.77 2.9 168 76 1.0 3.8 209 95 1.22 4.6 276 125
) The values apply at absolute pressure (pabs) 14.5 psi (1 bar) at the suction port S and mineral hydraulic uid. ) The values apply at absolute pressure (pabs) of at least 12 psi (0.8 bar) at the suction port S and mineral hydraulic uid. 3 ) The values apply at Vg Vg max or in case of an increase in the inlet pressure pabs at the suction port S (see diagram page 5) 4 ) The permissible angular acceleration or speed variation only applies for single pumps, not for combi pumps. The load on connection parts (e.g. through drive) must be taken into account additionally. At f < flimit the n specied in the table is permissible. At f > flimit the permissible angular acceleration specied in the table limits the value of the speed variation: nperm = 3.04 /f.
2
Pumps and Motors
94
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A10V(S)O
Axial piston pump A10VO, variable, in swashplate design for hydrostatic transmissions in open loop circuit Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement. By adjusting the swashplate angle it is possible to innitely vary the ow Mounting ange acc. to SAE J744 Flanged ports acc. to SAE J518 2 case drain ports Good suction characteristics Permissible working pressure 4000 psi (280 bar) Low noise level Long service life Axial and radial loading of drive shaft possible High power-weight ratio Wide range of controls Short response times Through drive option for multi-circuit system
Pumps and Motors
95
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RA 92 701/05.04 Ordering code
Version High-Speed-Version Axial piston unit Swashplate design variable
18, 28 18
45...140 28...140 -
Version H Axial piston unit Mode of operation A10V A10VS Size Control devices
Mode of operation Pump open circuit Size Displacement Vg max 18 1.10 18 18 28 1.71 28 28 45 2.75 45 45
O 71 4.33 71 71 100 6.10 100 100 140 8.54 140 140
Series Dir of rotation Seals Shaft
in3/rev cm3/rev
Control devices Two point, direct control Pressure control remote control Pressure and ow control
DG DR DR DFR DFR
DG DR DRG DFR DFR1 DFLR ED EF
orice in X-channel closed Pressure, ow and torque control d Electro-hydr. pressure control, see RA 92707 Pressure and ow control with electrically adjustable differential pressure see RE 92709 (in preparation) Series
31 Direction of rotation Viewed on drive shaft
clockwise counter clockwise
R L
Seals NBR nitril-caoutchouc, shaft seal FKM FKM uoro-caoutchouc Shaft end acc. to SAE J744 Splined, reduced dia. (not for through drive) [in] Splined, regular dia. (with undercut) [in] Splined (with runout, higher input torque) [in] Splined (with runout, reduced dia.) [in] Parallel with key Trapered with woodruff key = available Pumps and Motors = in preparation 18 5/8 3/4 28 7/8 7/8 45 7/8 1 1 7/8 71 100 140 1 1/4 1 1/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 1 1/4 1 1/4 = preferred program 96
P V
U S R W K C
= not available
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
A10V(S) O
Version Axial piston unit Mode of operation Size Control devices Series Direction of rotation Seals Shaft Mounting ange acc. to SAE J744 2-hole 4-hole Port for service lines Pressure port B Suction port S Pressure port B Suction port S Pressure port B Suction port S Pressure port B Suction port S 18 18 SAE ange rear, xing thread UNC SAE ange on opposite side xing thread UNC SAE ange rear, xing thread UNC SAE ange on opposite side xing thread UNC 28 28 45 45 71 71 -
/ 31
100 100
140 140
C D
91 92 61 62
Port plate 91 and 61 without through drive only
Through drive Without through drive With through drive (port plate 62 org2) Mounting ange1) Shaft/coupling2) 82-2 (A) 16-4 (A) 82-2 (A) 19-4 (A-B) 101-2 (B) 22-4 (B) 101-2 (B) 25-4 (B-B) 127-2 (C) 32-4 (C) 127-2 (C) 38-4 (C-C) 152-4 (D) 44-4 (D)
1 2
18 Sealing axial axial axial axial axial axial axial
28
45
71
100
140
N00
K01 K52 K68 K04 K07 K24 K17
) Flange acc. to SAE J744 ) Coupling for splined shaft acc. to SAE J744 OCT83 For mounting options on through drive see page 29.
Pumps and Motors
97
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Size Displacement Speed 1), max. at Vg max at Vg < Vg max Flow, max. at no max 18 High-Speed-Version in3 1.10 Vg max (cm3) (18) no max no max perm. qvo max rpm 3300 rpm 3900 28 1.71 (28) 3000 3600 45 2.75 (45) 2600 3100 71 4.33 (71) 2200 2600 100 6.10 (100) 2000 2400 140 8.54 (140) 1800 2100 45 2.75 (45) 3000 3300 71 4.33 (71) 2550 2800 100 6.10 (100) 2300 2500 140 8.54 (140) 2050 2200
gpm 15.6 22.2 30.9 41.2 52.8 66.6 35.7 47.8 60.7 75.8 (L/min) (59.4) (84) (117) (156) (200) (252) (135) (181) (230) (287) at nE = 1800 rpm qvE gpm 8.5 13.2 21.4 33.8 47.5 66.6 21.4 33.8 47.5 66.6 (L/min) (32.4) (50) (81) (128) (180) (252) (81) (128) (180) (252) Power (p = 4000 psi (280 bar) & Vg max) HP 37 52 74 98 125 157 84 113 143 180 at no max Po max (kW) (27.7) (39) (55) (73) (93) (117) (63) (84) (107) (134) at nE = 1800 rpm PE max HP 20 31 51 80 113 158 51 80 113 158 (kW) (15) (23) (38) (60) (84) (118) (38) (60) (84) (118) Torque at Vg max lb-ft 58.9 91 146 230 324 453 146 230 324 453 p = 4000 psi Tmax (280 bar) (Nm) (80.1) (125) (200) (316) (445) (623) (200) (316) (445) (623) p = 1450 psi lb-ft 21 33 53 83 117 164 53 83 117 164 T (100 bar) (Nm) (28.6) (45) (72) (113) (159) (223) (72) (113) (159) (223) Moment of inertia lb-ft2 0.022 0.040 0.078 0.197 0.396 0.574 0.078 0.197 0.396 0.574 J about drive axis (kgm2) (0.00093) (0.0017) (0.0033) (0.0083) (0.0167) (0.0242) (0.0033) (0.0083) (0.0167) (0.0242) Max. angular acceleration rad/s 6800 5500 4000 2900 2400 2000 4000 2900 2400 2000 Torsional stiffness - shaft "S" lb-ft/rad 8149 16403 27562 52835 89039 124610 27562 52835 89039 124610 (Nm/rad) (11087) (22317) (37499) (71884) (121142) (169537) (37499) (71884) (121142) (169537) shaft "U" lb-ft/rad 5946 22107 66953 22107 66953 (Nm/rad) (8090) (30077) (91093) (30077) (91093) shaft "R" lb-ft/rad 19375 30153 56261 30153 56261 (Nm/rad) (26360) (41025) (76545) (41025) (76545) shaft "W" lb-ft/rad 25330 74858 25330 74858 (Nm/rad) (34463) (101847) (34463) (101847) shaft "K" lb-ft/rad 9805 19712 32270 60352 99448 144680 32270 60352 99448 144680 (Nm/rad) (13340) (26819) (43905) (82112) (135303) (196844) (43905) (82112) (135303) (196844) Filling capacity gal. 0.1 0.18 0.26 0.42 0.58 0.79 0.26 0.42 0.58 0.79 (L) (0.4) (0.7) (1.0) (1.6) (2.2) (3.0) (1.0) (1.6) (2.2) (3.0) Weight (without uid) m lbs 26 33 46 73 99 132 46 73 99 132 (kg) 12 15 21 33 45 60 21 33 45 60 1 )Values shown are valid for an absolute pressure of 14.5 psi (1 bar) at inlet port S. At reduced displacement or increased inlet pressure the speed may be increased according to the diagram. 2 ) For higher radial loads, please consult us.
Pumps and Motors
98
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A10VO
Size 10...85 Series 52/53 Nominal pressure 3600 psi (250 bar) Peak pressure 4600 psi (315 bar)
Variable axial piston pump in swashplate design for hydrostatic drives in open circuits Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement.The ow is innitely variable by adjustment of the swashplate Strong bearings for long service life High permissible drive speeds High power-weight ratio - small dimensions Low noise level Good suction characteristics Axial and radial loading of drive shaft possible Pressure and ow control Electro-hydraulic pressure control Power control Electro-hydraulic displacement control Short response times
Series 52
Series 53
Pumps and Motors
99
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
A10V(S)
01
O
02 03 04
5
05 06 07
V
08 09 10 11 10 12 28 45 60/631) 85 A10VS A10V O [cm3] [in3] 10 10 0.61 28 28 1.71 45 60/63 45 63 2.75 3.84
1)
01
Axial piston unit Swash plate design, variable
Operating mode 02 Pump, open circuit Size Displacement Vg max 85 85 5.18
03
Control devices2) Pressure control DR DR with hydraulic ow control X-T open DFR DFR2) X-T open DR F DRF2) X-T closed DFR1 DFR12) X-T closed DR S DRS2) with ow control, electro-hydraulic adjustment of differential press.(inverse proportional characteristic) (RE 92 709) EF . D . EF.D. with remote pressure control hydraulic DR G DRG electric, inverse charact. (RE 92 707) ED . ED. Power control with pressure control min. start of control 145 to 510 psi (10 to 35 bar) LA 5 D LA5D 04 520 to 1015 psi (36 to 70 bar) LA 6 D LA6D 1030 to 1520 psi (71 to 105 bar) LA 7 D LA7D 1535 to 2030 psi (106 to 140 bar) LA 8 D LA8D 2045 to 3335 psi (141 to 230 bar) LA 9 D LA9D with remote pressure control min. start of control see above LA X D G LAXDG with pressure and ow control, X-T closed min. start of control see above LA X D S LAXDS with press. and ow control, electro-hydr. adjustment of diff. press. (inverse prop. characteristic), X-T closed (RE 92 709) min. start of control see above LA X S . LAXS. Electro-proportional displacement control (RE 92 708) with pressure and ow control positive characteristic EP . D . EP.D. with pressure and ow control positive characteristic; deactivation of control at I = 0 EK . D . EK.D.
1) 2)
Size 60 only in series 52; size 63 only in series 53 (see also index 06 in ordering code) For availability of control options in series 52 and 53 (see also index 06 in ordering code)
Pumps and Motors
100
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
A10V(S)
01 Series
05
O
02 03 04
5
05 06 07
V
08 09 10 11 12
5 Index 10 28 45 60 clockwise counter clockwise 63 85 21) 3 3
DR, DFR, DFR1, DRG, ED... 06 DR, DRF, DRS, DRG, ED... EF..., LA..., EP..., EK... Direction of rotation 07 viewing on shaft end Seals 08 FKM uor-rubber Shaft end Splined shaft to SAE J744, standard shaft Similar to shaft S however for higher input torque Splined shaft to SAE J744, reduced diameter, not for through drive 09 similar to shaft U, higher input torque, not for through drive SAE key Tapered with Woodruff key Mounting ange 10 SAE 2-hole SAE 4-hole Port for service lines SAE ange at rear, UNC threads (no through drive) 11 SAE ange on side, opposite sides, UNC threads Threaded ports at rear, UN threads (no through drive) Through drive Without through drive (only for port plate 61 and 64) Flange SAE J744 Coupler for splined shaft3) 82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP 82-2 (A) 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP 12 101-2 (B) 101-2 (B) 1 in 15T 16/32DP 127-4 (C) 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP 127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP 127-2 (C)
1) 2)
R L
V 10 28 45 60/63 85 S R U W K2) C2)
C D
61 62 642)
N00 Sealing axial axial axial axial axial axial axial K01 K52 K68 K04 K15 K07 K24
1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP
Not for new projects. For new projects use series 53 only. only series 52 3) 30 pressure angle, at base, ank centering, t class 5. available in preparation not available 101 Section 1
Pumps and Motors
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Size Displacement Speed2) max. at Vg max max. at Vg Vg max Flow at n0 max at n0 max zul. Power at n0 max at n0 max zul. Torque at Vg max p = 3600 psi (250 bar) p = 1440 psi (100 bar) Moment of inertia (about drive axis) Angular acceleration, max. Torsional stiffness Shaft S Shaft R Shaft U Shaft W Shaft P Case volume Weight (without uid) Tmax T J lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft (Nm) lbs-ft2 (kgm2) rad/s2 lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) gal (L) lbs (kg) 31 (42) 13 (16.7) 0.0142 (0.0006) 8000 6760 (9200) 5020 (6800) 7890 (10700) 0.05 (0.2) 17 (8) 82 (111) 33 (44.5) 0.0403 (0.0017) 5500 16400 (22300) 19400 (26300) 0.08 (0.3) 31 (14) 131 (179) 53 (71.5) 0.0783 (0.0033) 4000 27560 (37500) 30240 (41000) 22130 (30000) 25370 (34400) 0.13 (0.5) 40 (18) 175 (238) 70 (95) 0.1329 (0.0056) 3300 48100 (65500) 51200 (69400) 36290 (49200) 39830 (54000) 0.21 (0.8) 48.5 (22) 184 (250) 74 (100) 0.1329 (0.0056) 3300 48100 (65500) 51200 (69400) 36290 (49200) 39830 (54000) 0.21 (0.8) 48.5 (22) 247 (338) 102 (135) 0.2848 (0.012) 2700 105100 (143000) 75900 (102900) 86960 (117900) 0.26 (1) 75 (34) qV0 max qV0 max
zul.
A10V(S)O Vg max in3 (cm3) min-1 min

-1
10 0.61 (10.5) 3600 4320 9.7 (37) 11.4 (43,2) 22 (16) 25.5 (18)
28 1.71 (28) 3000 3600 22 (84) 26.6 (100) 47 (35) 56 (42)
45 2.75 (45) 26003) 3120 31 (117) 37 (140) 65 (49) 77.8 (58)
60 3.66 (60) 2700 3240 43 (162) 51 (194) 90 (68) 108 (81)
63 3.84 (63) 2600 3140 43.1 (163) 52.2 (198) 90 (68) 110 (82,5)
85 5.18 (85) 2500 3000 55 (212) 67.3 (255) 119 (89) 141 (106)
n0 max n0 max zul
gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) HP (kW) HP (kW)
p = 3600 psi (250 bar) Po max Po max

zul.
1) 2)
theoretical values, without considering mh and v, values rounded Values are valid with inlet pressure of 1 bar at suction inlet S. With reduced displacement or increased inlet pressure the drive speed can be increased according to the diagram on page 5 3) For higher drive speeds, please consult us.
Pumps and Motors
102
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model AA10VSO (A10VSO; Size 18)
Sizes 18 to 140, Series 31 Nominal pressure up to 280 bar (4000 PSI) Maximum pressure up to 350 bar (5100 PSI)
Variable displacement axial piston pump of swashplate design for hydrostatic open circuit systems Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement. It can be innitely varied by adjustment of the swashplate. SAE mounting ange Flange connections to SAE Two case drain ports Good suction characteristics Permissible continous pressure 280 bar (4000 PSI) Low noise level Long service life Axial and radial load of drive shaft possible High power-weight ratio Wide range of controls Short response times Through drive option for multi-circuit system
Pumps and Motors
103
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Hydraulic Fluid, Type of rotary group Mineral oil and HFD (no code) HFA, HFB and HFC - Fluids High-Speed-Version Axial Piston Unit Swashplate design, variable
18...45 l l
71...140 l l l
E H
size 18 size 28 to 140
A10VS AA10VS
Type of operation Pump in open circuit Size in3/rev. cm3/rev. Control device Two-position control, direct controls Pressure control remote control Pressure flow control DFR DFR 1 l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l l
18 28 45 71 100 140 1.10 1.71 2.75 4.33 6.10 8.54 18 28 45 71 100 140 18 l l l 28 l l l 45 l l l 71 l l l 100 l l l l l l l l 140 l l l l l l l l
DG DR DR
DG DR DRG DFR DFR1 DFLR DFE1 ED
without orifice between X and tank Pressure, flow and power control Pressure and flow control, electronic, see RA30022 Electro-hydraulic pressure control, see RE92707 Series
31 Direction of rotation Viewed on shaft end
R L
Seals NBR nitril-caoutchouc, shaft seal in FKM FKM flour-caoutchouc Shaft end SAE Parallel with key SAE Splined shaft SAE Splined shaft (higher through drive torque) SAE Splined shaft (not suitable for through drive) Mounting flange SAE 2-bolt SAE 4-bolt 18 l l l l 18 l 28 l l l 28 l 45 l l l l 45 l 71 l l l 71 l 100 l l l 100 l 140 l l 140 l
P V
K S R U
C D
Pumps and Motors
104
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

AA10VS
Hydraulic Fluid, Type of rotary group Axial Piston Unit Type of operation Size
/ 31
Control device Series Direction of rotation Seals Shaft end Mounting flange Service line connections Pressure port B and suction port S: SAE ports at opposite sides UNC fixing threads 18 l 28 l 18 l 45 l 28 l 71 l 45 l 100 l 71 l 140 l 100 l
62 92
140 l
Through drives without through drive with through drive to accept an axial piston pump or a gear pump Mounting flange SAEJ744 hub sealing 82-2(A) keyed (A-B) axial 101-2 (B) keyed (B) axial 101-2 (B-B) keyed (B-B) axial 127-2 (C) keyed (C) axial 127-2 (C) keyed (C) radial 152-4 (D) keyed (D) axial 82-2 (A) 5/8 in (A) axial 82-2 (A) 3/4 in (A-B) axial 101-2 (B) 7/8 in (B) axial 101-2 (B) 1 in (B-B) axial 127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in (C) axial 127-2 (C) 1 1/2 in (C-C) axial 152-4 (D) 1 3/4 in (D) axial 1) Not for new projects. Permitted with reduced throug drive torque only.
N00
l l
l l l l l
l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l l
K401) K031) K051) K081) K381) K211) K01 K52 K68 K04 K07 K24 K17
Pumps and Motors
105
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Size (A)A10VSO Standard AA10VSO High Speed Vg max cm (in3) rpm
3
18 18 (1.10) 3300 3900
28 28 (1.71) 3000 3600
45 45 (2.75) 2600 3100
71 71 (4.33) 2200 2600
100 100 (6.10) 2000 2400
140 71 140 (8.54) 1800 2100 71 (4.33) 2550 2600 100 100 (6.10) 2300 2400 140 140 (8.54) 2050 2100
Displacement Speed1), max. at Vg max at increased inlet pressure pabs resp. Vg < Vgmax Flow, max at n0 max at nE = 1800 rpm
n0 max
n0 max perm. rpm
qvo max qvo
L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) kW (HP) kW (HP) Nm (ft-lb) Nm (ft-lb ) kgm2 (lbs-ft2) L (gal.) kg (lbs.) N (lbs.) N (lbs.)
59.4 (15.7) 32 (7.2) 28 (36.6) 15 (19) 80 (58) 28.6 (14.6)
84 (22) 59 (13.3) 39 (51) 24 (31) 125 (91) 45 (33)
117 (31) 81 (21.4) 55 (72) 38 (50) 200 (146) 72 (53)
156 (41) 128 (33.8) 73 (96) 69 (79) 316 (230) 113 (83)
200 (53) 180 (47.6) 93 (124) 84 (111) 445 (324) 159 (117)
252 (67) 252 (67) 118 (156) 118 (156) 623 (453) 223 (164)
181 (48) 128 (33.8) 84 (112) 69 (79) 316 (230) 113 (83)
230 (61) 180 (47.6) 107 (142) 84 (111) 445 (324) 159 (117)
287 (76) 252 (67) 134 (177) 118 (156) 623 (453) 223 (164)
Power, max. (p = 280 bar (4000 PSI) at n0 max at nE = 1800 rpm Torque, max. at Vg max p= 280 bar (4000 PSI) at Vg max p= 100 bar (1450 PSI) Moment of inertia (about drive axis) Fill volume Weight (without uid) ca. max. perm. load max. perm. load2)
1)
Po max P
Tmax T J
0.0009 0.0017 0.0033 0.0083 0.0167 0.0242 0.0083 0.0167 0.0242 (0.022) (0.0403) (0.0783) (0.1970) (0.3963) (0.5743) (0.1970) (0.3963) (0.5743) 0.4 (0.1) 0.7 (0.2) 1.0 (0.3) 1.6 (0.4) 2.2 (0.6) 3.0 (0.8) 1.6 (0.4) 2.2 (0.6) 3.0 (0.8) 12 (27) 15 (33) 21 (46) 33 (73) 45 (99) 60 (132) 33 (73) 45 (99) 60 (132) 700 (157) 350 (79) 1000 (225) 1200 (270) 1500 (337) 1500 (337) 2400 (540) 1900 (427) 4000 (900) 2300 (517) 4800 (1080) 2800 (630) 2400 (540) 1900 (427) 4000 (900) 2300 (517) 4800 (1080) 2800 (630)
m Fax max Fq max
Permissible loading of drive shaft
These values are valid for an absolute pressure of 14.5 psi (1 bar) at the suction port S. By reducing the displacement or increasing the input pressure the speed can be increased as shown in the diagram. Please consult us for higher radial forces.
Application of force
Fq Fax X/2 X X/2
2)
Pumps and Motors
106
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A10VSO
Low noise level Variable pump in axial piston-swashplate design The ow is proportional to the drive speed and the displacement Optimized housing and port plate structure to minimize noise radiation Optional with pulsation damping High efciency Hydrostatic unloading of cradle bearings Double retainer mechanism for high speed version (Size 140 and 180) Arrangement to counteract cylinder lift off Optimized sealing High functional reliability, also with torsional vibrations or under unfavorable operating conditions Port for pressure transducer in pump outlet Universal through drive Excellent power to weight ratio
Pumps and Motors
107
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code for standard program
A10VS
01 Axial piston unit
O
02 03 04
32
05 06
V
07 08
D
09 10 11
S
12
01 Swashplate design, variable, industrial applications, nom. pres. 4000 psi (280 bar), peak press. 5100 psi (350 bar) A10VS Type of operation 02 Pump, open circuit Size 03 Displacement Vg max [cm ] [in ] Control and adjustment devices Two-point control, directly operated Pressure control with ow control, hydraulic, X-T open X-T closed with displacement control, electronic (with pressure control), remotely adjustable hydraulic electric, inversely prop. characteristic Power control with pressure control Beginning of control 725 psi below (50 bar) 04 from 739.5 to 1305 psi (51 to 90 bar) LA LA 5 6 7 8 9 D D D D D LA5D LA6D LA7D LA8D LA9D DR ED . G DRG ED.2) DG DR DR DR DF E1 F S DG DR DRF DRS DFE11)
3 3
O 45 45 2.75 71 71,1 4.34 100 100 6.10 140 140 180 180
8.54 10.98
1319.5 to 2320 psi LA (91 to 160 bar) 2334.5 to 3480 psi LA (160 to 240 bar) over 3480 psi (240 bar) with pressure control, remotely adjustable Beginning of control see above with pressure and ow control, X-T closed Beginning of control see above with separate ow control, X-T closed Beginning of control see above LA
LA X LA X LA X
D D
G S S
LAXDG LAXDS LAXS
Pumps and Motors
108
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code for standard program
A10VS
01 Series 05
O
02 03 04
32
05 06
V
07 08
D
09 10 11
S
12
32 Direction of rotation
06
viewing on shaft end
R L
Seals and uids 07 FKM uor-rubber HFA, HFB and HFC-uids (except Skydrol) Shaft end keyed parallel shaft to SAE 08 splined to SAE J744 like shaft end S , for higher torque inputs Anbauansch 09 SAE 4-hole Ports for service lines
45
71
100
140
180 V C3)
K S R
outlet B and inlet S, SAE ange on side, opposite sides UNC thread for xing screws, without through drive 10 like 62N however with universal through drive like 62N however with universal through drive and pulsation damping Through drive without through drive (only for port plate 62N) Flange SAE J744 82-2 (A) 82-2 (A) 11 101-2 (B) 101-2 (B) 127-4 (C) 152-4 (D) 152-4 (D) Hub for splined shaft 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP 3/4 in 11T 16/32DP 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP 1 in 15T 16/32DP 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP 1 1/2 in 17T 12/24DP 1 3/4 in 13T 8/16DP Sealing axial axial axial axial axial axial axial
62N 72U 82U
00 01 52 68 04 15 96 17 99
with shaft for through drive, without hub, without adapter ange, closed with cover (not for portplate 62N) Type of rotary group 12 High speed (only with port plate 62N and 72U)
1)
3)
See RE 30 022, not for HFx-uids available
2)
See RE 92 707 in preparation
See RE 90 223
not available
Pumps and Motors
109
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data1)
Size Displacement Speed2) max. at Vg max max. at Vg Vg max Flow at n0 max at nE = 1800 min-1 at n0 max. zul Power at n0 max at nE = 1800 rpm Torque at Vg max p = 4000 psi (p = 280 bar) p = 1450 psi (p = 100 bar) Moment of inertia (about drive axis) Angular acceleration, max. Torsional stiffness shaft K shaft S shaft R Case volume Weight (with pressure control)
1) 2)
Standard High-speed Vg max in (cm3) min-1 min-1 gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) HP (kW) HP (kW) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft (Nm) lb-ft2 (kgm2) rad/s2 lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) gal (L) m lbs (kg)
3
71 4.34 (71) 2200 2600 41.1 (156.4) 34 (128) 49 (184.3) 96 (73) 146 (109) 231 (317) 83 (113) 0.2065 (0.0087) 2900 59.466 (80627) 53.018 (71884) 56.456 (76545) 0.4 (1.6) 103 (47)
3)
100 6.10 (100) 2000 2400 53 (200) 47.6 (180) 63.8 (240) 124 (93) 212 (158) 325 (446) 117 (159) 0.4390 (0.0185) 2400 97.603 (132335) 89.348 (121142) () 0.6 (2.2) 152 (69)
140 140 8.54 (140) 1800 2100 67 (252) 67 (252) 78.2 (294) 156 (118) 156 (118) 454 (624) 164 (223) 0.6549 (0.0276) 2000 138.958 (188406) 125.042 (169537) () 0.8 (3.0) 161 (73) 8.54 (140) 18003) 2300 67 (252) 67 (252) 78.2 (294) 156 (118) 156 (118) 454 (624) 164 (223) 0.6549 (0.0276) 2000 138.958 (188406) 125.042 (169537) () 0.8 (3.0) 161 (73)
n0 max n0 max zul qV0 max qVE max qV0 max

zul
p = 4000 psi (p = 280 bar) Po max PE max
Tmax T J
Theoretical values, without considering mh and v, values rounded Values are valid with inlet pressure of 1 bar absolute at port S.
With inlet pressure of 12 psi (0.8 bar) abs. at port S.
Pumps and Motors
110
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for open circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model A10VNO
Variable displacement axial piston pump in swashplate design for hydrostatic drives in open circuits Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement. It can be innitely varied by adjustment of the swashplate High power to weight ratio - small dimensions Low noise level Permissible continuous pressure 3000 psi (210 bar) Axial and radial loading of drive shaft possible Pressure an ow control (load sensing) Short response times Well proven A10-Technology Extreme small mounting dimensions Cost effective alternative to xed displacement pumps Costs-optimized design
Pumps and Motors
111
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
A10VN O
01 02 03
DFR1 / 52
04 05 06
07 08
C
09 10 11
Axial piston unit

01 Swashplate design, variable, nominal press. 3000 psi (210 bar), peak press. 3600 psi ( 250 bar)
A10VN
Type of operation
02 Pump, open circuit
Size
03 Displacement Vgmax [cm3]
28
45
63
85
Control device
04 Pressure and ow control (without orice between X and Tank)
DFR1
Series
05
52
Direction of rotation
06
viewed on shaft end
clockwise counterclockwise
R L
Seals
07
HNBR (high density nitrile-rubber resp. Buna -N) FKM (uoride -rubber)
H V
Shaft end
08
Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a-1976 (with runout) Splined shaft ANSI B92.1a-1976 (with undercut)
R W
Mounting ange
09 SAE J744 2-hole
Connection for service lines

10
B, S and L: at rear, metric threaded ports (ISO 6149-1) B and S: SAE ange at rear, metric bolt holes
40 11
Through drive
11 without through drive
available
N00 not available
Available versions when ordering, state ordering code and ident nr.
Ordering code A10VNO28DFR1/52R-HRC40N00 A10VNO28DFR1/52L-HRC40N00 A10VNO45DFR1/52R-HRC40N00 A10VNO45DFR1/52L-HRC40N00 Pumps and Motors Ident-Nr. 2436422 2436423 2436456 2436457 Ordering code A10VNO63DFR1/52R-VRC11N00 A10VNO63DFR1/52L-VRC11N00 A10VNO85DFR1/52R-VWC11N00 A10VNO85DFR1/52L-VWC11N00 Ident-Nr. 2436458 2436459 2436460 2436461
112
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Inlet operating pressure range
Absolute pressure at port S pabs min _________________________________ 12 psi (0.8 bar) pabs max ________________________________ 435 psi (30 bar)
Maximum permissible speed (Speed limit)

Graph, showing permissible speed with increased inlet pressure at port S ( pabs ) resp. reduced displacement(Vg < Vg max ).
1,2 bar psi
Pressure at port B Nominal pressure pN ___________________ 3000 psi (210 bar) Peak pressure pmax ____________________ 3600 psi (250 bar) (Pressure data to DIN 24312)
1,4 1,1 1,2
20
17.5
Direction of ow
S to B.
1,0 1,0 0,9 0,8 1,0 14.5 1 3 11.5
Case drain pressure

The max. permissible pressure of the leakage uid (at port L, L1) max. 7 psi (0,5 bar) higher than inlet pressure at port S, but not higher than 29 psi (2 bar) absolute. pL abs max __________________________________ 29 psi (2 bar)
0,9 0,7 0,8 0,9
Displacement Vg / Vgmax
Table of values
Size Displacement Speed max. at Vg max Flow at n0 max Vg max self priming (14.5 psi (1 bar)) with boost (72 psi (5 bar)) n0 max n0 max qvo max qvo max Po max Po max Tmax J in3 (cm3) rpm rpm gpm (L/min) gpm (L/min) HP (kW) HP (kW) ft-lb (Nm) lbs-ft2 (kgm2) rad/s2 rpm lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) lb-ft/rad (Nm/rad) gal. (L) lbs (kg) 28 1.71 (28) 3000 3500 22.2 (84) 25.98 (98) 39 (29) 45 (34) 69 (94) 0.0403 (0.0017) 5500 70 19480 (26500) 14330 (19500) 0.08 (0.3) 30.8 (14) 45 2.74 (45) 1800 2600 21.4 (81) 30.9 (117) 38 (28) 55 (41) 110 (150) 0.0474 (0.002) 4900 65 19480 (26500) 14330 (19500) 0.08 (0.3) 30.8 (14) 63 3.84 (63) 1800 2600 29.8 (113) 43 (163) 52 (39) 76 (57) 154 (210) 0.0948 (0.004) 3500 57 29770 (40500) 25140 (34200) 0.13 (0.5) 39.6 (18) 85 5.18 (85) 1800 2600 40.4 (153) 58.3 (221) 71 (53) 104 (77) 208 (284) 0.1422 (0.006) 2500 47 49900 (68000) 39100 (53200) 0.21 (0.8) 48.4 (22)
self priming ((14.5 psi (1 bar)) with boost (72 psi (5 bar)) Power (p = 3000 psi (210 bar)) at n0 max self priming (14.5 psi (1 bar)) with boost (72 psi (5 bar)) Torque (p = 3000 psi (210 bar)) at Vg max Moment of inertia (about drive axis) angular acceleration, max. speed uctuation, max. Torsional stiffness Shaft end R Shaft end W Fill volume Weight (without uid) Permissible loading of drive shaft Fq max. prem. load max. prem. load
Fax
Fax max
X/2 X/2 X
lbf (N) lbf (N)
146 (650) 146 (650)
146 (650) 146 (650)
225 (1000) 225 (1000)
300 (1350) 300 (1350)
Fq max
Pumps and Motors
113
Section 1
Input pressure p abs
Output operating pressure range

Speed n/nmax
1,6
23
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement pump for closed circuits, Axial piston, swashplate design Model AA10VG
Variable displacement axial piston pump with swashplate design for hydrostatic closed circuit transmissions Flow is proportional to drive speed and displacement and is innitely variable Output ow increases with the swivel angle of the swashplate from 0 to its maximum value Flow direction changes smoothly when the swashplate is moved through the neutral position A wide range of highly adaptable control instruments is available for different control and regulating functions The pump is equipped with two pressure relief valves on the high pressure ports to protect the hydrostatic transmission (pump and motor) from overload The pressure relief valves also function as boost inlet valves An integral auxiliary pump serves as boost and pilot oil pump The maximum boost pressure is limited by a built-in boost pressure relief valve
Changes in ordering code from 06.04 issue

Control device - new standard: supply ltration at HD3, EP3 and EP4 control - not for new projects: HD1, EP1, EP2 Range of male connectors for solenoids - not for new projects: H
Pumps and Motors
114
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering Code
AA10V G
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
/ 10
10 11
N
12 13
C
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Axial piston unit 01 Variable swashplate design, nominal pressure 4350 psi (300 bar), peak pressure 5100 psi (350 bar) AA10V Operation 02 Pump in closed circuit G Size Displacement Vg max cm3 18 28 45 63 03 1.10 1.71 2.81 3.84 in3 Control device 18 28 45 63 Hydraulic control pilot pressure related without supply ltration HD1 with supply ltration HD3 mechanical servo HW direct operated DG speed related U = 12 V DC DA1 U = 24 V DC DA2 Electrical control with proportional solenoid U = 12 V DC without supply ltration EP1 04 U = 24 V DC EP2 with supply ltration U = 12 V DC EP3 U = 24 V DC EP4 with switching solenoid U = 12 V DC EZ1 U = 24 V DC EZ2 Mechanical pivot control MD Pressure cut-off Without pressure cut-off (no code) With pressure cut-off (standard for version with DA control valve) Neutral position switch (only for HW) Without neutral position switch (no code) With neutral position switch Mechanical stroke limiter Without mechanical stroke limiter (no code) With mechanical stroke limiter, external adjustable Spring neutral position centering (only MD) Without spring neutral position centering (no code) With spring neutral position centering DA control valve Without DA control valve With DA control valve, xed setting With DA control valve, mech. operating direction counter-clockwise adjust. with control lever clockwise With DA control valve, xed setting and hydraulic inch valve built-on, control with brake uid With DA control valve, xed setting, connections for master controller With DA control valve, xed setting and hydraulic inch valve built-on, control with mineral oil 115 18 18 18 18 EZ 28 28 28 28 28 45 45 45 45 45 63 63 63 63 63
05
06
07
08
N 1 2 3L 3R 4 7 8
HD
HW
DG
DA
EP
09
Pumps and Motors
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering Code
AA10V G
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09
/ 10
10 11
N
12 13
C
14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Series 10 Series 1, Index 0 Direction of rotation Viewed from shaft end 11
10 clockwise counter-clockwise 18...63 R L N 18 28 45 63 S T C 18 18 18 18 18 18 28 28 28 28 28

3
Seals 12 NBR (nitril-caoutchouc), shaft seal in FKM (uor-caoutchouc) Shaft end (permissible input torque see page X) standard for single pump Splined shaft 13 ANSI B92.1a-1976 standard for combination pump Mounting ange 14 SAE J744 2-hole Service line ports (metric thread) SAE ange ports A and B, same side left, suction port S bottom 15 Threaded ports A and B, same side right, suction port S bottom Boost pump Without integral boost pump without through drive with through drive 16 With integral boost pump without through drive with through drive Through drive Splined shaft hub Flange SAE J744 1) 82-2 (A) 5/8 in 9T 16/32DP 2) 7/8 in 13T 16/32DP 2) 17 101-2 (B) 1 in 15T 16/32DP 2) 127-2 (C) 1 1/4 in 14T 12/24DP 2) Valves Setting range With high pressure relief valve, 3600...4600 psi without bypass direct controlled, (xed setting) (250...320 bar) with bypass 18 1450...3600 psi without bypass (100...250 bar) with bypass Filtration Filtration in the suction line of the boost pump Filtration in the pressure line of the boost pump 19 ports for external boost circuit lter, (Fe and G (Fa)) External supply (model without integral boost pump - N00, K...) Range of male connectors for solenoids (only for EP, EZ and DA) DEUTSCH male connector without quenching diode 20 2-pin with quenching diode (only for EZ and DA) DIN male connector to HIRSCHMANN without quenching diode 1 ) 2 = 2-hole 2 ) splined shaft hub to ANSI B92.1a-1976 (splined shaft allocation to SAE J744, see pages XX) 3 ) pressure ltration in connection with the DA control valve is not possible. = available = available on request = not for new projects = not available Pumps and Motors 116
45 45 45 45 45
3
63 63 63 63 63 63
60 66 N00 K.. F00 F..
.01 .02 .04 .07 3 5 4 6 S D E P Q H
) ) 28 45
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Table of values (theoretical values, without efciencies and tolerances; values rounded)
Size Displacement variable pump auxiliary pump (at p = 290 psi/20 bar) Speed maximum at Vg max limited maximum 1) intermittent maximum 2) minimum Flow at nmax continuous and Vg max Power ) at nmax continuous Torque ) at Vg max
3 3
18 Vg max Vg H in
3
28 1.71 28 0.37 6.1 3900 4200 4500 500 28.8 109 73.2 54.6 98.6 134 32.9 44.6 0.0403 0.0017 5500 17 1013 23707 32143 0.17 0.64 55 25
45 2.81 46 0.53 8.6 3300 3550 3800 500 40.2 152 101.8 75.9 162.3 220 54 73.2 0.0738 0.0033 4000 14 855 39388 53404 54435 73804 0.20 0.75 60 27
63 3.84 63 0.91 14.9 3000 3250 3500 500 49.9 189 126.7 94.5 221.5 301 74 100.3 0.1252 0.0056 3300 13 788 57802 78370 68127 92368 0.29 1.1 86 39
1.10 18 0.34 5.5 4000 4850 5200 500 19 72 48.3 36 63.5 86 14.6 28.6 0.0221 0.00093 6800 18 1170 14960 20284 0.12 0.45 31(40) 5) 14(18) 5)
2
cm3 in3 cm3 nmax continuous nmax limited nmax interm. nmin qv max Pmax p = 300 bar p = 4350 psi (p = 300 bar) p = 1450 psi (p = 100 bar) Moment of inertia (about drive axis) Rotational vibration 4) Angular acceleration, max Speed variation, max Frequency limit Rotary stiffness shaft end S shaft end T Filling capacity Weight approx. (without through drive)
1 2
rpm rpm rpm rpm gpm l/min hp kW lb-ft Nm lb-ft Nm lbs-ft2 kgm
Tmax T J
n flimit
rad/s2 rpm Hz lb-ft/rad Nm/rad lb-ft/rad Nm/rad gal L
lbs kg
) Limited maximum speed: ) Intermittent maximum speed:
at half power (e.g. at Vg max and pN /2) at high idling speed at overspeed: p = 1000...2200 psi (70...150 bar) and Vg max at reversing peaks: p < 4350 psi (300 bar) and t < 5 sec.
) Without auxiliary pump The permissible angular acceleration or speed variation only applies to single pumps, not to combination pumps. The load on connection parts (e.g. through drive) must be taken into account additionally. at f < flimit, the n indicated in the table is permitted. at f > flimit, the permitted angular acceleration indicated in the table limits the size of the speed variation: nperm. = 3.04 /f. 5) 31lbs (14 kg): MD control, 40 lbs (18 kg): HD control
4)
Pumps and Motors
117
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Page 1 of 3 Issue 06.06
Closed loop pressure and flow control system Model SYDFE1

Series 2X
The DFE1 control is used for the electro-hydraulic closed loop control of the pressure and swivel angle of a variable displacement axial piston pump The SYDFE1 closed loop control system is comprised of the following components: AA10VSO axial piston pump with built-on VT-DFP-2X proportional valve, which serves as the pilot valve, and inductive position transducers for sensing the swivel angle and valve position VT 5041-2X analog amplier for the realization of all of the electrical functions required for the DFE1 control Pump pre-load valve (optional) Combination pumps are possible
Model SYDFE1-2X/071R-PSA12N00-0000-A030PX2
Pumps and Motors
118
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code SYDFE1 2X /

Single pump Pump combination 2) Series 20 to 29 = 2X (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) A10VSO pump Size 18 = 018 Size 28 = 028 Size 45 = 045 Size 71 = 071 Size 100 = 100 Size 140 = 140 Direction of rotation Clockwise (preferred types =R for through-drive pumps) Anti-clockwise =L Hydraulic fluid Mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL / HLP)
1)
12
*
Further details in clear text Preload valve 1 = Pressure limitation 200 bar (2900 PSI) 2 = Pressure limitation 250 bar (3626 PSI) 3 = Pressure limitation 300 bar (4350 PSI) X= Without preload valve Pressure transducer HM 12 (4 to 20 mA) C= Measuring range 315 bar (4568 PSI) HM 13 (0 to 10 V) G= Measuring range 315 bar (4568 PSI) X= Without pressure transducer Electronic assembly, VT 5041-2X with switch-able actual pressure value signal (from series 25) P= 4-20 mA / 0-10 V / 0-5 V / 1-10 V X= Without amplifier Additional function, VT 5041-2X with power limiter and swivel angle indicator Without amplifier X= 1 = Amplifier without additional function Amplifier with additional function 3=
=P
Shaft end ( = Preferred types for through-drive pumps) Size 18 28 45 71 100 140
3) 4) 5)
22 25 32 40 45 3/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 7/8 1 1 1/4
=P =S =R
Connection flange ( l = available) Size 18 28 45 71 100 140 ISO 2-hole l l l l =A ISO 4-hole l =B l SAE 2-hole =C Connection for service lines Pressure port B SAE on opposite sides = 12 Pressure port S Mounting thread, metric Through-drive (see table on page 3) = N00 Without through-drive Through-drive without hub for mounting: (any built-on pumps with SAE splined shaft profile ) Center diameter Built-on pump 82.55 mm (3.25 in.) A10VSO18 = KC1 6) 100 mm (3.94 in.) A10VSO28/45 = KD3 6) 125 mm (4.92 in.) A10VSO71/100 = KD5 6) 180 mm (7.09 in.) A10VSO140 = KD7 6) 101.6 mm (4.00 in.) Gear pump = KC3 6) 127 mm (5.00 in.) Gear pump = KC5 6) For single pumps, the hub must be ordered separately, if required For double pumps, the hub is included in the scope of supply.
0= A= 0000 = 0479 = 0487 =

1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Valve, installation orientation Plug-in connector installed radially to pump axis Valve, spool variant Basic pump version Standard (internal pilot oil supply) External supply (sizes 18 100) External supply (size 140)
See order example at the top of page 3 See order example at the top of page 3 Cylindrical with keyed shaft DIN 6885 Splined shaft prole SAE Splined shaft prole SAE (higher trough-drive torque) Through-drive is tted with an operationally safe blind cover
Pumps and Motors
119
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Order example 1) Order example of single pump SYDFE1-2X/100R-PSA12N00-0479-A0X0XCX
2)
Order example of pump combination Both model designations must be connected with + (material number of 1st pump + material number of 2nd pump) SY2DFE1-2X/100-100/ R900709794 + R900709794 SY2DFE1-2X/100-100/ SYDFE1-2X/100R-PSA12KD5-0000-A010PCX + SYDFE1-2X/100R-PSA12KD5-0000-A010PCX
Double pump Size of front pump Size of rear pump Material number of front pump (or details in clear text, if material number is not known) Material number of rear pump (or details in clear text, if material number is not known)
Standard models
Single pumps Model SYDFE1-2X/018R-PSC12N00-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/028R-PPA12N00-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/045R-PPA12N00-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/071R-PPA12N00-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/100R-PPA12N00-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/140R-PPB12N00-0000-A010PCX Through-drive pumps for pump combinations Model SYDFE1-2X/028R-PRA12KD3-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/045R-PRA12KD3-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/071R-PRA12KD5-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/100R-PSA12KD5-0000-A010PCX SYDFE1-2X/140R-PSB12KD7-0000-A010PCX
Material no. R900783410 R900708517 R900708518 R900708519 R900708520 R900708521
Material no. R900709782 R900709786 R900709792 R900709794 R900709795
Through-drive ( = available) Without through-drive With through-drive for building on an axial piston unit, a gear pump or a radial piston pump Mounting ange Shaft/coupling (separate order) for mounting: ISO 100, 2-hole Splined shaft 7/8 22-4 (SAE B) A10VSO 28 (shaft S or R) ISO 100, 2-hole Splined shaft1 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VSO 45 (shaft S or R) ISO 125, 2-hole Splined shaft 1 1/4 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71 (shaft S or R) ISO 125, 2-hole Splined shaft 1 1/2 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VSO 100 (shaft S) ISO 180, 4-hole Splined shaft 1 3/4 44-4 (SAE D) A10VSO 140 (shaft S) 1PF2G2, PGF2 82-2 (SAE A, 2-hole) Splined shaft 5/8 16-4 (SAE A) 82-2 (SAE A, 2-hole) Splined shaft 3/4 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 10, 18 (shaft S) 101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 7/8 22-4 (SAE B) A10VO 28 (shaft S), PGF3 101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 1 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VO 45 (shaft S), PGH4 127-2 (SAE C) Splined shaft 1 1/4 32-4 (SAE C) A10VO 71 (shaft S) 127-2 (SAE C) Splined shaft 1 1/2 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VO 100 (shaft S), PGH5 Splined shaft 1 3/4 44-4 (SAE D) A10VO 140 (shaft S) 152-4 (SAE D)
Size 18 28 45 71 100 140 N00
KD3 KD3 KD5 KD5 KD7 KC1 KC1 KC3 KC3 KC5 KC5 KC6
Pumps and Motors
120
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure and ow closed loop system Model SYDFEE

Series 2X
The DFEE control is used for the electro-hydraulic closed loop control of the pressure and swivel angle of an axial piston pump The SYDFEE.. closed loop control system consists of the following components: AA10VSO axial piston pump with built-on proportional valve as the pilot valve VT-DFPE-2X/.. The VT-DFPE..-2X/.. valve with integrated analog control and closed loop control electronics realizes the complete closed loop control function for the DFEE system The acquisition of the swivel angle is via a rotary angle sensor type VT-SWA-1-1X which is a hall effect based sensor Pump pre-load valve (optional) Combination pumps are possible
Model SYDFEE-2X/071R-PSA12N00-0000-A2AOFL2
Pumps and Motors
121
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
SYDFEE 2X /
Single pump Pump combination 2) Series 20 to 29 = 2X (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Pump A10VSO Nominal Size 18 = 018 Nominal Size 28 = 028 Nominal Size 45 = 045 Nominal Size 71 = 071 Nominal Size 100 = 100 Nominal Size 140 = 140 Direction of rotation Clockwise (pref. types for through drive pumps) =R Anti-clockwise =L Pressure fluid Mineral oil to DIN 51 524 (HL/HLP) = P Shaft end ( = Preferred types for through drive pumps) NS 18 28 45 71 100 140 3) 22 25 32 40 45 = P 4) 3/4 1 1/2 1 3/4 = S 5) 7/8 1 1 1/4 =R
1)
12
Connection flange (l = available) NS 18 28 45 71 100 140 l l ISO 2-hole l l =A l =B ISO 4-hole SAE 2-hole l =C Actuator line connections Pressure connection B SAE, on opposite sides = 12 Suction connection S metric mounting heads Through drive (see table on page 3) = N00 Without through drive Through drive without hub for mounting: (All built-on pumps are with a SAE splined shaft) Centre dia. Pump to be fitted 82.55 mm (3.25 in.) A10VSO18 = KC1 6) 100 mm (3.94 in.) A10VSO28/45 = KD3 6) 125 mm (4.92 in.) A10VSO71/100 = KD5 6) 180 mm (7.09 in.) A10VSO140 = KD7 6) 101.6 mm (4.00 in.) Gear pump = KC3 6) 127 mm (5.00 in.) Gear pump = KC5 6) With single pumps the hub must be ordered separately. With combination pumps the hub is included within the scope of supply.
Further details in clear text Pre-load valve 1= Pressure limitation 200 bar (2900 PSI) 2= Pressure limitation 250 bar (3636 PSI) 3= Pressure limitation 300 bar (4351 PSI) X= Without pre-load valve Pressure transducer C= HM 12 (4 to 20 mA) measuring range up to 315 bar (4568 PSI) G= HM 13 (0 to 10 V) measuring range up to 315 bar (4568 PSI) L= HM 16 (0.5 to 5 V) measuring range up to 315 bar (4568 PSI) 7) with connection cable 0.5 m (1.64 ft.) and plug-in connector M12 X= Without pressure transducer Actual pressure input C= Current input 4 20 mA V= Voltage input 0 10 V D= Voltage input 0 5 V E= Voltage input 1 10 V F= Voltage input 0.5 5 V 8) Electronic sub-assembly, optional 0= No option 1= Without leakage oil compensation Additional function power limitation A= Without power limitation B= With power limitation Valve, mounting orientation, integrated electronics 0= Radial to the pump axis 2= 90 in the direction of the connection plate A= Valve, spool version Basic pump version 0000 = Remote supply (NS 18 100) 0487 = Remote supply (NS 140) 1) See ordering example at the top of page 3 2) See ordering example at the top of page 3 3) Cylinderical with key, DIN 6885 4) SAE spline prole 5) SAE spline prole (higher through drive torque) 6) The through drive is covered by a cover plate 7) For direct connection to the integrated electronics version actual pressure input F 8) Connection via component socket M12
Pumps and Motors
122
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Ordering example 1) Ordering example for a single pump SYDFEE-2X/100R-PSA12N00-0479-A0A0VGX 2) Ordering example for a combination pump Both of the model codes are to be connected by a +. (Material No. of the 1st pump + Material No. of the 2nd pump) SY2DFEE-2X/100-100/ R900709780 + R900709780 SY2DFEE-2X/100-100/ SYDFEE-2X/100R-PSA12KD5-0000-A0A0CCX + SYDFEE-2X/100R-PSA12KD5-0000-A0A0CCX Double pump Nom. size of the front pump Nom. size of the rear pump Material No. of the front pump (or in clear text if the Material No. is not known) Material No. of the rear pump (or in clear text if the Material No. is not known)
Standard models
Single pump Model SYDFEE-2X/018R-PSC12N00-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/018R-PSC12N00-0000-A0A0CC2 SYDFEE-2X/028R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/028R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CC2 SYDFEE-2X/045R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/045R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CC2 SYDFEE-2X/071R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/071R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CC2 SYDFEE-2X/100R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/100R-PPA12N00-0000-A0A0CC2 SYDFEE-2X/140R-PPB12N00-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/140R-PPB12N00-0000-A0A0CC2 Material No. R900708503 R900708504 R900708505 R900708506 R900708507 R900708508 R900708510 R900708511 R900708512 R900708513 R900708514 R900708515 Through drive pumps for combination pumps Model SYDFEE-2X/028R-PRA12KD3-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/045R-PRA12KD3-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/071R-PRA12KD5-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/100R-PSA12KD5-0000-A0A0CCX SYDFEE-2X/140R-PSB12KD7-0000-A0A0CCX
Material No. R900709773 R900709774 R900709775 R900709780 R900709781
Through drive ( l = available) Without through drive With through drive for mounting an axial piston pump, a gear pump or radial piston pump Mounting ange Shaft/coupling (separate order) For tting a: ISO 100, 2-hole Splined shaft 7/8 22-4 (SAE B) A10VSO 28 (shaft S or R) ISO 100, 2-hole Splined shaft 1 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VSO 45 (shaft S or R) ISO 125, 2-hole Splined shaft 1 1/4 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO 71 (shaft S or R) ISO 125, 2-hole Splined shaft 1 1/2 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VSO 100 (shaft S) ISO 180, 4-hole Splined shaft 1 3/4 44-4 (SAE D) A10VSO 140 (shaft S) 82-2 (SAE A, 2-hole) Splined shaft 5/8 16-4 (SAE A) 1PF2G2, PGF2 82-2 (SAE A, 2-hole) Splined shaft 3/4 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO 10, 18 (shaft S) 101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 3/8 22-4 (SAE B) A10VO 28 (shaft S), PGF3 101-2 (SAE B) Splined shaft 1 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VO 45 (shaft S), PGH4 127-2 (SAE C) Splined shaft 1 1/4 32-4 (SAE C) A10VO 71 (shaft S) 127-2 (SAE C) Splined shaft 1 1/2 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VO 100 (shaft S), PGH5 152-4 (SAE D) Splined shaft 1 3/4 44-4 (SAE D) A10VO 140 (shaft S)
Nominal size 18 28 45 71 100 140 l l l l l l N00
l l
l l l l l
l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l
l l l l l l l l l l l l
KD3 KD3 KD5 KD5 KD7 KC1 KC1 KC3 KC3 KC5 KC5 KC6
Pumps and Motors
123
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure-ow closed loop control system Model SYHDFEE

Nominal size 125 to 355 Series 1X Max. operatiang pressure up to 350 bar (5100 PSI)
The DFE conrol is used for the electro-hydraulic closed loop control of the pressure and swivel angle of an axial piston pump The SYHDFEE.. closed loop control system consists of the following components: A4VSO axial piston pump with a built-on proportional valve as the pilot valve VT-DFPE-2X/.. The VT-DFPE..-2X/.. valve with integrated open and closed loop control electronics contains the complete closed loop control function of the DFE system The acquisition of the swivel angle is via a linear sensor type VT-SWA-LIN-1X which is a hall effect based sensor Combination pumps are possible For further information regarding this system see:
Model SYHDFEE Component description, pump A4VSO Component description, valve VT-DFPE Sales information (engineering guidelines) RE 92 050 RE 29 016 RE 30 030-01-V
Pumps and Motors
124
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code SYHDFEE 1X /

Single pump 1) Combination pump 2) Series 10 19 Nom. size 125 Nom. size 180 Nom. size 250 Nom. size 355 Direction of rotation Clockwise (preferred type) Anti-clockwise Pressure fluid FKM seals HFC Shaft end3) Cyl. shaft with key way DIN 6885 Splined shaft to DIN 5480 (standard type) Connection flange3) NG 125 355 > ISO 4-hole = 1X = 125 = 180 = 250 = 355 =R =L =V =F =P =Z =B 0= A= B=
25
*
Further details in clear text Actual pressure input Current input: 4 20 mA C= Voltage input: 0 10 V V= 05V D= 1 10 V E= 0.5 5 V 5) F= 0= 1= Electronic sub-assembly With Without leakage oil compensation Additional function power limitation Without power limitation With power limitation
Actuator line connections Connections B and S: SAE on side, off-set through 90, metric fixing threads 2nd pressure connection B1 opposite B when delivered blanked off with a flange (standard) = 25
Valve mounting orientation integrated electronics parallel to pump axis in the direction of the connection plate (standard)
A= C= 0000 = 0576 =
Valve spool version Standard (for mineral oil to DIN 51524 (HL/HLP)) 4groove spool for HFC pressure fluid Basic pump version Standard (internal pilot oil) Remote supply
1) 2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
See ordering example at the top of page 3 See ordering example at the top of page 3 For dimensions see table on page 11 The through drive is is covered by a cover plate Connection via an M12 component socket Example
Through drive (see table on page 3) Without through drive Universal through drive without hub, without intermediate flange with cover closed Through drive without hub, with cover for mounting: (all combination pumps (2nd) with SAE splined shaft profile) Combination pump 6) Pilot in mm (in.) KC1 4) = A10VSO18 82.55 (3.25) KD3 4) = A10VSO28/45 100 (3.94) KC3 4) = Gear pump 101.6 (4.00) With single pumps the hub and, if necessary, the intermediate flange must be ordered seperately. With combination pumps the front hub and, if necessary, the intermediate flange are included within the scope of supply. N00 = U99 =
Pumps and Motors
125
Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Ordering example:
1)
2)
Ordering example for a single pump SYHDFEE-1X/125R-PZB25N000000A0A0F Ordering example for a combination pump Both of the type codes are to be connected by a + (Material No. 1st pump + Material No. 2nd pump)
Possibility 1: SY2HDFEE1X/ 125 - 045/ R901038404 + R901019184 Possibility 2: SY2HDFEE1X/ 125 - 045/ SYHDFEE-1X/125R-PZB25KD30000A0A0V + SYDFEE-2X/045R-PRA12KD30000A0A0VXX
Combination pump Nom. size of the front pump Nom. size of the rear pump Matarial No. of the front pump (or in clear text if the Matarial No. is not known) Combination part Matarial No. of the rear pump (or in clear text if the Material No. is not known)
Standard models
SYHDFEE-1X/125R-PZB25N00-0000-A0A0F SYHDFEE-1X/180R-PZB25N00-0000-A0A0F SYHDFEE-1X/250R-PZB25N00-0000-A0A0F SYHDFEE-1X/355R-PZB25N00-0000-A0A0F
Through drive
= Not available l = The flange is integrated into the connecion plate zw = Through drive K99 + intermediate flange (sep. order) Without auxiliary pump; without through drive With through drive for mounting an axial piston pump, a gear pump or radial piston pump Flange Hub/splined shaft For mounting an ISO 125, 4-hole 32x2x30x14x9g A4VSO/H/G 40 ISO 140, 4-hole 40x2x30x18x9g A4VSO/H/G 71 ISO 160, 4-hole 50x2x30x24x9g A4VSO/H/G 125/180 ISO 224, 4-hole 60x2x30x28x9g A4VSO/G 250 ISO 224, 4-hole 70x3x30x22x9g A4VSO/G 355 ISO 100, 2-hole 7/8 22-4 (SAE B) A10VSO28BR31 ISO 100, 2-hole 1 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VSO45BR31 ISO 125, 2-hole 1 1/4 32-4 (SAE C) A10VSO71BR31 ISO 125, 2-hole 1 1/2 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VSO100BR31 ISO 180, 4-hole 1 3/4 44-4 (SAE D) A10VSO140BR31 82-2 (SAE A) 5/8 16-4 (SAE A) PGH2, 3 ; PGF2 82-2 (SAE A) 3/4 19-4 (SAE A-B) A10VSO10BR31, 18 101-2 (SAE B) 7/8 22-4 (SAE B) A10VO28BR31; PGF3 101-2 (SAE B) 1 25-4 (SAE B-B) A10VO45BR31; PGH4 127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/4 32-4 (SAE C) A10VO71BR31 127-2 (SAE C) 1 1/2 38-4 (SAE C-C) A10VO100BR31; PGH5 152-4 (SAE D) 1 3/4 44-4 (SAE D) A10VO140BR31 With through drive shaft, without hub, without intermediate flange, with blanked off functional cover Pumps and Motors 126
125 l
Nominal size 180 250 355
N00
l l zw l l zw zw l l l l zw zw l
l l zw l l zw zw zw l l l l zw zw zw l
l l zw zw l l zw zw zw l l l l zw zw zw l
l l zw zw zw l l zw zw zw l l l l zw zw zw l
Kxx 3) Kxx (K34) (K35) (K77) KD3 KD3 (KD5) (KD5) (KD7) KC1 KC1 KC3 KC3 (KC5) (KC5) (KC6) K99 Section 1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 2 Check Valves
Check valve, inline model S .........................................128 Cartridge check valve, cavity mount M-SR ..............129 Pilot operated check valve SV/SL ..............................130 Sandwich Prell valves ZSF ........................................132 Pilot operated prell valve SF ......................................................................................134 SFA ....................................................................................136 Direct operated andwich plate check valve Z1 S 6 ...............................................................................138 Z1 S 10 .............................................................................140 Pilot operated sandwich plate check valve Z2 S 6 ...............................................................................141 Z2 S 10 .............................................................................142 Pilot operated sandwich plate check valve Z2 SRK 6..........................................................................143 Z2 SRK 10 .......................................................................144 Pilot operated sandwich plate check valve Z2 S 16 .............................................................................145 Z2 S 22 .............................................................................146
127
127
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Check valve Model S

Sizes 6 to 30 Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 450 L/min (120 GPM)
For in-line or subplate mounting Leak-free closure in one direction Various cracking pressures (see ordering code)
Model S 15 A1.0/12
Ordering code S
Threaded version "A" 1/4" 3/8" 1/2" 3/4" 1" 1-1/4" 1-1/2" Subplate version "P" ANSI C 06 ANSI C 08 ANSI C 09 Size =6 =8 = 10 = 15 = 20 = 25 = 30 =A
0 /
*
Threaded version no code = 12 = BSP threads SAE threads Modication no. without spring (standard)
0= 0= 1= 2= 3= 5=
Threaded for in-line mounting
Technical data
Hydraulic uid Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Maximum degree of uid contamination C (F) mm2/s (SUS) NBR seals: 30 to +70 (22 to +158) FPM seals: 20 to +70 (4 to +158) 2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. bar (PSI) up to 315 (4600)
Operating pressure
Check Valves
128
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Check valve cartridge Model M-SR

Sizes 8 to 30 Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 400 L/min (106 GPM)
For installation in manifold blocks: available as right angled valve cartridge Leak-free closure in checked direction Various cracking pressure options (see ordering code) Symbol
Size 8 10 15 20 25 30
L mm (in) 36.3 (1.43) 39.3 (1.55) 45.8 (1.80) 55.3 (2.18) 74.3 (2.93) 83.3 (3.28) KE Right angle cartridge
L*
Ordering code M-SR

Cartridge check valve Size 8 Size 10 Size 15 Size 20 Size 25 Size 30 Right angle valve cartridge (typical stock) = M-SR =8 = 10 = 15 = 20 = 25 = 30 = KE 1X =
1X /
/ *
no code = NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions remain unchanged)
05 = (standard) 15 = 30 = 50 =
Technical data
Hydraulic uid Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) High water content (HFA) not permitted C (F) mm2/s (SUS) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to 176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to 176) 2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. bar (PSI) up to 315 (4600)
Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Maximum degree of contamination
Operating pressure
Check Valves
129
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Check valve Model SV/SL

Sizes 6 to 30 Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 450 L/min (120 GPM)
Pilot operated check valve, with leakfree closure in checked direction Subplate mounting with connection dimensions to ISO 5781-06, NFPA T3.5.1M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 POC 06 (for subplates, see datasheet RA 45 062) Threaded connections, for in-line mounting With or without external drain connection, as required Optional pilot poppet, for cushioned decompression and reduced hydraulic shock Various cracking pressures (see ordering code)
Model SV 10 PA.4X/...
Ordering code
S
Internally drained (without drain port) Externally drained (with drain port) Subplate mounting Ordering code 10 20 30 Ordering code 10 15 20 25 30 Subplate mounting Threaded connections NFPA interface standard POC 06 POC 08 POC 10 Subplates available SAE, NPT, BSP 3/8" and 1/2" 3/4" and 1" 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" A= B= =V =L
4X /
/ *
no desig. = 12 = no desig. = V= Threaded connections BSP threaded ports SAE threaded ports NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals suitable for phosphate ester uids (HFD-R)
4X =
Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49; externally interchangeable) Cracking pressure
Threaded in-line connections SAE 8; 3/416 12; 1-1/1612 16; 1-5/1612 20; 1-5/812 24; 1-7/812 =P =G
1= 2= With decompression poppet Without decompression poppet
Check Valves
130
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Page 2 of 2 Issue: 01,01
Technical data
General Size Weight (approx.) Subplate mounting Threaded connections Mounting position Direction of ow Hydraulic Operating pressure Pilot control pressure range Pilot volume Port X Port Y (only type SL) Control areas (see sectional drawing page 1) Area A1 Area A2 Area A3 Area A4 Hydraulic uid Fluid Temperature range Viscosity range Maximum degree of uid contamination NBR seals FPM seals
2
10 kg (lbs) kg (lbs) 1.8 (4.0) 2.1 (4.6) Optional
15
20 4.7 (10.4)
25
30 7.8 (17.2)
5.4 (11.9)
5.4 (11.9)
10 (22.0)
10 (22.0)
Free ow A to B; B to A when piloted open
bar (PSI) bar (PSI) cm3 (in3) cm (in ) cm (in ) cm3 (in3) cm3 (in3) cm (in )
3 3 3 3 3 3
... 315 (4600) 5 315 (72 ... 4570) 2.5 (0.153) 2.0 (0.122) 1.3 (0.206) 0.33 (0.051) 3.8 (0.589) 0.8 (0.122) 10.8 (0.659) 10.8 (0.659) 19.3 (1.176) 19.3 (1.176) 9.6 (0.586) 3.5 (0.536) 0.7 (0.109) 9.6 (0.586) 3.5 (0.536) 0.7 (0.109) 17.5 (1.068) 17.5 (1.068) 5.7 (0.887) 1.3 (0.206) 5.7 (0.887) 1.3 (0.206)
10.2 (1.576) 10.2 (1.576) 16.6 (2.575) 16.6 (2.575) 1.1 (0.175) 1.1 (0.175) 1.5 (0.239) 1.5 (0.239)
Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) C (F) C (F) mm /s (SUS) 30 80 ( 22 ... 176) 20 80 ( 4 ... 176) 35 ... 2320 Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
Check Valves
131
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Prell valve Sandwich plate Model ZSF

Nominal sizes 32 to 125 Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5100 PSI)
Hydraulic pilot operated prell valve, sandwich plate construction for ange mounting for pipe installation With decompression Integral high pressure supply port Model ZSF 40 F.11X/...
Ordering code ZSF

Nominal size Nominal size 32 Nominal size 40 Nominal size 50 Nominal size 63 Nominal size 80 Nominal size 100 Nominal size 125 Mounting For ange connection With decompression
1) 2)
1 1X / M /
*
Further details in clear text
= 32 = 40 = 50 = 63 = 80 = 100 = 125 =F =1 2X = * 1X =
121) = 012) = M=
Threaded connections SAE threads metric threads NBR seals (other seals on request) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure uid has to be taken into account!
Applicable to Sizes 32, 40, and 50 only Applicable to Sizes 63, 80, 100, and 125 1=
Series 10 to 19 (series 10 to 19: externally interchangeable) Series 20 to 29 (series 20 to 29: externally interchangeable) Spring return of main poppet opening pressure 1.74 PSI
* Through YR2006, series 2X versions will displace series 1X. As substitutions occur for preferred versions, series 2X will be made preferred.
Check Valves
132
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Symbols
Prell valve without directional valve model ZSF X A
P B
Technical data
Nominal size Weight Installation position Maximum operating pressure Ports B, P Port X Port A Cracking pressure Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Degree of contamination bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) C (F) mm2/s (SUS) Size kg (lbs) 32 40 50 63 7 (15.4) 80 10 (22) 100 15 (33) 125 26 (57)
3.5 (7.7) 4.2 (9.2) 5.5 (12) optional 350 (5100) 150 (2175) 16 (230) 0.12 (1.75) 30 +80 (22 to +176) 10 800 (45 to 3720)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
Check Valves
133
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pre-ll valve Model SF

Hydraulic pilot operated check valve For ange connections For reservoir mounting With or without de-compression As a check valve Reduced shock noise due to damping measures Model SF...A.-1-4X/
Ordering details SF
Nominal size 125 Nominal size 150 Nominal size 200 Nominal size 250 Nominal size 300 Nominal size 350 Nominal size 400 = 125 = 150 = 200 = 250 = 300 = 350 = 400
1 4X /
*
Further details in clear text No Code = 12 = No code = BSP thread connection SAE thread connection (X pilot port)
Connection type =A For flange connections =B For reservoir mounting As a cartridge valve without control spool (check valve) = K With de-compression 1) Without de-compression =1 =0 4X =
BSP thread connection (other seals on request) SAE thread connection 12 = (x pilot port) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Spring return of the main poppet Opening pressure 0.2 bar (3.0 PSI)
1=
1)
Not with version K
Check Valves
134
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (for applications outside these applications, please consult us!)
Installation Nominal size Connection type A (connection A: welding ange ND 16 to DIN 2633) Connection types B and K Port X (only with types A and B) BSP SAE Max. operating pressure Port A Ports B and X Size mm (in.) Optional 125 125 (5) G 3/4 150 150 (6) G 3/4 200 200 (8) G1 250 250 (10) G 1 1/4 300 300 (12) G 1 1/4 -20; 1 5/8-12 350 350 (14) G 1 1/2 -24 1 7/8-12 400 400 (16) G 1 1/2 -24 1 7/8-12
Reservoir mounting -12; -12; -16; -20; 11/16-12 11/16-12 15/16-20 1 5/8-12
bar (PSI) 16 (232) bar (PSI) 350 (5076)
Opening pressure bar (PSI) 0.2 (3.0) (pressure differential at the main poppet to overcome the spring pressure) Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524; Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil); Other pressure uids on request C 30 to +80 (22 to +176) mm /s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3720) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
2
Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Degree of contamination
Applications
Application 1 Application 2 Application 3
b a a
2 2 1 3 2 1
b 500 mm (19.7 in.)
1
Size of filling tank must be a minimum of 1.5 x cylinder capacity
1 Cylinder 2 Pre-fill valve 3 This metal sheet is not included within the scope of supply. Its use avoids the formation of a depressed suction vortex if the reservoir is too small and at low oil levels (a). a Min. 300 mm (11.8 in.) when cylinder is extended b Up to 1000 mm (39.4 in.) at the maximum given flow Check Valves 135 Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pre-ll valve Model SFA

Hydraulic pilot operated check valve For threaded connections (size 32) For ange connections (from size 40) For mounting directly onto the work cylinder With or without decompression, optional Integrated high pressure connection Model SFA 40 FT0-1X/M/01
Ordering details SFA

Nominal size Nominal size 32 Nominal size 40 Nominal size 50 Nominal size 63 Nominal size 80 Connection type (port A) For threaded connections (only NS 32) For flange connections (from NS 40) Without tank drilling With tank drilling With decompression Without decompression = 32 = 40 = 50 = 63 = 80 =G =F = No code =T =1 =0 1X =
1X / M / 01
*
Further details in clear text Connection version Threaded holes, with pipe threads to DIN ISO 228, DIN 3852 part 2
01 = M=
NBR seals (other seals on request) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! Series 10 to 19 (Series 10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
Check Valves
136
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Nominal size Weight Installation Ambient temperature range Maximum operating pressure Size kg (lbs.) C (F) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) 32 40 50 63 80 6 (13.2) 7 (15.4) 10.5 (23.1) 16 (35.3) 23 (50.7) Optional 30 to +80 (22 to +176) NBR seals 350 (5076) 150 (2175) 16 (232) 0.12 (1.74) See application cases on page 7 Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 2); Fast bio de-gradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 2); Other pressure uids on request 30 to +80 (22 to +176) 10 to 800 (45 to 3720) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/15 3)
Ports B, P Port X Port A
Opening pressure 1) Maximum ow Pressure uid
Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Cleanliness class to ISO code
1) 2) 3)
C (F) mm2/s (SUS)
Pressure differential required at the main poppet to overcome the spring force Suitable for NBR and FKM seals The cleanliness class stated for the components must be adhered too in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents faults from occurring and at the same time increases the component service life. For the selection of lters see data sheets RE 50 070, RE 50 076 and RE 50 081.
Maximum ow qv in L/min (GPM) [A to B] for the various applications

Size 32 40 50 63 80 Application 1 200 (52.8) 300 (79.3) 500 (132.1) 800 (211.3) 1200 (317.0) Application 2 170 (44.9) 250 (66.0) 400 (105.7) 650 (171.7) 1000 (264.2) If the pre-fill valve or pipe line is too small, gases may be released from the oil resulting in consequential damage which in turn often leads, in the long term, to damage to the cylinder seals. Application 1
a
1 Cylinder 2 Pre-fill valve 3 This metal sheet is not included within the scope of supply. Its use avoids the formation of a depressed suction vortex in small tanks and at low oil levels (a). 4 Take the supply cross-section into account!
Application 2
b
Note regarding application 2

a
A B 3 2 1 2 1 A
A B B
500 mm (19.7 in.)
Dimensions a and b a = Min. 300 mm (11.8 in.) when the cylinder is extended b = Up to 1000 mm (39.4 in.) at the maximum given flow Check Valves 137
Please consult us when operating close to the limiting parameters. However, it is often sufficient to choose a pipe one size larger.
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Check Valve Model Z1S

Nominal size 6 Series 4X Max. operatiang pressure up to 350 bar (5076 PSI) Max. ow 40 l/min (10.57 GPM)
Sandwich plate valve for use in vertical stacking assemblies Position of ports to DIN 24340 form A (without locating bore) (standard) Position of ports to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 (with locating bore) Eight different checking functions, optional Improved freedom from leakage due to poppet/bushing made of heavy-duty plastic material Optional seawater-resistant version Supplementary documentation: Sandwich plates size 6 RE 48050 and RE 59015
Model Z1S
Ordering code Z1S 6

Check valve, sandwich plate Size 6 Leak-free closure in channel A (A1 A2) Leak-free closure in channel B (B1 B2) Leak-free closure in channel A (A2 A1) Leak-free closure in channel B (B2 B1) Leak-free closure in channels A and B (A2 A1) and (B2 B1) Leak-free closure in channels P and T (P1 P2) and (T2 T1) Leak-free closure in channel P (P1 P2) Leak-free closure in channel T (T2 T1) (For symbol, see page 3) Cracking pressure 0.5 bar (7.25 PSI) 1.5 bar (21.75 PSI) 3.0 bar (43.50 PSI) 5.0 bar (72.50 PSI) =6 =A =B =C =D =E =F =P =T No code = J=
4X /
*
Further details in clear text No code = Without locating bore /60 1) = With locating bore /62 = With locating bore and locating pin ISO 8752-3x8-St V= Seal material FKM seals (other seals on enquiry) Caution! Observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid used! Standard Seawater-resistant 2)
= 05 = 15 = 30 = 50
Component series 40 to 49 4X = (40 to 49: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)

1)
2)
Locating pin ISO 8752-3x8-St, Material no. R900005694 (separate order) With ordering code J, outside parts are galvanised in contrast to the standard version
Check Valves
138
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Notes
Valve housing (steel) and spool with sealing bushing (plastic) can be disassemled to allow proper disposal. The integrated plastic bushing (blue) assumes a sealing function! Do not remove or damage!
General Weight Installation orientation Ambient temperature range Hydraulic Maximum operating pressure Cracking pressure Maximum ow Hydraulic uid Metal seal Soft seal bar (PSI) 350 (5076) bar (PSI) 0.5 (7.25); 1.5 (21.75); 3 (43.50); 5 (72.50) bar (PSI) 0.5 (7.25) l/min (GPM) 40 (10.6) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524; fast bio-degradable hydraulic uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221); HETG (rape seed oil); HEPG (polyglycols); HEES (synthetic esters); other hydraulic uids on enquiry C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) mm /s (SUS) 2.8 to 500 (13 to 2320) Class 20/18/15 1)
2
kg (lbs.) 0.8 (1.76) Optional C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176)
Hydraulic uid temperature range Viscosity range
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic uid - cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c)
1)
The cleanliness classes specied for components must be adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents malfunction and, at the same time, prolongs the service life of components. For the selection of lters, see data sheets RE 50070, RE 50076, RE 50081, RE 50086 and RE 50088.
Check Valves
139
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Check valve Sandwich plate Model Z1 S 10

Size 10 Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 100 L/min (26.4 GPM)
Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Leak-free closure of one or two service ports, as required Porting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 05 Optional cracking pressures (see ordering code) Model Z1 S 10..-../.V
Ordering code Z1 S 10
Leak free closure in port(s): A (A2 + A1) B (B2 + B1) P (P1 + P2) T (TA2 + TA1) (For symbols, see below) Cracking pressure 0.5 bar (7 PSI) Cracking pressure 3.0 bar (45 PSI) Cracking pressure 5.0 bar (75 PSI) =C =D =P =T =1 =2 =3
3X / V
*
Further details to be written in clear text no code = V= metal seal FPM seals suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) Other seal types on request Series 3X (model with metal seal) (30 to 39, externally interchangeable)
3X =
Technical data
Hydraulic fluid: Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Fluid Temperature range: 20 +80 C (4 ... 176 F) Viscosity range: 2.8 500 mm2/s (35 ... 2320 SUS) Maximum degree of contamination Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. Operating pressure: ... 315 bar (4600 PSI) Cracking pressure: Model Z1 S10..-3X/V 0.5 bar (7 PSI) 3 bar (45 PSI) 5 bar (75 PSI) Fluid velocity: Model Z1 S10..-3X/V Flow: 100 L/min (26.4 GPM) Weight (approx.): 0.8 kg (1.7 lbs) (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!) > 4 m/s (13 ft/s)
Symbols
Z1 S 10C.-../..
Z1 S 10D.-../..
Z1 S 10P.-../..
Z1 S 10T.-../..
Check Valves
140
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pilot operated check valve Sandwich plate Model Z2 S 6

Size 6, Series 6X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 60 L/min (16 GPM)
Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Leak-free closure of one or two actuator ports, as required Porting pattern to ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 03 Optional cracking pressures (see ordering code) Model Z2 S 6.6X/...
P.O. Check valve, size 6 Sandwich plate design Check assembly in lines A and B Check assembly in line A Check assembly in line B 1.5 bar (22 PSI) cracking pressure 3.0 bar (45 PSI) cracking pressure = =A =B =1 =2 6X =
6X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text no code = V= NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester uids Series 6X (60 to 69, externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Viscosity range: 2.8 500 mm2/s (352320 SUS) Flow (max): 60 L/min (16 GPM) Area ratio: A2/A1 = 3:1 Weight (approx.): 0.8 kg (1.8 lbs) (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Check Valves
141
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Leak-free closure of one or two actuator ports, as required Porting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 05 Optional cracking pressures (see ordering code) Model Z 2 S 10..3X/
P.O. Check valve, size 10 Sandwich plate design Leakage free closure of ports A and B Leakage free closure of port A Leakage free closure of port B Cracking pressure 1.5 bar (22 PSI) Cracking pressure 3 bar (45 PSI) Cracking pressure 6 bar (90 PSI) = =A =B =1 =2 =3 3X =
3X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text no code = V= NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39, externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Maximum ow: 120 L/min (32 GPM) Orientation: see symbols Area ratio: A1/A2 = 1:2.86 A3/A2 = 1:11.45 Weight (approx.): 2 kg (4.4 lbs) (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Check Valves
142
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Check valve Sandwich plate Model Z2 SRK 6

Size 6, Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) Maximum ow 40 L/min (10.5 GPM)
Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-3 NFPA T3.5.MR1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Sandwich plate design Leak-free closure of two actuator ports Model Z2 SRK611X/V
Ordering code, symbols ( = valve side, = manifold sides)

Symbol
1
Cracking pressure
Part no.
Model designation
1.5 bar (22 PSI)

P A 2 B T
R900564519
Z2SRK6-1-1X/V
Technical data (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Hydraulic uid Temperature range of uid Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Permissible ow max. Direction of ow Cracking pressure in open direction Area ratio Weight kg (lbs) L/min (GPM)
2
Petroleum oil (HL; HLP); phosphate ester (HFD-R) C (F) mm /s (SUS) 20 to +80 ( 4 to 176) 10 to 800 (60 to 3720) Maximum permissible degree of contamination to ISO 4406, class 18/15. For this, we recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. 40 (10.5) see symbol see operating curves A1/A2 = 1/3 approx. 1.1 (2.4)
Check Valves
143
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pilot operated check valve Sandwich plate Model Z2 SRK 10

Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-5 NFPA T3.5.MR1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Sandwich plate design Leak-free closure of two actuator ports Model Z2 SRK1011X/V
Ordering code, symbols ( = valve side, = manifold sides)

Symbol Cracking pressure Part no. Model designation
1.5 bar (22 PSI)

TA P A
R900564520
Z2SRK10-1-1X/V
TB
Hydraulic uid Temperature range of uid Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Permissible ow max. Direction of ow Cracking pressure in open direction Area ratio Weight kg (lbs) L/min (GPM)
2
Petroleum oil (HL; HLP); phosphate ester (HFD-R) C (F) mm /s (SUS) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) 10 to 800 (60 to 3720) Maximum permissible degree of contamination to ISO 4406, class 18/15. For this, we recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. 80 (21) see symbol see operating curves A1/A2 = 1/3 approx. 3.2 (7.1)
Check Valves
144
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Leak-free closure of one or two service ports, as required Z2S16 Porting pattern to ISO 4401-7, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 07; Z2S22 Optional cracking pressures (see ordering code) Model Z2 S1615X/...
Pilot operated check valve Sandwich plate design Size 16 (D 07) Leakfree closure in lines A and B Leakfree closure in line A Leakfree closure in line B Cracking pressure 3.0 bar (45 PSI) Cracking pressure 5.0 bar (75 PSI)
5X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text no code = NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59, externally interchangeable)
= 16 = =A =B =1 =2 V= 5X =
Technical data
Maximum ow: 300 L/min (80 GPM) Size 16 Weight (approx.): 6.5 kg (14.3 lbs) Size 16 (For applications outside these parameters, please consult us!)
Check Valves
145
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RA 21 564/06.98 (Size 22)

Pilot operated check valve Sandwich plate Model Z2 S22

Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Leak-free closure of one or two service ports, as required Porting pattern to ISO 4401-8, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 08 Various cracking pressures (see ordering code) Model Z2 S2215X/...
Ordering code
Z1 S22
Pilot operated check valve Sandwich plate design Size 22 (D 08) Leakfree closure in lines A and B Leakfree closure in line A Leakfree closure in line B Cracking pressure 3.0 bar (45 PSI) Cracking pressure 5.0 bar (75 PSI)
5X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text no code = NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals, suitable for Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59, externally interchangeable)
= 22 = =A =B =1 =2 V= 5X =
Hydraulic uid Temperature range of uid Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Permissible ow max. Direction of ow Cracking pressure in open direction Area ratio Weight (approx.) kg (lbs) L/min (GPM) C (F ) mm2/s (SUS) Petroleum oil (HL; HLP); phosphate ester (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) 2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Maximum permissible degree of contamination to ISO 4406, class 18/15. For this, we recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. 450 (120) see complete data sheet see complete data sheet A1/A2 = 1/13.6; A3/A2 = 1/2.8 12 (26.5)
Check Valves
146
Section 2
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 3 Directional Valves
Directional poppet valve with solenoid operation M-SED 6 ...........................................................................148 M-SEW 6 ..........................................................................150 M-.SED 10........................................................................152 M-.SEW 10 ......................................................................154 Directional valves, mechanical/manual operation, WM.6 ................................................................156 Directional valves with uidic actuators WP, WH...............................................................................158 Directional valves, manual or hydraulic operated WMM, WMD, WP, WN, or WHD ..................................160 Solenoid operated directional control valves WE ........................................................................................162 Five-chamber direct operated directional valves D05, 5-.WE 10 ...................................................166 Direct operated, spool type soft shift WE6 /A12, WE10 /A12 ..........................................168 Pilot operated, spool type WEH10, 16, 22, 25, 32 D05, D07, D08, D10 ....................................................170 Sandwich type isolation valves Z4WE 6 ..................172 Sandwich type isolation valves Z4WEH 10 ............174 DIN cartridge logic valves Directional function LC/LFA1650 ......................176 Pressure function LC/LFA1650 ..........................178
147
147
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

3/2- and 4/2-way Directional poppet valves with solenoid operation Model M-SED 6
Direct operated directional poppet valves with solenoid operation Mounts on standard ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 03 interface 10-24 UNC (M5) mounting bolts for 350 bar (5000 PSI) Model Leak-free closure in checked position Resists silting, even during extended pressure periods Model M-3SED 6 UK 1X/350CG24N9K4 with plug-in connector CK Solenoids with removable coils Coils can be changed without engaging uid
Ordering code M
3 actuator ports 4 actuator ports Poppet valve Nominal size 6 Actuator ports Symbols
A a a P A a a P T A B a a P A a a P T b T B b b b b b T b b
SED
1X / 350
K4 /
*
No code = NBR seals without cartridge No code = check valve, with throttle insert with cartridge check valve P= orifice 1.2 mm (0.047) B12 = orifice 2.0 mm (0.079) B20 = orifice 2.2 mm (0.087) B22 =
=3 =4 =6 3 4 K4 1) = = UK
Electrical connection individual connection; with component plug DIN 43 650-AM2, without plug-in connector with protected manual override Example: 24, 96 V DC
= CK
1)
N9 = G24 =
Plug-in connectors must be ordered separately.
=D
=Y
= available Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: externally interchangeable) Operating pressure 350 bar (5000 PSI) Wet pin solenoid with removable coil = 1X = 350 =C
Directional Valves
148
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation Ambient temperature range Weight 3/2-way directional poppet valve 4/2-way directional poppet valve Hydraulic data Max. operating pressure Max. ow Pressure uid
1) 2)
optional C (F) kg (lbs) kg (lbs) 30 to +50 (22 +122) 1.5 (3.306) 2.3 (5.069)
bar (PSI) L/min (GPM)
see table on page 7 of datasheet 25 (6.60) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1); fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1); HEPG (polyglycols) 2); HEES (synthetic esters) 2); other pressure uids on request
suitable for NBR and FPM seals only suitable for FPM seals C (F)
Pressure uid temperature range
30 to +80 (22 +176) (with NBR seals) 20 to +80 (4 +176) (with FPM seals)
Viscosity range Degree of contamination
mm2/s (SUS)
2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
Electrical data Voltage type Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power consumption Duty Switching time to ISO 6403 Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 Max. coil temperature 3)
3)
DC V % W 24, 96 10 30 continuous see table below cycles/h up to 15000 operations per hour, see table below IP 65 C (F) 150 (302) When connecting the electrics, the protective conductor (PE ) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
Due to the occurring surface temperature of the solenoid coils, the European standards EN563 and EN982 must be taken into account!
Directional Valves
149
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

2/2-, 3/2- and 4/2-way Directional poppet valves with solenoid operation Model M-SEW 6
Size 6, Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 420/630 bar (6100/9150 PSI) Maximum ow 25 L/min (6.6 GPM)
Mounts on standard ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 03 interface (except 630 bar version) 10-24 UNC (M5) mounting bolts for 420 bar (6100 PSI) Model 1/4-20 UNC (M6) mounting bolts for 630 bar (9150 PSI) Model Leak-free closure in checked position Resists silting, even during extended pressure periods Solenoids with removable coils
Model M-3SEW 6 U3X/420MG24N9K4 with plug-in connector and Model M-4SEW 6 D3X/420MG24N9K4 with plug-in connector
Ordering code M
A a a P A a a P A a a P A a a b P T b T B b b T B b b T b b
SEW 6
3X /
K4 /
*
=3 =4 =6 2 3 4
=U
NBR seals No code = FPM seals V= (other seals on request) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! Without cartridge check valve, without throttle insert With cartridge check valve P= Orifice mm (in.) B10, 12 = Throttle used when flow exceeds the power limit of the valve; inserted in the P port No code = K4 1;2) = Electrical connection Individual connection, with component plug DIN 43 650-AM2, without plug-in connector With protected manual override Example: 12, 24, 96 V DC
=C
=D
=Y
= available Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) Operating pressure 420 bar (6100 PSI) (10-24/M5 mounting bolts) Operating pressure up to 630 bar (9150 PSI) (1/4-20/M6 mounting bolts) Solenoid (air gap) with removable coil = 3X G24 =
1)
N9 =
= 420 = 630 =M
2)
Plug-in connectors must be ordered separately. For additional connector information, see datasheet RA 08 006. For the connection to an AC supply a DC solenoid must be used which is controlled via a rectier.
Directional Valves
150
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation Max. ambient temperature Weight 2/2-way poppet valve 3/2-way poppet valve 4/2-way poppet valve Hydraulic data Max. operating pressure Max. ow Pressure uid 1) suitable for NBR and FPM seals 2) only suitable for FPM seals Pressure uid temperature range C (F) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) see table on page 7 25 (6.6) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1); Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RA 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1); HEPG (Polyglycols) 2); HEES (synthetic esters) 2); other pressure uids on request 30 to +80 (22 to +176) (with NBR seals) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) (with FPM seals) Viscosity range Degree of contamination mm /s (SUS)
2
optional C (F) kg (lbs) kg (lbs) kg (lbs) +50 (+122) 1.5 (3.31) 1.5 (3.31) 2.3 (5.1)
Electrical data Model of voltage Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power consumption Duty Switching time to ISO 6403 Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 Max. coil temperature
3)
DC V % W 12, 24, 96 10 30 continuous see table below cycles/h 15000 IP 65 C (F) 150 (302) When connecting electric power, the protective conductor (PE ) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
3)
Due to the surface temperatures which occur on the solenoid coils, the European standards EN563 and EN982 must be taken into account!
Directional Valves
151
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

3/2- and 4/2-way Directional poppet valves with solenoid operation Model M-.SED 10
Direct operated directional poppet valve with solenoid actuation Mounts on standard ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 interface subplates to datasheet RA 45 054 (separate order) Leak-free closure in checked position Switching is ensured even when under pressure for long periods of time Solenoid coil can be rotated by 90 Coils can be changed without engaging uid Individual electrical connection With protected manual override, standard N9
Model M-3SED 10 UK1X/350CG24N9K4 with plug-in connector CK
Ordering code M
A a a P A a a P T A B a a P A a a P T b T B b b b b b T b b
SED 10
1X / 350
K4 /
*
Further details to be written in clear text No code = NBR seals
=3 =4 = 10 3 4 P= = UK K4 1) =
No code =
without cartridge check valve, without throttle insert with cartridge check valve
Electrical connection individual connection; with component plug DIN 43 650-AM2, without plug-in connector with protected manual override Example: 24, 96 V DC Wet pin solenoid with removable coil
= CK
N9 = G24 = C=
=D 1X =
350 =
Operating pressure 350 bar (5000 PSI) Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: externally interchangeable)
=Y
1)
Plug-in connectors must be ordered separately.
= available
Directional Valves
152
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation Ambient temperature range Weight 3/2-way directional poppet valve 4/2-way directional poppet valve Hydraulic data Max. operating pressure Max. ow Pressure uid
1) 2)
optional C (F) kg (lbs) kg (lbs) 30 to +50 (22 to +122) 2.6 (5.7) 3.9 (8.6)
bar (PSI) L/min (GPM )
see table on page 7 40 (10.60) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1); fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1); HEPG (polyglycols) 2); HEES (synthetic esters) 2); other pressure uids on request
suitable for NBR and FPM seals only suitable for FPM seals C (F)
30 to +80 (22 to +176) (with NBR seals) 20 to +80 (4 +176) (with FPM seals)
SUS (mm2/s)
Electrical data Voltage type Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power consumption Duty Switching time to ISO 6403 Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 Max. coil temperature 3)
3)
DC V % W 24, 96 10 30 continuous see table below cycles/h up to 15000 operations per hour, see table below IP 65 C (F) 150 (302) When connecting the electrics, the protective conductor (PE ) must be connected according to the relevant regulations.
Due to the occurring surface temperature of the solenoid coils, the European standards EN563 and EN982 must be taken into account!
Directional Valves
153
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

3/2- and 4/2-way Directional poppet valves with solenoid operation Model M-.SEW 10
Size 10, Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 420/630 bar (6100/9135 PSI) Maximum ow 40 L/min (10.5 GPM)
Directly operated directional poppet valve with solenoid operation Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A, ISO 4401 and CETOP RP 121 H, subplates to data sheet RA 45 054 (separate order) Leak-free closure in checked position Resists silting, even during extended pressure periods Solenoid coil can be rotated by 90 Single electrical connection With manual override, standard
Model M-3SEW 10 U1X/ 420MG24N9Z45
Model M-4SEW 10 D1X/ 420MG24N9Z45
Ordering code M
A a a P A a a P A a a P A a a b P T b T B b b T B b b T b b
SEW 10
1X /
K4 /
*
=3 =4 = 10 2 3 4
No code = V=
NBR seals FPM seals Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid must be taken into account!
=U
=C
=D
Without cartridge check valve or orifice insert With cartridge check P= valve insert Orifice mm (in.) B10, 12 = Throttle used when flow exceeds the power limit of the valve; inserted in the P port No code = K4 1) = no code = N9 = = 1X = 420 = 630 M=
1)
=Y
Electrical connectors without angled plug connector without manual override (24 V only) with protected manual override 24, 96 V DC removable air gap solenoid
= available Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: externally interchangeable) Operating pressure up to 420 bar (6100 PSI) Operating pressure up to 630 bar (9150 PSI) G24 =
Plug-in connectors must be ordered separately. For additional information, see datasheet RA 08 006.
Directional Valves
154
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Mounting position Ambient temperature, max. Weight (approx.) 3/2-way poppet valve 4/2-way poppet valve Hydraulic Operating pressure, max. Flow, max. Hydraulic uid
1) 2)
optional C (F) kg (lbs) kg (lbs) 50 (122) 2.0 (4.40) 3.5 (7.71)
bar (PSI) L/min (GPM)
420/630 (6100/9135) 40 (10.60) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1); Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RA 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1); HEPG (Polyglycol) 2); HEES (synthetic ester) 2); other uids on request
Suitable for NBR and FPM seals Only suitable for FPM seals C (F)
Fluid temperature range
NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +172) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176)
Viscosity range Maximum degree of contamination Electrical Type of supply Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power requirement Duty cycle Operating time to ISO 6403 Shifting frequency Type of protection to DIN 40 050 Coil temperature range
mm2/s (SUS)
2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
DC V % W 24, 96 10 30 100 % see table Cycles/h 15000 IP 65 C (F) up to 150 (302)
Directional Valves
155
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2-way Directional valves Mechanical/Manual operation Model WM.6
Size 6, Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 60 L/minn (16.0 GPM)
Direct operated spool type directional control valves Mounts on standard ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 interface For subplates, see data sheet RA 45 052 Mechanical/manual operation
Ordering code 6
4 service ports Hand lever Rotary knob Size 6 Spool type e.g. C, D, E, H, J, W, Y Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59, externally interchangeable) = 5X =4 = WMM = WMD =6
5X /
*
No code = No code = No code = F= NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) without orifice insert with spring return (available for WMM) with detent (available for WMM, WMD)
Directional Valves
156
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation position Weight Hydraulic Operating pressure max Ports A, B, P Port T: for WMM, WMD, WMDA for WMR, WMU Max. volume ow Flow section (Control position 0) Hydraulic uid Fluid temperature range
2
optional kg (lbs.) approx. 1.4 (3.1)
bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM)
315 (4600) 160 (2320) With spool types A or B, port T must be used as a drain port if the operating pressure is higher than the permissible tank pressure.
60 (900)
60 (16.0) with spool type W 3% of nominal section Petroleum oils (HM, HL,HLP); Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R)
C (F)
NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176)
Viscosity range
mm /s (SUS)
2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75.
Maximum degree of uid contamination Operating force/-torque Valve type Operating torque max. Operating force without tank pressure with and without detent 150 bar tank pressure kg (lbs) kg (lbs) Ncm (lb-in)
WMM 20 (4.5) 30 (6.7)
WMD/WMDA 150 (13.3)
Directional Valves
157
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2-way Directional valves with uidic actuators Model WP, WH
Nominal size 6 Series 6X (WP), 5X (WH) Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 60 L/min (16 GPM)
Fluidic actuators
Ordering code 4
4 actuator ports Fluidic actuation Pneumatic Hydraulic Nominal size 6 = WP = WH =6 No code =
/ 5
5= No code = No code = NPT threaded connection NBR seals Without orice insert Without manual override With spring return
No code =
Symbols, e.g. = C, D, E, G, H, J, M, Y (For symbols and examples see below) WP Series 60 to 69 (60 to 69: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) WH Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) = 6X
= 5X
Symbols =C =D =E =G
=Y
=H =J
Attention! Take the pressure intensication into account with differential cylinders!
=M
Directional Valves
158
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve type Installation Ambient temperature range C (F) Optional 1) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FKM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Weight Valve with: Hydraulic Max. operating pressure Ports A, B, P Port T Max. ow Flow cross-section (switched position 0): Min. control pressure Max. control pressure Control volume Pressure uid With symbol Q With symbol W bar (PSI) bar (PSI) cm (in )
3 3
WP
WH
1 operating cylinder 2 operating cylinders
kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.)
Approx. 1.8 (4.0) Approx. 2.0 (4.4)
Approx. 2.0 (4.4) Approx. 2.2 (4.9)
bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM)
Up to 315 (4600) Up to 160 (2300) (with symbols A and B, the port T must be used as leakage port when the operating pressure is above 160 bar (2300 PSI). 60 (16) 6 % of the nominal cross-section 3 % of the nominal cross-section 4 (60) (see char. curves on page 5) 10 (145) 1.23 (0.075) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 3); Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 3); HEPG (polyglycols) 4); HEES (synthetic ester) 4); Other pressure uids on request 6 to 10 (87 to 145) > tank pressure 2) 200 (2900)
C (F)
NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FKM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176)
mm2/s (SUS)
2.8 to 500 (35 to 2318) Maximum permissible degree of contamintion of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
3) 4)
1) 2)
With version ../O.. (A, C, and D): horizontal Performance limits dependent on the minimum control pressure, see datasheet
Suitable for NBR and FPM seals Only suitable for FKM seals
Directional Valves
159
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2-way Directional valves Manual or hydraulic operated Models WMM, WMD, WP, WN, or WHD
Direct operated spool type directional control valves Mounts on standard ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 interface For subplates, see data sheet RA 45 054 Available operator options: Hand lever or hydraulic pilot Manual operation
Symbols
A a P b T B a P A b T B
=E =G
=C
=H
=D
A a P T B b P A a T B b
3) Note: When ordering a spool with only two positions o & a or o & b, specify = Y the desired position a or b after the spool code. Example: Spool E with spool position a Ordering Code 4 WMM10EA-3X
=J =M
Pilot uid operation
Ordering code 10
4 service ports Hand lever Rotary hand knob Pneumatic piloted 1.5 to 6 bar (22 to 87 PSI) 4.5 to 12 bar (65 to 175 PSI) Hydraulic operated =4 = WMM = WMD = WN = WP = WHD = 10 no code = F= OF = 3X = 12 = no code = no code =
3X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text SAE threaded connections (WHD only) NBR seals for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) without orice insert with spring return with detent without spring return, with detent Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39; externally interchangeable)
ISO size 5, NFPA/ANSI D 05 interface Spool type ex. C, D, E, G, H, J, Y for possible spool configurations, see above
Valves with both operators (3-position spool) MM, WHD model with 3-position spools and Operator a side only Operator b side only
= no desig. =A =B
Directional Valves
160
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Hydraulic Maximum operating pressure Ports A, B, P Port T Maximum ow Hydraulic uids Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Maximum degree of uid contamination C (F) mm2/s (SUS) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM 315 (4600) 160 (2320) 120 (32) Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) 2.8 to 500 (35 to 2320) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. (For spool types A and B, port T must be use a drain port, if the operating pressure exceeds 160 bar (2320 PSI)
Directional Valves
161
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2-way Directional control valves with wet pin AC or DC solenoids Model WE 6.. /E
Direct operated, solenoid controlled directional spool valve, heavy duty construction Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 03 Subplates, see datasheet RA 45 052 Removable coils for quick replacement, or conversion, in AC or DC voltages Dual frequency solenoids AC voltage with 50 or 60 Hz operation Individual electrical connectors Wet pin core tubes, with high pressure tank capacity, standard
Model 4 WE 6...6X/EG 24 N9K4 with plug-in connector
Ordering code
2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 15 19 22 23
WE
3 service ports 4 service ports Size 6 =3 =4 =6
6X / OF E
N9
*
Further details in clear text No code = V= NBR seals for petroleum oil (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals for phosphate ester (HFD-R)
Spool e.g. C, D, E, G, H, J, M, W, Y Series 60 to 69 (60 to 69: externally interchangeable) Without spring return but with detent High performance solenoid wet pin (oil-immersed) with removable coil Voltages DC 12, 24, 96 AC 1) 110, 230 With protected manual override (Standard)
1)
= 6X = OF =E
Example Example
= G 24 = W110 = N9
AC Voltage and Frequency 110 = 110V50Hz, 110V60Hz, 120V60Hz 230 = 220V50Hz, 220V60Hz, 240V60Hz
Type of electrical connection to data sheet RA 08 006 Direct solenoid connections Without angled plug connector(s) K4 = Central solenoid connections Terminal box with 2 1/2" NPT conduit DA = conn DAL = Terminal box with two 1/2" NPT conduit connections and light(s) ANSI B 93.55 M plug-pin type connectors (without female end) DK23 = Terminal box with 3-pin conn. (single solenoid) DK25 = Terminal box with 5-pin conn. (double solenoid) DK23L = Terminal w/ 3-pin conn. & light(s) (single solenoid) DK25L = Terminal w/ 5-pin conn. & light(s) (double solenoid) DK24L2 = Terminal box with 4-pin conn., light(s), & surge suppression
Directional Valves
162
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Symbols
=E =C&D =G =H =J
1)
1)
Example: Spool E with switching position "a" Order code 4 WE6 EA6X/EW 110 NK4
Caution: Be aware of pressure intensication in differential cylinders
=M =W
=Y
Technical data
General Installation position Weight Single solenoid valve Valve with 2 solenoids Hydraulic Operating pressure Port A, B, P Port T p p bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 350 (5100) up to 210 (3050) DC, up to 160 (2320) AC Where symbols A and B occur, port T must be employed as a drain port if the operating pressure is above the permitted tank pressure . up to 80 (21) DC, up to 60 (15.8) AC m m kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) Optional 1.45 (3.2) 1.95 (4.3)
Flow, max. Electrical Type of voltage Available voltages Power consumption Holding current In-rush current Duty cycle Shifting time to ISO 6403 Shifting frequency Insulation Coil temperature ON OFF
qV
L/min (GPM)
DC voltage V P P P V W VA VA 12, 24, 96 30 continuous T T ms ms Sw/h 25 to 45 10 to 25 up to 15000 Exceeds NEMA class B t C (F) up to 150 (302)
AC voltage 110, 230 50/60 Hz 50 220 continuous 10 to 20 15 to 40 up to 7200 Exceeds NEMA class B up to 180 (356)
Directional Valves
163
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2-way Directional control valves with wet pin AC or DC solenoids Model WE 10.. /.C
Nominal Size 10, Series 3X (DIN spade to 43650) Series 4X (conduit box) Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 120 L/min (32 GPM)
Direct solenoid actuated directional spool valve in the standard version Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 D 05 interface Subplates, see datasheet RA 45 054 (separate order) Wet pin AC or DC solenoids with removable coil Solenoid coil can be rotated through 90 Coils may be replaced without engaging uid ports
Model 4WE 10 E3X/CG24N9K4 with plug-in connector
Electrical connections available as either individual spade connections or as a conduit box connection Manual override, standard For soft switching version, see RA 23 183 High ow body and spool design
Technical data
General Installation Weight Valve with 1 solenoid Valve with 2 solenoids Hydraulic data Max. operating pressure Ports A, B, P Port T bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 315 (4600) DC 210 (3050), AC 160 (2320). For symbols A and B, Port T must be used as a drain line if the operating pressure is higher than the permissible tank pressure. 120 (32) DC V % W VA VA continuous ON OFF Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 Insulation class VDE 0580 ms ms cycles/h IP 65 F H 45 to 60 20 to 30 15,000 15 to 25 20 to 30 7,200 10 35 90 550 12, 24, 96 AC 110, 230 50/60 Hz kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) optional Central connection DC 4.4 (9.7), AC 3.6 (7.93) DC 6.0 (13.2), AC 4.4 (9.7) Individual connection DC 4.3 (9.48), AC 3.5 (7.71) DC 5.9 (13), AC 4.3 (9.48)
Max. ow Electrical data Voltage model Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power consumption Holding power Inrush current Duty Switching time to ISO 6403
L/min (GPM)
Directional Valves
164
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 15 16 19 22 23
WE 10
3 service ports 4 service ports Directional control valve, electrically operated ISO Size 5, NFPA/ANSI D 05 interface Spool symbol e.g. E, G, H, J, M, W etc. Series 30 to 39 spade connection (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) Series 40 to 49 conduit box connection (40 to 49: externally interchangeable) With spring return Without spring return, with detent Wet pin solenoid (oil immersed) with removable coil Voltages DC 12, 24, 96 AC1) 110, 220 With manual override (standard) Central solenoid connections 1/2" NPT conduit connector in conduit box 1/2" NPT conduit connector in conduit box with light(s) ANSI B 93.55 M plug-in type connections (without female end) Terminal box with 3-pin connector (single solenoid) Terminal box with 5-pin connector (double solenoid) Terminal box with 3-pin connector and lights (single solenoid) Terminal box with 5-pin connector and lights (double solenoid) Terminal box with 4-pin connector, lights, and surge suppression Individual solenoid plug connections Without plug in connector(s) NBR seals FPM seals Attention! The compatibility of the seals and uid must be taken into account! Further details in clear text
1)
N9
=3 =4 = 10 = 3X = 4X = No code = OF =C Example Example = G 24 = W110 = N9 = DA = DAL = DK23 = DK25 = DK23L = DK25L = DK24L2 = K4 = No code =V
Symbols
=E =C&D =G =H =J =M =W
=Y
Directional Valves
165
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3-, 4/2- and 3/2-way Directional valves with switching time adjustment Model 5-.WE 10
Nominal Size 10 Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 120 L/min (32 GPM)
Direct solenoid operated spool type directional control valve With 5th chamber for dampened adjustable spool shifting time Mounts on standard ISO 4401-5, NFPA/ANSI T3.5.1 M R1 D 05, and ANSI B93.7 D 05 interface Subplates, see datasheet RA 45 054 (separate order) Wet pin DC solenoids Removable coils for quick replacement
Model 5-.WE 10 E3X/CG24N9K4 with plug-in connector
Ordering code
1 2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 15 18 19 22 23
5
4 actuator ports Nominal size 10 Symbol e.g. C, D, E, G, H, J =4
WE 10
= 10
3X /
N9 K4 /
Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) With spring return Wet pin solenoid (oil immersed) with removable coil 24 V DC 96 V DC With protected manual override (standard) Model of electrical connection Individual connection; with component plug DIN 43 650-AM2, without plug-in connector Without switching time adjustment With adjustable screw (throttle) Orifice 0.8 mm (0.031), 1.0 mm (0.039), 1.2 mm (0.047 ) Without cartridge throttle
= 3X = No code =C = G24 = G96 = N9 = K4 = No code =C = A08, A10, A12 = No code = No code
NBR seals Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! Further details to be written in clear text
Directional Valves
166
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation Max. ambient temperature Weight Valve with 1 solenoid Valve with 2 solenoids Hydraulic data Max. operating pressure Ports A, B, P Port T Max. ow Pressure uid bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) 315 (4600) 210 (3050) 120 (32) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1); Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RA 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1) C (F) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Viscosity range Degree of contamination mm /s (SUS)
2
optional C (F) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) 50 (122) 4.7 (10.4) 6.3 (13.9)
35 to 2318 Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75.
Electrical data Model of voltage Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power consumption Duty Switching time to ISO 6403 (without switching time adjustment) Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 Insulation class VDE 0580 Max. coil temperature
1)
DC V % W 24, 96 10 35 continuous ON OFF ms ms cycles/h 45 to 70 35 to 45 15000 IP 65 F C (F) 150 (302)
suitable for NBR and FPM seals
Symbols
P T P T
=C&D
=E =G
=H =J
Directional Valves
167
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Soft switching 4/2- and 4/3-way Directional valves with DC solenoids, Model WE...73-../A12..
Nominal Sizes 6 and 10 Series 6X (Size 6) and 3X (Size 10) Maximum operating pressure 350/315 bar (5100/4600 PSI) Maximum ow 60/100 L/min (15.85/26.42 GPM)
Direct operated directional spool valve with solenoid operation Soft switching characterisitics Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A, ISO 4401 and CETOPRP 121 H Mounts on standard ISO 4401, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D interfaces For subplates see catalog sheets RA 45 052 (size 6), and RA 45 054 (size 10), separate order Wet pin solenoids with removable coils Coils can be replaced without engaging uid Individual electrical connections With manual override
Model 4WE 10 E73-3X/CG24N9K4/A12 with plug-in connector
Ordering code
2 3 4 6 7 9 10 11 12 15 18 19 22 23
WE
4 service ports Nominal size 6 Nominal size 10 =4 = 6 = 10
N9 K4 / A12
*
Further details in clear text No code = V= NBR seals FPM seals Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! Switching time delay Electrical connection types Single connection; with cover, without plug-in connector With concealed manual override
Spool symbols e.g. D73, E73, G73, J73 Size 6 Series 60 to 69 (60 to 69: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: unchanged installation and connection dimensions ) = 6X
Size10
= 3X K4 = = No code =E =C Example = 24 N9 =
A12 =
Spring return Nominal size 6 Nominal size 10 Voltages DC 12, 24, 96
Directional Valves
168
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Nominal size Installation position Weight Single solenoid valve Valve with 2 solenoids Hydraulic Max. operating pressure Ports A, B, P Ports T Electrical Available voltages Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Power consumption Duty cycle Switching time tS to ISO 6403 Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 Insulation class VDE 0580 ON/OFF 1/h V % W continuous approx. 3 to 4 times longer than a standard valve 7200 IP 65 F 7200 IP 65 F 12, 24, 96 10 30 12, 24, 96 10 35 bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 350 (5076) 210 (3050) 315 (4600) 210 (3050) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) Size optional 1.45 (3.2) 1.95 (4.3) 4.5 (9.918) 6.1 (13.44) 6 10
Symbols
= D73 = E73 3) = G73 = J73
3)
Example: Spool E73 with switching position a ordering details ..E73A..
Directional Valves
169
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2- and 4/3-way Directional valves, Pilot operated, Model 4 WEH Externally pilot operated, Model 4 WH
Sizes 10 to 32, Series 4X, 6X, 7X Maximum pressure up to 350 bar (5100 PSI) Maximum volume up to 1100 L/min (290 GPM)
Solenoid pilot operated directional valves (WEH) Hydraulic pilot operated directional valves (WH) Mounts on standard ISO 4401-5, 7, 8, or 10, NFPA T 3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05, D 07, D 08, or D10 interfaces For subplates, see data sheets RA 45 045 ... RA 45 060, may be ordered separately 3-position spring centered (sizes 10 to 32) 3-position spring or hydraulic centering (sizes 16, 25 and 32) 2-position hydraulic or spring offset (sizes 10 to 32) Wet pin AC or DC solenoids as required Manual overrides standard (WEH)
Model 4WEH 22 E 7X/..6EG..N9..DA.. with plug-in connector Individual solenoid plug-in connectors or central wiring box, see datasheet RA 08 006 Optional meter-in or meter-out pilot choke option "P" port pilot pressure insert (sizes 16 to 32), for open center spools
Technical data
Sizes (ordering code) Operating pressure, max. Port P, A, B Model 4WEH Model H-4WEH Port T Pilot oil drain Y external Pilot oil drain Y internal 10 16 22 25 32
bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) Port Y Pilot oil drain external: bar (PSI) with version 4WH bar (PSI) bar (PSI) Pilot pressure, max. (With higher pilot pressures, a pressure reducing valve is required.) Pilot pressure, min. Pilot oil supply X external, pilot oil supply X internal (not with spools: C, G, H) 3-position valve, spring-centered 3-position valve, pressure-centered 2-position valve, with spring offset
280 (4060) 280 (4060) 350 (5100) 350 (5100) 315 (4600) 250 (3625) 3046 DC 2321 AC 3046 DC, 2321 AC 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) H-4W..
280 (4060) 280 (4060) 350 (5100) 350 (5100) 350 (5100) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 250 (3625)
210 (3050) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 210 (3050) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 4W.. 12.5 10.5 (180) (150) 14 11 (205) (160) 8 (115) 4.5 (65) 13 (190) 18 (260) 13 (190) 8 (115) 4.5 (65) 8.5 (125) 8.5 (125) 10 (145) 5 (72) 4.5 (65)
bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI)
10 (145) 10 (145) 7 (100) 4.5 (65)
14 (205) 14 (205) 14 (205) 14 (205) 4.5 (65)
2-position valve, with hydraulic offset bar (PSI) Internally piloted (with spools C, F, G, H, P, T, V, Z, S) bar (PSI)
Symbols (to ISO 1219)

4WEH.. EA.xx/... = 2-position main valve with single solenoid pilot 4WEH.. HD.xx/OF... = 2-position main valve with detented pilot, main stage hydraulically offset 4WEH.. D.xx/OF... = 2-position main valve with detented pilot, main stage spring offset 4WEH.. D.xx/... = 2-position main valve with single solenoid pilot, main stage spring offset Directional Valves 170
= D/C =G =M
=E
=H
=W
=Q
=J
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
1 2 3 4 5 6 6.5 7 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 19 20 21 22 23
4
280 bar (4100 PSI) = no code 350 bar (5100 PSI) = H 4-way (Four service ports) Operation Solenoid operated pilot valve Hydraulically operated Size 10 (D 05) 16 (D 07) 22 (D 08) 25 (D 08) 32 (D 10) =4 = WEH = WH = 10 = 16 = 22 = 25 = 32
no code = NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) V= FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester (HFD-R) no code = no code = P4.5 = without pilot pressure control valve Without pilot pressure insert po = 4.5 bar (65 PSI) (For spool types C, G, H) Electrical connections to data sheet RA 08006 Central electrical connections DA = Terminal box with 1/2" NPT conduit connection DAL = Terminal box with 1/2" NPT conduit connection and light(s) ANSI B 93.55 M plug-in type connections (without female end) DK23 = Terminal box w/3-pin connector (single solenoid) DK25 = Terminal box w/5-pin connector (double solenoid) DK23L = Terminal box w/3-pin connector & light (single solenoid) DK25L = Terminal box w/5-pin connector & light (single solenoid) DK24L2 = Terminal box with 4-pin connector, lights & surge suppression K4 = no code = S= S2 =
ppilot ppilot min ptank po
1)
Spool return (main body) Spring return (size 10 to 32) = no code Hydraulic return (size 10 to 32)* =H *(Size 10 and 22 with spool types C, D only) Spool type (ex. C, D, E, G, H, J, M, W) 3-position valve Series Size 10 Series 40 to 49* Size 25, 32 Series 60 to 69* Size 16, 22 Series 70 to 79* *externally interchangeable Variation to the pilot valve For 2-position valves with 2 solenoids: Only possible with spool types C, D, and hydraulic spool return "H" in the main valve Without spring return with detent Pilot valve WE 6 (D 03), with removable solenoids Voltages DC 12, 24, 96 AC1) 110, 230 With protected manual overrides (standard 6E) = no code = 4X = 6X = 7X
= OF = 6E
Example = G 24 Example = 110 = N9
Individual solenoid plug-in connection without angled plug connector(s) without pilot choke adjustment With meter-in pilot choke adjustment With meter-out pilot choke adjustment
Externally piloted, externally drained = no code Internally piloted, externally drained =E Internally piloted, internally drained = ET Externally piloted, internally drained =T (On sizes 16, 25, 32 models "ET" and "T" with hydraulically centered three-position valves, are only possible if: ppilot 2 x ptank + ppilot min
= pilot pressure = minimum pilot pressure = Tank pressure = Cracking pressure
Directional Valves
171
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2- and 4/3-way Isolating valves Model Z4WE 6

Nominal Size 6 Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 40 L/min (10.6 GPM)
Direct solenoid actuated directional spool valve Sandwich plate valve For use as an isolator/free-ow valve or as a isolator/free-ow/short circuit valve Free-ow through ports P and T in all spool positions Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A, ISO 4401 and CETOPRP 121 H, Wet pin AC or DC solenoids Manual override
Model Z4WE 6 E53-3X/EG24N9K4 with plug-in connector
Ordering code
Z4WE
Nominal size 6 E68, E63, Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) High performance solenoid (wet pin) Voltages DC 12, 24, 96 AC1) 110, 230 With protected manual override (standard)
1)
3X / E
K4
*
Further details in clear text No code = NBR seals
=6 K4 = = 3X =E Example Example = G 24 = W110 = N9
Electrical connection Individual connection; with component plug DIN 43 650-AM2, without plug-in connector
Directional Valves
172
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight Valve with 1 solenoid Valve with 2 solenoids Installation Hydraulic data Max. operating pressure Ports P, A, B Port T Electrical data Power consumption (DC) Holding power (AC) Inrush current (AC) Voltage tolerance (nominal voltage) Duty Switching time ON OFF Switching frequency Protection to DIN 40 050 ms ms 1/h W VA VA % 30 50 220 10 continuous 20 to 45 for DC voltages, 10 to 20 for AC voltages 10 to 25 for DC voltages, 15 to 40 for AC voltages up to 15000 for DC voltages; up to 7200 for AC voltages IP 65 bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 315 (4600) 210 (3050) for DC voltages; 160 (2320) for AC voltages kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) 1.2 (2.65) 1.6 (3.53) optional
Symbols (Codes: = valve side: = manifold side)

P1 A1 B1 T1
a b A2 A1 B2 B1 T2 T1
= E68
P2 P1
a b A2 B2 T2
= E63
P2
Directional Valves
173
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2- and 4/3-Way Isolation Valve Model Z4 WEH 10 Size 10

Series 4X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 160 L/min (42.6 GPM)
Functions as an emergency on-off isolation valve or on-off isolation/bypass valve, primarily applied with servo/proportional systems Free ow through ports P and T in all pilot valve positions Pilot operated by D 03, spool type directional control valve Solenoid operation (WEH) or hydraulic operation (WH) Porting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Wet pin AC or DC solenoids Manual overrides Individual electrical connections or central terminal box
Model Z4WEH 10 E62-4X/6A...NETZ45
Ordering code Z4
Safety/isolation sandwich plate Operator Electro-hydraulic Size 10, D 05 For symbols E63, E68 Series 40 to 49 = 4X (40 to 49; externally interchangeable) Pilot valve with wet-pin solenoids Voltages DC 12, 24, 96 AC 1) 110, 230 Example Example = 6E = WEH = 10 no code =
10
4X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) without pressure reduction to pilot valve
V=
no code =
= G 24 = W110 = N9 = ET = no code = K4 = DK25L

1)
With covered manual override Internally piloted, internally drained Without pilot chokes Electrical connection: Without angled plug connector(s) Terminal box with 5 pin connector and light
Directional Valves
174
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight (approx.) Electrical operation Valve with one solenoid Valve with two solenoids Mounting position Hydraulic Maximum operating pressure Ports A and B Port P Port T with internal pilot (only internal pilot uid possible) with DC solenoid with AC solenoid bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 160 (2320) 100 (1450) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 315 (4600) 210 (3100) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) 4.2 (9.2) 4.6 (10.1) Optional
Operating time "ON" (From energizing the pilot valve to the start of the opening of the spool in the main valve) at a pilot pressure of 2- and 3-position valves Operating time "OFF" (spring operation) 2- and 3-position valves ms 30 bar (PSI) ms ~ 70 (1000) = 30 65 ~ 140 (2000) = 25 60 ~210 (3100) = 20 55
Symbols (Codes: = valve side: = manifold side)

P1 A1 B1 T1
a b A2 A1 B2 B1 T2 T1
= E68
P2 P1
a b A2 B2 T2
= E63
P2
Directional Valves
175
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

2-way Cartridge valves Directional function Cartridge valves, Model LC... Control covers, Model LFA...
Nominal Size 16 to 50 Series 7X Maximum operating pressure 420 bar (6100 PSI) Maximum ow 2500 L/min (660 GPM)
Valve poppet with or without damping nose 2 area ratios 4 spring rates Stroke limiter option Control cover for mounting directional spool valves with or without built-in shuttle valve Control cover for mounting directional poppet valves with or without built-in shuttle valve Control cover model LFA 25 WEA7X/ with directional valve 4WE 6 D6X/EG24N9K4 and plug-in connector
Cartridge valve model LC 25 A40E7X/
Ordering code LC
Nom. size 16 Nom. size 25 Nom. size 32 Nom. size 40 Nom. size 50 Area ratio 2:1 Area ratio 14.3:1 = 16 = 25 = 32 = 40 = 50 =A =B = 05 = 10 = 20 = 40 E= D=
7X /
No code = 7X = NBR seals Series 70 to 79 (70 to 79: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Valve poppet without damping nose Valve poppet with damping nose
(series 7X)
(annulus area = 50%) (annulus area = 7%)
Cracking pressure approx. 0.5 bar (7.25 PSI) Cracking pressure approx. 1.0 bar (14.5 PSI) Cracking pressure approx. 2.0 bar (29.0 PSI) Cracking pressure approx. 4.0 bar (58.0 PSI)
Directional Valves
176
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Max. operating pressure Without directional valve Ports A, B, X, Z1, Z2 Port Y bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 6100 315 (4600); 350 (5100); 420 (6100) (dependent on the pilot valve) Corresponds to the tank pressure of the pilot valve
General notes on the ordering code for control covers

1 2 3 4 9
Symbols, cartridge valves

LFA . D-./F Control cover with remote control port Size 16 to 160 Seal Material
X X** X B A
Ordering details can be found on the pages covering the individual control cover variations
LFA
Remote control port
LFA . H2-./F Control cover with stroke limiter, with remote control port Size 16 to 160
X X** X B A
Nominal size Model Series 16 x x x x 25 x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x 32 x x x x x 40 x x x x x x x 50 x x D H2 WEA WEB WEMA GWA KWA 7X
F F
LFA . WEA-./ Control cover for mounting a directional spool or poppet valve Size 16 to 160
LFA . WEMA-7X/; LFA . WEA8-6X/ Control cover for mounting a directional spool or poppet valve with control port for switching a 2nd valve Size 16 to 100
A B b T T** F** X B A Y Z1
A a P P**
B b T T** X B A A** Y a
x = available
P P** Z2
LFA . GWA-./ Control cover for mounting a directional spool or poppet valve, with built-in shuttle valve Size 16 to 100
A a P P** Z1 T T** X B A A** Y B b
LFA . KWA-./ Control cover for mounting a directional spool or poppet valve, with built-in shuttle valve as a check valve circuit Size 16 to 100
A a P P.. X.. X B A T A** B b
Z1
Directional Valves
177
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

2-way Cartridge valves Pressure function Cartridge valves, Model LC... Control covers, Model LFA...
Valve poppet with or without dampening function 2 spring rates Stroke limiter option Control cover with integral relief (DB) Control cover with integral relief and poppet or spool valve unloading (DBW)
Control cover with manual pressure adjustment model LFA .. DBW ...
Cartridge valve model LC ..DB...-7X/
Ordering code LC
Sizes 16 ... 100 Size 16 Size 25 Size 32 Size 40 Size 50 = 16 = 25 = 32 = 40 = 50 = 20 = 40 7X =
DB
7X /
No code = NBR seals Sizes 16 to 50 Series 70 to 79 (70 to 79: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Poppet valve Poppet spool valve Standard model
(series 7X)
E= D=
Cracking pressure 2.0 bar (29 PSI) Cracking pressure 4.0 bar (58 PSI)
Directional Valves
178
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
2-way cartridge valve Max. operating pressure at ports A and B Nominal size Max. ow (recommendation) Poppet valve insert Spool valve insert LC..DB..E../.. LC..DB..D../.. L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) Up to 420 (6100) 16 300 (79.3) 175 (46.2) 25 450 (118.9) 300 (79.3) 32 600 (158.5) 450 (118.9) 40 1000 (264.2) 700 (184.5) 50 1600 (422.7) 1400 (369.8)
General notes on the ordering code for control covers

1 2 3 4 5
LFA
Seal Material
B T P T F** X B A Y X** X B A F** Y
Nominal size 16 25 32 40 50 Model x x x x x x x x x x x x x x DB DBW
Control Model Series 7X

A a P P** X D**
x = available
Symbols
LFA..DB.-../.. Size 16 to 50
LFA..DBW.-../.. Size 16 to 50
X X**
Directional Valves
179
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Notes
Directional Valves
180
Section 3
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 4 Mobile Controls
Electronic remote control for the actuation of hydraulic axis 4THES5, THEC5, THE5 .....................182 Pilot control devise in pedal design for the remote control of directional valves, pumps and motors 2TH6R ........................................................184 Hydraulic pilot control unit of sandwich plate design for the remote control of directional valves, pumps and motors 2TH6 ................................186 Hydraulic pilot control units for armrest installation 4TH6, 4TH6N, 4TH5 ................................188 Load sensing control block, Sandwich plate design M4-12........................................................190 High pressure load sensing control block, Sandwich plate design M4-15 ....................................194 High pressure load sensing control block, Sandwich plate design M4-22 ....................................198 Load sensing control block, Sandwich plate design SP-08 ....................................202 Bosch Rexroth Oil Control Heavy duty priority ow controls, 3-way ow regulator with pressure compensated and solenoid controlled priority ow for standard and two pump systems A-VRFC3C-VEI-VS ............206 Flow diverters 6 ways ow diverter VS 311/312/315 ..................212 6 ways bankable ow diverters VS 281/5/6F....................................................................214 181
181
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electronic remote control for the actuation of hydraulic axis Model 4THES5, THEC5, THE5
Series 1X
Specially designed for mobile machines Types available : Signal, CAN, Power PWM High mechanical robustness of hydraulic remote control components Large selection of ergonomic grips with various E-contacts Actuator ergonomics comparable with hydraulic remote controls Metallic electronic box
Functional description
Design
Remote controls type THE5 are mainly composed of a control lever (1), a fixation body (2) and a box (3) containing the sensors and electronic cards. With deflection of control lever (1) plunger (5) pushes against return spring (8). A position sensor is allocated to each actuation axis. Slider (4) of the sensor fixed on plunger (5) moves upward or downward while following the lever actuation direction. The command value generated by the sensor is proportional to lever deflection. A rubber grommet (6) protects the mechanical components of the housing from contamination.
General
All types of THE5 remote controls have similar mechanics and ergonomics. Their main differences are the integrated electronic functions and the type of output signals. The remote control 4THES5 Signal needs external regulated power supplies for its sensors. It generates an analog voltage command value (V). The CAN bus type THEC5 works in a similar manner. It periodically generates a frame on CAN bus. Both types of remote controls generate only low power signals. The actuation of an electrohydraulic axis requires a further external electronic power interface. The remote control THE5 Power PWM gives stabilized currents for the direct operation of electrohydraulic proportional pressure reducing valves. The analog Power outputs are pulsewidth-modulated (PWM). Remote controls THE5 fitted with microcontrollers (CAN bus and Power PWM) communicate with the PC through a serial interfaces RS232. CAN bus interfaces enable command values to be sent to further systems, such as Brueninghaus Hydromatik MC microcontrollers.
6 5
2 8
8 4 3
Function principle
When not actuated the control lever is held in the neutral position by the 4 return springs (8).
Mobile Controls
182
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code THE

Remote control : 2 axis controlled by the remote control electronic 42) 3 axis controlled by the remote control electronic 61) 4 axis controlled by the remote control electronic 81) Type : Signal Can bus Power PWM Grip range: Ergonomic EC2000 Ergonomic EC4000 Customers No grip Ergonomic grip types : Grip type E Grip type H Ergonomic grip orientation : lever straight and grip in the direction of control port 1 lever curved by 15 in the direction of control port 2 and grip in the direction of control port 1 (pilot control unit for the left hand) lever curved by 15 in the direction of control port 2 + and grip in the direction of control port 1 (pilot control unit for the right hand) Plugs for ergonomic wiring : DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK Without plug
1) 2)
1X /
S2) C no code
E H no code Z
TT, ST, VT, YT,YU see EC4000 datasheet : RE 64562
03
43
23
5 6 no code
Remote controls CAN and Power PWM Designate the Signal remote control with 2 axis maximum because the additional axis provided by grips EC4000 are not controlled by the remote control electronic.
Mobile Controls
183
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pilot control devise in pedal design for the remote control of directional valves, pumps and motors Model 2TH6R
Series 1X
Progressive, sensitive operation Precise control Working ports underneath Control elements protected by rubber sleeve Plungers made of stainless steel, plunger guides made of brass; this prevents corrosion and seizing
Further remote controls and pilot control units: Hydraulic remote control Pilot control device type 2TH6 (see RE 64 552) in sandwich plate design Pilot control device types 4 TH 6, 4 TH 5 and 4 TH 6N for arm rest installation (see RE 64 555) Pilot control device type TH 7, for instrument panel installation or in pedal design (see RE 64 558) Pilot control device type 4/5 THF 6 with end position locking (see RE 64 553) Electronic remote control Electronic remote control type THE6 for direct controlling of electrical or electro-hydraulical pilot operated actuators (see RE 29 771)
Mobile Controls
184
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Hydraulic uid Hydraulic uid temperature range Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness C mm2/s Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524; phosphate ester (HFD-R) 20 to + 80 10 to 380 Max. permisible degree of hydraulic uid contamination according to NAS 1638 class 9. For this, we recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. bar bar l/min bar kg daNm max. 50 max. 3 max. 16 max. 1 approx. 3.8 20
Max. inlet pressure Counterpressure in port T Pilot ow Hysteresis Weight Max. permissible operating torque at foot lever
Ordering Code
2
2 control ports Pedal operation Pedal version Bent pedal Flat pedal Standard control curve =2
TH6
1X
*
Further details in plain text Connecting thread G 1/4 pipe thread to standard ISO 228/1 M 14 x 1,5 metric to standard ISO 9974 9/16 UNF-2B to standard ISO 11926 Seals NBR seals, suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 FKM seals for phosphate ester (HFD-R)
=R =C =P = 06 = 1X M= V= 01 = 02 = 05 =
Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: Installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
Mobile Controls
185
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hydraulic pilot control unit of sandwich plate design for the remote control of directional valves, pumps and motors Model 2TH6
Series 1X
Progressive, sensitive control Precise and play-free control characteristics Low actuation force at the lever Rust-free plunger
Further remote controls and pilot control units: Hydraulic remote control Pilot control unit type 2 TH 6 R, pedal version (see RE 64 551) Pilot control unit types 4 TH 6, 4 TH 5, 4TH 6 N, for arm rest installation (see RE 64 555) Pilot control unit type 4/5 THF 6, with end position locks (see RE 64 553) Electronic remote control Electronic remote control type THE 6 for the direct control of electrical or electro-hydraulic pilot operated actuators (see RE 29 771) B2 TH 6 Recommended for use with a single 2 TH 6 control axis This pilot control unit cannot be anged on
Model 1-2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01
3-2 TH 6 H06-1X/H06 L06 M01
B2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01
Mobile Controls
186
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering Code
Pilot control unit with N flangeable control axis N = Number of control axes 1 to 6 1st control axis Example
2 TH 6
2nd control axis
1X
3-2 TH 6 L06-1X M70 L06 M01
3rd control axis
4th control axis
5th control axis Further details in clear text 6th control axis
*
Pilot control unit with 1 control axis, not flangeable Control axis, separate Example B 2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01 Example 2 TH 6 L06-1X/M01 Connection threads G 1/4 pipe thread to standard ISO 228/1 9/16 UNF-2B UNF connections to standard ISO 11926 Seals NBR seals FKM seals
B 2 TH 6 2 TH 6
1X 1X
* *
01= 05 =
Actuator type 1 lever without detent 1 lever with detent in 3 positions 1 lever held in any position by a friction coupling 1 lever with detent in 3 positions and held in any position by a friction coupling 1 lever with E-contact 1 lever with electrical detent in position 1 1 lever with electrical detent in position 2 1 lever with electrical detent in both positions
=L =M =P =T =N =G =H =J M= V =
Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account Plug (see page 8) DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 for wiring the solenoid on a 2 TH 6 G/H/J 6= Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK for wiring the solenoid on a 2 TH 6 G/H/J 7= DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 for wiring the solenoids on a 2 TH 6 N 8= Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK for wiring the solenoids on a 2 TH 6 N Without plug No code = 5=
Enter the identification number of the control curve that is required (see page 5) Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
Mobile Controls
187
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hydraulic pilot control units for armrest installation Model 4TH6, 4TH6N, 4TH5
Series 1X
Progressive, sensitive operation Low actuation forces Low force deviations when lever is actuated (4TH5, 4TH6N) Several ergonomic grips with various E contacts All connections point downwards
Model 4TH6, 4TH6N
Model 4TH5 for mini excavators
Mobile Controls
188
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
4 TH 5 4 TH 6
Operating force deviations For 4 TH 5: Reduced For 4 TH 6: Conventional Reduced Ergonomic grip range EC2000 EC4000 Control curve (see pages 6 and 7) l l l l l Different control curve: state identification No. Type of ergonomic grip (see page 5) EC2000 without E-contact EC2000 with E-contact (select the required version from page 5) EC4000 Grip orientation (see page 8) Lever straight, grip in the direction of control port 3 Lever curved 15 in the direction of control port 4. Grip in the direction of control port 3 Lever curved 15 in the direction of control port 2. Grip in the direction of control port 3 Plug (see page 9) DEUTSCH sealed plug IP 67 for wiring the grip Plug AMP MAT-N-LOK for wiring the grip Without plug Seals NBR seals FPM seals Connection threads Pipe thread to ISO 228/1 Metric connections to ISO 9974 Connections to JIS 2351 UNF connections to ISO 11926 Further details in cleara text 9/16 UNF-2B G 1/4 M 14 x 1.5 Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account = TT = ST, VT, YT, YU see datasheet : RE 64 562 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5 l l l l l l l l 03 43 23 l l l l l = 1X = No code = No code =N =E =H 4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5 06 20 70 97 106
1X /
Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5 l l l l l l l l 4TH6 l l l l l l l l l l 5 6 no code l l l l M V 01 02 04 05
4TH6 4TH6N 4TH5
4TH6N 4TH5
Mobile Controls
189
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Load sensing control block Sandwich plate design Model M4-12

Series 1X Nominal pressure 5000 psi (350 bar) pump side Nominal pressure 6100 psi (420 bar) actuator side Max ow pump side: 40 GPM (150 l/min) inlet element Max ow actuator side: 35 GPM (130 l/min) with load-holding function 26 GPM (100 l/min) with pressure compensator and load-holding function
System Load pressure-independent ow control Open center for xed displacement pump Closed center for variable displacement pump Design Sandwich plate design Inlet element Up to 10 directional valve elements End element Types of actuation Mechanical (hand lever) Hydraulic Electrohydraulic On/off Proportional Electrohydraulic with on-board electronics (OBE) Flow Load pressure-compensated High repeatability Low hysteresis Adjustable via stroke limiter Fields of application Truck applications Large & telescopic fork lifts Lifting platforms Forestry machines Construction machines Drilling equipment Cranes Municipal vehicles Stationary applications
Flow Load pressure-compensated High repeatability Low hysteresis Adjustable via stroke limiter
Pressure relief function Inlet element Pilot operated pressure valves of large nominal width Directional valve element / actuator ports Compact shock valves with anti-cavitation function LS pressure limitation Adjustable for each actuator port External pressure adjustment possible for each actuator port Fields of application Truck applications Large & telescopic fork lifts Lifting platforms Forestry machines Construction machines Drilling equipment Cranes Municipal vehicles Stationary applications
Pressure relief function Inlet element Pilot operated pressure valves of large nominal width Directional valve element / actuator ports Compact shock valves with anti-cavitation function LS pressure limitation Adjustable for each actuator port External pressure adjustment possible for each actuator port
Mobile Controls
190
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Design Designation Type Size Installation position Type of connection Weight Inlet element:
Open center Closed center Directional valve element, mechanical Directional valve element, hydraulic Directional valve element, electrohydraulic Additional weight for manual operation, hand lever included End element Hydraulic uid and ambient temperature range Hydraulic Flow Port P Port A, B qV, max qV, max pnom p p p p p p p p
lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) F (C) GPM (l/min) GPM (l/min) GPM (l/min) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar) psi (bar)
Sandwich plate LS control block M4 12 Optional SAE J1626 or ISO 11926-1 13.8 (6.3) 9.5 (4.3) 10.8 (4.9) 9.3 (4.2) 9.9 (4.5) 1.3 (0.6) 5.7 (2.6) -4 to +176 (-20 to +80) 40 (150) 26 (100) with pressure comp. & load-holding function 35 (130) without pressure compensator 5000 (350) 5000 (350) 6100 (420) 435 (30) at zero pressure to tank 508 (35) 508 (35) 123 to 326 (8.5 to 22.5) 94 to 250 (6.5 to 17.2) TH 6... characteristic curve 97, see RA 64 552 725 to 2160 (50 to 149) 1) 2175 to 5000 (150 to 350) Mineral oil (HL,HLP) to DIN 51 524 Other uids, e.g. HEES (synthetic esters) to VDMA as well as hydraulic uids as specied in RA 90 221 on inquiry 35 to 1760 (10 to 380) DIN4406 (C) class 20/18/15 FTWE 2 K...; see RA 58 007 FTDRE 2 K...; see RA 58 032
Nominal pressure Max. operating pressure in port:
P / LS A/B T Y Max. pilot X pressure in port: a, b Pilot pressure range Hydraulic Electrohydraulic Necessary hydraulic pilot control devices LS pressure limitation (adjustment ranges) (is selected in the factory) Hydraulic uid
Viscosity range Degree of contamination (max. permissible) Electrical Electrical pilot control valves
SSU (mm2/s)
Without mating connector Type Junior Timer (AMP) 2)
Recommended ampliers (other controlling options on enquiry)
On-board electronics
Analog amplier: MHVA2...; 1 to 6 axes, see RA 29 875; RA 29 883 Digital amplier: RC2-2, RC4-4, RC6-9; see RA 95 200. Data from page 19 onwards
1) Pressures below 725 psi (50 bar) please consult factory 2) Mating connectors are not included in the scope of supply and must be ordered separately.
Mobile Controls
191
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Short code Inlet elements Directional valve elements
1st spool axis
Continued on next page
M4 12 1X /
2nd spool axis
No. of directional valves 1 to 10 Size 12 = 12 Series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Inlet element Open center Closed center Without primary pressure relief valve (not with version P) With primary pressure relief valve (pressure details in bar, 3-digit) Pilot oil supply With internal pilot oil supply For external pilot oil supply = P = J = Q =
3rd spool axis, etc.
Actuator port B =
Actuator port A
= Y = X = S = C
Secondary valves HH = Shock valves with anti-cavitation function (see table) Q= Plug screw (secondary valves can be retrotted)
With pressure comp., with load-holding function (standard) Without pressure comp., with load-holding function
With LS pressure relief valve, pressure details in bar, 3-digit = With LS press. relief plug screw (LS press. relief valve can be retrotted) = Q Without LS pressure relief valve (LS press. relief valve cannot be retrotted) = Z Housing with measuring ports Housing without measuring ports Spool type
LSB LSA A B A LSB LSA B
= M1) = Z 1)
Operation, cover B Standard cover 3) Hand lever (engaged) B, K = Hand lever upwards F, L = Hand lever straight D, M = Hand lever dwnwrd Hand lever (disengaged) G = Hand lever upwards H = Hand lever straight J = Hand lever dwnwrd Details required only for type of operation W2and W4 Supply voltage 24 V Supply voltage 12 V Operation, cover A Mechanical 2) Hydraulic Electrohydraulic proportional Electrohydraulic, switchable Electronic pilot module Digital OBE CAN-BR protocol Digital OBE CANopen protocol Digital OBE - analog interface Flow in L/min, 3 digits e.g. 070-070 Actuator ports A and B
=E
P A LS T P LS T
=Q
1= 3= M H W2 W4 = = = =
LSB LSA B
=J
P
1)
LS
CAQ = CBQ = AAQ = =
Caution! The following combinations are not possible: ZMZ, QZQ, ... Z ... Always in conjunction with B, F, D, K, L, M, G, H or J B, F, D Multiple piece lever K, L, M Single piece lever
2) 3)
Mobile Controls
192
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
End elements Supplementary details
V 19 *
Further details in clear text 19 = A= Z= Connections with SAE ports to SAE J1626 or ISO 11926-1 End element End plate, without ports with internal LS unloading End plate with LS port without internal LS unloading
Preferred pressure settings for shock valves with anti-cavitation funciton (secondary valves) Caution: Shock valves are rmly set! Pressure setting in bar in actuator ports A and B (standard) H140 = 140 bar H210 = 210 bar H150 = 150 bar H230 = 230 bar H160 = 160 bar H240 = 240 bar H175 = 175 bar H250 = 250 bar H190 = 190 bar
H050 = H063 = H080 = H100 = H125 =
50 bar 63 bar 80 bar 100 bar 125 bar
H280 = H300 = H320 = H350 =
280 bar 300 bar 320 bar 350 bar
= Preferred
Hand lever position B
F D
Hand Lever (Engaged) Multiple Piece Version Version B = Hand lever upwards (standard) Version F = Hand lever straight Version D = Hand lever downwards Single Piece Version Version K = Hand lever upwards (standard) Version L = Hand lever straight Version M = Hand lever downwards
Hand Lever (Disengaged) Version G = Hand lever upwards (standard) Version H = Hand lever straight Version C = Hand lever downwards
Preferred spool types (with pressure compensator S, spool types E, J, Q)

100-100 085-085 070-070 100-073 085-065 070-057 Flow in L/min (other ows can be set on the stroke limiter ) 073-073 052-052 034-034 023-023 065-065 045-045 030-030 020-020 057-057 038-038 026-026 017-017 100-052 085-045 070-038 052-034 045-030 038-026 034-023 030-020 026-017 014-014 012-012 010-010 023-014 020-012 017-010
Symmetric spools
Asymmetric spools
Complete control blocks are to be defined in accordance with the type code. The order text is used to collate the technical features and requirements. The Rexroth Sales Organization derives a short code and a material number from the order text. Example of a short code of an M4-12 control block with three directional valve elements: Mobile Controls 193
M4 1234 00 / 3M4 12
Control block no. Number of directional valve elements Serial no./revision index
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

High pressure load sensing control block Sandwich plate design Model M4-15
Series 2X Nominal pressure 5000 psi (350 bar) pump side Nominal pressure 6100 psi (420 bar) actuator side Maximum ow pump side: 79 GPM (300 l/min) with central inlet element 53 GPM (200 l/min) with lateral inlet element Maximum ow actuator side: 53 GPM (200 l/min) with load holding function 50 GPM (190 l/min) with pressure compensator 40 GPM (150 l/min) with pressure compensator & Load holding function
System Load pressure-independent ow control Open Center for xed displacement pump Closed Center for ow-controlled pump Design Sandwich plate design Inlet element Up to 9 directional valve elements Up to 18 directional valve elements with central inlet element End element Types of operation Mechanical (moving hand lever) Hydraulic Electrohydraulic (switching, proportional) Electrohydraulic with on-board electronics (OBE) Flow Load pressure-compensated High repeatability Low hysteresis Can be adjusted via stroke limiter Pressure relief function Inlet element Pilot operated pressure control valves of large nominal width Directional valve element / actuator ports Compact shock valves with anti-cavitation function LS pressure limitation Adjustable for each actuator port External pressure adjustment possible for each actuator port Electro-proportional per section Fields of application Cranes Drilling equipment Large and telescopic fork lifts Truck applications Rock crushers Municipal vehicles Forestry machines Stationary applications
Mobile Controls
194
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Installation orientation Type of connection Weight Inlet element (lateral) Inlet element with priority valve Central inlet element Directional valve element, hydraulic Directional valve element, electrohydraulic End element Hydraulic uid and ambient temperature range Hydraulic Flow Port P Port A, B qVmax qVmax Optional Pipe thread to ISO 228/1 15.4 (7) 22 (10) 18.7 (8.5) 15.7 (7.1) 16.5 (7.5) 12.8 (5.8) 4 to +176 (20 to +80)
lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) lbs (kg) F (C)
pnom P p A, B p LS p T p Y p Pilot pressure max. X p in port a, b p Pilot pressure range Hydraulic p Electrohydraulic p Required control p Versions S; C p across control block Version T p Recommended hydraulic pilot control devices LS pressure limitation (adjustment ranges) Hydraulic uid
Nominal pressure Operating pressure max. in port
Viscosity range Electrical Electrical pilot control valves Recommended ampliers (further control options on enquiry) On-board electronics (OBE)
1)
GPM (l/min) 79 (300) with central inlet element GPM (l/min) 53 (200) with lateral inlet element GPM (l/min) 40 (150) with pressure compensator and load-holding function (version "S") GPM (l/min) 50 (190) with pressure compensator, without load-holding function (version "T") GPM (l/min) 53 (200) without pressure compensator (version "C") psi (bar) 5000 (350) psi (bar) 5000 (350) psi (bar) 6100 (420) psi (bar) 4786 (330) psi (bar) 435 (30) psi (bar) At zero pressure to tank psi (bar) 508 (35) psi (bar) 508 (35) psi (bar) 123 to 326 (8.5 to 22.5) psi (bar) 94 to 250 (6.5 to 17.2) psi (bar) 261 (18) psi (bar) 362 (25) TH 6..., characteristic curve 97, see RE 64552 psi (bar) 725 to 2160; 2175 to 5000 (50 to 149; 150 to 330) (selected in the factory) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524, other hydraulic uids, e.g. HEES (synthetic esters) to VDMA 24568 and hydraulic uids as specied in RE 90221 on enquiry SSU (mm2/s) 35 to 1760 (10 to 380) FTWE 2 K...; see RE 58007 without mating plug 1) FTDRE 2 K...; see RE 58032 MHVA2A1X/G..F..; 1 axis, see RE 29875 MHVA8/12B1X/G..F..; 4 to 6 axes, see RE 29883 RC control devices, see RE 95200 Data from page 26
Mating plugs are not included in the scope of supply and must be ordered separately.
Note: The technical data were determined at a viscosity of = 30 mm2/s (HLP46: 50 C) 195 Section 4
Mobile Controls
Ordering code Electric Drives

Pneumatics
Service
Type code
Inlet elemente
Directional valve elements 1st spool axis Continued on next page
M4 15 2X
No. of directional Preferred/Spotlight part numbers 2nd spool axis valves 1 to 18 1) and unit price. Size 15 = 15 Component series 20 to 29 = 2X (unchanged installation and connec3rd spool axis tion dimensions) Closed Center, lateral =J Open Center, lateral =P Closed Center, internal priority actuator ,= VL external subordinate actuator Closed Center, external priority actuator, = VR internal subordinate actuator Closed Center, central = JZ Closed Center, central = VZ inlet element with priority valve Without primary pressure relief valve =Q (not with version P) With primary pressure relief valve =... (pressure details in bar, 3 digits) Priority valve (with V. only) Static priority valve =A Dynamic priority valve =B LS pressure limitation with priority valve (V.) = (pressure details in bar, 3 digits) With pressure compensator, with load-holding function =S With pressure compensator, without load-holding function =T Without pressure compensator, with load-holding function =C
With LS pressure relief valve, 2) (pressure details in bar, 3 digits), or With LS-DB plug screw (LS-DB can be retrotted), 2) with measuring ports With only 1 LS pressure relief valve 2) Without LS pressure relief valve (LS-DB cannot be retrotted) Housing with measuring ports Housing without measuring ports With elecroprop. pressure limitation, 210 bar (falling char. curve) 2) With electroprop. pressure limitation, 210 bar (rising char. curve) 2) With elecroprop. pressure limitation, 350 bar (falling char. curve) 2) With electroprop. pressure limitation, 350 bar (rising char. curve) 2) Spool symbol = = Q M 3) Q 3) = Z 4) See Section 16 for applicable
= = Z =M =Z = L 5) = J 5) = R 5) = N 5)
A MB MA B
=E
A MB MA B
=Q
Secondary valves H...H... = Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve, pilot operated E =Anti-cavitation valve Q= Plug screw (secondary valves can be retrofitted ) Operation, cover B = Standard cover moving hand lever K= Hand lever upwards L= Hand lever straight M = Hand lever downwards Details required only for types of operation W2 and W4 and with el.-proportional pressure limitation Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 8) 1= Supply voltage 24 V 3= Supply voltage 12 V DT04-2P (Deutsch) 8) 8= Supply voltage 24 V 9= Supply voltage 12 V Operation, cover A M= Mechanical 6) H= Hydraulic W2 = Electrohydraulic, proportional W4 = Electrohydraulic, switchable Electronic pilot module AAQ = Digital OBE analogue interface 7) CAQ = Digital OBE CAN-BR protocol 7) CBQ = Digital OBE CANopen protocol 7) ...... = Flow in l/min, 3-digit, e.g. 070-070; actuator ports A and B Actuator port "B" Actuator port "A"
P LS T A MB MA B
=J
LS
5) 6)
P
1) 2)
LS
T
3) 4)
Max. 9 elements per side Only with S- and T-pressure compensator
Z impossible M impossible
See also data sheet RE 18139-05 Always in conjunction with K, L or M 7) See also data sheet RE 64565-07 8) Mating plugs are not included in the scope of supply and must be ordered separately.
Mobile Controls
196
Section 4
Ordering code Electric Drives

Pneumatics
Service
End elements
Supplementary details
19
*
Further details in clear text Connections with SAE ports to SAE J1626 or ISO 11926-1
19 =
V= With LS unloading LA = LAY = LAX = LZ = LZY = LZX =
FKM seals; observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluids used !1) Without LS unloading External pilot oil supply Internal pilot oil supply
LVZ = LU =
= Scope of supply Only in conjunction with inlets "VL", "VZ", "JZ" External priority port (optional connection of a futher LS control block) Diversion plate
Hand lever position

K L M K L M Hand lever upwards (standard) Hand lever straight Hand lever downwards
Spools - standard types

Symmetric spools Spool type Pressure compensator S E, J, Q C T Asymmetric spools Spool type Pressure compensator S E, J, Q C T 150-120 130-100 110-085 175-146 190-160 120-080 100-070 085-060 145-110 160-100 Flow in l/min 080-050 070-045 060-040 110-080 100-065 050-032 045-028 040-025 080-045 065-040 150-150 130-130 110-110 175-175 190-190 120-120 100-100 085-085 145-145 160-160 Flow in l/min 080-080 070-070 060-060 110-110 100-100 050-050 045-045 040-040 080-080 065-065 032-032 028-028 025-025 045-045 040-040
Complete control blocks are dened in accordance with the type code. The order text can be used to specify technical features and requirements. The Bosch Rexroth sales organisation derives a short code and a material number from the order text.
Example of a short code for an M4-15 control block with three directional valve elements:
M4 4567 2 0 / 3 M4 15
Control block no. No. of directional valve elements Revision index of series
1)
The hand lever version contains FKM and NBR seals
Component series (2X)
Mobile Controls
197
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

High pressure load sensing control block Sandwich plate design Model M4-22
Series 2X Nominal pressure 5000 psi (350 bar) pump side Nominal pressure 6100 psi (420 bar) actuator side Maximum ow pump side: 105 GPM (400 l/min) inlet element 158 GPM (600 l/min) with P1 and P2 ports Maximum ow actuator side: 105 GPM (400 l/min)
System Load pressure-independent ow control Open center for xed displacement pump Closed center for ow controlled pump Design Sandwich plate design Inlet element Up to 8 directional valve elements End element Types of actuation Mechanical (hand lever) Hydraulic Types of actuation mechanical hydraulic electrohydraulic (on/off, proportional) Flow Load pressure-compensated High repeatabillity Low hysteresis Adjustable via stroke limiter Pressure relief function Inlet element Pilot operated pressure relief valves of large nominal width Directional valve element / actuator ports Relief valves with anti-cavitation function LS pressure limitation Adjustable for each actuator port External pressure adjustment possible for each actuator Fields of Application Cranes Drilling machines Forestry machines Others
Mobile Controls
198
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

General Design System Type Size Installation position Type of connection Weight
Open center Closed center Directional valve element, mechanical Directional valve element, hydraulic Directional valve element, electrohydr. End element Hydraulic uid and ambient temperature range Hydraulic Flow Port P qV, max qV, max pnom p p p p p p p p
Inlet element:
kg kg kg kg kg kg C
Sandwich plate design Load-Sensing (LS) M4 22 optional SAE 28 28 24 29 33 13 20 to +80
Port A, B Nominal pressure max. Operating pressure P / LS max. in port A/B T Y X Pilot pressure max. in port a, b Pilot pressure range hydraulic elektrohydraulic Recommended hydraulic pilot control devices LS pressure relief function (adjustment ranges) (selected in the factory) Hydraulic uid
Viscosity range haydraulic uid max. permissible degree of contamination to ISO 4406 (c) Electric Electrical pilot control valves Recommended ampliers (other control options on enquiry)
L/min 400 600 with P1 and P2 ports L/min 400 with pressure compensator and load-holding function bar 350 bar 350 bar 420 bar 30 bar at zero pressure to tank bar 35 bar 35 bar 8.5 to 22.5 bar 8.7 to 26 TH 6... characterictic curve 97, see RE 64552 bar 50 to 149 150 to 350 Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Other uid on enquiry, e.g. HEES (synthetic esthers) to VDMA 24568 as well as hydraulic uids as specied in RE 90221 2 mm /s 10 to 380 class 20/18/15
FTWE 4 K...; see RE 58008 FTDRE 4 K...; see RE 58038 Analogue amplier: RA 1.0 and 2.1 (in preparation) Digitalamplier: RC-Family (RE 95200)
Note: The technical data was determined at a viscosity range of = 30 mm2/s (HLP46: 50C).
Mobile Controls
199
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Ordering code
Short code Inlet element
1 spool axis
Directional valve elements

Continued on next page
M4 22 1X
2 spool axis
=P =J =Q
Actuator port "A"
Actuator port "B"
No. of directional valves 1 to 8 Size 22 = 22 Series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Open Center Closed Center
Without primary pressure relief valve (not with version P)
3 spool axis
Secondary valves H...H... = Pressure relief

anti-cavitation valves, preoperated (see table) Q= Plug screw (Secondary valves can be retrotted)
With primary pressure relief valve =... (pressure details in bar, 3-digits) Pilot oil supply With internal pilot oil supply =Y For external pilot oil supply =X Without pilot pressure switch-off and LS damping shuttle = 1 =2 With pilot pressure switch-off With LS damping shuttle =3 With pilot pressure switch-off and LS damping shuttle = 4 With pressure compensator, with load-holding function (standard) = S Without pressure compensator, with load-holding function = C With LS pressure relief valve (pressure details in bar, 3-digits) With LS pressure relief plug screw (LS pressure relief valve can be retrotted) Without LS pressure relief valve (LS pressure relief valve can not be retrofitted)) Housing with measuring ports Housing without measuring ports Spool symbol = = Q = Z =M =Z M M Q Z Z 1)
=E
=Q
=J
1) 2)
Details required only for type of operation H and H3 Damping shuttle 00 = Without (Standard) 06 = With 0.6 mm 07 = With 0.7 mm With 0.8 mm 08 = Details required only for type of operation H3, W2, W3 and W4 Junior Timer 2-pin (AMP) 2) 1= Supply voltage 24 V 3= Supply voltage 12 V DT04-2P (Deutsch) 2) 8= Supply voltage 24 V 9= Supply voltage 12 V Operation cover A M= Mechanical 1) H= Hydraulic W2 = Electrohydraulic proportional W4 = Electrohydraulic switchable H3 = Hydraulic with pilot oil switch-off W3 = Electrohydraulic proportional with pilot oil switch-off ...... = Flow in L/min, 3-digits, e.g. 320-320; Actuator ports A and B Mechanical is only without LS pressure relief valve (ZZZ) Mating plugs are not included in the scope of supply and must be ordered separately. Section 4
Mobile Controls
200
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Ordering code
End element Additional details
11
Further details in clear text 11 = A= Z= P= R= T=

Ports as SAE
End element End element without ports, with internal LS unloading End element with LS port, without internal LS unloading End element with P2 port End element with P2 and LS port End element with T2 port
Pressure setting in bar in actuator ports A and B H050 = 50 bar H063 = 63 bar H080 = 80 bar H100 = 100 bar H125 = 125 bar H140 = 140 bar H150 = 150 bar H160 = 160 bar H175 = 175 bar H190 = 190 bar H210 = 210 bar H230 = 230 bar H240 = 240 bar H250 = 250 bar H280 = 280 bar H300 = 300 bar H320 = 320 bar H350 = 350 bar
= Prefered type
Preferred spool types Symetric spools Spool type Pressure compensator S 400-400 360-360 320-320 Flow in L/min (other ows can be set on the stroke limiter) 300-300 270-270 240-240 200-200 180-180 160-160 130-130 115-115 100-100 080-080 072-072 065-065
E, J, Q
Complete control blocks are to be dened in accordance with the type code. The order text is used to collate the technical features and requirements. The Rexroth Sales Organisation derives a short code and a material number from the order text.
Example of a short code of an M4-22 control block with three directional valve elements.
M4 6789 1 0 / 3 M4 22
Control block no. Series of type (1X) No. of directional valve elements revision index of series
Mobile Controls
201
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Load sensing control block Sandwich plate design Model SP-08

Series 2X Nominal pressure 3600 psi (250 bar) pump side Nominal pressure 4300 psi (300 bar) actuator side Maximum ow pump side: 20 GPM (75 l/min) inlet element Maximum ow actuator side: 13 GPM (50 l/min)
Features Types of actuation Mechanical (hand lever) Hydraulic Electromagnetic: switchable, proportional Flow Load-pressure compensated Excellent repeatability Low hysteresis Adjustable
Pressure relief function Inlet element With primary pressure relief valve Directional valve element / actuator ports Pilot operated pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve Fields of application Truck applications Drilling equipment Working platforms Cranes
Construction machines Agricultural machines Municipal vehicles Stationary applications
8 A B
5
A B
1
1 2 3 4
7
5 6 7 8
Housing Main spool Adjustable orice with load-holding function Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve
Pilot operated check valves Solenoid Compression spring Plug screw
Mobile Controls
202
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Type of connection Pipe thread to ISO 228/1 Weight Inlet with 3-way pressure compensator P lbs (kg) 5.1 (2.3) elements with 2-way pressure compensator M; H lbs (kg) 11.5 (5.2) without pressure compensator J; G lbs (kg) 10.8 (4.9) Directional with manual actuation lbs (kg) 4 to 5.1 (1.8 to 2.3) valve with hydraulic actuation lbs (kg) 4.8 (2.2) elements with electromagnetic actuation lbs (kg) 6.6 to 7.7 (3 to 3.5) End LA (without mounting angle) lbs (kg) 0.44 (0.2) element LU (without mounting angle) lbs (kg) 0.9 (0.4) Mounting angle F, plus lbs (kg) 0.22 (0.1) SV (with poppet valve) lbs (kg) 7.3 (3.3) Installation orientation Optional Hydraulic uid and ambient temperature range F (C) 4 to +176 (20 to +80) Hydraulic Max. operating Ports P, M, X, LS psi (bar) 3600 (250) p pressure Port A, B psi (bar) 4300 (300) p Port T psi (bar) 290 (20) p Nominal pressure psi (bar) 3600 (250) pnom Max. pilot pressure ports a, b psi (bar) 43 (30) p Max. ow Actuation mechanical, hydraulic GPM (l/min) 13 (50) qV, max electromagnetic, switchable GPM (l/min) 8 (30) qV, max electromagnetic, proportional qV, max GPM (l/min) 10.5 (40) Recommended hydraulic pilot control devices Type 2TH6 (control curve 06) Data sheet RE 64552 Type 2TH6R (control curve 06) Data sheet RE 64551 Type 4TH6 (control curve 06) Data sheet RE 64555 Hydraulic uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1); other hydraulic uids, e.g. HEES (synthetic esters) to VDMA as well as hydraulic uids as specied in RE 90221, on enquiry Viscosity range SSU (mm2/s) 35 to 1760 (10 to 380) Max. permissible degree of contamination of the Class 20/18/15 2) hydraulic uid cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c) Leakage A, B T at an operating pressure of 2175 psi (150 bar) Standard ounce/min (cm3/min) 1.5 (45) qVL With isolator valve ounce/min (cm3/min) 0.07 (2) qVL Magnetic Switching solenoid 12 V 24 V Current/proportional range A 2.5 1.25 Resistance 5 19.2 R Proportional solenoid 12 V 24 V Current/proportional range A 0.5 to 2.3 0.25 to 1.5 Resistance 5.3 15 R Note: The technical data were determined at a viscosity of = 00 SSU (41 mm2/s) and a temperature of = 120 F (50 C).
1 2
) Suitable for NBR and FKM seals ) For this, we recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75 203 Section 4
Mobile Controls
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Ordering code
Short code
Inlet elements
Directional valve elements 1. spool axis Continued on next page
SP 08 2X
2. spool axis
No. of directional valves 1 to 10 Component series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) = 2X
3. spool axis
Inlet element Open Center With 3-way pressure compensator Inlet element Closed Center Without shuttle valve, without pressure compensator With shuttle valve, without pressure compensator Without shuttle valve, with 2-way pressure compensator With shuttle valve, with 2-way pressure compensator With priority valve
=P =J =G =M =H =V
With plug screw (primary pressure relief function can be retrofitted), without measuring port =Q With primary pressure relief function, without measuring port (pressure indication in bar, 3 digits) = Adjustable orifice with load-holding function Section pressure compensator (on enquiry) Spool symbol A LS B 1 P 0 T 2 =E A LS B 2 T =J =F =S
1 P
Actuator ports A and B Flow in L/min, 3 digits, e.g. 030030 1) Actuation Mechanical, encapsulated lever Mechanical, with double-axis lever Hydraulic Electromagnetic, switchable Electromagnetic, proportional Indication required only in the case of actuation types C2 and P5 Supply voltage 24 V Supply voltage 12 V
1)
= = R5 = R9 = H2 = C2 = P5 =1 =3
Standard spool types (spool types E, J) Symmetric spools Asymmetric spools Flow in L/min 010-010 020-010 040-020 020-020 030-030 040-040
Mobile Controls
204
Section 4
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Ordering code
Directional valve elements End elements / supplementary details
M 19
Further details in clear text 19 = Actuator port A Actuator port B M= F= O= LA = LU = SV = Connections with SAE ports to SAE J1626 or ISO 11926-1 NBR seals, suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 With mounting angle Without mounting angle End plate (up to 2-fold control block) End plate with internal tank connection (from 3-fold control block) End plate with poppet valve 4)
Z= Without secondary valve Pressure relief/anti-cavitation valve, pilot operated (pressure indicated in bar, 3 digits) H + pressure in bar = Q= Plug screw S= Pilot operated check valve (in the case of a pilot operated check valve, this valve is installed in actuator port "B" in the factory ordering code "ZS") A= Hydraulically lockable float function (one-sided) B= Pilot operated check valves with split opening spool (float function) 3) A= B= Arrangement of the actuating element with version R5 Manual actuation on connection side A - lever to the top (standard type) Manual actuation on connection side B - lever to the top B
C4 =
Indication required only for types of actuation C2 and P5 Cable socket, 2-pin, type: Junior Timer (AMP) 2)
2) 3)
Cable sockets are not included in the scope of supply and must be ordered separately, see page 19 of full version catalog. Only in conjunction with end element SV 4) Only in conjunction with directional valve element B The complete control blocks are dened in accordance with the type code. The ordering text is used to lay down the technical features and requirements. The Bosch Rexroth sales organisation derives a short code and a material number from the ordering text. Example of a short code of an SP-08 control block with three directional valve elements.
SP 1234 20 / 3 SP 08
Number of directional valve elements Control block no. Serial no./revision index
Mobile Controls
205
Section 4
Extracted from RA 90810/01.06

Heavy duty priority ow controls

3-way ow regulator with pressure compensated and solenoid controlled priority ow for standard and two pump systems A-VRFC3C-VEI-VS OM.43.20.80 - Y - Z OM.43.12.80 - Y - Z Up to 6000 PSI (410 bar) Up to 100 GPM (380 l/min)
Precise metering of the pressure compensated priority ow A independent of all working pressures Constant, repeatable priority ow yielding steady beats-perminute hammer performance or rotations-perminute speed of rotary actuators Electronic, solenoid actuated control to engage priority ow, with a wide range of electrical connections and voltages available Wide choice of ow ranges, with various port options, from SAE-8 (3/4-16 UNF) up to SAE-20 (1 5/8-12 UN) Two pump circuit solution employing only a single priority valve reduces plumbing requirements Relief valve for pressure limitation of the priority circuit is standard in all valves Low leakage from the priority outlet, with solenoid valve de-energized, means no undesired operation of the actuator (such as pecking of and impact hammer) Rugged, Zinc plated, steel body for heavy duty applications (pressure up to 5000 psi / 350 bar) Unique mounting hole arrangement reduces stress on moving parts from possible misalignment, and minimizes the chance for malfunction in awkward, after-market installations
Compact Hydraulics
206
Section 4.1

Standard conguration OM.43.20.80 - Y - Z
TECHNICAL DATA
Max working pressure: 5000 psi (350 bar) Max priority line pressure: depending from relief (1) setting (see table Z) Back pressure in T (max): 20 psi (1.5 bar)
Drain from T with solenoid up to 0.4 gpm valve not energized: (up to 1.5 l/min) Steel body
0.79 0.18 2.76 3.39 2.15 2.46 3.48 1.89 2.99 7.48 2.68 0.71 3.54 0.55 3.62 1.42 1.50 5.12 0.35 (20) (4.5) (70) (86) (54.5) (62.5) (88.5) (48) (76) (190) (68) (18) (90) (14) (92) (36) (38) (130) (9) 1.18 0.22 2.36 2.93 1.83 2.22 3.07 1.44 2.99 6.81 2.68 0.59 3.54 0.53 3.17 (30) (5.5) (60) (74.5) (46.5) (56.5) (78) (36.5) (76) (173) (68) (15) (90) (13.5) (80.5) 1.08 0.20 1.97 2.32 1.46 1.73 2.40 1.34 1.97 5.51 2.87 0.53 2.87 0.51 2.74 (27.5) (5) (50) (59) (37) (44) (61) (34) (50) (140) (73) (13.5) (73) (13) (69.5) 1.42 1.50 4.72 0.35 (36) (38) (120) (9) 1.61 1.50 3.93 0.35 (41) (38) (100) (9)
58 27 57 56
27.6 (12.5) 19.8 (9) 10.6 (4.8) 7.5 (3.4) Weight lbs (Kg)
1.32 0.20 1.58 2.15 1.40 1.50 2.22 1.16 1.97 5.12 2.99 0.34 2.87 0.49 2.36 1.61 1.50 3.54 0.34 (33.5) (5) (40) (54.5) (35.5) (38) (56.5) (29.5) (50) (130) (76) (8.5) (73) (12.5) (60) (41) (38) (90) (8.5)
S2
S1
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
H6
H5
H4
H3
H2
H1
PORT SIZE
Y
P-A-B T
INLET FLOW (max)

gpm (l/min)
27 (100) 53 (200) 80 (300) 106 (400)
REGULATED PRIORITY FLOW

gpm (l/min) max
23 (85) 37 (140) 58 (220) 80 (300)
PRIORITY PRESSURE RANGE
gpm (l/min) per turn

approx. 4.8 (approx. 18) approx. (approx. approx. (approx. 5.3 20) 6.9 26)
Z
20 35
Adj. press. range psi (bar)
Press. increase psi/turn (bar/turn)
Std. setting psi (bar)
56 57 27 58
3/4-16 UNF-2B 9/16-18 UNF 1 1/16-12 UN-2B 9/16-18 UNF 1 5/16-12 UN-2B 9/16-18 UNF 1 5/8-12 UN-2B 9/16-18 UNF
725-3000 (50-210) 1450-5000 (100-350)
696 (48) 1378 (95)
2900 (200) 5000 (350)
approx. 7.4 (approx. 28)
Compact Hydraulics
207
Section 4.1

Two pump conguration OM.43.12.80 - Y - Z
TECHNICAL DATA
Max working pressure: 5000 psi (350 bar) Max priority line pressure: depending from relief (1) setting (see table Z) Back pressure in T max: 20 psi (1.5 bar)
Drain from T with solenoid up to 0.4 gpm not energized: (up to 1.5 l/min) Steel body
1.58 0.20 4.33 2.78 1.65 2.40 (40) (5) (110) (70.5) (42) (61) 1.26 0.18 3.54 2.32 1.34 1.85 (32) (4.5) (90) (59) (34) (47) 3.07 1.28 2.99 6.81 2.87 0.59 (78) (32.5) (76) (173) (73) (15) 2.40 1.34 (61) (34) 3.54 0.53 3.17 1.50 1.52 5.51 0.35 1.38 2.21 4.06 (90) (13.5) (80.5) (38) (38.5) (140) (9) (35) (56) (103)
27 57 56 Y
39.7 (18) 23.6 (10.7) 14.3 (6.5) Weight lbs (Kg)
1.97 5.51 2.87 0.69 2.87 0.53 2.89 1.50 1.44 4.88 0.35 1.14 1.81 3.19 (50) (140) (73) (17.5) (73) (13.5) (73.5) (38) (36.5) (124) (9) (29) (46) (81)
1.26 0.18 2.76 2.11 1.50 1.40 2.22 1.12 1.97 5.12 2.87 0.34 2.48 0.49 2.36 1.50 1.44 3.94 0.34 0.98 1.30 2.89 (32) (4.5) (70) (53.5) (38) (35.5) (56.5) (28.5) (50) (130) (73) (8.5) (63) (12.5) (60) (1.38) (36.5) (100) (8.5) (25) (33) (73.5)
S2 S1
L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1
H6 H5 H4 H3 H2 H1 REGULATED PRIORITY FLOW

gpm (l/min) gpm (l/min) max per turn
40 (150) 65 (250) 103 (390) approx. 8.45 (approx. 32) approx. 9.25 (approx. 35) approx. 12.15 (approx. 46)
PORT SIZE
Y
56 57 27
INLET FLOW (max)

T
9/16-18 UNF-2B 9/16-18 UNF-2B 9/16-18 UNF-2B
PRIORITY PRESSURE RANGE
P1-P2 B1-B2
3/4-16 UNF-2B 1 1/16-12 UN-2B 1 5/16-12 UN-2B
A
1 1/16-12 UN-2B 1 5/16-12 UN-2B 1 5/8-12 UN-2B
gpm (l/min) P1 P2
26 (100) 53 (200) 79 (300) 26 (100) 53 (200) 79 (300)
Z
20 35
Adj. press. range (psi)
Press. increase (psi/turn)
Std. setting (psi)
725-3000 (50-210) 1450-5000 (100-350)
696 (48) 1378 (95)
2900 (200) 5000 (350)
Compact Hydraulics
208
Section 4.1

The FLOW CONTROL VALVES code OM.43.12.80 are 3 way, with two separate inlets P1 and P2 and three outlets A and B1 and B2, the first outlet A being priority, pressure compensated type, with pressure relief valve, and available on demand through a solenoid cartridge; the second and third outlets B1 and B2 are the by-pass for all flow in excess of what demanded by priority. All flows from A, B1 and B2 ports can be employed to power different functions of the machine. These valves provide a simple and efficient way to power hydraulic tools (such as hydraulic hammers) from the existing hydraulic system, without any need to modify the directional control valve. Applications They allow the simultaneous operations, independently from the respective working pressures, of both the hydraulic actuator powered by the priority outlet A, and of the normal functions of the machine (traction, slewing, cylinder motions, etc.) supplied by the main directional valve through the bay-pass outlets B1 and B2.
FITTING AND CONNECTIONS

The valve must be mounted against a flat surface using the 3 fixing holes, and it must lay on top of the 3 special mounting spacers in order to avoid even the smallest distortion of the valve body which could prevent the internal compensating spool from sliding freely.
Connections to the hydraulic system:

Ports P1 and P2 (inlets) to the main line from the pumps. Port A (priority outlet) to the line feeding the hydraulic hammer, or the attachment. Important: for the correct metering of the compensating spool the priority outlet shall be always pressurized, with a back-pressure of at least 115-130 psi (8-9 bar); if necessary, fit a check valve with the needed cracking pressure. Ports B1 and B2 (by-pass, or excess flow outlet) to the lines delivering the oil to the main directional valve. Port T to a tank line. It is absolutely necessary that port T is connected to a low pressure tank line, 15-22 psi max (1-1.5 bar max).
Adjustment of priority flow

The volume of priority flow from port A can be easily modified by turning the screw (1): the flow increases by turning the screw counter-clockwise and, once adjusted to the desired level, it remains constant independently from the working pressure.
Adjustment of maximum priority pressure

The maximum pressure in the priority line A can be adjusted by turning the screw (5) of the small relief cartridge (6) which controls the maximum pressure in the chamber (3): when this pilot cartridge opens, the pressure in chamber (3) drops and the priority flow is stopped. Note: the relief cartridge (6) controls only the maximum pressure in the priority outlet A, and does not control the pressure in the by-pass and main line: the main line must be protected by another relief valve, capable to discharge the full oil flow.
Compact Hydraulics
209
Section 4.1

Ordering code: OD.02.17 - X - Y - Z
COILS
Attention: indicated coils fit every hammer valve versions
SPARE PARTS
SOLENOID CARTRIDGE
Port size Ordering code
RELIEF CARTRIDGE
Port size Ordering code
OM.43.12.80.56.20 OM.43.12.80.56.35 OM.43.12.80.57.20 OM.43.12.80.57.35 OM.43.12.80.27.20 OM.43.12.80.27.35
OD.15.02.18.1I.00
OD.13.20.67.39.00
OM.43.12.80.56.20 OM.43.12.80.57.20 OM.43.12.80.27.20 OM.43.12.80.56.35 OM.43.12.80.57.35 OM.43.12.80.27.35
04.11.22.03.99.20
04.11.22.03.99.35
Compact Hydraulics
210
Section 4.1

Flow diverters
6 ways ow diverters VS 311/312/315
L7.53.U.J.W.V.X.Y.Z Pressure up to 4500 PSI (310 bar) Flow up to 37.0 GPM (140 l/miin)
6 ways bankable ow diverters VS 281/5/6F

L7.45.U.J.W.V.X.Y.Z Pressure up to 4500 PSI (310 bar) Flow up to 23.8 GPM (90 l/min)
Compact Hydraulics
211
Section 4.1

6 ways ow diverters VS 311/312/315 L7.53.U.J.W.V.X.Y.Z
Compact Hydraulics
212
Section 4.1

6 ways ow diverters VS 311/312/315 L7.53.U.J.W.V.X.Y.Z
Compact Hydraulics
213
Section 4.1

6 ways bankable ow diverters VS 281/5/6F L7.45.U.J.W.V.X.Y.Z
Compact Hydraulics
214
Section 4.1

Compact Hydraulics
215
Section 4.1

Compact Hydraulics
216
Section 4.1

Coils for ow diverters VS 311/312/315 & VS 281/5/6F C 65
Compact Hydraulics
217
Section 4.1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Notes
Mobile Controls
218
Section 4.1
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 5 Pressure Control Valves
Pressure relief, direct operated DBD ................................................................................ 220 DB 6 D ........................................................................... 221 Pressure relief, direct operated ZDBY D/Z2DY D ............................................................ 223 Pressure relief, pilot operated (Z)DBT/DZT .......... 225 Pressure relief, pilot operated DBV 6 V ................. 227 Pilot operated pressure relief, sandwich plate design ZDBK 6 .......................................................................... 229 ZDBK 10........................................................................ 230 ZDB 6 and Z2DB 6 .................................................... 231 ZDB 10 and Z2DB 10 ............................................... 232 Pilot operated pressure relief DB(W)-5X ................................................................. 233 DB(W)-4X ................................................................. 237 Multi-function, direct operated DZ 6 DP ......................................................................... 239 DZ 10 DP ...................................................................... 240 Multi-function, pilot operated DZ ............................. 241 Pressure cut-off valve, pilot operated DA 6 V ...... 242 Pilot operated pressure reducinig, sandwich plate design ZDRK 6 VP ........................................... 244 Direct operated pressure reducing, sandwich plate design ZDR 6 D......................................................................... 245 ZDR 10 D ...................................................................... 246 Direct operated pressure reducing DR 6 DP ....... 247
Pilot operated pressure reducing, sandwich plate design ZDRK 10 V............................................ 248 Pilot operated pressure reducing, sandwich plate design ZDR 10 V .............................................. 249 Pilot operated pressure reducing ZDRY 10 V ....................................................................... 250 Pilot operated pressure reducing DR-5X ........................................................................ 252 DR-4X ........................................................................ 253 Direct operated pressure reducing DR 10 DP ......................................................................... 254 Pilot operated pressure shut-off DA ....................... 255
219
219
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve, direct operated Model DBD

Sizes 6 to 30, Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 630 bar (9150 PSI) Maximum ow 330 L/min (87 GPM)
Direct operated, fast response pressure relief valve Optional mounting styles Screw-in cartridge valve Cartridge in threaded housing Multiple pressure adjustment options Model DBD A..K 1X/.. Multiple pressure adjustment ranges available for maximum resolution
Ordering code DBD

Pressure relief valve, direct operated
Type of adjustment Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Handknob Size SAE Type of connection for block mounting (cartridge) for threaded connections Ordering code for pressure range PSI 25 bar (365 PSI) 50 bar (725 PSI) 100 bar (1450 PSI) 200 bar (2900 PSI) 315 bar (4600 PSI) 400 bar (5800 PSI) 630 bar (9150 PSI) Thread options Model G only SAE threaded housing NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Further details to be written in clear text = 25 = 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 400 = 630 = 12 = no code =6 -4; 7/16-20 6 = 10 -8; 10 = 15 -12; 15 = 20 -16; 20 = 25 -20; 25 = 30 -24; = 10 =K =G = 1X 30 =H e.g.. Size 6 10 15 20 25 30 =S
1X
3/4-16 1 1/16-12 1 5/16-12 1 5/8-12 1 7/8-12
Series 10 to 19, (10 to 19, externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Operating pressure range Inlet P Outlet T bar (PSI) bar (PSI) Size 6 ... 400 (5800) ... 315 (4600) Size 10 ... 630 (9140) ... 315 (4600) Size 15 and 20 ... 400 (5800) ... 315 (4600) Size 25 and 30 ... 315 (4600) ... 315 (4600)
Pressure Control Valves
220
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve, directly operated Model DB 6 D

Nominal size 6 Series 1X Max. working pressure up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Max. ow 60 l/min (15.85 GPM)
For subplate mounting 3 pressure setting elements, choice of: Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale Rotary knob with scale Model DB 6 D
Ordering code
DB 6
Pressure relief valve Nominal size 6 Directly operated Pressure relief in P-duct Pressure relief in P and B-ducts Mounting hole configuration to ISO 6264 Setting elements Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale 1) Rotary knob with scale
1)
1X /
*
= Further information in plain text horizontal adjustment vertical adjustment No code = W65 =
= DB =6 =D =P = PB =W =2 =3 =7 1X = 180 = 160 = 315 = V=
FPM seals (other seals available on request) Note Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account! max. setting pressure = 80 bar (1160 PSI) max. setting pressure = 160 bar (2320 PSI) max. setting pressure = 315 bar (4500 PSI) Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
2H key included in scope of delivery
221
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve function Type of mounting Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Horizontal Vertical Hydraulic Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524, rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (also see RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester), other pressure uids available on request Class 20/18/15 1) Pressure relief valve, directly operated Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6, ISO 6264 Optional C (F) 25 to +50 (13 to +122) kg (lbs.) 1.4 (3.09) kg (lbs.) 1.1 (2.42)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Pressure uid temperature range Seals Viscosity range Max. setting pressure Max. working pressure Max. ow rate
1) 2
C (F) 25 to +80 (13 to +176) FPM (Viton Dupont) mm /s (SUS) 10 to 500 (45 to 2320) bar (PSI) 80, 160 or 315 (1160, 2320 or 4500) bar (PSI) 315 (4500) l/min (GPM) 60 (15.85)
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
222
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve, directly operated Model ZDBY D / Z2DBY D

Nominal size 6 and 10 Series 1X Max. working pressure up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Max. ow 60 and 120 l/min (15.85 and 31.70 GPM)
Modular valve Mounting hole conguration to ISO 4401 3 pressure stages 5 effective directions With 1 or 2 pressure valve cartridges 2 setting elements: Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale Subplates as per catalog sections RE 45053 (NG6) and RE 45055 (NG10) (order separately)
Model ZDBY D / Z2DBY D
Ordering code Z
Modular valve With 2 pressure valve cartridges (only enter for versions DC and DD) Pressure relief valve Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401 Nominal size 6 Nominal size 10 Directly operated Injection P to T A to T B to T A to T and B to T A to B and B to A Setting element Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale 1)
1)
DB
1X /
V /
*
Further information in plain text No code = mounting hole config. ISO 4401, without locating bore mounting hole config. ISO 4401 with locating bore
=Z =2
= DB =Y V= = 60 = 10 =D =P =A =B =C =D =2 =3
60 =
FPM seals (other seals available on request) Note Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account! max. setting pressure setting pressure range up to 80 bar (1160 PSI) setting pressure range up to 160 bar (2320 PSI) setting pressure range up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
180 = 160 = 315 = 1X =
2H key is included in scope of delivery
223
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Size 6 General Valve function Type of mounting Installation position Weight Hydraulic Pressure uid
Version 2 Version 3
Pressure reducing valve, directly operated Intermediate plate NG6, ISO 4401-03-04-0-94 Optional kg (lbs.) 1.4 (3.09) kg (lbs.) 1.8 (3.97) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester), other pressure uids available on request Class 20/18/15 1)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Seals FPM (Viton Dupont) 2 Viscosity range mm /s (SUS) 10 to 500 (45 to 2320) Max. setting pressure bar (PSI) 80, 160 or 315 (1160, 2320 or 4500) Max. working pressure bar (PSI) 315 (4500) Max. ow rate l/min (GPM) 60 (15.85) 1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
Size 10 General Valve function Type of mounting Installation position Weight Hydraulic Pressure uid
Version 2 Version 3
Pressure reducing valve, directly operated Intermediate plate NG10, ISO 4401-05-04-0-94 Optional kg (lbs.) 2.9 (6.39) kg (lbs.) 3.5 (7.71) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester), other pressure uids available on request Class 20/18/15 1)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Seals FPM (Viton Dupont) Viscosity range mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 500 (45 to 2320) Max. setting pressure bar (PSI) 80 (1160) 160 or 315 (2320 or 4500) Max. working pressure bar (PSI) 315 (4500) 315 (4500) Max. ow rate l/min (GPM) 90 (23.78) 120 (31.70) 1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
224
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve Model (Z)DBT/DZT

Directly operated valves for limiting the system pressure Used as a pilot valve For subplate mounting: Mounting hole conguration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Subplates as per catalog sections RE 45052 (order separately)
Model (Z)DBT / DZT
Ordering code
Subplate mounting Pressure relief function Pressure sequence function Intermediate plate Pressure relief function For installation in instrument panel Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Function in A-duct Function in B-duct Function in P-duct Setting elements Handwheel and lock nut External square with lock nut and protective cap Rotary knob, lockable, with scale 1) Rotary knob with scale External square and lock nut 1) 2H key is included in scope of delivery = DBT = DZT = ZDBT =G =X =A =B =P 1X = =1 =2 =3 =7 =8 180 = 160 = 315 =
1X /
No code = NBR seals (other seals available on request) Note Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account! setting pressure range 3 to 80 bar (43 to 1160 PSI) setting pressure range 3 to 160 bar (43 to 2320 PSI) setting pressure range 3 to 315 bar (43 to 4500 PSI) Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
225
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation position Storage temperature range Ambient temperature range Weight Optional C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) kg (lbs.) 2.0 (4.4)
Hydraulic measured with HLP 46; oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F), v = 35 mm2/s (162 SUS) Max. working pressure Max. setting pressure Port P Pressure stage 160 bar (2320 PSI) Pressure stage 315 bar (4500 PSI) Pressure stage 350 bar (5075 PSI) Min. setting pressure Return Max. ow rate Pressure uid Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Port T bar (PSI) 350 (5075) bar (PSI) 160 (2320) bar (PSI) 315 (4500) bar (PSI) 350 (5075) bar (PSI) 3 (43) bar (PSI) Separately to tank without pressure l/min (GPM) 3 (0.79) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 other pressure uids available on request C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) mm2/s (SUS) 15 to 380 (70 to 1760) Class 20/18/15 1) % < 5 of max. setting pressure cm3 (in3) < 0.5 (0.03)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Hysteresis Control oil volume (Vx) (for pressure sequence valves only)
1)
226
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated Model DBV 6 V

For subplate mounting 2 pressure setting elements, choice of: Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale Model DBV 6 V
Ordering code DB 6
Pressure relief valve Nominal size 6 Pilot operated Pressure relief in P-duct Mounting hole configuration to ISO 6264 Setting elements Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale 1)
1)
1X /
V
V=
*
Further information in plain text FPM seals (other seals available on request) Note Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account! Secondary pressure 6 to 80 bar (87 to 1160 PSI) Secondary pressure 6 to 160 bar (87 to 2320 PSI) Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
= DB =6 =V =P =W =2 =3 1X = 180 = 160 =
227
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve function Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Hydraulic Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester), other pressure uids available on request Class 20/18/15 1) Pressure relief valve, pilot operated Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6, ISO 6264 Optional C (F) 25 to +50 (13 to +122) kg (lbs.) 1.4 (3.09)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Pressure uid temperature range Seals Viscosity range Max. setting pressure Max. working pressure Max. ow rate
1)
C (F) 25 to +80 (13 to +176) FPM (Viton Dupont) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 500 (45 to 2320) bar (PSI) 80 or 160 (1160 or 2320) bar (PSI) 315 (4500) l/min (GPM) 60 (15.85)
228
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve Sandwich plate design Model ZDBK 6

Size 6 Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) Maximum ow 40 L/min (10.6 GPM)
Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Sandwich plate design Three pressure ranges Adjustment type: Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Available with different pressure control congurations
Model ZDBK 6 VP 21X/V
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate design Pressure relief valve Nominal size 6 (D 03) Relief from: AT PT BT =Z = DBK =6 = VA = VP = VB 50 = 100 = 210 = 1X = V=
DBK
1X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text FPM seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester fluids (HFD-R) Other seal types on request Adjustment range up to 50 bar (725 PSI) Adjustment range up to 100 bar (1450 PSI) Adjustment range up to 210 bar (3050 PSI) Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19 = externally interchangeable
2=
Adjustment mechanism Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Technical data
Nominal size Nominal pressure Adjustment pressure Flow Weight Model ZDBK Size bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) 6 210 (3050) up to 50 (725), 100 (1450), 210 (3050) 40 (10.6) 0.6 (1.3)
229
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve Sandwich plate design Model ZDBK 10

Size 10 Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) Maximum ow 80 L/min (21 GPM)
Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Sandwich plate design Three pressure ranges Adjustment type: Screw adjustment with protective cap Available with ve different pressure control congurations With one or two pressure relief cartridges
Model ZDBK 10 VP 21X/V
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate design Port or cross port relief, Omit is single Pressure relief valve Nominal size 10 (D 05) Relief from: AT PT BT A T; B T (Z2DBK) A B; B A (Z2DBK) =Z =2 = DBK = 10 = VA = VP = VB = VC = VD 2= 50 = 100 = 210 = 1X = V=
DBK 10
1X
*
Further details to be written in clear text FPM seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Other seal types on request Adjustment range up to 50 bar (725 PSI) Adjustment range up to 100 bar (1450 PSI) Adjustment range up to 210 bar (3050 PSI) Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19 = externally interchangeable) Adjustment mechanism Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Technical data
Nominal size Nominal pressure Adjustment pressure Flow Weight Model ZDBK Size bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) 10 210 (3050) up to 50 (725), 100 (1450), 210 (3050) 80 (21) 1.3 (2.9)
230
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve Sandwich plate design Models ZDB 6 and Z2DB 6
Size 6 Series 4X Maximum operating pressure 315 (bar) 4600 PSI Maximum ow 60 L/min (15.9 GPM)
Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Porting pattern to ISO 4401-3; NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Two pressure adjustment options 1 or 2 pressure relief valve cartridges available Five relieving congurations available Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 4600 PSI
Model ZDB 6 VA24X/
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate design =Z V= =2 = DB =6 = VA = VP = VB = VC = VD 1= 2= 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 4X = Two pressure relief cartridges (only available with Models 2VC2 and 2VD2, see below Pressure relief valve Nominal size 6 (D 03) Relief from: AT PT BT A T and B T (Z2DB) A B and B A (Z2DB)
DB
4X
*
Further details to be written in clear text FPM seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Other seal types on request Adjustment range up to 50 bar (725 PSI) Adjustment range up to 100 bar (1450 PSI) Adjustment range up to 200 bar (2900 PSI) Adjustment range up to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49 = externally interchangeable) Adjustment mechanism Rotary handwheel Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Technical data
Operating pressure Adjustable pressure range Flow Weight (approx.) Model ZDB 6 Model Z2DB 6 bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) up to 315 (4600) up to 50 (725), 100 (1450), 200 (2900), 315 (4600) up to 60 (15.9) 1 (2.2) 1.2 (2.6)
231
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve Sandwich plate design Models ZDB 10 and Z2DB 10
Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Porting pattern to ISO 4401-5; NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Pressure adjustment options 1 or 2 pressure relief valve cartridges available Three relieving congurations available Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 4600 PSI Model Z2DB 10 VD24X/
Ordering code Z DB 10 4X V
*
Further details to be written in clear text V= FPM seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) (other seal types on request) Adjustment range up to 50 bar (725 PSI) Adjustment range up to 100 bar (1450 PSI) Adjustment range up to 200 bar (2900 PSI) Adjustment range up to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49: externally interchangeable)
Sandwich plate design
=Z =2
Two pressure relief cartridges (only available with Models "VC" and "VD", see below) Pressure relief valve Size 10 (D 05) Relief from: PT A TB and B TB (Z2DB) A B and B A (Z2DB)
= DB = 10 = VP = VC = VD 1= 2=
50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 4X =
Adjustment mechanism Rotary handwheel Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Technical data
Operating pressure Adjustment pressure Flow Weight (approx.) Model ZDB 10 Model Z2DB 10 bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) up to 315 (4600) up to 50 (725), 100 (1450), 200 (2900), 315 (4600) up to 100 (26.4) 2.4 (5.3) 2.6 (5.7)
232
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated Models DB / DBW

Pilot operated pressure relief valve Threaded in-line, or subplate mounted Porting pattern to ISO 6264-06, 08, or 10, NFPA/ANSI R 06, R 08, or R 10 interface Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form E, ISO 6264 and CETOPRP 121 H, For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 064 (must be ordered separately) Five pressure ranges available, to 5000 PSI Pressure adjustment options Optional solenoid venting with directional control valve
Model DB 20 15X/315
Model DBW 20 A35X/3156AG24NZ45
233
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code DB 5X
Without directional valve With built-on directional spool valve Pilot operated valve (complete) Nominal size Valve for Threaded connection SAE
= No code =W = No code
Subplate mounting no code
Ordering details 10 25 32
A a P A a P T T B b B b
= 10 = 20 = 30
= 10 SAE-8; 3/4-16 = 20 SAE-16; 1 5/16-12 = 30 SAE-24; 1 7/8-12
Normally closed
=A
Normally open
=B
For subplate mounting For threaded connections Adjustment elements Rotary knob Sleeve with hexagon and protective cap With main spool 24 mm (0.94) (only in sizes 10, 15, 25 and model DBC 30) Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Settable pressure up to 50 bar (725 PSI) Settable pressure up to 100 bar (1450 PSI) Settable pressure up to 200 bar (2900 PSI) Settable pressure up to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Settable pressure up to 350 bar (5076 PSI)
= No code =G =1 =2 = = 5X = = = = = 50 100 200 315 350
234
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code (continued)
*
Further details to be written in clear text 12 = No code = Threads for Y Port SAE (preferred) NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP Attention! The compatibilty of the seals and pressure uid has to be taken into account! Electrical connections Without plug-in connector, but covered Central solenoid connections Terminal box with 1/2" NPT conduit conn. Terminal box with two 1/2" NPT conduit conn. ANSI B 93.55 M plug-in type connections (without female end) Terminal box with 3-pin connector and light (single solenoid) Terminal box with 5-pin connector and light (single solenoid) With protected override Example Example Voltage DC 12, 24, 96 AC1) 110, 230
K4 = DA = DAL =
DK23L = DK25L = N9 = G 24 = W110 = No code = 6E = No code = =
Without directional valve With directional spool valve (3WE66X/E) settable pressure up to 420 bar (6100 PSI) Standard version Pilot oil supply and drain line
1)
235
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Designation Mounting style Model of connection pressure relief valve subplate mounting, threaded connections or cartridge valve direct via threads; indirect via subplate or manifold, porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A, ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H 10 DB. 10 Subplate mounting DB DBW Threaded connection DB..G DBW..G Installation Hydraulic Nominal pressure Max. operating pressure at ports A, B, X Max. back pressure at port Y DB DBW bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) Max. ow Subplate mounting Threaded connection Electrical technical data Voltage Nominal voltage Nominal power Protection Permissible switching frequency Voltage Nominal voltage Holding power Inrush current Protection Permissible switching frequency 1/h V VA VA 1/h V W DC 12 ,24, 96 30 IP65 15000 AC 110, 220, 50/60 Hz 50 220 IP65 7200 L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) 315 (4600) 210 (3050) (high performance DC solenoid) (3WE66X/E) 2320 (high performance AC solenoid) (3WE66X/E) DB. 10 250 (66) 250 (66) DB. 20 500 (132.1) 500 (132.1) DB. 30 650 (171.7) 650 (171.7) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 350 (5100) 350 (5100) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) 2.6 (5.73) 4.07 (8.98) 5.3 (11.68) 6.87 (14.93) optional 25 DB. 20 3.5 (7.71) 4.97 (10.95) 5.1 (11.24) 6.57 (14.49) 30 DB. 30 4.4 (9.7) 5.87 (12.94) 4.8 (10.58) 6.27 (13.82)
Nominal size Weight
236
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure relief valve, pilot operated Models DB..-4X/...W65 and DBW..-4X/...W65

Sizes 20 Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5100 PSI) Maximum ow 400 L/min (105 GPM)
Pilot operated pressure relief valve Mounts on standard ISO 6264-06 or 08, NFPA/ANSI R 06 or R 08 interface For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 064 Three mounting styles subplate mounting threaded in-line mounting cartridge for manifold mounting Two pressure adjustment options Five pressure ranges, for excellent resolution Model DB 10-1-4X/...W65
Model DB 20 K1-1X/...XY
Technical data
General Mounting position Weight Subplate mounting Threaded connections Manifold mounting (cartridge) Directional control valve data Hydraulic Operating pressure, ports A, B, X Back pressure, port Y Adjustable pressure DB DB min. max. Maximum ow Subplate mounting Threaded connections L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) ... 350 (5100) ... 20 (3625) Flow dependent, see curves page 4 ...50 (725), ...100 (1450), ...200 (2900), ...315 (4600), ...350 (5100) [5100 only Model DB] Size 20 ... 400 (105) ... 300 (80) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) Optional Size 20: 2.3 (5.1) DB 2.95 (6.5), DBW 4.25 (9.4) 0.35 (0.8) See data sheet RA 23 178
237
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code DB
Pilot operated pressure relief valve = DB Without solenoid venting = no desig. with solenoid venting =W Subplate mounting Ordering NFPA/ANSI code interface standard 20 R 08 Ordering code 20 Subplates available SAE 3/4" and 1" SAE 1" -16; 1-5/16-12 = 20 =G =K =1 =2 = 1X = 4X
*
Further details to be written in clear text W65 = Upright cartridge (code not required in manifold mounted version, Model K) No code = V= NBR seals FPM seals (other seals on request)
Threaded in-line connections
Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure uid has to be taken into account! K4 = DA = N9 = G 24 = Example W110 = Example no desig. = 6E = no desig. = Without angled plug-in connector, but covered Terminal box with 1/2 NPT conduit connection With protected manual override Voltage DC 12, 24, 96 AC 110 without solenoid venting with removable solenoids Minimum vent pressure when valve is open A to B
Cartridge model K for manifold mounting
Threaded connections for in-line mounting Manifold mounting (cartridge) Adjustment mechanism Handknob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 10 to 19 (model K only) (10 to 19; externally interchangeable) Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49; externally interchangeable) Maximum Pressure Setting ... 50 bar (725 PSI) ... 100 bar (1450 PSI) ... 200 bar (2900 PSI) ... 315 bar (4600 PSI) ... 350 bar (5100 PSI) (only Model DB)
= 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 350
238
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Multi-function valve, direct operated Model DZ 6 DP

Size 6 Series 5X (Size 6) Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 60 L/min (16 GPM)
Direct operated multi-function valve Mounts on ISO 5781-03 or 08, NFPA/ANSI P 03 Pressure adjustment options screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Handknob Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 4600 PSI Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 052
Model DZ 6 DP25X/M
Ordering code DZ 6
Multi-function valve, direct operated Direct operated Subplate mounted Adjustable handknob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59, externally interchangeable) = DZ =6 =D =P =1 =2 = 5X no code = no code = X= Y= 25 = 75 = 150 = 210 = 12 = no code =
5X
*
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection SAE threads NBR-seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) With reverse free-ow check valve Internally piloted, internally drained Externally piloted, internally drained Internally piloted, externally drained Max. adjustable pressure 25 bar (365 PSI) Max. adjustable pressure 75 bar (1090 PSI) Max. adjustable pressure 150 (2175 PSI) Max. adjustable pressure 210 (3050 PSI)
Size 6, NFPA/ANSI P 03
Technical data
Nominal size Sequence pressure (adjustable) Operating pressure Ports P, A, B (X) Ports T (Y) Maximum ow Weight (approx.) Size bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) 6 up to 25 (365); 75 (1090); 150 (2175); 210 (3050) up to 315 (4600) up to 160 (2320) up to 60 (16) 1.2 (2.6)
239
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Multi-function valve, direct operated Model DZ 10 DP

Size 6, 10 Series 4X (Size 10) Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) Maximum ow 80 L/min (21 GPM)
Direct operated multi-function valve Mounts on ISO 5781-06, NFPA/ANSI P 06 interface For subplates, see data sheet RA 45 062 Four pressure adjustment options Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Handknob Key lock hand knob with scale Hand knob with scale
Model DZ 10 DP24X/M Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 3000 PSI 1) Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve 1) Maximum spring setting, valve permitted to 4600 PSI
Ordering code DZ 10
Multi-function valve, direct operated Size 10, P 03 Direct operated Subplate mounted Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 40 to 59 (40 to 49, externally interchangeable) = DZ = 10 =D =P =2 = 4X
*
Further details to be written in clear text no code = NBR-seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) V= FPM seals suitable for phosphate ester oils (HFD--R) no code = With reverse free-ow check valve M= Without reverse fee-ow check valve no code = Internally piloted, internally drained Y= Internally piloted, externally drained XY = Externally piloted, externally drained 75 = Max. adjustable pressure 1.0 75 bar (151090 PSI) Max. adjustable pressure 1.0 210 bar (153050 PSI) 210 =
Hydraulic uid Temperature range of uid Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Sequence pressure (adjustable) Operating pressure Max. permissible ow Installation position Weight (approx.) kg (lbs.) Ports A, B, X Port Y bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) C (F) mm2/s (SUS) Petroleum oil (HL; HLP); phosphate ester (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) 10 to 800 (60 to 3710) Maximum permissible degree of contamination to ISO 4406, class 18/15. For this, we recommend a lter with a minmum retention rate of 10 75. 25 (360); 75 (1100); 150 (2100); 210 (3100) 315 (4600) 160 (2300) 80 (21) optional 3 (6.6)
240
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Multi-function valve, pilot operated Model DZ

Sizes 10, 20, 30 Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 600 L/min (160 GPM)
Direct operated multi-function valve Mounts on ISO 5781-06, 08, or 10, NFPA/ANSI P 06, P 08, or P10 interface For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 062 Pressure adjustment options Four pressure ranges available, to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve
Model DZ20-2-5X/315XYM
Ordering code DZ
Multi-function valve Complete valve P 06 (3/8", 1/2") P 08 (3/4", 1") P 10 (1-1/4", 1-1/2") Adjustment mechanism Hand knob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59; externally interchangeable) = DZ = no code = 10 = 20 = 30 =1 =2 = 5X no code = X= Y= XY = 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 12 = no code = no code = M=
5X
Further details to be written in clear text Ports X and Y SAE threads (standard) NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) with reverse free-ow check valve without reverse free-ow check valve Piloting internal pilot, internally drained external pilot, internal drain internal pilot, external drain external pilot, external drain Maximum pressure setting ... 50 bar (725 PSI) ... 100 bar (1450 PSI) ... 200 bar (2900 PSI) ... 315 bar (4600 PSI)
Technical data
Mounting position Weight (approx.) Subplate mounted Hydraulic Operating pressure, ports A, B, X Backpressure, port Y Setting pressure Maximum ow maximum valve size bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) ... 315 (4600) ... 315 (4600) ... 50 (725), ... 100 (1450), ... 200 (2900), ... 315 (4600) 200 (52.8) 400 (105.7) 600 (158.6) valve size DZ... kg (lbs.) Optional 10 3.4 (7.5) 20 5.3 (11.7) 30 8.0 (17.7)
241
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure cut-off valve, pilot operated Model DA 6 V

Nominal size 6 Series 4X Max. pressure up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Max. ow 30 l/min (7.93 GPM)
For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 Form A, without locating pin hole (standard) Porting pattern to ISO 4401 and CETOPRP 121 H, with locating pin hole, (ordering details .../60 at the end of the valve type code) Subplates to data sheet RE 45052 (separate order) As cartridge valve (Cavity to ISO 7789) Four adjustment elements: Rotary knob Sleeve with hexagon and protective cap Lockable rotary knob with scale Rotary knob with scale Four pressure stages
Model DA 6 V..2-4X/...
Ordering details DA
Pressure cut-off valve Nominal size 6 Pilot operated For subplate mounting: Pump connection in P (standard) Pump connection in A As cartridge valve (without check valve) Rotary knob Sleeve with hexagon and protective cap Lockable rotary knob with scale Rotary knob with scale = DA =6 =V =P =A =K =1 =2 =3 =7 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = M= V= No code = /60 1) =
4X /
*
Further details in clear text Without locating pin hole With locating pin hole NBR seals FKM seals (other seals on request)
Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid must be taken into account! 10 = 17 = Switching pressure differential 10% Switching pressure differential 17% Settable pressure range 30 to 50 bar (435 to 725 PSI) 50 to 100 bar (725 to 1450 PSI) 100 to 200 bar (1450 to 2900 PSI) 200 to 315 bar (2900 to 4500 PSI)
Series 40 to 49 = 4X (40 to 49: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)

1)
Locating pin 3 x 8 DIN EN ISO 8752, Material No. R900005694 (separate order)
242
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

General Installation Ambient temperature range Weight Manifold mounting Cartridge valve Hydraulic Maximum operating pressure at ports B (P) Maximum ow Pressure uid bar (PSI) 315 (4500) after switching P to T, A to T L/min (GPM) 30 (7.93) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 1); Fast bio-degradable VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1); HEPG (polyglycols) 2); HEES (synthetic ester) 2); Other pressure uids on request C (F) 30 to + 80 (22 to +176) NBR seals 20 to + 80 (4 to +176) FKM seals Viscosity range Cleanliness class to ISO code Switching differential
1) 2) 3)
Optional C (F) 30 to +80 (22 to +176) NBR seals 20 to +80 (4 to +176) FKM seals kg (lbs.) 2.4 (5.29) kg (lbs.) 0.3 (0.66)

2
mm /s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3720) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/15 3) % 10; 17 (see characteristic curves on page 5)
Suitable for NBR and FKM seals Only suitable for FKM seals The cleanliness class stated for the components must be adhered too in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents faults from occurring and at the same time increases the component service life. For the selection of lters see catalogue sheets RE 50 070, RE 50 076 and RE 50 081.
243
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pilot operated pressure reducing valve Model ZDRK 6 VP

Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-03, NFPA T3.5 MR1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Sandwich plate design Three pressure ranges Adjustment type: Screw adjustment with protective cap Pressure reduction in port P Optional pressure gauge port
Model ZDRK 6 VP 5-1X/V
Ordering code Z DRK 6

Sandwich plate design = Z Pressure reducing valve Size 6, D 03 Pilot operated Pressure reduction in port P1 = DRK =6 =V =P =5 = 1X Y= 50 = 100 = 210 = M= V=
P 5 1X
*
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection 12 = SAE threads FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester oils (HFD-R) without reverse free-ow check valve Internally piloted, externally drained Adjustable secondary "reduced" pressure range ... 50 bar (725 PSI) ... 100 bar (1450 PSI) ... 210 bar (3050 PSI)
Adjustment mechanism Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19; externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Nominal pressure (inlet) Secondary pressure (outlet) Backpressure port T (Y) Flow, max Weight Model VP bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) up to 210 (3050) up to 50 (725), 100 (1450), 210 (3050) up to 160 (2320) 40 (10.5) approx. 1.8 (4.8)
244
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, direct operated Model ZDR 6 D sandwich mounted

Size 6 Series 4X Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) Maximum ow 50 L/minn (13 GPM)
Direct operated pressure reducing valve, of sandwich plate design, for use in vertical stacking assemblies Porting pattern to ISO 4401-03, NFPA T 3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Pressure adjustment options Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 3000 PSI Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve
Model ZDR 6 DP 24X/YM
Ordering code
Z DR 6
Sandwich plate design = Z Pressure reducing valve Size 6, D 03 Direct operated Pressure reduction in port A2 Pressure reduction in port P1 (Pilot control signal from port B) Pressure reduction in port P1 = DR =6
4X
=D =A =B =P =1 =2
Adjustment mechanism Rotary handwheel Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49; externally interchangeable) = 4X
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection no code = metric threads 12 = SAE threads no code = NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) no code = with reverse free-ow check valve (Model ZDR 6 "DA" only) M= without reverse free-ow check valve Y= Internally piloted, externally drained Adjustable secondary "reduced" pressure range 25 = ... 25 bar (365 PSI) 75 = ... 50 bar (1090 PSI) 150 = ... 150 bar (2175 PSI) 210 = ... 210 bar (3050 PSI)
Technical data
Nominal Size Hydraulic uid Operating pressure (Inlet) Reduced pressure (Outlet) Back pressure Port T(Y) Maximum permissible ow Weight (approx.) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) Size 6 Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP); Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) ... 315 (4600) ... 25 (365), ... 50 (1090), ... 150 (2175), ... 210 (3050) ... 160 (2320) ... 50 (13.2) 1.2 (2.6)
245
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, direct operated Model ZDR 10 D sandwich mounted

Direct operated pressure reducing valve, of sandwich plate design, for use in vertical stacking assemblies Porting pattern to ISO 4401-05, NFPA T 3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Option of pressure reduction in pressure supply line or in one of the service lines Four pressure adjustment options Rotary handwheel Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Model ZDR 10 DP 25X/. .Y. . Key lock rotary handknob with adjustment scale Rotary handknob with adjustment scale Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 3000 PSI Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve Maximum spring setting, valve is permitted to 4600 PSI
Ordering code
Z DR 10 D
5X
Sandwich plate design = Z Pressure reducing valve = DR Size 10, D 05 = 10 Direct operated =D Pressure reduction in port A2 =A Pressure reduction in port P1 =B (Pilot control signal from port B) Pressure reduction in port P1 =P Adjustment mechanism Rotary handwheel =1 =2 Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59; externally interchangeable) = 5X
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection 12 = SAE threads no code = NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) no code = with reverse free-ow check valve (Model ZDR 6 "DA" only) M= without reverse free-ow check valve Y= Internally piloted, externally drained Adjustable secondary "reduced" pressure range 25 = ... 25 bar (365 PSI) 75 = ... 75 bar (1090 PSI) 150 = ... 150 bar (2175 PSI) 210 = ... 210 bar (3050 PSI)
12
Hydraulic uid Temperature range of uid Viscosity range Fluid cleanliness Operating pressure (inlet) Reduced pressure (outlet) Back presure Maximum permissible ow Weight (approx.) Pressure Control Valves Port T (Y) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) C (F) mm2/s (SUS) Petroleum oil (HL; HLP); phosphate ester (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) 10 to 800 (60 to 3710) Maximum permissible degree of contamination to ISO 4406, class 18/15. For this, we recommend a lter with a minmum retention rate of 10 75. 315 (4600) 25 (365); 75 (1090); 150 (2175); 210 (3050) 160 (2320) 80 (21) 2.8 (6.1) 246 Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, direct operated Model DR 6 DP

Direct operated pressure reducing valve Mounts on standard ISO 5781-03, NFPA/ANSI P 03 For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 052 Pressure adjustment options Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve
Model DR 6 DP 25X/YM
Ordering code DR
Pressure reducing valve Size 6, P 03 Direct operated Subplate mounted = DR =6 =D =P =1 =2 = 5X Y= = 25 = 75 = 150 = 210 12 = no code = no code = M=
5X
*
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection SAE threads NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP)
Adjustment mechanism Rotary handwheel Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59; externally interchangeable) Adjustable secondary "reduced" pressure range ... 25 bar (365 PSI) ... 75 bar (1090 PSI) ... 150 bar (2175 PSI) ... 210 bar (3050 PSI)
With reverse free-ow check valve Without reverse free-ow check valve Internally piloted, externally drained
Technical data
Hydraulic uid Operating pressure Reduced pressure Back pressure Maximum permissible ow Weight (approx.) Port P Port A Port T (Y) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP); Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) ... 315 (4600) ... 25 (365), ... 75 (1090), ... 150 (2175), ... 210 (3050) ... 160 (2320) ... 60 (16) 1.2 (2.6)
247
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pilot operated pressure reducing valve Model ZDRK 10 V

Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-05, NFPA T3.5. MR1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Sandwich plate design Three pressure ranges Setting element: Screw adjustment with protective cap Check valve option for Models VA and VB Optional pressure gauge port
Model ZDRK 10 VP 51X/V
Ordering code Z DRK 10 V

Sandwich plate design = Z Pressure reducing valve Size 6, D 03 Pilot operated Pressure reduction in port A2 Pressure reduction in port B2 Pressure reduction in port P1 = DRK = 10 =V =A =B =P =5 = 1X Y= 50 = 100 = 210 = V= no code = M=
5 1X
*
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection 12 = SAE threads FPM seals, suitable for phosphate ester oils (HFD-R) with reverse free-ow check valve (Models VA and VB) without reverse free-ow check valve Internally piloted, externally drained Adjustable secondary "reduced" pressure range ... 50 bar (725 PSI) ... 100 bar (1450 PSI) ... 210 bar (3000 PSI)
Adjustment mechanism Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19; externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Nominal pressure (inlet) Secondary pressure Back pressure Flow, max. Weights Model VA and VB Model VP (Ports A1, B1 or P2) (Ports TA, TB) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) up to 210 (3050) up to 210 (3050) up to 160 (2320) 80 (21) approx. 1.5 (3.3) approx. 1.1 (2.4)
248
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, pilot operated Model ZDR 10 V, sandwich mounted

Pilot operated pressure reducing valve, of sandwich plate design, for use in vertical stacking assemblies Porting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Option of pressure reduction in supply line or in one of the service lines Compact design, with excellent pressure underride characteristics Pressure adjustment options Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Optional gauge port connection
Model ZDR 10 VP 23X/YM
Ordering code Z DR 10 V
Sandwich plate des. = Z Pressure reducing valve = DR Size 10, D 05 Pilot operated Pressure reduction in port P1 = 10 =V =P =4 =5 = 3X M= no code = Y= 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 12 = no code =
3X
*
Further details to be written in clear text Gauge port connection SAE threads NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) without reverse free-ow check valve with pressure gauge connection Internally piloted, externally drained Adjustable secondary "reduced" pressure range ... 50 bar (725 PSI) ... 100 bar (1450 PSI) ... 200 bar (2900 PSI) ... 315 bar (4600 PSI)
Adjustment mechanism Rotary handwheel Screw adjustment w/ locknut and protective cap Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39; externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Operating pressure (Inlet ports A1, B1 or P2) Reduced pressure (Outlet ports A2, B2 or P1) Back pressure (Port TA, TB) Maximum permissible ow Weight (approx.) (Model VP) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) ... 315 (4600) ...50 (725), ...100 (1450), ...200 (2900), ...315 (4600) ... 160 (2320) ... 100 (26.4) 2.3 (5.1)
249
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, pilot operated Model ZDRY 10V

Modular valve Mounting hole conguration to ISO 4401-05-04-0-94 4 pressure stages Pressure reduction in duct A, B or P Check valve in versions VA and VB Pressure gauge connection G1/4 Setting element: I Sleeve with hexagon socket I Rotary knob, lockable, with scale Subplate as per catalog section RE 45055 (order separately)
Model ZDRY 10V
Ordering code Z
Modular valve =Z No code = = DR =Y = 10 =V =A =B =P =2 =6 Y= 130 = 180 = 160 = 315 = No code = M= Pressure reducing valve
DR
10
1X /
*
Further information in plain text FPM seals (other seals available on request) Note Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account! with check valve without check valve Internal control oil supply, external control oil drain
3-way pressure reducing valve Nominal size 10 Pilot operated Pressure reduction in A-duct Pressure reduction in B-duc Pressure reduction in P-duct
Setting elements Sleeve with hexagon socket Rotary knob, lockable, with scale 1)
Secondary pressure 4 to 30 bar (58 to 435 PSI) Secondary pressure 4 to 80 bar (58 to 1160 PSI) Secondary pressure 8 to 160 bar (116 to 2320 PSI) Secondary pressure 8 to 315 bar (116 to 4500 PSI)
Unit series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)

1)
250
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve function Type of mounting Installation position Weight Hydraulic Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester), other pressure uids available on request Class 20/18/15 1) Pressure reducing valve, pilot operated Intermediate plate NG10, ISO 4401-05-04-0-94 Optional kg (lbs.) 2.7 (5.95)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Pressure uid temperature range Seals Viscosity range Max. setting pressure (outlet) Max. working pressure (inlet) Max. ow rate
1)
C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) FPM (Viton Dupont) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 500 (46 to 2320) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 30 (435) 80 (1160) 160 (2320) 315 (4500) Setting pressure +120 (1740) Setting pressure +200 or 315 (2900 to 4500)
l/min (GPM) 120 (31.7)
251
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, pilot operated Model DR

Sizes 10 to 30, Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5000 PSI) Maximum ow 400 L/min (105 GPM)
Pilot operated pressure reducing valve Subplate design Mounts on standard ISO 5781-06, 08, or 10, NFPA/ANSI P 06, P 08, or P 10 interfaces Two pressure adjustment options Four pressure ranges available, to 5000 PSI Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve
Model DR20-5-5X/315Y..
Ordering code DR
Pressure reducing valve Complete valve = DR = no code no code = no code = M= Y= 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 5X =
5X
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP)
12 = SAE threaded housing (standard)
Subplate mounting Ordering code 10 20 30 NFPA/ANSI interface standard P 06 P 08 P 10 Subplates available SAE 3/8" and 1/2" 3/4" and 1" 1-1/4" and 1-1/2" = no code =4 =5
With reverse free-ow check valve (only for subplate mounted valves) Without reverse free-ow check valve Internally piloted; externally drained Maximum pressure setting ... 50 bar (725 PSI) ... 100 bar (1450 PSI) ... 200 bar (2900 PSI) ... 315 bar (4600 PSI)
Subplate mounted
Adjustment mechanism Hand knob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59; externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Mounting position Weight (approx.) Subplate mounted Inlet pressure, port B Outlet pressure, port A Backpressure, port Y Setting pressure Maximum ow
1) 1)
Optional Valve size DR kg (lbs.) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) maximum Valve size L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) 10 3.4 (7.5) ... 315 (4600) 10 to 315 (145 to 4600) ... 315 (4600) ... 50 (725), ... 100 (1450), ... 200 (2900), ... 315 (4600), ... 350 (5000) 10 150 (39.6) 20 300 (79.2) 30 400 (105.7) 20 3.5 (11.7) 30 8.0 (17.7)
Subplate mounting For subplates, see data sheet RA 45 062.
252
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, pilot operated Model DR

Sizes 10 and 20, Series 4X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 160 L/min (42 GPM)
Pilot operated pressure reducing valve For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 062 Mounting style: Threaded in-line mounting Pressure adjustment options: Rotary handknob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
DR 20 G-4-4X/..
Ordering code DR
Pressure reducing valve = DR no code = M= Y= =G =4 =5 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 = 4X =
12
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP)
12 = SAE threaded housing (standard) Threaded in-line connections G Ordering code 10 20 SAE -8; 3/4-16 -16; 1 5/16-12
Without reverse free-ow check valve Internally piloted; externally drained
Threaded connection for in-line mounting
Adjustment mechanism Rotary handknob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap
Adjustable secondary reduced pressure range 10 50 bar (145... 725 PSI) 10 100 bar (145... 1450 PSI) 10 200 bar (145... 2900 PSI) 10 315 bar (145... 4600 PSI) Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49; externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Size Hydraulic uid Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Maximum degree of uid contamination Operating pressure, port B inlet Reduced pressure, port A outlet Backpressure, port Y Flow Threaded housing for in-line mount bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) C (F) mm2/s (SUS) 10 20
Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP); Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to 176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to 176) 10 to 800 (60 to 3170) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. ... 315 (4600) ... 50 (725), ... 100 (1450), ... 200 (2900), ... 315 (4600) ... 250 (3625) 80 (21.1) 160 (42.3)
253
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure reducing valve, direct operated Model DR 10 DP

Sizes 10, Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) 1) Maximum ow 80 L/min (21 GPM)
Direct operated pressure reducing valve Mounts on standard ISO 5781-06, NFPA/ANSI P 06 interfaces For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 062 Pressure adjustment options Four pressure adjustment ranges available to 210 bar (3050 PSI) Optional built-in reverse free ow check valve Pressure gauge port
Model DR 10 DP 24X/YM
1)
Maximum spring setting, however valve is permitted to 4600 PSI
Ordering code DR 10
Pressure reducing valve Size 10, P 06 Direct operated Subplate mounted Rotary handknob Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap = DR = 10 =D =P =1 =2 no desig. = 12 =
4X
*
Further details to be written in clear text SAE threaded gauge port
Series 4X = 4X (40 to 49, installation and connection dimensions remain unchanged) Adjustable secondary reduced pressure range ... 25 bar (365 PSI) ... 75 bar (1090 PSI) ... 150 bar (2175 PSI) ... 210 bar (3050 PSI) = 25 = 75 = 150 = 210
NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) With reverse free-ow check valve Without reverse free-ow check valve
no desig. = M= Y=
Internally piloted, externally drained
Technical data
Hydraulic uid Fluid temperature range Viscosity range Maximum degree of uid contamination Operating pressure Adjustable secondary pressure (output) Back pressure Maximum ow Installation position Weight Pressure Control Valves Port B Port A Port Y Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP), Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to 176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 ... 176) 10 ... 800 (60 ... 3710) (dependent on uid) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. up to 315 (4600) ... 25 (365), ... 75 (1090), ... 150 (2175), ... 210 (3050) up to 160 (2300) up to 80 (21) optional approx. 3 (6.6) 254 Section 5
C (F) mm2/s (SUS)
bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.)
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure shut-off valve, pilot operated Model DA

Nominal sizes 10, 25, 32 Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 240 L/min (63 GPM)
For subplate mounting (subplates must be ordered separately)1) For installation in manifolds Adjustment options: Rotary knob Sleeve with internal hexagon and protective cap Three pressure ratings
Model DA 30 -2-5X/100-17
Ordering code DA
Without directional valve = No code Nominal size 10 Nominal size 25 Nominal size 32 = 10 = 20 = 30
5X
*
Further details to be written in clear text No code = NBR seals V= FPM seals (other seals on request) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure uid has to be taken into account! No code = Y= 10 = 17 = Internal pilot oil drain External pilot oil drain Switching pressure differential (P A) In the mid range 10% In the mid range 17%
Adjustment elements Rotary knob =1 Sleeve with internal hexagon and protective cap = 2 Series 50 to 59 = 5X (50 to 59: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Settable pressure range 50 to 100 bar (725 to 1450 PSI) 100 to 200 bar (1450 to 2900 PSI) 200 to 315 bar (2900 to 4600 PSI) = 100 = 200 = 315
1) For subplates, see data sheet RA 45 062. Pressure Control Valves 255 Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Nominal size Weight Hydraulic technical data Nominal pressure Maximum operating pressure at port A Pressure uid temperature range bar (PSI) bar (PSI) C (F) C (F) Viscosity range Maximum ow 10% version 17% version Degree of contamination mm2/s (SUS) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) 315 (4600) 4500 (after switching from P to T) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (86 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (68 to +176) 10 to 800 (45 to 3720) 40 (10.6) 60 (15.9) 80 (21.1) 120 (31.7) 120 (31.7) 240 (63.4) DA kg (lbs.) Size 10 2.6 (5.7) Size 25 13 (28.7) Size 32 27 (60)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. bar (PSI) 50 (725), 100 (1450), 200 (2900), 315 (4600)
Maximum set pressure
256
Section 5
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 6 Flow Control Valves
Throttle, Throttle/Check In-line MG, MK ...................258 Sandwich double throttle/check Z2FSK 6, D03 .................................................................259 Z2FS 6, D03 ....................................................................260 Z2FSK 10, D05 ..............................................................261 Z2FS 10, D05 .................................................................262 Sandwich double throttle/check Z2FS 16, D07 .................................................................263 Z2FS 22, D08 .................................................................264 Fine throttle F6 ................................................................265 Flow control cartridge 2FRM . K.................................267 Flow control, sandwich plate design Z2FRM..................................................................................269 Temperature and Pressure Compensated Flow Controls 2FRM F06, F07 (sizes 10 and 16) .........................................271 F03 (size 6) ......................................................................272
257
257
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Throttle and throttle check valves Models MG/MK

Sizes 6 to 25 Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI)
Throttle and throttle/check valve For in-line mounting Leak-free closure in one direction Pressure, temperature, and viscosity dependent
Model MK .. G1.2/V
Ordering code G
Throttle valve Throttle/check valve Size 10 (1/2") Size 15 (3/4") Size 20 (1") Size 25 (1-1/4") In-line mounted = MG = MK = 10 = 15 = 20 = 25 =G 1X = V=
1X
*
Further details to be written in clear text 12 = SAE threads (size 10, 15, 20, 25 only) FPM seals, suitable for Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Series 1X (10 to 19; externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Maximum operating pressure: up to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Cracking pressure for check valve: Model MK: 0.5 bar (7 PSI)
Flow Control Valves
258
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Double throttle/check valve Model Z 2 FSK 6

Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5. MR1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Sandwich plate design Adjustment type: Screw adjustment with protective cap For throttling the ow to 2 actuator ports, example: control speed of an actuator in both directions For meter-in or meter-out control as required O-ring plate included
Model Z 2 FSK 6 21X/2QV
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate Dual throttle/checks Combination throttle/check valve Size 6 (D 03) Throttle / check valve in ports A and B Adjustment option Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap =Z =2 = FSK =6 = =2 1X = 2Q = V=
2 FSK 6
2 1X
*
Further details to be written in clear text FPM seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) & phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Other seal materials on request Throttling spool with two grooves (when used as a main throttle) Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19, externally interchangeable)
Note: Model Z 2 FS 6..-4X/.. uses the same adjustment mechanism on both sides (A and B).
Technical data
Operating pressure Maximum ow Weight (approx.) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) ... 210 (3050) 40 (10.5) 0.5 (1.1)
Flow Control Valves
259
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Double throttle/check valve Model Z 2 FS 6

Throttle valve with reverse free ow check valves Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Used to reduce ow in actuator lines, example: control speed of the actuator in both directions Meter-in or meter-out control as required O-ring plate included Porting pattern to ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.4.1 MR1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 03
Model Z 2 FS 6 24X/
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate Dual throttle/checks Combination throttle/check valve Size 6 (D 03) Throttle / check valve in ports A and B Throttle/check valve in port A Throttle/check valve in port B Adjustment option Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap =Z =2 = FS =6 = =A =B =2 4X = 1Q = 2Q = V=
FS
4X
*
Further details to be written in clear text FPM seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) & phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Other seal materials on request Throttling spool with one groove (when used as a pilot choke) Throttling spool with two grooves (when used as a main throttle) Series 40 to 49 (40 to 49, externally interchangeable)
Note: Model Z 2 FS 6..-4X/.. uses the same adjustment mechanism on both sides (A and B).
Technical data
Operating pressure Maximum ow Weight (approx.) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) ... 315 (4600) 80 (21.1) 0.8 (1.8)
Flow Control Valves
260
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Double throttle/check valve Model Z 2 FSK 10

Size 10 Series 1X Maximum operating pressure 210 bar (3050 PSI) Maximum ow 80 L/miin (21 GPM)
Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5. MR1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Sandwich plate design For throttling the ow to 2 actuator ports, example: control speed of an actuator in both directions Adjustment type: Screw adjustment with protective cap For meter-in or meter-out control as required O-ring plate included
Model Z2FSK10-2-1X/2QV
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate Dual throttle/checks Combination throttle/check valve Size 6 (D 03) Throttle / check valve in ports A and B Adjustment option Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap Note: For model Z 2 FS 10..3X/.. the same adjustment option is used on sides A and B. =Z =2 = FSK = 10 = 1X = =2 2Q = V=
2 FSK 10
2 1X
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) & phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Throttling spool with two grooves (when used as a main throttle) Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19, externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Operating pressure Maximum ow Weight (approx.) PSI GPM lbs ... 3050 21 2.6
Flow Control Valves
261
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Mounting pattern to ISO 4401-5, NFPA T3.5. MR1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Sandwich plate design For throttling the ow to 2 actuator ports, example: control speed of an actuator in both directions Adjustment type: Screw adjustment with protective cap For meter-in or meter-out control as required O-ring plate included
Ordering code Z 2 FS
Dual throttle/check valve Size 10 Throttle/check valve side A and B Adjustment option Screw adjustment with locknut and protective cap = 10 = =5 3X = no code = V=
10
3X
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) and phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) (with dual throttle /check valves) meter-in or meter out control (this valve may be turned over) Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39, externally interchangeable)
Technical data
Flow direction Operating pressure Maximum ow Weight (approx.) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) The same for both valves; throttle in one direction, reverse free ow across check valve in the other ... 315 (4600) 120 (32) 3.1 (6.8)
Flow Control Valves
262
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Throttle valve with reverse free-ow valves Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Control speed of the actuator in both directions Meter-in or meter-out control as required Porting pattern to ISO 4401-7, NFPA T 3.5.1 M R1 and NFPA/ANSI B 93.7 D 07
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate Dual throttle/checks Combination throttle/check valve Size 16 (D 07) Series 3X (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) =Z =2 = FS = 16 = 3X S= S2 = no code = V=
FS
16 3X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals (standard) suitable for phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) Throttle control meter-in Throttle control meter-out
Technical data
Flow direction Hydraulic uid Fluid temperature range Maximum degree of uid contamination Operating pressure Maximum ow Weight (approx.) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) C (F) The same for both valves; throttled in one direction, reverse free-ow across check valve in the other Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to _80 (4 to +176) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. ... 350 (5100) 250 (66) 4.7 (10.4)
Flow Control Valves
263
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Throttle valve with reverse free-ow valves Sandwich plate design for use in vertical stacking assemblies Control speed of the actuator in both directions Meter-in or meter-out control as required Porting pattern to ISO 4401-8, NFPA T 3.5.1 M R1 and NFPA/ANSI B 93.7 D 08
Ordering code Z
Sandwich plate Dual throttle/checks Combination throttle/check valve Size 22/25 (D 08) Series 3X (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) =Z =2 = FS = 22 = 3X S= S2 = no code = V=
FS
22 3X /
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals (standard) suitable for phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) Throttle control meter-in Throttle control meter-out
Technical data
Flow direction Hydraulic uid Fluid temperature range Maximum degree of uid contamination Operating pressure Maximum ow Weight (approx.) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) kg (lbs.) C (F) The same for both valves; throttled in one direction, reverse freeow across check valve in the other Petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Phosphate-ester uids (HFD-R) NBR seals: 30 to +80 (22 to +176) FPM seals: 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Class 18/15 according to ISO 4406. Therefore, we recommend a lter with a retention rate of 10 75. ... 350 (5100) 360 (95) 8 (17.6)
Flow Control Valves
264
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fine throttle Model F6

Nominal sizes 6 Series 1X Max. working pressure up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Max. ow 60 l/min (15.85 GPM)
For subplate mounting Throttle valve or throttle check valve
Model F6
Ordering data F
Throttle valve (fine throttle) Nominal size 6 For subplate mounting to ISO 5781 Setting element Hexagon socket with lock nut =F =6 = ZP =2 R= 60 = V=
ZP
2 1X / 60
*
Further information in plain text FPM seals (other seals available on request) Note Take compatibility of seals and pressure fluid into account! With by-pass check valve Qmax = 60 l/min (15.85 GPM)
Unit series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
Flow Control Valves
265
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve function Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Hydraulic Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524. Rapidly biodegradable pressure uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221), HETG (rapeseed oil), HEPG (polyglycols), HEES (synthetic ester), other pressure uids available on request Class 20/18/15 1) Throttle valve or throttle check valve Subplate mounting, mounting hole conguration NG6, ISO 5781 Optional C (F) 25 to +50 (13 to +122) kg (lbs.) 1.0 (2.2)
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Pressure uid temperature range Seals Viscosity range Max. working pressure Max. ow rate Min. ow rate
1)
C (F) 25 to +80 (13 to +176) FPM (Viton Dupont) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 500 (45 to 2320) bar (PSI) 315 (4500) l/min (GPM) 60 (15.85) l/min (GPM) 0.2 (0.05)
Flow Control Valves
266
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

2-way ow control valve, Model 2 FRM . K

Nominal sizes 6 and 10 Series 1X Max. pressure up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Max. ow 60 l/min (15.85 GPM)
Cartridge valve Adjustment element with internal hexagon With built-in check valve Low start-up jump Model 2FRM 6 K2-1X/6QRV
Ordering details, preferred types 2FRM

2-way flow control valve Nominal size 6 Nominal size 10 Cartridge valve Adjustment element Internal hexagon =6 = 10 =K =2 R= 6Q = 32Q = 60Q = V=
2 1X /
*
Further details in clear text FKM seals (other seals on request)
Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! With check valve Flow (A B) Up to 6.0 L/min (1.59 GPM) nom. size 6 Up to 32.0 L/min (8.45 GPM) nom. size 6 Up to 60.0 L/min (15.85 GPM) nom. size 10
Series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions)
Flow Control Valves
267
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

General Installation Ambient temperature range Weight Hydraulic Maximum operating pressure, port A Pressure differential p for free return ow B A Minimum pressure differential Pressure stable up to p = 315 / 210 bar (4500 / 3045 PSI) Flow Pressure uid pV max pV min
3 3
NS 6 Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) % L/min (GPM) cm /min (in /min) 0.19 (0.42) 315 (4500) 18 (261) 3(pV max) 6.0 (1.59) 50 (3.05) 32 (8.45) 250 (15.25)
NS 10
0.6 (1.32) 210 (3045) 18 (261) 3(pV min) 60 (15.85) 500 (30.51)
bar (PSI) See characteristic curves on page 3
Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524; Fast bio de-gradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil); HEPG (polyglycols); HEES (synthetic ester); other pressure uids on request C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) mm /s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3712) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/151)
2
1)
The cleanliness class stated for the components must be adhered too in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents faults from occurring and at the same time increases the component service life.
Flow Control Valves
268
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Flow control valve, Model Z2FRM

Nominal sizes 6 Series 2X Max. pressure up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Max. ow 32 l/min (8.45 GPM)
Sandwich plate valve Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 Form A, without locating pin hole (standard) Porting pattern to ISO 4401 and CETOPRP 121 H, with locating pin hole, (ordering code .../60 at the end of the valve type code) With 1 or 2 ow control cartridges Adjustment element with internal hexagon
Model Z2FRM 6 CB2-2X/32QRV
Ordering details Z
Sandwich plate 2-way flow control valve Nominal size 6 =6 V= =A =B =C =T =B =2 =2X 6Q = 32Q =
1)
2FRM
2 2X /
*
Further details in clear text No code = Without locating pin hole /60 2) = With locating pin hole FKM seals (other seals on request)
=Z
Flow control function (meter-out control) in Port Port B Ports A and B Port T 1) Without closing of the pressure componsator Adjustment element with internal hexagon
Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure fluid has to be taken into account! R= With check valve Flow Up to 6.0 L/min (1.59 GPM) Up to 32.0 L/min (8.45 GPM)
2)
By rotating through the longitudinal axis a ow control function in port P is achieved (meter-in control), also see page 7. Locating pin 3 x 8 DIN EN ISO 8752, Material No. R900005694 (seperate order)
Flow Control Valves
269
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

General
Connection type Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 Form A, without locating pin hole (standard) Porting pattern to ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP121H, with locating pin hole, (ordering code .../60 at the end of the valve type code) C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 1.3 (2.87) ow control function in ports A, B or T 1.4 (3.09) ow control function in ports A and B
Ambient temperature range Weight
Hydraulic
Nominal pressure Minimum pressure differential At qV max At qV min Pressure stable up to p = 315 bar (4500 PSI) Flow range Pressure uid qV max qV min bar (PSI) 315 (4500) bar (PSI) 18 (260) bar (PSI) 7 (100) % 3 (qV max) L/min (GPM) 6 (1.59); 32 (8.45) cm3/min (in3/min) 50 (3.05); 250 (15.25) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524; Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil); HEPG (polyglycols); HEES (synthetic ester); Other pressure uids on request C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3712) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 20/18/15 1)
1)
The cleanliness class stated for the components must be adhered too in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents faults from occurring and at the same time increases the component service life.
Flow Control Valves
270
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

2-way ow control valves, pressure compensated Model 2FRM

Sizes 10 and 16 Series 3X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 160 L/min (42.5 GPM)
Pressure compensated ow control Anti-lunge adjustment option on hydrostat, for smooth initial motion of the actuator Freewheeling, key lockable handknob adjustment, Model 2FRM Mounts on standard ISO 6263-06-2, 07-2, NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 2 FO 6, 2 FO 7 interface, for subplates see RA 45 066 Linear adjustment characteristics with scale for frequent adjustment reference
Model 2FRM 10 -3X/..
Ordering code 2
2-Way =2 Further details to be written in clear text = FR =M = 10 = 16 = 3X no code = V= NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals suitable for phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Flow control valve, Pressure compensated Manual lockable handknob adjustment Size 10 (2 F0 6) Size 16 (2 F0 7) Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) Flow range A B Size 10, linear up to 10 L/min (2.64 GPM) up to 16 L/min (4.23 GPM) up to 25 L/min (6.6 GPM) up to 50 L/min (13.21 GPM) Size 16, linear up to 60 L/min (15.85 GPM) up to 100 L/min (26.42 GPM) up to 160 L/min (42.27 GPM) Without anti-lunge adjustment With anti-lunge adjustment
FR
3X
= = = =
10L 16L 25L 50L
= 60L = 100L = 160L = no code =B
Flow Control Valves
271
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight (approx.) Model 2FRM Mounting pos. 2FRM... Size 10 (2 FO 6) Flow qV max A B Dp with reverse free ow B A across check valve qV-related Flow temperature-stability: pressure-stability: Operating pressure, port A Minimum pressure drop L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) 20 to 70 C ( 4 to 158 F) p = 315 bar (4600 PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 10 16 25 50 (2.64) (4.23) (6.60) (13.21) 2.0 (29) 2.5 3.5 (36.3) (50.8) 6.0 (87) Size 16 (2 FO 7) 60 (15.85) 2.8 (40.6) 100 (26.42) 4.3 (62.4) 160 (42.27) 7.3 (106) Model 2FRM kg (lbs.) Size 10 5.6 (12.3) Optional Size 16 11.3 (24.9 )
2% (qV max) < 5% (qV max) up to 315 (4600) 3 to 7 (44 to 102) 5 to 12 (73 to 175)
Flow Control Valves
272
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

2-way ow control valve Model 2FRM 6

Pressure compensated ow control valve Mounts on standard ISO 6263-03, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 2 FO 3 interface, for subplates see RA 45 052 External closure of compensator possible Available with reverse free-ow check valve Handknob with high resolution scale for accurate ow settings and frequent adjustment reference Optional lockable handknob adjustment, with keys Pressure compensator designed to reduce actuator lunge at start Sharp-edged orice for temperature/viscosity immunity
Models 2FRM 6 .36-3X/..V
Ordering code 2FRM

2-way ow control valve Size 6, NFPA 2 FO 3 With external closing of the pressure compensator (lunge control) Without external closing of the pressure compensator Adjustment element Lockable handknob with scale 1) Handknob with scale Zero position of the scale at port P Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39, externally interchangeable)
1)
6 3X
*
Further details in clear text V= FPM seals (other seals on request) Attention! The compatibility of the seals and uid must be taken into account!
=6 =A =B R= M= =6 = 3X 0.6Q 1.5Q 6Q 10Q 16Q 25Q 32Q = = = = = = =
=3 =7
with check valve without check valve Flow (A B) up to 0.6 L/min (0.159 GPM) up to 1.5 L/min (0.396 GPM) up to 6.0 L/min (1.585 GPM) up to 10.0 L/min (2.642 GPM) up to 16.0 L/min (4.227 GPM) up to 25.0 L/min (6.604 GPM) up to 32.0 L/min (8.454 GPM)
H-key with part no. 00008158 is included within the scope of supply.
Flow Control Valves
273
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Weight 2FRM 6 A; 2FRM 6 B kg (lbs.) C (F) bar (PSI) approx. 1.3 (2.865) 30 to +50 (86 to +122) 315 (4600) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524; fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RA 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil); HEPG (polyglycole); HEES (synthetic ester); other uids on request C (F) mm2/s (SUS) qV max qV min to 100 bar qV min to 315 bar Degree of contamination L/min (GPM) cm3/min (in3/min) cm3/min (in3/min) 20 to +80) 68 to +176 10 to 800 (45 to 3720) 0.6 (0.159) 15 (0.394) 25 (1.526) 1.5 (0.396) 15 (0.394) 25 (1.526) 6.0 (1.585) 25 (1.526) 25 (1.526) 10.0 (2.642) 50 (3.051) 50 (3.051) 16.0 (4.227) 70 (4.27) 70 (4.27) 25.0 (6.604) 100 (6.1) 100 (6.1) 32.0 (8.454) 250 (15.26) 250 (15.26)
Ambient temperature range Maximum operating pressure at port A Pressure uid
Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Flow
Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. see characteristic curves on page 6 bar IPSI) % 6 to 14 (87 to 203) 2 (qV max)
Pressure differential p for free return ow B A Minimum pressure differential Pressure stability up to p = 315 bar
Attention! Pressure loss from P at the inlet of the directional valve to A at the inlet of the ow control valve is noticeable at low ows.
Flow Control Valves
274
Section 6
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 7 Proportional Valves
Proportional directional direct operated Direct operated servo solenoid D03 and D05, 4WRPEH............................. 276, 279 4WRREH .................................................................. 282 Proportional throttle & directional D05, 5WRPE10 ...................................................... 285 4WRPE 10 ............................................................... 288 D03 and D05, 4WRP ........................ 290, 292, 294 D03 and D05, 4WRPE .......................................... 298 D03 and D05, WRBA(E) ....................... 302, 304, 306 D03, 4WRAB ............................................................... 308 D03 and D05, 4WRA(E) ........................................... 310 D03 and D05 with position feedback, 4WRE(E) ....................................................................... 313 Proportional directional pilot operated Pilot operated proportional directional 4WRLE, 1025............................................................ 316 Pilot operated servo solenoid 4WRLE, 1025 ....................................................... 320 4WRVE, 1025 ....................................................... 324 Injection valves, 4WRLE Q, 1027......................... 323 D05 to D10, pilot operated without position feedback 4WRH, 4WRZ(E) .................. 327 Servo directional 4WS............................................... 330
Proportional pressure relief Direct operated DBET(E)-6X .............................................................. 334 DBETX ....................................................................... 336 DBETR (feedback) .................................................. 338 DBETFX (linear) ....................................................... 340 DBETBEX (OBE) .................................................... 342 Pilot operated DBE(E)6 .................................................................... 344 DBE6X ....................................................................... 346 DBEBE6X (OBE) .................................................... 348 DBE 10, DBE 20 ..................................................... 350 Proportional pressure reducing Direct operated 3DREP(E)6-2X .................................................... 352 Pilot operated DREBE6X (OBE) .................................................... 354 DRE(M) 10, DRE(M) 20 ........................................ 356 Pilot operated proportional cartridge throttle valve, inductive position transducer FESXE (OBE) ........ 358
275
275
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE) Model 4WRPEH 6

Size 6 Series 2X Maximum working pressure: 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow rate: 40 L/min (10 GPM) (p 70 bar [1000 PSI])
Directly operated servo solenoid valve NG6, with control spool and sleeve in servo quality Actuated on one side, 4/4 fail-safe position when switched off Control solenoid with integral position feedback and on-board electronics (OBE), calibrated at the factory Electrical connection 6P+PE Signal input difference amplier with interface A1 10 V, or interface F1 4...20 mA (RS 200 ) Suitable for electrohydraulic controllers in production and testing systems
For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24 340 Form A, ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1, and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 Subplates as per catalog section RE 45 053 (order separately)
Model code 4WRP

With on-board electronics Control piston/sleeve Size 6 Symbols 4/4-way version
AB a 0 PT b
E
=H
L 2X / G24 K0 /
*
Further information in plain text
=E M=
=6
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Interface for on-board electronics Setpoint input 10 V Setpoint input 420 mA
= C3 = C4 Side of inductive position transducer

AB a PT 0 b
A1 = F1 =
(Standard)
=B
Electrical connection K0 = without mating connector, with plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order mating connector separately G24 = 2X = Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
Nominal ow rate at 1015 PSI (70 bar) valve pressure difference: 508 PSI (35 bar) / metering notch Size 6 4 L/min (1.06 GPM) = 04 12 L/min (3.17 GPM) = 12 24 L/min (6.34 GPM) = 24 40 L/min (10.57 GPM) = 40
Series 20 to 29 (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Flow characteristic Linear
L=
Proportional Valves
276
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Pressure uid Viscosity range, recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Purity class to ISO code Flow direction Nominal ow at p = 35 bar (508 PSI) per notch* Max. working pressure Max. pressure Operating limits at p Pressure drop at valve qVnom.: > qN valves Leakage at 100 bar (1450 PSI) bar (PSI ) bar (PSI ) cm3/min (in3/min) cm3/min (in3/min) Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance for qmax. Response time for signal change 0 100 % Thermal drift Zero adjustment Conformity 0.2 % < 10 % 10 ms Zero point displacement, 1 % at T= 104 F Factory-set 1 % EN 50 081-1 EN 50 082-2 L/min (GPM) mm /s (SUS) mm2/s (SUS) C (F)
2
Spool type valve, operated directly, with steel sleeve Proportional solenoid with position control, OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG 6 (ISO 4401 and CETOPRP 121 H) Optional C (F) kg (lbs.) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) 2.7 (5.95) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51 524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (100 to 465) 10 to 800 (60 to 3700) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol 4 (1.06) 12 (3.17) 24 (6.34) 40 (10.57)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F))
Port P, A, B: 4600 PSI (315 bar) Port T: 3600 PSI (250 bar) 315 (4600) 315 (4600) < 180 (10.98 ) 315 (4600) 315 (4600) < 300 (18.31 ) 315 (4600) 250 (3600) < 500 (30.51) < 300 (18.31) 160 (2300) 100 (1450) < 900 (54.92) < 450 (27.46)
1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied within hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50 070, RE 50 076 and RE 50 081. * Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom.
px 35 bar (507 PSI)
Proportional Valves
277
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (cont.)

Electrical, trigger electronics integrated in the valve Duty cycle Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: VE Terminal E: Input, mA signal version Terminal D: IDE Terminal E: IDE Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Test signal, mA signal version Terminal F: IFC Terminal C: IFC Protective conductor and shield Recommended cable 100 % IP 65 to DIN 40 050 and IEC 14 434/5 Mating connector 6P+PE, DIN 43 563 24 V DCnom. min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid 2.5 AF Difference amplier, Ri = 100 k 0 ... 10 V 0V Load, Rsh = 200 4 ... (12) ... 20 mA Current loop IDE feedback DB EB 45 mm (1.77 in.) = 40 VA max.
} max. 18 V DC
LVDT 0 ... +10 V Reference 0 V LVDT signal 4 ... 20 mA at external load 200 ... 500 max. 4 ... 20 mA output Current loop IFC feedback See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m (65 ft.) up to 40 m (131 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 7 x 1 mm2
Calibration
Calibrated at the factory, see valve performance curve
Version A1: Standard
Version F1: mA signal
Proportional Valves
278
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE) Model 4WRPEH 10

Direct operated servo solenoid valve NG 10, with control spool and sleeve in servo quality Actuated on one side, 4/4 fail-safe position when switched off Control solenoid with integral position feedback and on-board electronics (OBE), calibrated at the factory Electrical connection 6P+PE Signal input difference amplier with interface A1, +10 V, or interface F1 4...20 mA (RS 200 ) Suitable for electrohydraulic controllers in production and testing systems
For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24 340 Form A, ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Subplates as per catalog section RE 45 055 (order separately)
Model code 4WRP

With on-board electronics Control piston/sleeve Size 6 Symbols 4/4-way version
AB a 0 PT b
E
=H
H 10
L 2X / G24 K0 /
*
=E M=
= 10
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Interface for on-board electronics Setpoint input 10 V Setpoint input 420 mA
= C3 = C4 Side of inductive position transducer

AB a PT 0 b
A1 = F1 =
(Standard)
=B
Electrical connection K0 = without mating connector, with plug to DIN 43 563-AM6 Order mating connector separately G24 = 2X = Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
Nominal flow rate at 70 bar (1015 PSI ) valve pressure difference: 35 bar (508 PSI) / metering notch Size 10 50 L/min (13.21 GPM) = 50 100 L/min (26.42 GPM) = 100 L=
Proportional Valves
279
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Pressure uid Viscosity range, recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Purity class to ISO code Flow direction Nominal ow at p = 508 PSI (35 bar) per notch* Max. working pressure Max. pressure Operating limits at p Pressure drop at valve qVnom.: > qN valves Leakage at 1450 PSI (100 bar) bar (PSI) bar (PSI ) cm3/mm (in3/min) cm3/mm (in3/min) L/min (GPM) mm /s (SUS) mm /s (SUS) C (F)
2 2
Spool type valve, operated directly, with steel sleeve Proportional solenoid with position control, OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG 10 (ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H) Optional C (F) kg (lbs.) 20 to +50 (4 +122) 7.1 (15.65) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51 524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (100 465) 10 to 800 (60 3700) 20 to +70 (4 +158) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol 50 (13.21) Port P, A, B: 4600 PSI Port T: 3600 PSI 315 (4600) 250 (3600) < 1200 (73.2) < 600 (36.6) 0.2 % < 10 % 25 ms Zero point displacement, 1 % at T= 104 F Factory-set 1 % EN 50 081-1 EN 50 082-2 315 (4600) 250 (3600) < 1200 (73.2) < 500 (30.5) 160 (2300) 100 (1450) < 1500 (91.5) < 600 (36.6) 160 (2300) 100 (1450) < 100 (61.0) < 600 (36.6) 50 (13.21) 100 (26.42) 100 (26.42)
Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance for qmax. Response time for signal change 0 100 % Thermal drift Zero adjustment Conformity
px 35 bar (507 PSI)
Proportional Valves
280
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Electrical, trigger electronics integrated in the valve Duty cycle Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: VE Terminal E: Input, mA signal version Terminal D: IDE Terminal E: IDE Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Test signal, mA signal version Terminal F: IFC Terminal C: IFC Protective conductor and shield Recommended cable 100 % IP 65 to DIN 40 050 and IEC 14 434/5 Line socket 6P+PE, DIN 43 563 24 V DCnom. min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid 2.5 AF Difference amplier, Ri = 100 k 0 ... 10 V 0V Load, Rsh = 200 4 ... (12) ... 20 mA Current loop IDE feedback DB EB 45 mm (1.77 in.) = 40 VA max.
} max. 18 V DC
LVDT 0 ... +10 V Reference 0 V LVDT signal 4 ... 20 mA at external load 200 ... 500 max. 4 ... 20 mA output Current loop IFC feedback See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m (65 ft.) up to 40 m (131 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 7 x 1 mm2
Calibration
Version F1: mA signal
Proportional Valves
281
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE) Model 4WRREH 6

Size 6 Series 1X Max. working pressure: P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI) T 100 bar (1450 PSI) Nominal ow rate: 4 to 40 L/min (1.06 to 10.6 GPM) (p 70 bar [1015 PSI])
Model 4WRREH 6
Model code 4WRR

With on-board trigger electronics Control piston/sleeve Size 6 Symbols 4/3-way version
AB a 0 P T b
1X / G24 K0 / B5 M
*
=E =H =6 M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Interface for trigger electronics Setpoint input 10 V
B5 = =V Side of inductive position transducer

AB
K0 =
Electrical connection without line socket, with plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order line socket separately Voltage supply of trigger electronics +24 V DC Unit series 10 to 19 (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Flow characteristic Linear Non-linear curve 2)
0
PT
G24 = (Standard) = B 1X =
Nominal flow rate at 70 bar valve pressure difference (35 bar/metering notch) Size 6 4 l/min (1.06 GPM) 8 l/min (2.11 GPM) 12 l/min (3.17 GPM) 15 l/min 24 l/min 25 l/min 40 l/min = 04 = 08 = 12 = 15 1) = 24 = 25 1) = 40 L= P=
1) 2)
Only in connection with ow characteristic p Kink 60 % for NG6 with nominal ow rate 15 and 25, otherwise kink 40 %
Proportional Valves
282
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Maximum permissible degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Flow direction Nominal ow at p = 35 bar (500 PSI) per notch 2) Max. working pressure Max. pressure Operating limits at p Leakage at 100 bar (1450 PSI) l/min (GPM)
2
Spool type valve, operated directly, with steel sleeve Proportional solenoid with position control, OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 2.5 (0.66) max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 535, other uids after prior consultation mm /s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 450) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) C (F) 20 to +65 (4 to +149) Class 18/16/13 1)
Hydraulic (measured with HLP 46, qoil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)
See symbol 4 (1.06) 8 (2.11) 12 (3.17) 15 (3.96) 24 (6.34) 25 (6.60) 40 (10.57)
bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4500) bar (PSI) Port T: 100 (1450) bar (PSI) cm3/min (in3/min) cm3/min (in3/min) < 315 (4500) < 180 (2600) < 315 (4500) < 250 (3625) < 315 (4500) < 300 (4350) < 315 (4500) < 180 (2600) < 315 (4500) < 500 (7250) < 315 (4500) < 250 (3625) < 250 (3625) < 900 (13050)
Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance for qmax Response time for signal change 0 100 % Thermal drift Zero adjustment Conformity
1)
% % 0.2 % ,10 ms % 5 Zero point displacement ,1 % at T = 40 C Factory-set 1 % EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom
2)
35 bar (507 PSI)

px 283 Section 7
Proportional Valves
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Electrical, trigger electronics integrated in the valve Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Connection Power supply 24 V DCnom
1)
% 100, max. current input 30 VA (24 V DC) IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Plug, 11P+PE 1 2 9 10 4 5
6 7
Data +24 V DCnom, fuse 2.5 AF (output stages) 0 V power ground +24 V DCnom signal part 0V signal ground UIN Difference amplier Ri = 100 k UIN 10 V DC, Ra = 1 k 0 V, reference point > 8.5 V to 24 V DCnom (max. 40 V DC) Ri = 10 k Enabling acknowledgement +24 V DC Fault signal: no fault +24 V DC Only connect when transformer of 24 V DC system does not conform to standard VDE 0551
2)
Input signal 10 V Feedback signal (LVDT) Enabling input Signals Protective conductor Connecting cable
3)
3
4)
8 11
Recommended 12 ... 14 mm (0.47 0.55 in.): screened max. 20 m (65.6 ft.) 0.75 mm2 (0.0012 in2) max. 40 m (131.2 ft.) 1.0 mm2 (0.0016 in2) 11P+PE
24 V DCnom
1)
min. 21 V DC max. 40 V DC
UB (Pin 1) = output stage supply Valve OFF < 13.4 V DC Valve ON > 16.8 V DC No fault signal (Pin 11) US (Pin 9) = signal electronics supply Valve OFF < 16.8 V DC Fault signal (Pin 11) Valve ON > 19.5 V DC No fault signal (Pin 11) Inputs: dielectric strength to withstand up to max. 50 V. Signals can bear a load of max. 20 mA and are resistant to shorts to ground.
2)
3) 4)
Proportional Valves
284
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE) Model 5WRPE 10

Directly operated servo solenoid valve NG 10, with pQ 5/3-way symbol in servo quality Actuated on one side, A-T fail-safe position when switched off Control solenoid with integral position feedback and on-board electronics (OBE), calibrated at the factory Electrical connection 6P+PE Signal input difference amplier with interface A1, +10 V Suitable for electrohydraulic controllers in production and testing systems
For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24 340 Form A, ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1, ANSI B 93.7 D 05 Subplates as per catalog section RE 45 055 (order separately)
Model code 5WRP

With on-board electronics Without sleeve Size 6 Symbols 4/4-way version
A B A B a P1 P2 T 0 b
10
B 70
L 2X / G24
K0 / A1 M
*
=E M=
no designation = 10
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Interface for on-board electronics Setpoint input 10 V
=F
P1P2 T
A1 = K0 =
Side of inductive position transducer

A B a P1 P2 T 0 b
Electrical connection without mating connector, with plug to DIN 43 563-AM6 Order mating connector separately Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
=B G24 = 2X =
Nominal flow rate at 160 PSI (11 bar) valve pressure difference: 11 bar (160 PSI) / metering notch Size 10 70 L/min (18.5 GPM) = 70 L=
Proportional Valves
285
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Purity class to ISO code Flow direction Nominal ow p = 35 bar (508 PSI) per notch* Max. working pressure Max. pressure Operating limits at p Leakage at 1450 PSI (100 bar) Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance for qmax. Response time for signal change 0 100 % Thermal drift Zero adjustment Conformity 0.3 % < 10 % 25 ms Zero point displacement, 1 % at T= 104 F Factory-set 1 % EN 50 081-1 EN 50 082-2 L/min (GPM) mm /s (SUS) mm2/s (SUS) F
2
Spool type valve, operated directly Proportional solenoid with position control, OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG 10 (ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H) Optional C (F) kg (lbs.) 20 to +50 (4 +122) 7.1 (15.65) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51 524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 100 465 60 3700 20 to +70 (4 +158) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol P1 A P 1 A + P2 B AT bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) cm3/min (in3/min) Port T: 50 (725) See diagram < 1200 < (73.2) 18.5 (70) 18.5 + 18.5 (70 + 70) 17.2 (65)
Port P1, P2, A, B: 210 (3045)
px 11 bar (160 PSI)
Proportional Valves
286
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Electrical, electronics integrated in the valve Duty cycle Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: VE Terminal E: Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Protective conductor and shield Recommended cable 100 % IP 65 to DIN 40 050 and IEC 14 434/5 Mating connector 6P+PE, DIN 43 563 24 V DCnom. min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid 2.5 AF Difference amplier, Ri = 100 k 0 ... 10 V 0V DB EB 2.36 in. (60 mm) = 60 VA max.
}max. 18 V DC
LVDT 0 ... +10 V Reference 0 V See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 10 m (65.6 ft.) up to 40 m (131.2 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) 7 x 1 mm2
Calibration
Supply 24V = Signal: 0+/10V LVDT Signal: 0+/10V LVDT Signal: +/10V
stroke
P 2 B
II sign.
A
A+
A T
P1
P 1
P2
10V 0 +10V
Proportional Valves
287
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9 535 233 903 (10/00)

Direct operated proportional valves 4WRPE 10

The spool is directly operated by the solenoid thus eliminating the hydraulic amplier of the conventional servo valve. Less than 0.1% repeatability Flow rates up to 80 L/min (21 GPM) Zero lap On-board electronics Subplates as per catalog section RE 45 055 (order separately)
Model code 4WRPE 10 V 80 M 2X / G24 K0 / A1M - 837
Technical data
Pressure Rating bar (PSI)
01
NG10 (D05)
[Int. EI] UDE
A B
Flow L/min (GPM) 80 (21.1) at p = 5 bar (73 PSI)
Material Number
Weight kg (lbs.)
Amplier
P T
315 (4600)
m.LR
0 811 404 552
7.3 (16.0)
OBE 7 PIN
Connectors Mating Connector for OBE 7 Pin Plastic Solder Type Mating Connector for OBE 7 Pin Plastic Crimped Type Mating Connector for OBE 7 Pin MS Solder Type
Material Number 1 834 482 022 1 834 482 022 R 978 713 598
Old Number 1 834 482 022 1 834 482 026 9 536 230 054
Proportional Valves
288
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9 535 233 903 (10/00)


General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Assembly position Ambient temperature range Vibration Test condition Hydraulic Pressure medium Viscosity, recommended max. permitted Pressure medium temperature mm2/s (SUS) mm2/s (SUS) C (F) Hydraulic oil as per DIN 51524 535. Other uids after prior consultation. 20 to 100 (100 to 465) 10 to 800 (60 to 3700) 20 to +80 (4 +176) Permissible contamination level Class 8 (NAS 1638) 17/14 (ISO 4406) Flow direction Max. operating pressure (static) Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (75 PSI)*/land Operating limitis, GPM Leakage at 70 bar (1000 PSI)/land Static/dynamic Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance Qmax. Frequency response Response time 100% signal change 10% signal change Thermal drift 0.3% 0.2% 3% 5% 50% = 40 ms = 10 ms < 1%, at T = 22 C (72 F) 50 Hz 20 Hz bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) See symbol Ports P, A, B: 315 (4600) Port T: 200 (2900) 63 (16.6) See diagram, 182 L/min (48 GPM) at 200 bar (1450 PSI ) 91 L/min (24 GPM) at 315 bar (4600 PSI) 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) Achieved using lter x = 75 X = 10 C (F) Spool valve, direct operated, without steel sleeve Proportional solenoid with position control and with integrated amplier Subplate, ISO 4401 Optional 20 to +50 (4 to +122) max. 25 g Shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Filtration In line with operational reliability and service life
* This always refers to a pressure differential of p = 72.5 PSI at the throttle point. Where other pressure differentials are involved, ow is calculated according to the following formula: qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
However, the operating limits must be observed. When the operating limits are exceeded, the ensuing ow forces lead to uncontrollable spool movements.
Proportional Valves
289
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2 servo solenoid valves with positive overlap and position feedback (Lvdt AC/AC) Model 4WRP ..EA..
Size 10 Unit series 1X Maximum working pressure of P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI), T 250 bar (3626 PSI) Maximum ow 63 L/min (17 GPM)
Directly operated NG10 valves with positive overlap and external valve electronics Actuated on one side, symbol E Control solenoid with position feedback (Lvdt AC/AC) Suitable for use in electrohydraulic controls in production plants For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration NG10 with additional L port to ISO 4401-05-06-0-94
External trigger electronics (order separately), see catalog section RE 30052 and RE 30054 Solenoid and position transducer connectors included in scope of delivery Subplates as per catalog section RE 45053 and RE 45055 (order separately)
Ordering code 4WRP

For external electronics Size 10 Symbols 4/2-way version NG10 1)
A B
ac ac
10
28
S 1X / G24
Z4 / M
*
= no code = 10 M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Electrical connection with plug to DIN 43560 AM2 with mating connector, mating connector included in scope of delivery
0 P T L
=E
Z4 =

A B
ac ac
G24 = 1X = =A
Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Flow characteristic Progressive Nominal flow rate at 10 bar (145 PSI) valve pressure difference (5 bar (73 PSI) per metering notch) 28 L/min (7.4 GPM)
0 P T
(Standard)
1)
Type 4WRP 10 Mounting hole configuration with additional L port
S=
28 =
Proportional Valves
290
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition
C (F) kg (lbs.)
Spool type valve Proportional solenoid with position control, external amplier Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG10 (ISO 4401-05-06-0-94) Optional 20 to +50 (4 to +122) 7.0 (15.4) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (93 to 464) Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3708) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of Class 18/16/13 1) pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol Nominal ow at L/min (GPM) 63 (16.6) p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per notch 2) Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3626) bar (PSI) Port L: 2 (29) Leakage per metering edge Im = 0 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Electrical Cyclic duration factor Power supply Degree of protection Solenoid connection Position transducer connection Max. solenoid current Coil resistance R20 Max. power consumption at 100 % load and operating temperature
A VA
100 24 Vnom (external amplier) IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Unit plug DIN 43650/ISO 4400, M16 x 1.5 (2P+PE) Unit plug Pg7 (4P) 3.7 2.5 60
Static/Dynamic 3) Hysteresis % 0.3 Range of inversion % 0.2 Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax. % < 10 Response time 100% signal change ms < 25 10% signal change ms < 15 1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
Flow rate at a different p
qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
3)
All specications achieved in conjunction with proportional amplier: 0 811 405 099
Proportional Valves
291
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3 servo solenoid valves with positive overlap and position feedback (Lvdt AC/AC) Model 4WRP ..E..
Size 10 Unit series 1X Maximum working pressure of P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI), T 250 bar (3626 PSI) Maximum ow 63 L/min (17 GPM)
Directly operated NG10 valves with positive overlap and external valve electronics Actuated on both sides, symbol E Control solenoids with A-side position feedback (Lvdt AC/AC) Suitable for use in electrohydraulic controls in production plants For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration NG10 with additional L port to ISO 4401-05-06-0-94
External trigger electronics (order separately), see catalog section RE 30048 and RE 30047 Solenoid and position transducer connectors included in scope of delivery Subplates as per catalog section RE 45053 and RE 45055 (order separately)
Ordering code 4WRP

For external electronics Size 10 Symbols 4/3-way version NG10 1)
A B
ac ac
10
63
S 1X / G24
Z4 / M
*
= no code = 10 M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Electrical connection with plug to DIN 43560AM2 with mating connector, mating connector included in scope of delivery Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
Z4 =
b L
0 P T
=E
G24 =
1)
Type 4WRP 10 Mounting hole configuration with additional L port
1X =
Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Flow characteristic Progressive Nominal flow rate at 10 bar (145 PSI) valve pressure difference (5 bar (73 PSI) per metering notch) 63 L/min (16.6 GPM)
S=
63 =
Proportional Valves
292
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
C (F) kg (lbs.)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (93 to 464) Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3708) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of Class 18/16/13 1) pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol L/min (GPM) 63 (16.6) Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per notch 2) Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3626) bar (PSI) Port L: 2 (29) A T = 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) Leakage per metering edge Im = 0 B T = 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Leakage per metering edge A T = 0.4 to 0.8 L/min (0.11 to 0.21 GPM) (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI]) B T = 0.4 to 0.8 L/min (0.11 to 0.21 GPM) Electrical Cyclic duration factor Power supply Degree of protection Solenoid connection Position transducer connection Max. solenoid current Coil resistance R20 Max. power consumption at 100 % load and operating temperature % 100 24 Vnom (external amplier) IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Unit plug DIN 43650/ISO 4400, M16 x 1.5 (2P+PE) Unit plug Pg7 (4P) 3.7 2.5 60
A VA
Static/Dynamic 3) Hysteresis % 0.75 Range of inversion % 0.5 Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax. % < 10 Response time 100% signal change ms < 50 10% signal change ms < 20 1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
3)
All specications achieved in conjunction with proportional amplier: 0 811 405 099 293 Section 7
Proportional Valves
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2 servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE), positive overlap and position feedback Model 4WRP ..EA..
Size 6, 10 Unit series 2X Max. working pressure of P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI), T 250 bar (3626 PSI) NG6 Max. working pressure of P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI), T 200 bar (2900 PSI) NG10 Maximum ow 32 L/min (8.5 GPM) NG6 80 L/min (21 GPM) NG10
Directly operated NG6 and 10 valves with positive overlap, actuated on both sides and position-controlled, symbol E Control solenoid with on-board electronics (OBE), deadband compensation and gain calibrated at the factory Electrical connection 6P+PE (standard), signal input: differential amplier with interface A1 = +10 V For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration NG6 to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 and NG10 to ISO 4401-05-04-0-94 Plug-in connectors to DIN 43563-AM6, see catalog section RE 08008 (order separately) Subplates as per catalog section RE 45053 and RE 45055 (order separately)
Ordering code 4WRP

For external electronics Size 6 Size 10 Symbols 4/2-way version
A B a 0 P T
J 2X / G24
K0 / A1 M
*
=E =6 = 10 M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Interface for electronics setpoint input +10 V
A1 = =E K0 =

A B a 0 P T
Electrical connection without mating connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 2) Order mating connector separately Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
(Standard)
=A 2X =
G24 =
Nominal flow rate at 10 bar (145 PSI) valve pressure difference (5 bar (73 PSI) per metering notch) 32 L/min (8.5 GPM) Size 6 80 L/min (21.1 GPM) Size 10
Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Overlap compensating signal See curve range 0 +0.5 Flow characteristic Progressive
= 32 = 80 S=
J=
Proportional Valves
294
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Model 4WRPE 6 EA..)

C (F) kg (lbs.)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (93 to 464) Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3708) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to 158) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of Class 18/16/13 1) pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol L/min (GPM) 32 (8.5) Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per notch 2) Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3626) Operating limits See chart Leakage per metering edge Im = 0 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax. Response time 100% signal change 10% signal change Thermal drift QN type Calibration (factory setting) 3% p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
0.3 0.2 3 ~ 12 ~7 <1% at T = 40 C (104 F) L/min (GPM) 18 (4.8) 30 (8.0) L/min (GPM) 0.45 (0.12) 0.78 (0.21) UDE = 1 V = 15 (4.0) 30 (8.0) UDE = 8 V = Conformity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied within hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
% % % ms ms
qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
Proportional Valves
295
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Model 4WRPE 10 EA..)

C (F) kg (lbs.)
Spool type valve, directly operated Proportional solenoid with position control, OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG10 (ISO 4401-05-06-0-94) Optional 20 to +50 (4 to +122) 7.1 (15.6) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (93 to 464) Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3708) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of Class 18/16/13 1) pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol L/min (GPM) 80 (21.1) Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per notch 2) Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 200 (2900) Operating limits See chart Leakage per metering edge Im = 0 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax. Response time 100% signal change 10% signal change Thermal drift QN type Calibration (factory setting) 3% p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
0.3 0.2 3 ~ 25 ~ 10 <1% at T = 40 C (104 F) L/min (GPM) 50 (13.2) 80 (21.1) L/min (GPM) 0.15 (0.04) 0.34 (0.09) UDE = 0.6 V = 40 (10.6) 70 (18.5) UDE = 8 V = Conformity EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied within hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
2)
% % % ms ms
qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
Proportional Valves
296
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Model 4WRPE .. EA..)

Electrical, electronics integrated in the valve Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption NG6 NG10 External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: UE Terminal E: Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Safety earth conductor and shield Recommended cable A1 A1 % 100 IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Line socket 6P+PE, DIN 43563 24 V DCnom min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid Solenoid 2.5 AF Differential amplier, Ri = 100 k +0.4 ... +10 V 0V DB EB 45 mm = 40 VA max. 60 mm = 60 VA max.
max. 18 V DC
LVDT +0.4 ... +10 V Reference 0 V See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m 7 x 0.75 mm2 up to 40 m 7 x 1 mm2 Calibrated at the factory, see valve curve
Calibration

Supply 24V = Signal: 0,4+10V LVDT Signal: 0+10V (Ri = 100kW) NG 6/10 U S
Proportional Valves
297
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3 servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE), positive overlap and position feedback Model 4WRPE ..E.. / ..W..
Size 6, 10 Unit series 2X Max. working pressure of P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI), T 200 bar (2900 PSI) Max. ow 18 to 32 L/min (4.8 to 8.5 GPM) NG6 50 to 80 L/min (13.2 to 21 GPM) NG10
Directly operated NG6 and 10 valves with positive overlap, actuated on both sides and position-controlled, symbol E or W Control solenoid with on-board electronics (OBE), deadband compensation and gain calibrated at the factory Electrical connection 6P+PE (standard), signal input: differential amplier with interface A1 = 10 V (F1 on request) For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration NG6 to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 and NG10 to ISO 4401-05-04-0-94
Plug-in connectors to DIN 43563-AM6, see catalog section RE 08008 (order separately) Subplates as per catalog section RE 45053 and RE 45055 (order separately)
Ordering code 4WRP

For external electronics Size 6 Size 10 Symbols 4/3-way version
A B a 0 P T b
J 2X / G24
K0 /
*
=E =6 = 10 M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Interface for electronics setpoint input +10 V setpoint input 41220 mA 1)
A1 = F1 = =E =W
K0 =
Electrical connection without mating connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 2) Order mating connector separately Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
Nominal flow rate at 10 bar (145 PSI) valve pressure difference (5 bar (73 PSI) per metering notch) Size 6 18 L/min (4.8 GPM) 32 L/min (8.5 GPM) Size 10 50 L/min (13.2 GPM) 80 L/min (21.1 GPM)
G24 = 2X = = 18 = 32 = 50 = 80 S=
Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Overlap compensating signal See curve range 0 +0.5 Flow characteristic Progressive
J=
Proportional Valves
298
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Model 4WRPE 6 ..)

C (F) kg (lbs.)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (93 to 464) Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3708) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of Class 18/16/13 1) pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol L/min (GPM) 18 (4.8) 32 (8.5) Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per notch 2) 13 (3.4) 3% 26 (6.9) 3% QA at 8 V Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 200 (2900) A T = 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) Leakage per metering edge Im = 0 B T = 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Leakage per metering edge A T = 0.8 to 1.6 L/min (0.21 to 0.42 GPM) (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI]) B T = 0.8 to 1.6 L/min (0.21 to 0.42 GPM) Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax. Response time 100% signal change 10% signal change Thermal drift Conformity
1)
0.3 0.2 3 20 5 < 1% at T = 40 C (104 F) EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
% % % ms ms
2)
Proportional Valves
299
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Model 4WRPE 10 ..)

C (F) kg (lbs.)
Hydraulic (measured at n = 46 L/min (213 SUS) and t = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F)) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 ... 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (93 to 464) Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (46 to 3708) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Maximum permissible degree of contamination of Class 18/16/13 1) pressure uid. Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol L/min (GPM) 50 (16.6) 32 (8.5) Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per notch 2) 40 (10.6) 3% 70 (18.5) 3% QA at 8 V Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 200 (2900) A T = 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) Leakage per metering edge Im = 0 B T = 80 cm3/min (5 in3/min) (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Leakage per metering edge A T = 0.8 to 1.6 L/min (0.21 to 0.42 GPM) (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI]) B T = 0.8 to 1.6 L/min (0.21 to 0.42 GPM) Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax. Response time 100% signal change 10% signal change Thermal drift Conformity
1)
0.3 0.2 3 40 10 < 1% at T = 40 C (104 F) EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3 The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
% % % ms ms
2)
Proportional Valves
300
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (Model 4WRPE ..E.. / ..W..)

Electrical, electronics integrated in the valve Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption NG6 NG10 External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: UE Terminal E: Input, mA signal version Terminal D: IDE Terminal E: IDE Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Test signal, mA signal version Terminal F: IFC Terminal C: IFC Safety earth conductor and shield Recommended cable A1 A1 % 100 IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Line socket 6P+PE, DIN 43563 24 V DCnom min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid Solenoid 2.5 AF Differential amplier, Ri = 100 k 0 0.4 10 V 0V Load, Rsh = 200 4 12 20 mA Current loop IDE feedback DB EB 45 mm = 40 VA max. 60 mm = 60 VA max.
F1
max. 18 V DC
LVDT 0 0.4 10 V Reference 0 V LVDT signal 4 12 20 mA at external load 200 500 4 20 mA output Current loop IFC feedback See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m 7 x 0.75 mm2 up to 40 m 7 x 1 mm2 Calibrated at the factory, see valve curve
F1
Calibration

Supply 24V = Signal: 0...+/- 0,4+/-10V LVDT Signal: 0+/-10V (Ri >100 kW) NG 6/10 U 0 S
Version F1: mA-Signal

Supply 24V = Signal: 41220mA LVDT Signal: 41220mA (Brde: 200W) NG 6/10 U 0 S
Proportional Valves
301
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2 proportional directional control valve, without position control Model 4WRBA..EA..
Size 6, 10 Unit series 2X Maximum working pressure P, A, B 315 bar (4600 PSI), T 250 bar (3600 PSI) Nominal ow rate Qnom 14 to 28 L/min (3.7 to 7.4 GPM) NG6 32 to 63 L/min (8.5 to 16.6 GPM) NG10
Directly controlled NG6 and NG10 valves with positive overlap and external valve electronics Actuated on one side, standard symbol EA, normally closed version NC (normally open NO also available, with manual adjustment as optional extra) Adjustable by means of the solenoid current, see Characteristic Curve, Technical Data and the selected valve electronics
Ordering code 4WRBA

4/2 proportional directional control valve, without position control NG6 NG10 Symbols 4/2-way version
A B NC a 0 P T NO
2X / G24
Z4 / M
*
Further information in plain text See symbol 1) see symbol 2)
=6 = 10 M=
892 = 893 =
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
=E
Z4 =
Electrical connection With unit plug to DIN 43650-AM2 with plug-in connector, included in scope of delivery Manual adjustment Manual auxiliary override (covered) Voltage supply of trigger electronics +24 V DC
=X
N= N9 = G24 = =A 2X =
Actuating side
A B a 0 P T
Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
Nominal flow rate (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI] per metering notch) NG6 15 = 30 = NG10 32 = 64 = 14 l/min (3.7 GPM) 28 l/min (7.4 GPM) 32 l/min (8.5 GPM) 63 l/min (16.6 GPM)
Proportional Valves
302
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Spool-type valve Proportional solenoid without position control, external amplier Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) NG10 (ISO 4401-05-04-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) NG6 NG10 Vibration resistance, test condition Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range
2
Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight
kg (lbs.) 2.0 (4.4) 2.2 (4.8) with manual adjustment kg (lbs.) 6.9 (15.2) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
oil
= 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation mm /s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 450) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Class 18/16/13 1) NG6 l/min (GPM) 14 (3.7) 28 (7.4) per channel 80 (4.9) 150 (9.2) 32 (8.5) NG10 63 (16.6) per channel 80 (4.9)
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow, see symbol Nominal ow rate (at p = 5 bar)* Leakage per metering edge (p = 100 bar) Im = 0
cm3/min (in3/min)
Im = max. cm3/min (in3/min) Max. working pressure
bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Port T: 250 (3600) * Nominal flow This is always based on a pressure differential of p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) at the throttling point. Where other pressure differentials are involved, the ow is calculated according to the following formula:
1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of component For a selection of lters, see catalog sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
Qx = Qnom
5
pX
However, the operating limits must be born in mind. If they are exceeded, the ensuing ow forces lead to uncontrollable spool movements. Pressure compensators are used to reliably limit p.
Proportional Valves
303
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3 proportional directional control valve, without position control Model 4WRBA..E.. / ..W..
Directly controlled NG6 and NG10 valves with positive overlap and external valve electronics Actuated on both sides, standard symbols E and W Adjustable by means of the solenoid current, see Characteristic Curve, Technical Data and the selected valve electronics
Ordering code 4WRBA

4/3 proportional directional control valve, without position control NG6 NG10 Symbols 4/3-way version
AB a 0 PT b
2X / G24 N9 Z4 / M
*
Further information in plain text NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Electrical connection With unit plug to DIN 43650-AM2 with plug-in connector, included in scope of delivery Manual auxiliary override (covered) Voltage supply of trigger electronics +24 V DC
M= =6 = 10 Z4 =
N9 = G24 = =E 2X = =W NG6 07 = 15 = 30 = NG10 32 = 64 =
Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Nominal flow rate (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI] per metering notch) 6 l/min (1.6 GPM) 14 l/min (3.7 GPM) 28 l/min (7.4 GPM) 32 l/min (8.5 GPM) 63 l/min (16.6 GPM)
Proportional Valves
304
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Spool-type valve Proportional solenoid without position control, external amplier Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) NG10 (ISO 4401-05-04-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) NG6 NG10 Vibration resistance, test condition Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range
2
Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight
kg (lbs.) 2.6 (5.7) kg (lbs.) 7.7 (17.0) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
oil
= 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation mm /s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 450) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Class 18/16/13 1) NG6 l/min (GPM) 6 (1.6) 28 (7.4) per channel A T = 80 (4.9) B T = 80 (4.9) A T = 0.81.6 (0.050.1) B T = 0.81.6 (0.050.1) 32 (8.5) NG10 63 (16.6) per channel A T = 80 (4.9) B T = 80 (4.9) A T = 0.40.8 (0.020.05) B T = 0.40.8 (0.020.05)
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow, see symbol Nominal ow rate (at p = 5 bar)* Leakage per metering edge (p = 100 bar) Im = 0
cm3/min (in3/min)
Im = max. cm3/min (in3/min) Max. working pressure
bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Port T: 250 (3600) * Nominal flow This is always based on a pressure differential of p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) at the throttling point. Where other pressure differentials are involved, the ow is calculated according to the following formula:
Qx = Qnom
5
pX
However, the operating limits must be born in mind. If they are exceeded, the ensuing ow forces lead to uncontrollable spool movements. Pressure compensators are used to reliably limit p.
Proportional Valves
305
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3 proportional directional control valve, without position control, with onboard electronics Model 4WRBAE..E.. / ..W..
Directly controlled NG6 and NG10 valves with positive overlap and on-board electronics Actuated on both sides, standard symbols E and W Adjustable by means of the setpoint in the on-board electronics, see Characteristic Curves Valves are preset at the factory, ramp is set to minimum ramp time and overlap (Qmin at 0.8 V) to Qnom at 8 V
Ordering code 4WRBA E

4/3 proportional directional control valve, without position control With on-board electronics NG6 NG10 Symbols 4/3-way version
AB a 0 PT b
J 2X / G24 N9 K31 /
*
M= =E =6 = 10 A1 = F1 = K31 =
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Interface for trigger electronics Setpoint input 0... 10 V Setpoint input 4...20 mA
=E N9 = = W, W1 Nominal flow rate (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI] per metering notch) 18 l/min (4.8 GPM) 32 l/min (8.5 GPM) 35 l/min (9.2 GPM) 65 l/min (17.2 GPM) G24 = 2X = J=
Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately Manual auxiliary override (covered)
Voltage supply of trigger electronics +24 V DC
NG6 18 = 32 = NG10 35 = 65 =
Unit series (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Step response / deadband compensation
Proportional Valves
306
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Spool-type valve Proportional solenoid without position control, with on-board electronics (OBE) Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) NG10 (ISO 4401-05-04-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 3.1 (6.8) kg (lbs.) 8.3 (18.3) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition
NG6 NG10
Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 450) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure Class 18/16/13 1) uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow, see symbol NG6 NG10 l/min (GPM) 18 (4.8) 32 (8.5) per metering edge 35 (9.2) 65 (17.2) per metering edge Nominal ow rate (at p = 5 bar)* l/min (GPM) 15 1 (4.0 0.3) 26 1 (6.9 0.3) 28 2 (7.4 0.5) 58 3 (15.3 0.8) Leakage per metering edge A T = 80 (4.9) A T = 80 (4.9) 3 3 (p = 100 bar [1450 PSI]) Im = 0 cm /min (in /min) B T = 80 (4.9) B T = 80 (4.9) Leakage drain (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI]) Im = max. A T = 0.81.6 (0.050.1) B T = 0.81.6 (0.050.1) bar (PSI) Port P, A, B: 315 (4600) Port T: 250 (3600) cm3/min (in3/min) % % ms 50 6 3 100 A T = 0.40.8 (0.020.05) B T = 0.40.8 (0.020.05)
Max. working pressure Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Response sensitiviity Response time 100% signal change (ramp = Tmin)
90
8 5 100
* Nominal flow This is always based on a pressure differential of p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) at the throttling point. Where other pressure differentials are involved, the ow is calculated according to the following formula:
Qx = Qnom
5
pX
However, the operating limits must be born in mind. If they are exceeded, the ensuing ow forces lead to uncontrollable spool movements. Pressure compensators are used to reliably limit p. Proportional Valves 307 Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2 and 4/3-way proportional directional control valves, direct operated Model 4 WRAB
Direct operated proportional directional control valves, which control both the direction and volume of a uid ow Mounts on standard ISO 4401-3, NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 D 03, and ANSI B 93.7 D 03 interface Two piece solenoid design with removable coils Integrated electronics available For subplates, see RA 45 052
Model 4 WRAB 6...6X/EG 24 N9K4 with plug-in connector
Ordering code 4
4-way =4 Further details to be written in clear text MR = =B =6 K4 = N9 = G12 = =E =W 12 = 25 = = EA = WA 1X = Buna-N (NBR) seats suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) Individual solenoid plug connections Without angled plug connector(s) Covered manual override solenoid voltage 12 VDC Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19 externally interchangeable) Nominal ow at 10 bar (145 PSI) pressure drop 12 L/min (3.2 GPM) 25 L/min (6.6 GPM)
WRA
1X /
N9
Proportional directional control valve, direct operated = WRA Valve with removable coil Size 6 ISO 4401 NFPA/ANSI D 03 Symbols
Proportional Valves
308
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight (approx.) valve with 1 solenoid valve with 2 solenoids Mounting position Hydraulic Operating pressure ports A, B, P port T Recommended maximum pressure drop Maximum ow Hysteresis Repeatability Sensitivity Frequency response (-3 dB, signal 50%) Switching time to, or Step response Electrical Supply voltage Maximum current (at 24 vdc) Maximum power Solenoid coil resistance, cold value 68 F warm value 122 F Inductance Duty cycle Insulation Analog input (Re > 10 k- ) vdc vdc amps W mH 12V ( 10%) 2.5 30 4.8 7.2 86 Continuous IP65, exceeds NEMA class B MDSD ON or 0 100% OFF or 100% 0 bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) % % % Hz ms ms ...350 (5075) ...210 (3050) < 210 (3050) 30 (7.9) < 3.5 <1 <1 24 18 20 kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) 1.6 (3.5) 2.1 (4.6) Optional
Associated electronic amplier cards (some restrictions apply)
Proportional Valves
309
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2 and 4/3-way proportional directional valves, direct operated, without electrical position feedback Model 4WRA and 4WRAE
Sizes 6 and 10 Series 2X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 42 L/min (11.1 GPM) (Size 6) Maximum ow 140 L/min (37 GPM) (Size 10)
Direct operated proportional valve for controlling the direction and volume of a ow Actuation by means of proportional solenoids with central pole tube and removable coil For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A, ANSI B93.7 D03, D05, NFPA T3.5.1 MR1, ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP 121 H. Subplates to datasheets RA 45 052 (Size 6) or RA 45 054 (Size 10, separate order) Spring centered control spool Integrated control electronics, 0 to 10 V or 4 to 20 mA interface A1 or F1 for Model 4WRAE Control electronics for Model WRA: Electrical amplier VT-VSPA2-1-2X/ in 48F Eurocard format, see RE 30 110
Model 4WRA 10 -2X/G24K4/.V with plug-in connectors and associated control electronics (separate order)
Model 4WRAE 6 -2X/G24K31/.V
Proportional Valves
310
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code 4WRA

Without integrated control electronics With integrated control electronics Nominal size 6 Nominal size 10 Symbols = No code =E = 6 = 10 V=
2X / G24
*
Further details to be written in clear text FPM seals, suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524
No code =
A a 0
B b
For WRA For WRAE: A1 = Command value input 10 V F1 = Command value input 4 to 20 mA Electrical connections For WRA: With component plug DIN 43 650-AM2 Without plug-in connector Plug-in connector (separate order) For WRAE: With component plug to E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 Without plug-in connector Plug-in connector (separate order) Without special protection Supply voltage 24 VDC
= E
K4 =
= W K31 =
No code = G24 = 2X =
Nominal ow at a valve pressure differential Dp = 145 PSI (10 bar) Size 6 07 = 7 L/min (1.85 GPM) 15 = 15 L/min (3.96 GPM) 30 = 30 L/min (7.93 GPM) Size 10 30 = 30 L/min (7.92 GPM) 60 = 60 L/min (15.95 GPM)
Proportional Valves
311
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve type Installation Weight Size 6 Size 10 kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) WRA optional, preferably horizontal 2.0 (4.4) 6.6 (14.5) 2.2 (4.8) 6.8 (15) WRAE
Hydraulic measured at n = 46 mm2/s (208 SUS) and t = 40 C (104 F) Operating pressure Ports A, B, P Port T Nominal ow qV nom at p = 10 bar (145 PSI) Max. permissible ow Hysteresis Reversal error Response sensitivity Frequency (at 90 phase response, Signal 50%; xe = 40% xe nom) Electrical, solenoid Voltage Signal type Command value Voltage controlled Current controlled Max. current per solenoid Solenoid coil resistance Duty Electrical, control electronics For WRA For WRAE Supply voltage 4WRAE 4WRA 1) Power consumption of the amplier Nominal voltage Lower limiting value Upper limiting value Imax Max. power impulse current VDC V V A A 35 1.8 3 1.8 3 Amplier in Eurocard format VT-VSPA2-1-2X/ see RA 30 110 integrated in the valve 24 21 19 Cold value at 20 C Max. warm value Size 6 Size 10 Size 6 Size 10 V V mA mA A % 100 DC analog 10 10 4 to 20 4 to 20 2.5 2 3 10 10 4 to 20 4 to 20 2.5 2 3 Size 6 Size 10 Size 6 Size 10 Size 6 Size 10 bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) % % % Hz Hz up to 315 (4600) up to 210 (3050) 7 (1.85), 15 (3.96), and 30 (7.92) 30 (7.92) and 60 (15.85) 42 (11) [80 (21) with double ow] 75 (19.8) [140 (37) with double ow] 5 1 0.5 25 10 25 10
Proportional Valves
312
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/2 and 4/3-way proportional directional valves, direct controlled, with electrical position feedback Model 4WRE and 4WREE
Sizes 6 and 10 Series 2X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 180 L/min (47.5 GPM)
Directly controlled proportional valve for the control of direction and magnitude of a ow Actuation is by proportional solenoids with central thread and removable coil Electrical position feed-back For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A, ISO 4401, and CETOP-RP 121 H NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 03, D 05 For subplates, see datasheet RA 45 052 and RA 45 054 (separate order) Spring-centered control spool Model 4WREE, integrated valve electronics with interface A1 and F1 Control electronics for model WRE: Electronic amplier VT-VRPA2-1-1X/.. in Eurocard format (separate order), see RE 30119
Model 4WREE 10 ...-2X/G24K31/..V with integrated control electronics
Proportional Valves
313
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code 4WRE

Without integrated control electronics = No code With integrated control electronics (standard electronics) =E Nominal size 6 Nominal size 10 Symbols =6 = 10
2X / G24
*
Further details to be written in clear text V= FPM rectangular rings, suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 For WREE: command value input 10 VDC command value input 4 to 20 mA
A a a P 0
B b T
=E
A1 = F1 =
b
K4 =
K31 = = V G24 =
Electrical connection for WRE with component plug DIN 43 650-AM2 without plug-in connector Electrical connection for WREE with component plug to E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 without plug-in connector Power supply voltage 24 VDC
= W
2X = Series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Nominal ows at a valve pressure differential Dp = 145 PSI Size 6 8 L/min (2.11 GPM) 16 L/min (4.23 GPM) 32 L/min (8.45 GPM) Size 10 25 L/min (6.6 GPM) 50 L/min (13.21 GPM) 75 L/min (19.81 GPM)
08 = 16 = 32 = 25 = 50 = 75 =
Proportional Valves
314
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation Weight 4WRE 4WREE kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) Size 6 optional, preferably horizontal 2.2 (4.85) 2.4 (5.29) 6.3 (13.89) 6.5 (14.33) Size 10
Hydraulic measured at n = 46 mm2/s (208 SUS) and t = 40 C (104 F) Operating pressure Ports A, B, P Ports T Nominal ow qV nom at p = 10 bar (145 PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) up to 315 (4600) up to 210 (3050) 8 (2.11) 16 (4.23) 32 (8.45) Flow, max. permissible Hysteresis Reversal error Response sensitivity Electrical (solenoid) Insulation to DIN 40 050 Voltage model Signal model Command value signal Voltage input "A1" Current input "F1" Max. current per solenoid Solenoid coil resistance Duty Coil temperature Electrical (inductive position transducer) Electrical measuring system Electrical connection Protection to DIN 40 050 inductive plug-in connector 4-pin + Pg7-G4W1F IP 65 Cold value at 20 C Max. warm value V mA A % C (F) exceeds NEMA class B (IP 65) DC analog 10 4 to 20 2.5 2 3 100 up to 150 (302) L/min (GPM) % % % 0.1 0.05 0.05 80 (21.1) 25 (6.6) 50 (13.2) 75 (19.8) 180 (47.5)
Proportional Valves
315
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with positive overlap and on-board electronics Model 4WRLE 10 25, symbols E. / W.
Nominal size 10, 16, 25 Series 3X Maximum working pressure: 350 bar (5075 PSI) Nominal ow rate: 92.5 L/min (350 GPM) (p 10 bar [145 PSI])
Pilot operated servo solenoid valves NG 10 to NG 25 with positive overlap, see symbols E. / W. and characteristic curves Pilot valve NG 6, with control spool and sleeve in servo quality Actuated on one side, 4/4 fail-safe position when switched off Control solenoid with integral position feedback and on-board valve electronics (OBE), calibrated at the factory Main stage with approx. 20 % overlap and position feedback Electronically calibrated overlap compensation see characteristic curve range 0.5 V Spool with linear travel, with anti-rotation element Flow characteristic S = Progressive NG 16 and 25 with load tap C1 / C2 Suitable for electrohydraulic controllers in production systems with more demanding requirements
For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24340 Form A, ISO 4401, CETOP-RP 121 H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1, ANSI B 93.7 D05, D07, D08, D10 For subplates, see datasheets RA 45 054 to RA 45 060 (separate order)
Proportional Valves
316
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Model code 4WRL

With on-board trigger electronics Nominal size 10 Nominal size 16 Nominal size 25 Symbols
AB
J 3X / G24
K0 /A1 M
*
=E = 10 = 16 = 25 A1 = K0 = = E (Z), E1 (Z)
P C2T
M= NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Interface for electronics Setpoint input 10 V
= E, E1
PT AC1 B
Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with plug to DIN 43 563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately
AB
AB
= W, W1
PT AC1 B PT AC1 B
Control oil supply x, control oil outlet y No code = x = external, y = external E= x = internal, y = external ET = x = internal, y = internal T= x = external, y = internal G24 = 3X = Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
= W (Z), W1 (Z)
P C2T AB P C2T AB
= E4
PT AB PT AB
Series 20 to 29 (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Overlap compensation signal See characteristic curve range: 0.5 V Flow characteristic Progressive
J= = W4 S=
PT
PT
With symbol E1, E1 (Z), E4, W1 (Z), W4: P A: qv B T: qv/2 P B: qv/2 A T: qv With load tap C1 / C2 =Z
Nominal flow rate at 10 bar (145 PSI) valve pressure difference Nominal size 50, 80 = 10 50 or 80 L/min (13.2 or 21.1 GPM) 180 = 16 180 L/min (47.6 GPM) 350 = 25 350 L/min (92.5 GPM)
Proportional Valves
317
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight kg (lbs.) Vibration resistance, test condition
2
Spool type valve, pilot operated Servo solenoid valve NG 6, with position controller for pilot valve and main stage Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG 10 ... 35 (DIN 24340 Form A and ISO 440)1) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) NG 10 8.7 (19) NG 16 10.6 (23) NG 25 18.4 (40.5)
Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 535, other uids after prior consultation
Hydraulic measured at n = 46 mm /s (208 SUS) and t = 40 C (104 F) Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Purity class to ISO code Direction of ow Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72 PSI) per notch * Max. working pressure in P, A, B Max. pressure in X (ext.) Max. pressure in P (X = int.) Max. pressure in T (Y = ext.) Max. pressure in T (Y = int.) Max. pressure in Y (ext.) Min. control oil pressure of pilot stage Qmax. QN pilot valve, p = 35 bar (508 PSI) Leakage of pilot valve at 100 bar (1450 PSI) Leakage of main stage Sb E at 100 bar (1450 PSI ) QN: Sb W, see graph on page 5
3
mm2/s (SUS) mm2/s (SUS) C (F)
20 to 100 (100 to 465) 10 to 800 (60 to 3700) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol NG 10 NG 16 180 (48) 350 (5076) NG 25 350 (92.5) 350 (5076)
L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) cm /min (in /min) L/min (GPM)
3
50, 80 (13, 21) 350 (5076) 280 (4060) 280 (4060) 250 (3626) 250 (3626) 250 (3626) 8 (116) 170 (45) 2 (0.5) < 150 (9.15) < 0.25 (0.07)
450 (119) 4 (1.0) < 180 (11) < 0.4 (0.11)
900 (238) 12 (3) < 350 (21) < 0.6 (0.16)
1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. * Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
Proportional Valves
318
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Static/Dynamic Overlap in mid position Spool stroke, main stage Control oil volume of main stage 100 % Control oil requirement 0 ... 100 %, x = 100 bar (1450 PSI) Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance Response time for 0 ... 100 % [ms], x = 100 bar (1450 PSI) Response time for 0 ... 100 % [ms], x = 10 bar (145 PSI) Switch-off behavior Thermal drift Calibration Conformity Electric pilot valve NG 6, valve with on-board electronics Duty cycle Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: VE Terminal E: Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Protective conductor and shield Recommended cable 100 % IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Plug-in connector 6P+PE, DIN 43563 24 V DCnom. min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid 2.5 AF Difference amplier, Ri = 100 k 0 ... 10 V 0V DB EB 45 mm (1.8 in.) = 40 VA max. ms ms mm (in.) cm (in ) L/min (GPM)
3 3
18 ... 22 % of spool stroke for UDE 0.5 V 4 (0.157) 1.1 (0.07) 2.2 (0.58) < 0.1 %, scarcely measurable < 5 % (Qmax.) < 40 < 150 < 80 < 250 < 80 < 250 7 (0.276) 4.3 (0.26) 4.7 (1.24) 10 (0.394) 11.3 (0.69) 11.7 (3.09)
After electrical shut-off (pilot valve in fail-safe) Main stage moves to spring centered mid position (Sb E.. / W..) < 1 % at T = 104 F At factory 1 % EN 50081-1 EN 50082-2
} max. 18 V DC
LVDT 0 ... 10 V Reference 0 V See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m (65 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) up to 40 m (131 ft.) 7 x 1 mm2 Overlap and PA at +8 V, calibrated at the factory, see valve characteristic curve
Calibration
Proportional Valves
319
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE) Model 4WRLE 10 25, symbols V/V1
Size 10, 16, 25 Series 3X Maximum working pressure: 350 bar (5075 PSI) Nominal ow rate: 430 L/min (114 GPM) (p 10 bar [145 PSI])
Pilot operated servo solenoid valves NG 10 to NG 27 Pilot valve NG 6, with control spool and sleeve in servo quality Actuated on one side, 4/4 fail-safe position when switched off Control solenoid with integral position feedback and on-board electronics (OBE), calibrated at the factory Main stage in servo quality with position feedback Flow characteristic M = Progressive with ne metering notch Electrical connection 6P+PE Signal input difference amplier with interface A1 10 V, or interface F1 4...20 mA (Rs 200 )
Suitable for electrohydraulic controllers in production and testing systems For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24340 Form A, ISO 4401, CETOP-RP 121 H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1, and ANSI B 93.7 D05, D07, D08 For subplates, see datasheets RA 45 054 to RA 45 060 (separate order)
Model code 4WRL

With on-board electronics Size 10 Size 16 Size 25 Size 27 Symbols 4/3-way version
a 0 PT b
E
= 10 = 16 = 25 = 27
M 3X / G24
K0 / A1 M
*
Further information in plain text NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Interface for electronics Setpoint input 10 V
=E M=
A1 = K0 = = V, V1
Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with plug to DIN 43 563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately
With symbol V1: B T: qv/2 P A: qv A T: qv P B: qv/2 Nominal flow rate at 145 PSI valve pressure difference Size 10 55 or 85 L/min (15 or 23 GPM) 16 125 or 200 L/min (32 or 53 GPM) 25 370 L/min (98 GPM) 27 430 l/min (114 GPM)
Control oil supply x, control oil outlet y No code = x = external, y = external E= x = internal, y = external ET = x = internal, y = internal T= x = external, y = internal = 55, 85 = 125, 200 = 370 = 430 M= G24 = 3X = Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
Series 20 to 29 (installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Flow characteristic Progressive with linear ne metering
Proportional Valves
320
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition
2
Spool type valve, pilot operated Servo solenoid valve NG 6, with position controller for pilot valve and main stage Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG 10 ... 25 (DIN 24340 Form A and ISO 440)1) Optional C (F) kg (lbs.) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) NG 10 8.7 (19) NG 16 10.6 (23) NG 25 18.4 (40.5)
Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Hydraulic measured at n = 46 mm /s (208 SUS) and t = 40 C (104 F) Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Purity class to ISO code Direction of ow Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72 PSI) per notch * Max. working pressure Max. pressure Qmax. QN pilot valve p = 35 bar (508 PSI) Leakage of pilot valve at 100 bar (1450 PSI) Leakage of main stage at 100 bar (1450 PSI) L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) cm /min (in3/min) cm3/min (in3/min)
3
Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 535, other uids after prior consultation mm2/s (SUS) mm /s (SUS) C (F)
2
20 to 100 (100 to 465) 10 to 800 (60 to 3700) 20 to +70 (4 +158) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol NG 10 55 (15) 85 (23) 120 (32) NG 16 200 (53) NG 25 370 (98) NG27 430 (114)
Port P, A, B: 350 (5076) Port T, X, Y: 250 (3626) 170 (45) 4 (1.1) < 180 (11) < 400 (24 ) < 600 (37) 450 (119) 12 (3.2) < 300 (18) < 1000 (61) 900 (238) 24 (6.3) < 500 (55) < 1000 (61)
1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. * Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom. Important Pilot operated servo solenoid valves only perform their function in an active closed control loop and do not have a safe basic position when switched off. For this reason, many applications require the use of additional isolation valves, which must be taken into account during the On/Off switching sequence.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
Proportional Valves
321
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data (cont.)

Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance Response time for signal change at x = 100 bar (1450 PSI) Response time for signal change at x = 10 bar (145 PSI) Switch-off behavior Thermal drift Zero adjustment Conformity Electric pilot valve NG 6, valve with on-board electronics Duty cycle Degree of protection Connection Power supply Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption External fuse Input, Standard version Terminal D: VE Terminal E: Input, mA signal version Terminal D: ID-E Terminal E: ID-E Max. differential input voltage at 0 V Test signal, Standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Test signal, mA signal version Terminal F: IF-C Terminal C: IF-C Protective conductor and shield Recommended cable 100 % IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Plug-in connector 6P+PE, DIN 43563 24 V DCnom. min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC Solenoid 2.5 AF Difference amplier, Ri = 100 k 0 ... 10 V 0V Load, Rsh = 200 4 (12) 20 mA Current loop ID-E feedback DB EB 45 mm (1.8 in.) = 40 VA max. 0 100% 0 10% 0 100% 0 10% < 0.1 %, scarcely measurable < 5 % (Qmax.) 25 14 85 50 26 15 80 30 32 18 120 50
After electrical shut-off (pilot valve in fail-safe) Main stage moves to spring-centered offset position: 1 6% P-B/A-T Zero point displacement < 1% at T = 40 C (104 F) Factory-set 1% EN 50081-1 EN 50082-2
} max. 18 V DC
LVDT 0 ... 10 V Reference 0 V LVDT signal 4 20 mA at external load 200 500 max. 4 20 mA output Current loop IF-C feedback See pin assignment (installation conforms to CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m (65 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) up to 40 m (131 ft.) 7 x 1 mm2 Calibrated at the factory, see valve characteristic curve
Calibration
Proportional Valves
322
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from Catalogs: ATUS AKY 013/2 US 9 535 233 789 (5.97)
Injection valves Model 4WRLE Q

The injection valve was designed for plastic injection molding applications. Sizes in NG10 (D05), NG16 (D07), and NG25 (D08) Flow rates up to 1000 L/min (264 GPM) Technical Data Up to 62 Hz frequency response Position feedback on mainstage On-board electronics For subplates, see datasheets RA 45 054 to RA 45 060 (separate order)
Technical Data
Pressure Rating (PSI) 350 (5000) 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000 Flow L/min (GPM) 85 (22.4) 85 (22.4) 200 (52.8) 200 (52.8) 200 (52.8) 200 (52.8) 370 (98) 370 (98) 430 (114) 430 (114) 430 (114) Material Number 0811404668 0811404670 0811404276 0811404275 0811404270 R978714476 0811404434 0811404435 0811404438 0811404441 0811404442 Old Number 0 811 404 668 0 811 404 670 0 811 404 276 0 811 404 275 0 811 404 270 9 811 232 120 0 811 404 434 0 811 404 435 0 811 404 438 0 811 404 441 0 811 404 442 Weight kg (lbs.) 8.67 (19.1) 8.67 (19.1) 10.6 (23.3) 10.6 (23.3) 10.6 (23.3) 10.6 (23.3) 18.4 (40.5) 18.4 (40.5) 18.6 (41.0) 18.6 (41.0) 18.6 (41.0)
Model 4WRLE10 Q4 - 85M 3X/G24T K0/A1M 4WRLE10 Q4 - 85M 3X/G24ETK0/A1M 4WRLE16 Q4 - 200M 3X/G24 K0/A1M 4WRLE16 Q4 - 200M 3X/G24 TK0/A1M 4WRLE16 Q4 - 200M 3X/G24ETK0/A1M 4WRLE16 Q4 - 200M 3X/G24E K0/A1M 4WRLE25 X - 370M 3X/G24ETK0/A1M-812 4WRLE25 X - 370M 3X/G24E K0/A1M-812 4WRLE27 Q4 - 430M 3X/G24ETK0/A1M 4WRLE27 Q4 - 430M 3X/G24 K0/A1M 4WRLE27 Q4 - 430M 3X/G24 TK0/A1M Connectors
Mating Connector for OBE 7 PIN Plastic Solder Type Mating Connector for OBE 7 PIN Plastic Crimped Type Mating Connector for OBE 7 PIN MS Solder Type
1834482022 1834482026 R978713598
1 834 482 022 1 834 482 026 9 536 230 054
Proportional Valves
323
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics (OBE) Model 4WRVE 10 25

Size 10, 16, 25 Series 2X Maximum working pressure: 350 bar (5075 PSI) Nominal ow rate: 370 L/min (98 GPM) (p 10 bar [145 PSI])
Pilot operated High Response servo solenoid valves NG 10 to NG 25, with control piston and sleeve in servo quality On-board electronics (OBE) with position controller for the pilot and main stages, calibrated at the factory Main stage in servo quality with position feedback Flow characteristic M = Progressive with ne metering notch Electrical connection 11P+PE Signal input difference amplier with interface B5 10 V Suitable for electrohydraulic controllers in production and testing systems
For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24 340 Form A, ISO 4401,CETOP-RP 121 H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1, and ANSI B 93.7 D05, D07, D08 Subplates as per catalogue section, NG 10 RE 45 055, NG 16 RE 45 057 and NG 25 RE 45 059
Model code 4WRV

With on-board trigger electronics Size 10 Size 16 Size 25 Symbols 4/3-way version
AB a 0 PT b
M 2X / G24
K0 / B5 M
*
=E = 10 = 16 = 25 B5 = K0 = =V M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Interface for electronics Setpoint input 10 V
Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with plug to DIN 43 563-AM6 Order separately 1 834 482 142
Nominal flow rate at 145 PSI valve pressure difference Size 10 55 or 85 L/min (15 or 23 GPM) 16 125 or 200 L/min (32 or 53 GPM) 25 370 L/min (98 GPM) Flow characteristics Progressive with linear ne metering
Control oil inlet x, control oil outlet y No code = x = external, y = external = 55, 85 = 125, 200 = 370 =M G24 = 2X = Voltage supply of electronics +24 V DC
Series 20 to 29 (installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
Proportional Valves
324
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
General Construction Actuation Type of mounting Installation position Ambient temperature range Weight kg (lbs.) Vibration resistance, test condition C (F) Spool type valve, pilot operated Servo solenoid valve NG 6, with position controller for pilot valve and main stage Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG 10 ... 25 (DIN 24340 Form A and ISO 4401) Optional 20 to +50 (4 to +122) NG 10 8.0 (19) NG 16 10.4 (23) NG 25 18.2 (40.5)
Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Hydraulic measured at n = 46 mm2/s (208 SUS) and t = 40 C (104 F) 5 C (41 F) Pressure uid Viscosity range, recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Purity class to ISO code Direction of ow Nominal ow at p = 5 bar (72 PSI) per notch * Max. working pressure Max. pressure Qmax. QN pilot valve Leakage of pilot valve at 100 bar (1450 PSI) Leakage of main stage at 100 bar (1450 PSI ) Control oil pressure pilot stage min.b max. L/min (GPM) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) / () cm3/in (in3/min) cm3/in (in3/min) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) mm2/s (SUS) mm2/s (SUS) C (F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524 535, other uids after prior consultation 20 to 100 (100 to 465) 10 to 800 (60 to 3700) 20 to +65 (4 to +149) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid to ISO 4406 (C) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol NG 10 55 (15) 85 (23) Port P, A, B: 350 (5076) Port T, X, Y: 250 (3625) 170 (45) 8 (2) < 180 (11) < 400 (24) 10 (145) 250 (3626) Important Pilot operated servo solenoid valves only perform their function in an active closed control loop and do not have a safe basic position when switched off. For this reason, many applications require the use of additional isolation valves, which must be taken into account during the On/Off switching sequence. < 600 (37) 450 (119) 24 (6) < 300 (18) < 1000 (61) 900 (238) 40 (10.5) < 500 (55) < 1000 (61) NG 16 120 (32) 200 (53) NG 25 370 (98)
1) The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sections RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. * Flow rate at a different p qx = qnom.
px 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
Proportional Valves
325
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data (cont.)

Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance Response time for signal change at x = 100 bar (1450 PSI) Response time for signal change at x = 100 bar (145 PSI) Switch-off behavior Thermal drift Zero adjustment Conformity Electrical, trigger electronics integrated in the valve Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Connection Power supply 24 V DCnom.
2) 1)
% % 0 100% 0 10% 0 100% 0 10%
< 0.1, scarcely measurable < 5 (Qmax.) 12 6 40 20 15 7 50 20 23 10 90 30
Undened, not a fail safe value ? Zero point displacement < 1 % at T = 40 C (104 F) Factory-set 1% EN 50081-1 EN 50082-2
100 %, max. current input 30 VA (24 V DC) IP 65 to DIN 40 050 and IEC 14 434/5 Plug, 11P+PE
1 2 9 10
Data +24 V DCnom., fuse 2.5 AF (output stages) 0 V power ground +24 V DCnom. signal part 0V UIN UIN signal ground
Input signal 10 V Feedback signal (LVDT) Enabling input Signals Protective conductor Connecting cable
3)
4 5 6 7 3
} Difference amplier, R = 100 k

i
10 V DC, Ra = 1 k 0 V, reference point > 8.5 V to 24 V DCnom. (max. 40 V DC) Ri = 10 k Enabling acknowledgement +24 V DC Fault signal: no fault +24 V DC Only connect when transformer of 24 V DC system does not conform to standard VDE 0551
4)
8 11
Recommended 12 ... 14 mm: screened up to 20 m (65 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (18 AWG) up to 40 mm (131 ft.) 7 x 1 mm2 2) US (Pin 9) = signal electronics supply Valve OFF < 16.8 V DC Fault signal (Pin 11) Valve ON > 19.5 V DC No fault signal (Pin 11) 3) Inputs: dielectric strength to withstand up to max. 50 V. 4) Signals can bear a load of max. 20 mA and are resistant to shorts to ground.
24 V DCnom. min. 21 V DC max. 40 V DC 1) UB (Pin 1) = output stage supply Valve OFF < 13.4 V DC Valve ON > 16.8 V DC No fault signal (Pin 11)
Proportional Valves
326
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

4/3 and 5/3-way proportional directional valves, pilot operated Models WRZ and WRZE External pilot operation, Model WRH
Sizes 10 to 32 Series 7X Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5100 PSI) Nominal ow 520 L/min (137 GPM)
Pilot operated 2-stage proportional directional valve for the control of direction and ow rate Proportional solenoid operation, with central thread and removable coil For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 part 2 form A, ISO 4401, and CETOP-RP121H (4WRZ, NS 10 to 32) NFPA T3.5.1 MR1 and ANSI B 93.7 D 05, D07, D 08, D 10 (4WRZ, sizes 10 to 32) For subplates, see datasheets RA 45 054 to RA 45 060 (separate order) Manual override, optional Spring-centered control spool Models WRZE with integrated control electronics, interface A1 or F1 External control electronics for model WRZ: VT-VSPA2-1-2X/, see data sheet RE 30110
Model 4WRZ 10 ...7X/6EG24N9...K4/V with relevant control electronics (subject to separate order)
Model 4WRZE 10 ...7X/6EG24N9...K31.../V with integrated control electronics
Proportional Valves
327
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code 4WR _

Hydraulic operation Electro-hydraulic operation =H =Z
7X
Only for WRZ: without integrated control electronics = No code with integrated control electronics (standard electronics) =E Nominal size 10 Nominal size 16 Nominal size 25 Nominal size 32 Symbols
a 0 b a P A 0 T B b
= 10 = 16 = 25 = 32
= E E1= W6W8With symbols E1- and W8-: B to T: qV/2 P to A: qV max P to B: qV/2 A to T: qV max With symbols E3- and W9-: P to A: qV max B to T: closed P to B: qV/2 A to T: qV max (Regenerative circuit, base of spool at port A) Note: With spools W6-, W8-, W9-, W6A, W6B in their neutral position "0", there is a connection from A to T and B to T with an opening of less than 2% of the relevant cross-section.
1)
Omitted for 4WRH
Further details to be written in clear text V= FPM seals, suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 No code = without pressure reducing valve D3 1) = with pressure reducing valve, model ZDR 6 DP0-4X/40YM-W80 (xed setting) For 4WRZE: A1 = command value input 10 V F1 = command value input 4 to 20 mA Electrical connection only for WRZ: with component plug to K4 1) = DIN 43 650-AM2 without plug-in connector For WRZE: with component plug to K31 1) = E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 Pilot oil feed and drain No code = pilot oil feed external, pilot oil drain external; E= pilot oil feed internal, pilot oil drain external; ET = pilot oil feed internal, pilot oil drain internal; T= pilot oil feed external, pilot oil drain internal No code = without special protection with concealed hand override N9 1) = Electronic control supply voltage 24V DC (standard version) G24 1) = 1) 6E = proportional solenoid with removable coil No code = for subplate mounting 7X = series 70 to 79 (70 to 79: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Nominal ow in L/min (GPM) with a 10 bar (145 PSI) valve pressure drop 50 = 50 (13.2) 85 = 85 (22.5) for nominal size 10 25 = 25 (6.6) 150 = 150 (39.6) for nominal size 16 100 = 100 (26.4) 325 = 325 (85.8) for nominal size 25 220 = 220 (58.1) 520 = 520 (137.3) for nominal size 32 360 = 360 (95.1)
Proportional Valves
328
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve model Installation position Spool symbol Weight for version 4WRZ... 0.2 kg (0.44 lbs) For sub-plate mounting Size 10 Size 16 Size 25 Size 32 Nominal size Operating pressure Pilot valve Control pressure, 4WRH Pilot oil feed external, 4WRZ Pilot oil feed internal, 4WRZ Main valve Return line pressure Port T (port R) (pilot oil drain external) Port T (pilot oil drain internal) Port Y Flow through main valve Hysteresis Repeatibility Electrical Valve model Insulation Voltage model Signal model Command value signal Voltage A1 Current F1 Input impedance Control electronics For WRZ (separate order) Amplier in Euro-card format with 1 ramp time with 5 ramp time For WRZE VT- VSPA2-1-2X/V0/T1, see RA 30 110 VT- VSPA2-1-2X/V0/T5, see RA 30 110 integrated into the valve Voltage A1 Current F1 V mA 10 4 to 20 30K or higher 100 DC analog WRZ exceeds NEMA Class B (IP65) WRZE bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) % % to 362, not higher 435 to 1450 1450 to 4600 only with "D3" ... 315 (4600) ... 4600 ... 435 ... 435 ... 44.9 6 3 ... 5100 ... 3626 ... 435 ... 435 ... 121.5 ... 5100 ... 3626 ... 435 ... 435 ... 230 ... 5100 ... 2176 ... 435 ... 435 ... 423 kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) Size 10 WRZ WRZE optional, preferably horizontal (for commissioning guidelines see RA 07 800) E, E1-, E3-, W6-, W8-, W97.8 (17.2) 13.4 (29.5) 18 (40.1) 80 (175.2) 16 25 EA, W6A, EB, W6B 7.4 (16.3) 28.0 38.6 173.0 32
Hydraulic measured at n = 46 mm2/s (208 SUS) and t = 40 C (104 F)
Note: For details concerning environmental simulation testing for EMV (electro-magnetic compatibility), climate and mechanical loading see RA 29 115-U (explanation regarding environmental compatibility).
Proportional Valves
329
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Servo directional valve of 4-way design Model 4WS.2E

Nominal size 10 Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4500 PSI) Maximum ow 180 l/min (47.55 GPM)
Valve control for closed loop position, force and speed control 2-stage servo valve with mechanical or mechanical and electrical feedback 1st stage as jet/apper plate amplier For subplate mounting, Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form A10 with ports X and Y Subplates to catalogue sheet RE 45 054 (separate order)
Model 4WSE2ED 10-5X/BK31EV
Model 4WS2EM 10-5X/BK31EV
Proportional Valves
330
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data 10 5X /
Electrically actuated 2-stage servo valve in a 4-way version = 4WS2E For external control electronics = With integrated control electronics 4WSE2E Mechanical feedback Mechanical and electrical feedback (only available with integrated electronics) Nominal size 10 Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Nominal flow With a valve pressure differential p = 70 bar (1015 PSI) 5 L/min (1.32 GPM) 10 L/min (2.64 GPM) 20 L/min (5.28 GPM) 30 L/min (7.93 GPM) 45 L/min (11.89 GPM) 60 L/min (15.85 GPM) 75 L/min (19.81 GPM) 90 L/min (23.78 GPM) =M =D
K31 E
*
Further details in clear text V= FKM seals, suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Spool overlap 0 to 0.5 % negative Electrical connections Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175.201-804 Plug-in connector separate order, see page 7
E= K31 =
= 10 = 5X 210 = 315 = = E= T= ET = 11 =
Inlet pressure range for the 1st stage 10 to 210 bar (145 to 3045 PSI) 10 to 315 bar (145 to 4500 PSI) Pilot oil supply and drain External supply, external drain Internal supply, external drain External supply, internal drain Internal supply, internal drain (standard) Valves for external control electronics: Coil no. 11 (30 mA / 85 per coil) Valves with integrated control electronics: Control:
= 5 = 10 = 20 = 30 = 45 = 60 = 75 = 90
Com. value 9= 13 = 10 V 10 mA
Act. value (only provided with 4WSE2ED) 10 V 10 mA
Proportional Valves
331
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Porting pattern Installation Storage temperature range Ambient temperature range Weight With mechanical feedback With mechanical and electrical feedback and integrated electronics C (F) C (F) kg (lbs.) kg
DIN 24 340 form A10 Optional, it has to be ensured the pilot control is supplied with a dequate pressure, ( 10 bar) when starting-up the system! 20 to +80 (4 to +176) 30 to +70 (22 to +158) valves with external control electronics 20 to +60 (4 to +140 valve with integrated electronics 3.56 (7.85) 3.65 (8.04)
Hydraulic measured with HLP 32, oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Operating Pilot control stage, pilot oil supply bar (PSI) 10 to 210 (145 to 3045) or 10 to 315 (145 to 4500) pressure: Main valve, ports P, A, B bar (PSI) Up to 315 (4500) Return Port T Internal pilot oil drain bar (PSI) Permissible pressure peaks < 100 (1450) pressure: External pilot oil drain bar (PSI) Up to 315 (4500) Port Y bar (PSI) Permissible pressure peaks < 100 (1450), static < 10 (145) Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524, other pressure uids on request! Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 15 to +80 (+5 to +176); preferably +40 to +50 (+104 to +122) Viscosity range mm2/s (SUS) 15 to 380 (70 to 1760); preferably 30 to 45 (140 to 210) Cleanliness class to ISO codes Maximum permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to ISO 4406 (C) class 18/16/13 1) Zero ow qV,L 2) pP 4) 0.7 pP 4) 0.9 pP 4) 1.2 pP 4) 1.5 pP 4) 1.7 L/min measured without dither signal 70 (0.24) 70 (0.18) 70 (0.32) 70 (0.40) 70 (0.45) (GPM) (1015) (1015) (1015) (1015) (1015) Nominal ow qV nom 10 % 3) with a valve pressure differential p = 70 bar (1015 PSI) 5) Control spool stroke L/min (GPM) mm (in.) 5 (1.3) 10 (2.6) 0.29 (0.011) 120 to 170 mechanical (M) 1.5 0.3 0.2 30 3, long term 5 1 1 2 1
2) 3) 4) 5)
20 30 45 60 75 (5.3) (7.9) (11.9) (15.9) (19.8) 0.43 0.74 0.99 (0.02) (0.029) (0.04) 120 to 150
90 (23.8) 1.10 (0.043)
Max. possible control spool stroke at mechanical end stop % referring to the nominal stroke (in the case of a fault) Feedback system Hysteresis (dither optimised) % Reversal span (dither optimised) % Response sensitivity (dither optimised) % Pressure amplication 1 % spool stroke % of pP change (from the hydraulic zero point) Balance current over the entire % operating pressure range Zero displacement with changes to: Pressure uid temperature %/20 C (68 F) Ambient temperature %/20 C (68 F) %/100 (1450) Operating pressure 80 to 120 % of pP %/bar (PSI) Return pressure 0 to 10 % of pP
1)
120 to 150
mechanical and electrical (D) 0.8 0.2 0.1 60 2 2 2 2 1 80
The cleanliness class stated for the components must be adhered too in hydraulic systems Effective ltration prevents faults from occuring and at the same time increases the component service life. For the selection of lters see data sheets RE 50 070, RE 50 076 and RE 50 081. 332
qV,L qV nom pP p
= Zero ow in L/min (GPM) = Nominal ow (entire valve) in L/min (GPM) = Operating pressure in bar (PSI) = Valve pressure differential in bar (PSI) Section 7
Proportional Valves
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Electrical Feedback system Valve protection to EN 60 529 Signal type Nominal current per coil Resistance per coil Inductivity at 60 Hz Serial connection and 100% nom. current: Parallel connection Recommended superimposed dither signal: f = 400 Hz
mA H H
Mechanical M Mechanical and electrical D IP 65 with mounted and xed plug-in connector Analog 30 85 1.0 0.25 The amplitude is dependent on the hydraulic system: max. 5 % of the nominal current
Electrical, external control electronics (only version M) Eurocard format Analog Type VT-SR2-1X/... to catalog sheet RE 29 980 Amplier (separate order) Module format Analog Type VT 11021 to catalog sheet RE 29 743 Note: For details regarding the environmental simulation test covering EMC (electro-magnetic compatibility), climate and mechanical loading see RE 29 583-U (Declaration regarding environmental compatibility).
Plug-in connectors
Plug-in connector to DIN EN 175.201-804 Separate order under Material No. R900223890 (metal version)
A B C 813.5 (0.310.53) D F E
85 (3.35)
Electrical connections, external control electronics

Type 4WS2EM 10-5X
A C B D E F PE
The electrical connections can be made in either series or parallel. Due to operational safety reasons and the low coil inductivity, we recommend the parallel connection. The bridge E-F can be used for the electrical recognition that the plug is correctly connected or for cable break recognition. Parallel connection: Serial connection: In the plug-in connector connect contact A with B and C with D. In the plug-in connector connect contact B with C.
Coil A Coil B
Electrical control from A (+) to D () causes a flow direction of P to A and B to T. By reversing the electrical control the direction of flow is P to B and A to T. E F = Bridge 333 Section 7
Proportional Valves
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve Models DBET and DBETE

Size 6 Series 6X Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5075) PSI Maximum ow 2 L/min (0.5 GPM)
Direct operated valve for limiting a system pressure Operated via a proportional solenoid Proportional solenoid with central thread and removable coil For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to ISO 4401-03-02 subplates to catalogue sheet RE 45052 Internal control electronics for type DBETE: Low example spread of the command value-pressurecharacteristic curve CE: For the type DBETE with integrated control electronics the EMC directive 89/336/EWG is complied with EN 61000-6-3: 2002-08 The compliance of the identied products with the specications of the stated directive can be proven by fully complying with the stated standards
Model DBETE6X/... with integrated control electronics and Model DBET-6X/..
Ordering code DBET

Proportional pressure relief valve For external control electronics With integrated electronics Component series 60 to 69 (60 to 69: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Max. pressure stage Up to 100 bar (1450 PSI) Up to 200 bar (2900 PSI) Up to 315 bar (4600 PSI) Control electronics supply voltage 24 V DC = no code =E A1 = F1 = = 100 = 200 = 315 = G24 K4 = V=
6X /
G24
*
Further details in clear text FKM seals Integrated control electronics for the DBETE: Command value input 0 to 10 VDC Command value input 4 to 20 mA Electrical connections for the DBET: Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175301-803 Plug-in connector, separate order For the DBETE: Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175201-804 Plug-in connector, separate order
= 6X
K31 =
Proportional Valves
334
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Installation Weight kg (lbs.) DBET Optional 2.0 (4.4) DBET 350 (5075) 100 (1450) 200 (2900) 315 (4600) Separate and at zero pressure to tank 2 (0.5) < 4 of the max. settable pressure < 0.5 of the max. settable pressure < 0.5 of the max. settable pressure 3 of the max. settable pressure < 1.5 of the max. settable pressure 3) < 5 of the max. settable pressure 4) < 1.5 of the max. settable pressure 2.15 (4.7) DBETE DBETE
Hydraulic measured with HLP 46; oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Max. operating pressure Max. settable pressure Port P Pressure stage 100 bar (1450 PSI) Pressure stage 200 bar (2900 PSI) Pressure stage 315 bar (4600 PSI) Return pressure Max. ow Hysteresis Reversal span Response sensitivity Linearity (ow 0.8 L/min) Example spread of the com. At com. value 20% value-pressure-char. curves at At com. value 100% 0.8 L/min; pressure rising Step response (Tu + Tg) 0 100% or 100% 0 Pipe volume < 20 cm3 (1.22 in3); qV = 0.8 L/min (0.21 GPM) Electrical Supply voltage Nominal voltage Lower limiting value Upper limiting value Min. control current (with a 0 V or 4 mA com. value) Max. control current Coil resistance Duty Control electronics Amplier in Eurocard format (separate order) see data sheet RE 30115 Amplier of modular design (separate order) see data sheet RE 30223 Analog Analog Cold value at 20C (68 F) Max. warm value VDC VDC VDC mA mA % 5.5 8.05 100 24 21 35 100 Port T bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) % % % % % % ms
80 (depending on the system!)
DBET
DBETE
1600 1)
1600
DBET External amplier VT-VSPA1-2-1X VT-VSPA1K-2-1X VT-MSPA1-1-1X
DBETE Integrated into the valve
Proportional Valves
335
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve Model DBETX

Nominal sizes 6 Series 1X Max. working pressure P 315 bar (4500 PSI) T 250 bar (3600 PSI) Max. ow Qnom 1 l/min (0.26 GPM)
Directly operated valves (pilot valves) for limiting system pressure Adjustable by means of the solenoid current, see Characteristic curve, Technical data and selected valve electronics Solenoid versions Imax = 0.8 A or Imax = 2.5 A Pressure limitation to a safe level even with faulty electronics (solenoid current I > Imax)
Model DBETX
Ordering data DBET

Proportional pressure relief valve Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 =X M=
X 1X /
G24
Z4
*
Further information in plain text NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Electrical connection Unit plug to DIN 43650-AM2 Plug-in connector included in scope of delivery Manual auxiliary override Solenoid type (current) Solenoid current 0.8 A max. Solenoid current 2.5 A max.
Unit series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Max. pressure stage up to 50 bar (725 PSI) up to 80 bar (1160 PSI) up to 180 bar (2610 PSI) up to 250 bar (3600 PSI) up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Voltage supply of trigger electronics 24 V DC = 50 = 80 = 180 = 250 = 315 = G24
Z4 =
N= 8= 25 =
Proportional Valves
336
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Spool valve Proportional solenoid without position control, external amplier Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 1.9 (4.19) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Hydraulic (measured with HLP 46, oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 20 to 100 (92 to 460) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure Class 18/16/13 1) uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol bar (PSI) 50 (725) 80 (1160) 180 (2600) 250 (3625) 315 (4500) Max. set pressure (at Q = 1 l/min) bar (PSI) 2 (29) 3 (43.5) 4 (58) 5 (72.5) 8 (116) Minimum pressure (at Q = 1 l/min) Note: At Qmax = 1.5 l/min the pressure levels stated here increase bar < 55 < 85 < 186 < 258 < 325 Max. mechanical pressure limitation level, (PSI) (790) (1230) (2700) (3750) (4700) e.g. when solenoid current I Imax bar (PSI) Port P: 315 (4500) 2) Max. working press. (at Q = 1 l/min) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3600) Electrical Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Solenoid connection Valve with solenoid type Max. solenoid current Coil resistance R20 Max. power consumption at 100 % load and operating temperature Static/Dynamic 3) Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance Response time 100% signal change
1)
% 100 IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Unit plug DIN 43650/ISO 4400, M16x1.5 (2P+PE) 0.8 A 2.5 A 0.8 A 2.5 A Imax 22 3 VA 25 30
% % % ms
4 3 10 On 60 / Off 70
2) 3)
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. The maximum pressure in P is 315 bar (3500 PSI) in the standard version. 350 bar (5100 PSI) is available on request. All characteristic values ascertained using amplier 0 811 405 079 for the 2.5 A solenoid and 0 811 405 081 for the 0.8 A solenoid.
Proportional Valves
337
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve Model DBETR

Valve for remote electrical control Direct operated proportional pressure relief valve, poppet-type design Proportional solenoid operation with inductive positional transducer (pressure balanced) For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Subplates to catalog sheet RE 45052 Electrical closed loop position contol of the spring pretension, hence low hysteresis Good repeatability Valve and electronic control from one source Control electronics: Analog amplier VT-VRPA1-100-1X/ in Eurocard format (separate order), see RE 30118 Analog amplier of modular design VT-MRPA1-100-1X/V0/0 (separate order), see RE 30221
Model DBETR-1X/... with associated electronic control (ordered separately)
Ordering code DBETR 1X

Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: externally interchangeable) Pressure stage: up to 180 bar (2600 PSI) up to 230 bar (3330 PSI) up to 316 bar (4600 PSI) Control electronics supply voltage 24 V DC = 1X M= = 180 = 230 = 315 = G24 K4 =
G24
K4
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable fo mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524
Electrical connections Without plug-in connector with component plug to DIN EN 175301-803 for the proportional solenoid and GSA20 for the position transducer Plug-in connector separate order
Proportional Valves
338
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight Mounting position Hydraulic measured at n = 41 mm /s (190 SUS) and t = 50 C (122 F) Operating pressure Port P Port T, with pressure control without pressure control, T port Max. pressure setting pressure stage 180 pressure stage 230 pressure stage 315 Max. ow pressure stage 180 pressure stage 230 pressure stage 315 Hysteresis Repeatability Linearity Typical variation Stepped response Tu + Tg (0 to 100%), installation dependent Pressure stage 30, 80, 180 Pressure stage 230, 315 Electrical (Solenoid) Supply voltage Maximum power input Coil resistance Duty Electrical connections cold at (20 C) 68 F maximum warm valve VA % 24 V DC 50 10 13.9 100 With component plug to DIN EN 175301-803 Plug-in connector to DIN EN 175301-803 Electrical (inductive positional transducer) Coil resistance Electrical connections Inductivity Oscillator frequency Protection to EN 60529 Control electronics (separate order) Amplier in Eurocard format Amplier of modular deaign Analog VT-VRPA1-100-1X/ (see data sheet RE 30118) VT-MRPA1-100-1X/V0/0 (see data sheet RE 30221) mH kHz Total resistance of the coils at 20 C (68 F) Coil I 56 Coil II 56 Coil III 112 ms ms bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) L/min (GPM) % % % % ... 350 (5075) ... 2 (30) ... 100 (1450) 180 (2610) 230 (3335) 350 (5075) 3 (0.8) 3 (0.8) 2 (0.5) <1 of max. pressure setting <0.5 of max. pressure setting < 1.5 of max. pressure setting 3 of max. pressure setting pmin pmax 100 150 pmax pmin 50 100
2
kg (lbs.)
4.0 (8.8) Optional
With component plug GSA20 Plug-in connector GM 209N with at seal 6 to 8 2.5 IP65 with mounted and xed plug-in connector
Proportional Valves
339
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve with linear curve (Lvdt AC/AC) Model DBETFX
Directly operated valves with position feedback for limiting system pressure Adjustable through the set position (force) of the cone against the main spring (see Basic principle, page 3) Position-controlled, linear curve with minimal hysteresis < 1 %, see Technical data Pressure limitation to a safe level even with faulty electronics (solenoid current I > Imax) For subplate attachment, mounting hole conguration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Subplates as per catalog sheet RE 45053 (order separately) Plug-in connector for solenoid to DIN 43650-AM2 and plug-in connector for position transducer, included in scope of delivery
Model DBETFX
Ordering data DBETF

Proportional pressure relief valve with linear curve and inductive position transducer on the cone Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Max. pressure stage up to 80 bar (1160 PSI) up to 180 bar (2600 PSI) up to 250 bar (3625 PSI) up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Voltage supply of trigger electronics 24 V DC =X = 1X Z4 =
X 1X /
G24 27
Z4
*
M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Electrical connection Unit plug to DIN 43650-AM2 Plug-in connector included in scope of delivery Manual auxiliary override Solenoid type (current) Solenoid current 2.7 A max.
= 80 = 180 = 250 = 315 = G24
N= 27 =
Proportional Valves
340
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted
oil
Poppet valve Proportional solenoid with position control and external amplier Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Horizontal, vertical with solenoid at top C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 2.3 (5.07) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation 2 mm /s (SUS) 20 to 100 (92 to 450) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700)
Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Class 18/16/13 1) Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol bar (PSI) 80 (1160) 180 (2600) 250 (3600) 315 (4500) Max. set pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) bar (PSI) 3 (43) 4 (58) 5 (72) 6 (87) Minimum pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Note: At Qmax = 3 l/min [0.80 GPM] the pressure levels stated here increase Max. mechanical pressure limitation level, e.g. bar (PSI) < 85 (1200) < 186 (2700) < 258 (3700) < 325 (4700) when solenoid current I Imax Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P: 315 (4500) (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 200 (2900) Electrical Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Solenoid connection Position transducer connection Max. solenoid current Coil resistance R20 Max. power consumption at 100 % load and operating temperature Static/Dynamic 2) Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance for Qmax Response time 100 % signal change
1)
% 100 IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Unit plug DIN 43650/ISO 4400, M16 x 1.5 (2P+PE) Special plug Imax 2.7 3 VA 35
% % % ms
1 0.8 2 On 45 / Off 25
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. 2) All characteristic values ascertained using amplier 0 811 405 095 for the position-controlled 2.7 A solenoid. Proportional Valves 341 Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve with on-board electronics (OBE) Model DBETBEX
Directly operated valves with position feedback and on-board electronics for limiting system pressure Adjustable through the position of the armature against the compression spring Position-controlled, minimal hysteresis < 0.2 %, rapid response times, see Technical data Pressure limitation to a safe level even with faulty electronics (solenoid current I > Imax)
Model DBETBEX
Ordering data DBETB

Proportional pressure relief valve with inductive position transducer on the cone With on-board electronics Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Max. pressure stage up to 80 bar (1160 PSI) up to 180 bar (2600 PSI) up to 250 bar (3600 PSI) up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Voltage supply of trigger electronics 24 V DC =E =X = 1X K31 = = 800 = 180 = 250 = 315 = G24 A1 = F1 =
X 1X /
G24
K31
*
Further information in plain tex
M=
NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Interface for trigger electronics Setpoint input 0...+10 V Setpoint input 4...20 mA
Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately
Proportional Valves
342
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow Max. set pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Minimum pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) bar (PSI) bar (PSI)
oil
Poppet valve Proportional solenoid with position control and OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 2.7 (6.0) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation mm2/s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 460) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol 80 (1160) 3 (43) 180 (2600) 4 (58) 250 (3600) 5 (72) 315 (4500) 8 (116)
Note: At Qmax = 1.5 l/min [0.40 GPM] the pressure levels stated here increase Max. mechanical pressure limitation level, e.g. when solenoid current I Imax Max. working pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Max. pressure Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance Response time Thermal drift Conformity
1)
bar (PSI)
< 85 (1200)
< 186 (2700)
< 258 (3700)
< 325 (4700)
bar (PSI) Port P: 315 (4500) bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (2900) % 0.2 % 0.1 % 5 ms 30 ms 10 < 1 % at T = 40 C (104 F) EN 61000-6-2: 2002-08 EN 61000-6-3: 2002-08
100 % signal change 10 % signal change
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081.
Proportional Valves
343
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve Models DBE and DBEE

Valve for limiting system pressure Operation via proportional solenoid For subplate mounting or of sandwich plate design: Porting pattern to DIN 24 340, Form A6 Subplates to data sheet RE 45052 Valve and control electronics from a single source External control electronics for models DBE and ZDBE: Analog amplier type VT-VSPA1-1 in Eurocard format (separate order), see data sheet RE 30111 Analog amplier of modular design model VT 11131 (separate order), see data sheet RE 29865
Model DBEE 6.. 1X/.. with integral control electronics Models DBEE and ZDBEE with integrated control electronics: Low example spread of the commnad value-pressurecharacteristic curve Independently adjustable up and down ramps
Ordering code DBE

Subplate mounting = No code Proportional pressure relief valve For external control electronics With integrated control electronics Size 6 Subplate mounting valve = No code =E =6 = No code K31 = = 200 = 315 G24 = M=
1X
G24
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524
K4 =
Electrical connection for DBE; ZDBE: Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175 301-803 Plug-in connector, separate order For DBEE; ZDBEE: Without plug-in connector, with component plug to E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 Plug-in connector, separate order Supply voltage for control electronics 24 V DC
Series 10 to 19 = 1X (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Pressure stage 200 bar (2900 PSI) Pressure stage 315 bar (4600 PSI)
No code = Internal pilot oil drain (Subplate mtg. up to Qmax = 15 L/min (3.9 GPM) recommended) Y= External pilot oil discharge (only for subplate mounting)
Proportional Valves
344
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight Installation position DBEE and ZDBEE kg (lbs .) 2.5 (5.5) optional
Hydraulic, measured with HLP 46; and voil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Operating pressure Ports P; P1 P2; A1 A2; B1 B2 Port T Max. set pressure Pressure stage 200 Pressure stage 315 Return pressure port A; with external pilot oil discharge (Y) Max ow Hysteresis Repeatability Linearity Stepped response Tu + Tg 10% 90% 90% 10% Electrical Type of voltage Min. control current Max. control current Coil resistance Duty Electrical connections DBE and ZDBE DBEE and ZDBEE Valve protection to DIN 40 050 Control electronics For DBEE and ZDBEE For DBE and ZDBE (separate order) Amplier in Eurocard fomat Amplier of modular design Analog Analog VT-VSPA1-1 (see data sheet RE 30111) VT 11131 (see data shet RE 29865) Cold value at 20 C (68 F) Max. warm value mA mA % 24 VDC 100 1600 5.4 7.8 100 With component plug to DIN EN 175 301-803 Plug-in connector to DIN EN 175 301-803 With component plug to E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 Plug-in connector to E DIN 43 563-BF6-3/Pg11 IP65 with mounted and xed plug-in connector Integrated into the valve L/min (GPM) % % % ms ms bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 315 (4600) 50 (725) 200 (2900) 315 (4600) separate and unpressurized to tank max. 30 (7.9) 1.5 of maximum set pressure < 2 of maximum set pressure 3.5 of maximum set pressure approx. 80 approx. 50

depending on installation
Proportional Valves
345
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve pilot operated Model DBE6X

Pilot operated valves (pilot valves) for limiting system pressure (pilot oil internal only) Adjustable by means of the solenoid current, see Characteristic curve, Technical data and selected valve electronics Solenoid versions Imax = 0.8 A or Imax = 2.5 A Pressure limitation to a safe level even with faulty electronics (solenoid current I > Imax)
Model DBE6X
Ordering data DBE6

Proportional pressure relief valve NG6, pilot operated Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Max. pressure stage up to 80 bar (1160 PSI) up to 180 bar (2600 PSI) up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Voltage supply of trigger electronics 24 V DC =X = 1X Z4 = M=
X 1X /
G24
Z4
*
Further information in plain text NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Electrical connection Unit plug to DIN 43650-AM2 Plug-in connector included in scope of delivery Manual auxiliary override Solenoid type (current) Solenoid current 0.8 A max. Solenoid current 2.5 A max.
= 80 = 180 = 315 = G24 8= 25 =
N=
Proportional Valves
346
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction
Pilot stage Main stage
Actuation Connection type Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition
Poppet valve Spool valve Proportional solenoid without position control, external amplier Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 2.2 (4.85) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation Viscosity range, recommended mm2/s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 460) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +80 (4 to +176) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Class 18/16/13 1) Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow See symbol bar (PSI) 80 (1160) 180 (2600) 315 (4500) Max. set pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) bar (PSI) 7 (100) 8 (116) 10 (145) Minimum pressure (at Qmin = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Max. mechanical pressure limitation level, e.g. bar (PSI) < 90 (1300) < 190 (2750) < 325 (4700) when solenoid current I Imax Max. working pressure bar (PSI) Port P: 315 (4500) Max. pressure bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3625) Pilot oil ow l/min (GPM) approx. 0.6 (0.16) Max. ow l/min (GPM) 40 (10.57) Electrical Cyclic duration factor Degree of protection Solenoid connection Valve with solenoid type Max. solenoid current Coil resistance R20 Max. power consumption at 100 % load and operating temperature Static/Dynamic 2) Hysteresis Range of inversion Manufacturing tolerance for pmax Response time 100 % signal change
1)
% 100 IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Unit plug DIN 43650/ISO 4400, M16 x 1.5 (2P+PE) 0.8 A 2.5 A 0.8 A 2.5 A Imax 22 3 VA 25 30
% % % ms
4 3 10 On 200 / Off 250
The purity classes stated for the components must be complied with in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents problems and also extends the service life of components. For a selection of lters, see catalog sheets RE 50070, RE 50076 and RE 50081. 2) All characteristic values ascertained using amplifier 0 811 405 079 for the 2.5 A solenoid and 0 811 405 081 for the 0.8 A solenoid.
Proportional Valves
347
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve, pilot operated, with on-board electronics (OBE) and position feedback Model DBEBE6X
Pilot operated valves with position feedback and on-board electronics for limiting system pressure (pilot oil internal only) Adjustable through the position of the armature against the compression spring Position-controlled, minimal hysteresis <1%, rapid response times, see Technical Data Pressure limitation to a safe level even with faulty electronics (solenoid current I > Imax) Model DBEBE6X
Ordering data DBETB

Proportional pressure relief valve with inductive position transducer on the cone With on-board electronics Nominal size Mounting hole configuration to ISO 440103-02-0-94 Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Max. pressure stage up to 80 bar (1160 PSI) up to 180 bar (2600 PSI) up to 315 bar (4500 PSI) Voltage supply of trigger electronics 24 V DC =E =6 =X = 1X A1 = F1 = K31 =
X 1X /
G24
K31
*
M=
Interface for trigger electronics Setpoint input 0...+10 V Setpoint input 4...20 mA Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately
= 80 = 180 = 315 = G24
Proportional Valves
348
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range
2
Poppet valve Spool valve Proportional solenoid with position control and OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 3.4 (7.49) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
oil
= 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation mm /s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 450) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3600) C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 80 (1160) 7 (100) < 90 (1300) 180 (2600) 8 (116) < 190 (2800) 315 (4500) 10 (145) < 325 (4700)
Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow Max. set pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Minimum pressure (at Q = 1 l/min [0.26 GPM]) Max. mechanical pressure limitation level, e. g. when solenoid current I Imax Max. working pressure Max. pressure Pilot oil ow Max. ow Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance Response time Thermal drift Conformity
1)
bar (PSI) Port P: 315 (4500) bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3625) l/min (GPM) approx. 0.6 (0.16) l/min (GPM) 40 (10.57) % 1 % 5 ms 70 ms 15 < 1 % at T = 40 C EN 61000-6-2: 2002-08 EN 61000-6-3: 2002-08 Response time at: Q = 10 l/min (values depend on the dead volume) 100 % signal change 10 % signal change
Proportional Valves
349
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure relief valve Model DBE

Sizes 10, 25 Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 350 bar (5075 PSI) Maximum ow 400 L/min (106 GPM)
Pilot operated valve for limiting a system pressure Operation via proportional solenoids For subplate mounting: Porting patterm to DIN 24 340, Form E See data sheet RE 45064 Optional maximum pressure limitation function via spring loaded pilot control valve External control electronics for tyes DBE and DBEM: Analog amplier model VT-VSPA1-1 in Eurocard format Amplier model VT 11131 of modular design
Model DBEME 10-5X/... with integrated electronics Integrated control electronics for models DBEE and DBEME: Low example spread of the command value-pressurecharacteristic curve Independently adjustable ramp time for pressure increase and pressure decrease
Ordering code DBE

Without Maximum pressure protection With Maximum pressure protection For external electronic control With integral electronic control Size 10 NFPA/ANSI R06 Size 25 NFPA/ANSI R08 Series 50 to59 (50 to 59, externally interchangeable) Pressure range up to 725 PSI up to 1450 PSI up to 2900 PSI up to 4600 PSI External drain 24 V DC = no code =M = no code =E = 10 = 20 = 5X K31 = = 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 =Y = G24 K4 = M=
5X
G24
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals suitable for mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524 Electrical connections for DBE; DBEM: Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175 301-803 Plug-in connector (separate order) Without plug-in connector, with component plug to E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 Plug-in connector (separate order)
1)
Note: pushing the manual override may result in uncontrolled motions of the machinery.
Proportional Valves
350
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight DBE and DBEM DBEE and DBEME Installation position kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) optional
Size 10 3.4 (7.5) 3.5 (7.7)
Size 25 3.8 (8.3) 3.9 (8.6)
Hydraulic, measured with HLP 46; and voil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Operating pressure Ports A, B and X bar (PSI) 350 (5075) Port Y Separaate and at zero proessure to tank Max. settable pressure pressure stage 50 bar bar (PSI) 50 (725) pressure range 100 bar bar (PSI) 100 (1600) pressure range 200 bar bar (PSI) 200 (2900) pressure range 315 bar bar (PSI) 315 (4600) Max. pressure safety (innitely adjustable Adjustment range: Setting as supplied: pressure stage 50 bar bar (PSI) 30 to 70 (435 to 1015) up to 70 (1015) pressure range 100 bar bar (PSI) 50 to 130 (725 to 1885) up to 130 (1885) pressure range 200 bar bar (PSI) 90 to 230 (1305 to 3335) up to 230 (3335) pressure range 315 bar bar (PSI) 150 to 350 (2175 to 5075) up to 350 (5075) Max. ow L/min (GPM) 200 (53) 400 (106) Hysteresis (see ideal value pressure curve) % 1.5% of max. preset pressure Repeatability % < 2% of max. preset pressure Linearity 3.5% of max. preset pressure Example spread of the com. DBE and DBEM % 2.5% of max. preset pressure value-pressure-characteristic DBEE and DBEME % 1.5% of max. preset pressure curve, referring to the hysteresis char. curve pressure increasing depending on volumetric ow 0 100% ms 150 Step function response Tu + Tg on line volume (A) of the system 100% 0 ms 150 Electrical Supply voltage Min. control current Max. control current Coil resistance Duty Electrical connections 24 V DC 100 1600 1440 to 1760 5.4 7.8 100 With component plug to DIN EN 175 301-803 Plug-in connector to DIN 175 301-803 With component plug to E DIN 43 563-AM6-3 Plug-in connector to E DIN 43 6=563-BF6-3/Pg11 IP65 with mounted and xed plug-in connctor Integrated into the valve VT-VSPA1-1 (see data sheet RE 30111) VT 11131 (see data shet RE 29865)
DBE and DBEM DBEE and DBEME cold at 20 C (68 F) max. warm value DBE and DBEM DBEE and DBEME
mA mA mA %
Valve protection to DIN 40 050 Control electronics For DBEE and DBEME For DBE and DBEM (separate order) Amplier in Eurocard format Analog Amplier of modular design Analog
Proportional Valves
351
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure reducing valve, 3-way design Model 3DREP 6 and 3DREPE 6
Direct actuated proportional valve for the control of pressure and direction of ow Actuated via proportional solenoids with central thread and removable coil For subplate mounting: porting pattern DIN 24 340 part 2 form A, ISO 4401 and CETOP-RP121H, NFPA T3.5.1 M R1 and ANSI B93.7 P 03 (D 03) Subplates, see datasheet RA 45 052 Manual override, optional
Model 3DREPE 6 .2X/E Spring centered control spool External control electronics for model 3DREP: Electrical amplier model VT 11118 of modular design (separate order) Analog amplier VT-VSPA2-1-2X/ in Eurocard format
Ordering code 3DREP

= No code =E =6 M= V=
For external control electronics With integrated control electronics Nominal size 6 Symbols (simplied)
A
2X /
E G24
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals FPM seals,
No code = For 3DREP A1 = Command value input 10 V =A

b
P B a T B a T P
Electrical connections For 3DREP K4 = Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175 301-803 Plug-in connector (separate order) K31 = For 3DREPE Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175 201-804 Plug-in connector (separate order) without special protection with protected manual override Supply voltage for the control electronics 24 V DC proportional solenoid with removable coil
=B
P A b P T
=C N9 = G24 = = 25 E=
No code =
Series 20 to 29 = 2X (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Pressure stage 25 bar (362.6 PSI)
Proportional Valves
352
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Valve model Installation Weight Hydraulic Operating pressure range Port P Port T Max. ow Hysteresis Repeatibility accuracy Response sensitivity Reversal span Electrical, solenoid Valve model Voltage model Signal model Command value signal Max. current per solenoid Solenoid coil resistance Cold value at 20 C (68 F) Max. warm value Duty Electrical, control electronics Integrated, control electronics for model 3DREPE Supply voltage Nominal voltage Lower limiting value Upper limiting value Amplier current consumption Imax Impulse current VDC V V A A Integrated into the valve 24 19 35 1.8 4 Voltage input "A1" V A % 100 DC Analog 1.5 4.8 7.2 10 2.5 2 3 3DREP 3DREPE bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) % % % % 435 to 1450 for pressure stage 25 0 to 435 15 (4.0) (p = 50 bar [725 PSI]) 5 1 0.5 1 kg (lbs.) 3DREP optional, preferrably horizontal 2.0 (4.4) 2.2 (4.9) 3DREPE
External, control electonics for model 3DREP Anaolgo amplier in Eurocard format Amplier of modular design with 1 ramp time with 5 ramp times VT-VSPA2-1-2X/V0/T1, see data sheet RE 30110 VT-VSPA2-1-2X/V0/T5, see data sheet RE 30110 VT 11118-1X/, see data sheet RE 30218
Proportional Valves
353
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure reducing valve, pilot operated, with on-board electronics (OBE) and position feedback Model DREBE6X
Pilot operated valves with position feedback and on-board electronics for reducing system pressure in the consumer (pilot oil internal only) 3-way version (PA/AT), pmin = pT Adjustable through the position of the armature against the compression spring Position-controlled, minimal hysteresis < 1 %, rapid response times, see Technical data Pressure limitation to a safe level even with faulty electronics (solenoid current I > Imax) Model DREBE6X
Ordering data DBEB

Proportional 3-way pressure reducing valve with inductive position transducer, pilot operated With on-board electronics Nominal size Mounting hole configuration to ISO 4401-03-02-0-94 Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged) Max. pressure stage up to 75 bar (1100 PSI) up to 175 bar (2500 PSI) up to 310 bar (4500 PSI) Without non-return valve Voltage supply of trigger electronics 24 V DC =E =6 =X = 1X K31 = A1 = F1 =
X 1X /
G24
K31
*
M=
Interface for trigger electronics Setpoint input 0...+10 V Setpoint input 4...20 mA Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately
= 75 = 175 = 310 =M = G24
Proportional Valves
354
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Construction Actuation Connection type Mounting position Ambient temperature range Weight Vibration resistance, test condition Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, Pressure uid Viscosity range recommended max. permitted Pressure uid temperature range Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow Max. set pressure in A (at Qmin = 1 l/min) Minimum pressure in A Min. inlet pressure in P Max. working pressure Max. pressure Internal pilot oil ow Max. ow Static/Dynamic Hysteresis Manufacturing tolerance Response time Thermal drift Conformity
1)
Poppet valve Spool valve Proportional solenoid with position control and OBE Subplate, mounting hole conguration NG6 (ISO 4401-03-02-0-94) Optional C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) kg (lbs.) 3.3 (7.27) Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h)
oil
= 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation mm2/s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 450) mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Class 18/16/13 1) See symbol bar (PSI) 75 (1100) 175 (2500) 310 (4500) bar (PSI) 0 (relative) or pressure in T bar (PSI) pP = pA + 5 bar (PSI) Port P: 315 (4500) bar (PSI) Port T: 250 (3600) B sealed l/min (GPM) approx. 0.6 (0.16) with closed-loop control l/min (GPM) 40 (10.57) % 1 % 5 ms 50 ms 20 < 1 % at T = 40 C EN 61000-6-2: 2002-08 EN 61000-6-3: 2002-08
100 % signal change 10 % signal change
Proportional Valves
355
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional pressure reducing valve Model DRE, DREM

Sizes 10, 25 Series 5X Maximum operating pressure 315 bar (4600 PSI) Maximum ow 300 L/min (80 GPM)
Valve used for reducing a working pressure Proportional solenoid operation For subplate mounting: Porting pattern to DIN 24 340 form D Subplates, see datasheet RE 45 062 (separate order) Third ow path A to Y, 6 mm (0.24 in.) diameter Lowest settable pressure 2 bar (29 PSI) at zero command value Linearized command value-pressure-characteristic curve Main spool closed from B to A in the de-energized position Excellent transient response Optional check valve between A and B Maximum pressure limitation, optional Valve and electronics from one source Controls for mode DRE: Analog amplier model VT-VSPA1(K)-1 in Eurocard format (separate order)
Model DREME 20 -5X/Y with integrated electronics Analog amplier for model VT 11724 of modular design (separate order) Model DREE with integrated electronics Low example spread for the command value-pressurecharacteristic curve Independently adjustable ramp times for increasing and decreasing the pressure
Ordering code DRE

Without maximum pressure limitation With maximum pressure limitation = no code =M = no code =E = 10 = 20 = 5X K4 = M=
5X
G24
*
Further details to be written in clear text NBR seals, suitable for use with mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524
For external electronics with integrated electronics Nominal size 10 Nominal size 25
Series 50 to 59 (50 to 59: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Pressure rating: 50 bar (728 PSI) 100 bar (1450 PSI) 200 bar (2900 PSI) 315 bar (4600 PSI)
= 50 = 100 = 200 = 315 =Y = no code =M = G24
Electrical connections for DRE, DREM: Without plug-in connector, with component plug to DIN EN 175 301 plug-in connector (separate order) For DREE, DREME: Without plug-in connector with component plug to DIN EN 175 301-803 plug-in connector (separate order) without manual override with manual override
K31 =
Pilot oil drain always external, separate and at zero pressure to the tank With check valve between A and B Without check valve Power supply for the control electronics 24 V DC
no code = N=
Proportional Valves
356
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight Mounting position DRE and DREM DREE and DREEM kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) optional Size 10 5.1 (11.2) 5.2 (11.5) Size 25 6.0 (13.2) 6.1 (13.4)
Hydraulic, measured with HLP 46; and voil = 40 C (104 F) 5 C (41 F) and p = 100 bar (1450 PSI) Maximum operating pressure: Maximum adjustable pressure in port A ports A and B port Y Pressure stage 50 bar Pressure stage 100 bar Pressure stage 200 bar Pressure stage 315 bar Maximum pressure protection valve Pressure stage 50 bar Pressure stage 100 bar Pressure stage 200 bar Pressure stage 315 bar Max. permissible ow of the main valve Linearity Repeatability Hysteresis Example spread of the com. DRE and DREM value-pressure-characteristic DREE and DREME curve, referring to the hysteresis char. curve, pressure increasing Step response Tu + Tg Electrical Type of supply Minimum pilot current Maximum current Coil resistance Duty cycle Control electronics For DREE and DREME For DRE and DREM (separate order) Amplier in Eurocard format Analog Amplier of modular design Analog DRE and DREM DREE and DREME DRE and DREM DREE and DREME Cold value at 20 C (68 F) Max. warm value mA mA mA mA 24 V DC 50 100 800 (= 100% command value) 1440 to 1760 19.5 for DRE / DREM 28.8 for DRE / DREM Continuous Integrated in the valve VT-VSPA1(K)-1, see data sheet RE 30111 VT 11724, see data sheet RE 29866 5.4 for DREE / DREME 7.8 for DREE / DREME 10 90% 90 10% bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) L/min (GPM) % % % % % ms ms bar (PSI) 315 (4600) Separately connected, pressureless to tank (Inside pipe 5 mm (0.20 in.); pipe length <2500 mm [8.2 ft]) 50 (725) 100 (1450) 200 (2900) 315 (4600) Pressure adjustment range: 30 to 70 (435 to 1015) 50 to 130 (725 to 1885) 90 to 230 (1305 to 3335) 150 to 350 (2175 to 5075) 200 (53) 2.5 of maximum settable pressure < 2 of maximum settable pressure max. 2 of maximum settable pressure 2.5 of max. settable pressure 1.5 max. settable pressure 130 120 measured with standing oil column of 15L/min (4 GPM) at port A Factory set: to 70 (1015) to 130 (1885) to 230 (3335) to 350 (5075) 300 (80)
Proportional Valves
357
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Proportional cartridge throttle valve, with on-baord electronics (OBE) and inductive position transducer, pilot operated Model FESXE
Sizes 16, 25, 32, 40, 50 Series 1X Max. working pressure A, B, X 315 bar (4600 PSI) Y 100 bar (1450 PSI) Maximum ow 300 L/min (80 GPM)
Model FESXE
Ordering code FESX

Proportional throttle valve with inductive position transducer (pilot operated) With on-board electronics Nominal size Mounting hole configuration DIN 24342, ISO/DIS 7368 =E = 16 = 25 = 32 = 40 = 50 =C =A = 1X B1 =
A 1X /
K0 B1 M
*
Further information in plain text M= NBR seals, suitable for mineral oils (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 Interface for trigger electronics Setpoint input 0.5...+10 V Electrical connection without plug-in connector, with unit plug to DIN 43563-AM6 Order plug-in connector separately Flow characteristic Linear Nominal flow rate Qnom in l/min p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI)
K0 =
Connection type (cartridge) Direction of flow A B (customer may implement B A) Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: installation and connection dimensions unchanged)
L= 125 = 210 = 320 = 500 = 980 =
Proportional Valves
358
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Cartridge type throttle valve, spool valve with closed-loop position control via OBE Pilot operated, proportional 3/2-way directional control valve in valve cover, without position control Main stage Position control via OBE and position transducer LVDT DC/DC Connection type Cartridge type, mounting hole conguration to DIN 24342, ISO/DIS 7368 Mounting position Horizontal if possible, or posion transducer at the bottom Ambient temperature range C (F) 20 to +50 (4 to +122) Vibration resistance, test condition Max. 25 g, shaken in 3 dimensions (24 h) Hydraulic measured with HLP 46, oil = 40 C 5 C (104 F 41 F) Pressure uid Hydraulic oil to DIN 51524...535, other uids after prior consultation Viscosity range recommended mm2/s (SUS) 20 to 100 (90 to 460) max. permitted mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (45 to 3700) Pressure uid temperature range C (F) 20 to +70 (4 to +158) Class 18/16/13 1) Maximum permitted degree of contamination of pressure uid Purity class to ISO 4406 (c) Direction of ow A B or B A (when X supplied internally, or externally when pressure higher) Nominal ow rate at NG16 NG25 NG32 NG40 NG50 p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) per edge 2) l/min (GPM) 125 (33.02) 210 (55.48) 320 (84.54) 500 (132.09) 980 (258.89) Weight kg (lbs.) 3.5 (7.71) 4.6 (10.14) 5.8 (12.78) 7.9 (17.41) 10.5 (23.14) Max. working pressure in A, B, X bar (PSI) 315 (4600) 315 (4600) 315 (4600) 315 (4600) 315 (4600) Max. working pressure in Y bar (PSI) 100 (1450) 100 (1450) 100 (1450) 100 (1450) 100 (1450) l/min (GPM) 350 (92.46) 600 (158.50) 1000 (264.17) 1500 (396.26) 3000 (792.52) Qmax QN pilot valve (supply) l/min (GPM) 5 (1.32) 15 (3.96) 15 (3.96) 28 (7.40) 28 (7.40) p = 5 bar (72.5 PSI) 3 < 150 < 200 < 200 < 400 < 400 Leakage X Y cm /min (in3/min) (9.15) (12.20) (12.20) (24.41) (24.41) Pilot valve at 100 bar (1450 PSI) cm3/min 2000 2000 3000 3000 4000 Min. ow rate at UE = 0 V adjustable (122.04) (122.04) (183.06) (183.06) (244.08) (in3/min) Valve active (p = 5 bar [72.5 PSI]) A B = tight (poppet valve) Leakage in main stage at p =100 bar B A = tight (poppet valve) Note: min. leakage X B possible when X = external (valve shut down electrically) Minimum supply pressure A B bar (PSI) 12 (174) 12 (174) 12 (174) 12 (174) 12 (174) Minimum supply pressure B A bar (PSI) 20 (290) 20 (290) 20 (290) 20 (290) 20 (290) Static/Dynamic Spool stroke/characteristic curve + mm (in.) 4 (0.16) 5 (0.20) 7 (0.28) 10 (0.39) 12.5 (0.49) Overlap on shutdown mm (in.) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) 3 (0.12) Control oil volume of main stage 100 % cm3 (in3) 1.02 (0.06) 2.66 (0.16) 6.36 (0.39) 12.57 (0.77) 24.54 (1.50) Required control oil 0...100 %, l/min (GPM) 3 (0.79) 5 (1.32) 7 (1.85) 9 (2.38) 9 (2.38) x = 100 bar (1450 PSI) Hysteresis % < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.2 < 0.2 Positioning accuracy % < 0.5 < 0.5 < 0.5 < 0.5 < 0.5 % 5 Manufacturing tolerance (Qmax) Response time (x = 100 bar) ms Signal change 0...100 % open < 70 < 70 < 90 < 90 < 110 Signal change 100... 0 % close < 70 < 70 < 90 < 130 < 300 Signal change 0... 10 % open < 50 < 50 < 70 < 70 < 80 Signal change 10... 0 % close < 40 < 40 < 50 < 70 < 100 After electrical shutdown (pilot valve opens X to the main stage), Switch-off behavior UB = OFF or UDE 0.3 V main stage moves to closed end position Thermal drift < 1 % at T = 40 C (104 F) Calibration At the factory 1 %, when UDE = 0.5 V, see characteristic curves General Construction Actuation
Proportional Valves
359
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Electrical, trigger electronics integrated in valve Cyclic duration factor % Degree of protection Connection Supply voltage Terminal A: Terminal B: 0 V Power consumption External fuse Input, standard version Terminal D: UDE Terminal E: Max. voltage to differential inputs over 0 V Test signal, standard version Terminal F: UTest Terminal C: Safety earth conductor and shield Recommended cable 100 IP 65 to DIN 40050 and IEC 14434/5 Plug-in connector 6P+PE, DIN 43563 24 V DCnom Min. 21 V DC/max. 40 V DC Ripple max. 2 V DC 40 VA max. 2.5 AF Differential amplier, Ri = 100 k 0...0.5...+10 V (see curve) 0V DB max. 18 V DC EB A1 LVDT 0...+10 V Reference 0 V See pin assignment (installation in conformity with CE) See pin assignment up to 20 m (65.6 ft.) 7 x 0.75 mm2 (0.0012 in2) up to 40 m (131.2 ft.) 7 x 1 mm2 (0.0016 in2) Calibrated at the factory, see valve curve
Calibration Conformity
1)
EN 61000-6-2: 2002-08 EN 61000-6-3: 2002-08
2)
Flow for other values of p QX = Qnom
5 bar (72.5 PSI)

pX
Supply 24V = Signal: 0+10 V (valve position) LVDT Signal: 0+/10 V
FESXE OBE
NG 16 50
Note: Rapid shutdown takes place if: The supply voltage 24 Vnom (UAB) drops below 18 V DC The signal setpoint drops below 0.3 V (see characteristic curve)
LVDT U +/10 V S
Mainstage coverplate 2/2 valve
Pilot- 3/2 stage
0 +10 V
Proportional Valves
360
Section 7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 8 Proportional Electronics
Valve Ampliers VT-VSPA1-508 (-525)................................................ 362 VT-SSPA1-508 (-525) ............................................... 362 VT-VRPA1-527 (-537) PV/QV.............................. 363 VT-VRPA1-527 (-537) RTP................................... 365 VT-VRPA1-527 (-537) RTP................................... 367 VT-VSPA1-1, for proportional pressure control valves ................................................................ 369 VT-VSPA1-2, for DBET-6X........................................ 371 VT-VSPA2-1-2X/, for 4WRA, 4WRZ ...................... 373 MDSD, for proportional solenoids without position feedback ........................................................ 375 VT-VRPA2, for 4WRE valves with position feedback (series 2X) ................................................... 377 VT-VRPA1-100, for DBETR ...................................... 379 VT 5035, for control of A4VSO or A4VSG with E01 and E02 controls........................................ 381 VT 5041, for control of SYDFE1 pumps ................ 383 VT-SR2, for control of 4WS2EM10 servo valve without position feedback ............................... 385 Analog Cards & Accessories VT-SWMA3-5 ............................................................... 387 VT-VARAP1-527 (-537) ............................................. 388 VT-VACAP-500 ............................................................ 390 VT-MACAS-500 ........................................................... 392 Digital Control Cards VT-HACD-1 closed loop controller ......................... 394 DMX, for control of position, pressure, and force ........................................................................ 397
Accessories VT-SWMA, analog command value module.......... 398 VT-SSV, plug-in switching amplier ........................ 400 CH, cardholder for ampliers in Euro Card format ............................................... 401, 402 Card Connector ........................................................... 403 VT3002-2X, cardholder for ampliers in Euro Card format (32 pin) ......................................... 404 Power Supplies, regulated supplies for use with amplier cards ..................................................... 405 VT Patch Cord, test leads for use on VT cards ......................................................................... 406 MESAP, test adaptor for measuring current and voltage on solenoids ........................................... 407 VT-VETSY, test unit for valves with integrated electronics ................................................. 408 GSC 1, Generator speed controller ....................... 410
361
361
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from Catalog AKY 013/1

Amplier cards
The following amplier cards convert voltage or current commands into the appropriate current signals to operate the associated hydraulic valve. Available card functionality: ramps, set points, failing outputs, etc. Amplier cards come in three forms: Euro-card (requires card holder) DIN module (mounted on standard DIN rail) Active plugs (mounts directly on the solenoid)
Technical data
Description Ramp with ramp Model VT-SSPA1-525-20/V0 (AS 2.5 - V) VT-SSPA1-525-20/V0/I (AS 2.5 - mA) VT-SSPA1-508-20/V0 (AS 0.8 - V) VT-SSPA1-508-20/V0/I (AS 0.8 - mA) VT-VSPA1-508-10/V0/RTP (1 M 45 - 0.8 A) VT-VSPA1-525-10/V0/RTP (1 M 45 - 2.5 A) Material Number 0811405143 0811405145 0811405144 0811405162 0811405081 0811405079
with ramp with ramp with ramp

1)
See catalog #AKY 13/1 1 987 761 317 for complete description and performance specications.
Proportional Electronics
362
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electric ampliers Model VT-VRPA1 (PV/QV)

Series 1X
Analog ampliers in Eurocard format for installation in 19 rack Output stage with closed-loop control Closed-loop position control with PID action Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times Enabling input Short-circuit-proof outputs Open-circuit detection for feedback signal cable (partially) Zero and sensitivity adjustment possibilities Material numbers: 0811405095 0811405097 0811405099
VT-VRPA1
Ordering code
VT
Hydraulic component For valves with electrical feedback Valve type 4/2 servo solenoid valves with positive overlap Actuation Analog Output stages 1 output stage
/
PV = QV = V0 = Option Pressure valves Throttle/ow control valves Customer version Catalog version Series Series 10 to 19 Serial numbers for types 2.7 A solenoid 3.7 A solenoid
=R
=P 1X = =A =1 527 = 537 =
363
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
P.C.B. format Plug connector Power supply VB to b 16/b 18 and b 2/b 4 (0 V) Smoothing capacitor, separately to b 28/b 30 b 2/b 4 Solenoid Power consumption Current rating Solenoid output b6b8 Setpoint (100 x 160 x approx. 35) mm (W x L x H) Europe format with front panel (7 modular spacings) Connector DIN 41612 F 32 24 V DC Battery voltage 2140 V, Rectied AC voltage Veff = 2128 V (single-phase, full-wave rectication) 4700 F, 63 V (ELKO) if ripple >10 % 2.7 A/25 W max. 35 W max. 1.5 A 3.7 A/50 W max. 60 W max. 2.5 A
Square-wave voltage, pulse-modulated Imax. = 3.7 A Imax. = 2.7 A VE III : 0 +10 V UE III : 0 V VE III : 0 +10 V VE III : 0 +10 V (z 10) (z 12)
Differential input
Signal source (setpoint) Actual value feedback 0811405095 0811405097 0811405099 Output stage enable Cable lengths and cross-sections
Potentiometer R = 1 k +10 V supply from b 32 (10 mA) or external source Oscill. b 26 10.2 Veff / 7.8 kHz 10.8 Veff / 7.8 kHz 10.8 Veff / 7.8 kHz Test pt. z 28 * 0 +10 V DC 0 +10 V DC 0 +10 V DC
To z 16, V = 8.5 40 V; e.g. 10 V from z 32 LED (green) on front panel lights up < 20 m 1.5 mm2 20 50 m 2.5 mm2 Position transducer: max. 50 m at 100 pF/m Supply and capacitor 1.5 mm2 Solenoid: green: Enable yellow: Feedback signal open circuit red: VB < VB min. (approx. 21 V) z 26: Switching output No fault +24 V (max. 100 mA) Fault 0 V Output stage to solenoid Signal to position sensor Potentiometer supply Open-circuit protection for feedback signal cable Closed-loop position control with PID action Clocked output stage Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times 1. Zero 2. Sensitivity
LED displays
Fault indication Feedback signal open circuit VB too low 15 V stabilization Short-circuit-proof outputs
Special features
Adjustment via trimming potentiometer
364
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electric ampliers Model VT-VRPA1 (PV-RTP)

Series 1X
Analog ampliers in Eurocard format for installation in 19 rack Output stage with closed-loop control Closed-loop position control with PID action Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times Enabling input Ramp can be adjusted and deactivated Open-circuit detection for feedback signal cable Short-circuit-proof outputs (partially) Adjustment possibilities for zero and sensitivity, acceleration and braking ramps Material numbers: 0811405100 0811405102
VT-VRPA1
Ordering code
VT
Hydraulic component For valves with electrical feedback Valve type 4/2 servo solenoid valves with positive overlap Actuation Analog Output stages 1 output stage
V
=R
1X / V00 /
RTP
Option Ramp, adjusted and deactivated by potentiometer Option Pressure valves Customer version Catalog version Series Series 10 to 19 Serial numbers for types 2.7 A solenoid 3.7 A solenoid
RTP =
=P PV = =A V0 = =1 1X = 527 = 537 =
365
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
P.C.B. format Plug connector Power supply VB to b 16/b 18 and b 2/b 4 (0 V) Smoothing capacitor, separately to b 28/b 30 b 2/b 4 Solenoid Power consumption Current rating Solenoid output b6b8 Setpoint (100 x 160 x approx. 35) mm (W x L x H) Europe format with front panel (7 modular spacings) Connector DIN 41612 F 32 24 V DC Battery voltage 2140 V, Rectied AC voltage Veff = 2128 V (single-phase, full-wave rectication) 4700 F, 63 V (ELKO) if ripple >10 % 2.7 A/25 W 3.7 A/50 W max. 35 W max. 60 W max. 1.5 A max. 2.5 A Square-wave voltage, pulse-modulated Imax. = 3.7 A Imax. = 2.7 A VE III : 0 +10 V (z 10) Differential input (z 12) } UE III : 0 V VE III : 0 +10 V VE III : 0 +10 V Potentiometer R = 1 k +10 V supply from b 32 (10 mA) or external source Oscill. b 26 Test pt. z 28 * 10.2 Veff / 7.8 kHz 0 +10 V DC 0 +10 V DC 10.8 Veff / 7.8 kHz To z 16, V = 8.5 40 V; e.g. 10 V from z 32 LED (green) on front panel lights up to b 20; V = 8.5 40 V Solenoid: < 20 m 1.5 mm2 20 50 m 2.5 mm2 Position transducer: max. 50 m at 100 pF/m Supply and capacitor 1.5 mm2 green: Enable yellow: Feedback signal open circuit yellow: Ramp OFF red: VB < VB min. (approx. 21 V) z 26: Switching output No fault +24 V (max. 100 mA) Fault 0 V Output stage to solenoid Signal to position sensor Potentiometer supply Open-circuit protection for feedback signal cable Closed-loop position control with PID action Clocked output stage Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times Ramp, can be adjusted and deactivated 1. Zero 2. Sensitivity 3. Acceleration ramp 4. Braking ramp 366 Section 8
Signal source (setpoint) Actual value feedback 0811405101 0811405102 Output stage enable Ramp OFF Cable lengths and cross-sections
LED displays
Fault indication Feedback signal open circuit VB too low 15 V stabilization Short-circuit-proof outputs
Special features
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electric ampliers Model VT-VRPA2

Series 1X
Suitable for actuating directly operated servo solenoid valves (type 4WRP, series 1X) Analog ampliers in Eurocard format for installation in 19 rack Ramp generator can be deactivated Deadband compensation Output stage with closed-loop control Enabling input Inputs and outputs (partially) short-circuit-proof External ramp deactivation Adjustment possibilities Valve zero Sensitivity Ramp times Open-circuit detection for feedback signal cable
Closed-loop position control with PID action Testing and service equipment Test box type VT-PE-TB1, see RE 30 063 Test adapter type VT-PA-3, see RE 30 070
Ordering code VT
Hydraulic component For valves with electricl feedback Valve type Servo solenoid valve Actuation Ananlog Output stage Two output stages per valve
V
=R
1X / V0 / RTP
RTP = Option Ramp function manually adjusts Customer version Catalog version Series Series 10 to 19 Serial numbers for types NG 6 NG 10
=P V0 = =A 1X = =2 527 = 537 =
Technical data
P.C.B. format Plug connector Ambient temperature Weight m Power supply UB to b 16/b 18 and b 2/b 4 (100 x 160 x approx. 35) mm (W x L x H) Europe format with front panel (7 modular spacings) DIN 41 612 F 32 0 C +70 C, storage temperature min. 20 C; max. +70 C 0.25 kg 24 V DC nominal, Battery voltage 2140 V, Rectied AC voltage Ueff = 2128 V (single-phase, full-wave rectication)
367
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Smoothing capacitor, separately to b 28/b 30 b 2/b 4 Valve solenoid A/VA max. Current rating 4,700 F/63 V DC, only required if UB ripple >10 % 2.7/25 (NG 6) 1.5 A 3.7/50 (NG 10) 2.5 A
The current rating can rise at min. UB and long cable length to control solenoid Power consumption (typical) Input signal (setpoint) Signal source Actual-value feedback 0811405119 0811405120 Output stage enable Ramp OFF Solenoid output 35 W 60 W 0 10 V supply from b 10, z 8, z 10, z 12, z 14/b 14 cumulative (Ri = 10 k ) Potentiometer 1 k , +10 V supply from b 32 (50 mA), 10 V from z 22 (50 mA) or external signal source Oscil. b 26 10.2 Veff / 7.8 kHz 10.2 Veff / 7.8 kHz Meas. tap z 28* 0 10 V DC 0 10 V DC
To z 16, U = 8.5 40 V, Ri = 100 k, LED (green) on front panel lights up To b 20, U = 8.5 40 V Output stage to solenoid Signal to position sensor Potentiometer power supply Solenoid cable: Position transducer: up to 20 m 20 to 50 m 1.5 mm2 2.5 mm2
Length of amplier to valve cables
max. 50 m at 100 pF/m Supply and capacitor 1.5 mm2
Special features
Open-circuit protection for feedback signal cable Closed-loop position control with PID action Clocked output stage Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times Ramps with quadrant recognition Deadband compensation in valve centre position Ramps can be deactivated 1. Zero NPA and NPB 2. Sensitivity QA and QB 3. Ramps for acceleration and deceleration t = 0.05 5 s Green: Enable ON Red: UB < UB min. (approx. 21 V) Yellow: Ramp OFF Yellow: Feedback signal open circuit z 22: Open collector output to +UK max. 100 mA; no fault: +UK
LED displays
Fault signal Feedback signal open circuit UB too low 15 V stabilization
Note: Connect power zero b 2 and control zero b 12 separately to central ground (neutral point). * Values for potentiometer in end position (cw) and for zero potentiometer in centre position.
368
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electrical ampliers for the control of proportional pressure control valves without electrical position feedback Models VT-VSPA1-1 and VT-VSPA1K-1
Series 1X
Suitable for controlling all direct and pilot operated proportional pressure control valves without electrical position feedback and only one solenoid as actuator that are available at the time of publication of this data sheet Differential input, can be switched between voltage and current input Additional command value input, 0 to + 9 V Ramp generator, can be adjusted separately for up and down Clocked output stage Messageready for operation (VT-VSPA1K-1 with LED indicator lamp only) Reverse polarity protection for voltage supply Cable break detection for current input 4 to 20 mA Short-circuit protection of solenoid cable Cable break detection for solenoid cable
Models VT-VSPA1-1-1 and VT-VSPA1K-1
Ordering code VT-VSPA1

Ampliers for controlled proportional pressure control valves, analog, with one solenoid With 32-pin male connector and front panel With 16-pin terminal strip; without front panel = No code =K
1 1X/ *
Further details to be written in clear text 1X = Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: Technical data and pin allocation unchanged) Substitutions for ampliers VT 2000 (up to series 4X), VT 2010, VT 2013 or VT 2023 installed in racks, blind plate 4TE/3HE must be ordered separately. Material no.: R900021004 or R978887127
369
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Operating range: Upper limiting value Lower limiting value Power requirement Current consumption Fuse Inputs Command value 1 Command value 2 (differential input) or or Ramp time (adjustment range) Outputs: Final output stage Solenoid current/resistance or Biasing current at Imax = 800 mA at Imax = 1600 mA additionally at Imax = 800 mA at Imax = 1600 mA Clock-pulse frequency Vo Vo (t)max Vo (t)min Ps I IF V V Ii Ii t 24 VDC + 40% 5% 35 V 22 V <2A <1.8 A 2.5 A T 0 to + 9 V (Reference potential is M0) 0 to + 10 V; Ri = 100 k depending on setting 4 to 20 mA (load Ri = 100 ) of S11 to 13 0 to 20 mA (load Ri = 100 ) 30 ms to approx. 1 s or 5 s (depending on setting of S14)
Imax Imax IV IV IV IV f
800 mA + 20 %; R(20) = 19.5 depending on setting using BR17 or S17 1) 1600 mA + 20 %; R(20) = 5.4 50 mA or 100 mA depending on setting with S17 and Zw (R130) 100 mA 0 to 300 mA + 20% adjustable with Zw (R130) on the printed board 0 to 600 mA + 20% 100 Hz, 200 Hz, 300 Hz or 370 Hz, 10 % each (depending on setting with S25 to S27) approx. Vo Load resistance > 10 k <1V ca. Vo; 50 mA 0 V; Ri = 10 k 9 V 1 %; 25 mA externally loadable 0 to + 6 V (+ 6 V 100% solenoide current); Ri = 1 k 0 to 1600 mV 0 to 1600 mA 20 mA 32-pin blade connector, DIN 41 612, form D 16-pin terminal strip Euro-card 100 x 160 (3.93 x 6.29), DIN 41 494 3 U, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 HP, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 3 HP 0 to 50 (0 to 122) 25 to 85 (13 to 185) 0.1
Signal ready for operation (with VT-VSPA-1 only) Series 10 when ready for operation V in the case of a fault V From Series 11 when ready for operation V in the case of fault V Regulated voltage V Measuring sockets Command value w V Actual current value I V Type of connection VT-VSPA1-1 VT-VSPA1K-1 Card dimensions mm (in.) Front plate dimensions: Height Width soldering side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range C (F) Storage temperature range C (F) Weight kg (lbs.)
1)
The maximum current Imax can be adjusted to the required value with the help of the command value attenuator (porentiometer Gw).
370
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electrical ampliers Models VT-VSPA1-2 and VT-VSPA1K-2

Series 1X
Suitable for controlling pressure valves type DBET, series 6X or as universal amplier (see technical data) Differential input (0 to +10V) Current input (4 to 20mA) 4 command value call-ups (with option A4 only) Ramp generator, with separately adjustable up/down ramp time External ramp time preselection Enable input Clocked current output stage Signal ready for operation Reverse polarity protection of the supply voltage Short-circuit protection of the solenoid cable Solenoid cable break detection
VT-VSPA1-2 and VT-VSPA1K-2
Ordering code VT-VSPA1

Amplier for controlled proportional pressure valves, analog, with one solenoid With 48-pin male connector and front pane With 16 or 24-pin terminal strip without front panel = No code =K = 1X V0 =
2 1X / V0 / 0 / *
Further details in clear text (additional functions on enquiry) Standard option 0= A4 = Variant with 4 command value call-ups Basic version
Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged technical data and pin assignment)
371
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Operating range: Upper limit value Lower limit value Power consumption Current consumption Fuse Inputs: Analog Command values 1 to 4 (potentiometer inputs) * Differential input Current input External ramp time Digital Command value call-ups * Ramp call-ups Ramp ON/OFF Enable * provided only for option A4 Clock-pulse frequency: Adjustment ranges: Zero balancing (potentiometer Zw) Command values (potentiometers w1 to w4) Ramp times (potentiometers t< and t>) Amplitude attenuator (potentiometer Gw) Frequency adjustment with potentiometer (J7 activated) Outputs Command value signal Actual value signal Ready for operation Output command value reached on enquiry Regulated voltage Ramp signal measuring socket Current output stage Type of connection: VT-VSPA1-2 VT-VSPA1K-2 Card dimensions: Front panel dimensions (refers to VT-VSPA1-2) Height Width soldering side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range Storage temperature range Weight VO VO(t)max VO(t)min PS I IF 24VDC +40% -20% 35VDC 18VDC <24VA <2A 2A M, can be replaced
Vi Vi Ii Vi V V V V V V V V f
0 to +10V; Ri > 100k 0 to +10V; Ri > 50k 4 to 20mA; load RB = 100 0 to +5V; Ri > 10k 8.5V to UB > call-up activated; Ri > 100k 0V to 6.5V > no call-up; Ri > 100k 8.5V to UB > call-up activated; Ri > 100k 0V to 6.5V > no call-up; Ri > 100k 8.5V to UB > ramp ON; Ri > 100k 0V to 6.5V > ramp OFF; Ri > 100k 8.5V to UO > ON; Ri > 100k 0 to 6.5V > OFF; Ri > 100k 250 Hz 10% with J6 and J7 = open 30% 0 to +100% 20ms to 5s; can be changed over to 0.2s to 50s 0 to +120% see explanation: Clock-pulse generator
V V V V V V I
0 to +10V 2%; Imax = 2mA 0 to +10V 2%; Imax = 2mA >16V; Imax = 50mA (in the event of a fault: U < 1V; Ri = 10k) >16V; Imax = 50mA (when command value reached) (when command value not reached: U<1V; Ri =10k) +10V 2%; Imax = 25mA; short-circuit-proof +100mV to +5V 10%; +10mV to +100mV 50% 0 to 1.9A; short-circuit-proof; clocked 48-pin male connector; DIN 41612; form F 16- or 24-pin terminal strip Euro-card 100 x 160 mm (3.93 x 6.29 in.); DIN 41494 3HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1TE, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 3TE, 15.24 mm (0.6 in.) 0 to 50 (0 to 122) 25 to 85 (13 to 185) 0.15 (0.33) net
C (F) C (F) kg (lbs.)
372
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Analog amplier card Model VT-VSPA2-1-2X/

Series 2X
Suitable for controlling valve types 4WRA sizes 6 and 10, series 2X and 4WRZ series 7X Built-up in the form of a board in the Euro-format Command value inputs: Differential input 10 V Four command value inputs, 10 V that can be called up Current input 4 to 20 mA Inverting the internal command value signal via the 24V input or jumper Selecting the ramp time via quadrantal recognition (24V input) or ramp time call-ups (24V inputs) (option T5) Switching over the ramp time range via jumpers Characteristic curve correction by separately adjustable jump heights and maximum values Enable input Ramp on/off input
VT-VSPA2-1-2X/
Output signal operational Switchable measuring socket (option T5) Polarity protection for the supply voltage Power supply with DC/DC convertor without a raised zero point
Ordering code VT-VSPA2 1 2X / V0 /

Analog amplier in Eurocard format For controlling valve types: 4WRA 62X; 4WRA 102X; 4WRZ-7X =1 = 2X V0 =
/ *
T1 = T5 = With one ramp time With ve ramp times Basic version
Series 20 to 29: (20 to 29 unchanged technical data and connection allocation)
Technical data
Operating voltage Functional range: Upper limiting value Lower limiting value Power consumption Current consumption Fuse VB VB (t)max VB (t)min PS I IS 24 VDC + 40% 20% 35 V 18 V < 50 VA < 2A 2 A M, replacable continued on next page
373
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Inputs: Analog Com. value 1 to 4 (potentiometer inputs) Com. value 5 (differential input) Com. value 6 (current input) External ramp time Digital Command value call-ups Ramp call-up Quadrant recognision Command value inversion Enable Ramp Setting ranges Zero compensation (potentiometer Zw) Command value (potentiometers w1 to w4) Ramp times (potentiometers t1 to t5) Jump height (potentiometers S+ and S) Amplitude attenuation (potentiometers G+ and G) Outputs Command value signal Actual value signal Measuring point signal (option 5) Operational Controlled voltages Current output stage Measurement sockets Command value signal Actual value signal Clock frequency WRA6 WRA10 WRZ Connection type Card dimensions Front plate dimensions Height Width soldered side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range Storage temmperature range Weight Proportional Electronics
Ve Ve Ie Ve V V V V V V V V V V V V
0 to 10 V; Re > 100 k (ref. is M0) 0 to 10 V; Re > 50 k 4 to 20 mA; load RB = 100 0 to + 10 V; Re = 10 k (raised internally to +15 V; ref. is M0) 8.5 V to VB > call-up actuated; Re > 100 k 0 to 6.5 V > no call-up; Re > 100 k 8.5 V to VB > call-up actuated; Re > 100 k 0 to 6.5 V > no call-up; Re > 100 k 8.5 V to VB > ON; Re > 100 k 0 to 6.5 V > OFF; Re > 100 k 8.5 V to VB > ON; Re > 100 k 0 to 6.5 V > OFF; Re > 100 k 8.5 V to VB > ON; Re > 100 k 0 to 6.5 V > OFF; Re > 100 k 8.5 V to VB > ON; Re > 100 k 0 to 6.5 V > OFF; Re > 100 k 30% 0% to 110% 20 ms to 5 s; switchable 0.2 to 50 s 0% to 50% 0% to 110% (valid when setting the jump height from 0%)
V V V V V I
10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA 2.5 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA (mV mA) 10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA > 16 V; 50 mA (with a fault: U < 1 V; Ri = 10 k) 10 V 2 %; 25 mA; short circuit-proof 0 to 2.5 A; short circuit-proof; clocked approx. 5 kHz 10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA 2.5 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA (mV mA) 300370 Hz (at 24 V VB and 0 V Vcom. = 370 Hz) 180410 Hz (at 24 V VB and 0 V Vcom. = 410 Hz) 170 Hz 48-pin blade connector, DIN 41 612, form F Eurocard 100 x 160 mm (3.93 x 6.29 in.) 3 HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 TE, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 3TE 0 to 50 (32 to 122) 25 to 85 (13 to 185) 0.17 (0.38) net Section 8
f f f
374
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Mobile dual solenoid driver Model MDSD

Series 2X
Wide supply voltage range: 1028 VDC On board, replaceable fuse Reverse voltage protection Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) outputs PWM frequency adjustable from 75275 Hz Max. and min. current separately adjustable for both solenoids High current driver, regulated to within 1.0%, continuous operation Innite duration short circuit protection on both outputs Reference voltage provided for control via an external potentiometer (>1K Ohm) Differential inputs for external voltage sources (2.5 or 5.0 VDC) Neutral position deadband for joysticks Ramp time 0.2 to 10.0 sec., separately adjustable for both solenoids (A = up/down; B = up/down) All adjustments are made via multi-turn potentiometers EMI/RFI resistant Rugged, environmental packaging Temperature range: 25 to 80 C (13 to 176 F)
MDSD Mobile Dual Solenoid Driver
Ordering code MDSD

Mobile Dual Solenoid Driver Electrical deadband +/ 10% neutral deadband, for joysticks No deadband (*for other applications) Connector Flat tabs (standard) Screw terminals Design series Series 20 to 29 * Minimum pots P5, P6 can be adjusted to eliminate spool overlap on MDSD 1 cards. = No code =1 No code = = No code =K = 20 to 29
1= 2= 3= 4= 0=
2X
*
Further details to be written in clear text 0= 1, 2, 3, 4 = Adjustment option for MDSD-2X/ All other models See preset adjustment table Ramp time 0.2 10 sec. Ramp type A/B solenoid ramp
No code = Preset Adjustments

P1, P2 2 sec. 2 sec. 2 sec. 2 sec. P5, P6 P3, P4 700 mA 1800 mA 400 mA 1200 mA 300 mA 800 mA 200 mA 600 mA don't care
P7 180 Hz 100 Hz 180 Hz 100 Hz
Only applies to MDSD2X/1, MDSD2X/2, MDSD2X/3, and MDSD2X/4.
375
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Power supply voltage Power requirement VDC W VDC = 10 to 28 P = I2max RSOL 1.2 (Refer to valve or pump data sheet for max. solenoid current and hot solenoid resistance) I= P VDC
Power supply current Ramp time
Amp sec.
0.2 to 10 (standard) 1.2 to 60 (R60) 2.4 to 120 (R120) 4.8 to 240 (R240) 1 to 10 75 to 275 4 25 to 80 (13 to 176) 0.16 (0.36)
Control potentiometer Pulse frequency Fuse 5x20 mm fast acting Ambient temperature Weight P7
K Hz Amp C (F) kg (lbs.)
376
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Analog amplier card Model VT-VRPA2-.-1X/

Series 1X
Suitable for controlling 4WRE valves with position feedback sizes 6 and 10, series 2X Designed as printed circuit board in Euro-format 100 x 160 mm and suitable for installation in a rack Command value inputs: Differential input 10 V Four callable command value inputs 10 V Current input 4 to 20 mA Inversion of the internal command value signal via 24V input or jumper Characteristic curve correction by means of separately adjustable step-change heights and maximum values Ramp time selection via quadrant recognition (24V input) or ramp time call-ups (24V inputs) (option T5) Changeover of ramp time range by means of jumpers Enable input Ready for operation output signal Switchable measuring socket (option T5) Polarity reversal protection for voltage supply Power supply unit with DC/DC converter without elevated zero point
Type VT-VRPA2-.-1X/
Ordering code VT-VRPA2

Analog amplier in Eurocard format For controlling 4WRE 6-2X valves For controlling 4WRE 10-2X valves Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: Unchanged technical data and pin assignment) =1 =2 = 1X
1)
1X / V0 /
/ *
Further details to be written in clear text 1) T1 = T5 = With one ramp time With ve ramp times Basic version
Additional functions e.g. output stage monitoring, actual value monitoring or ramp-steady signal on inquiry
377
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Operating range: Upper limit value Lower limit value Power consumption Current consumption Fuse Inputs: Analog Command values 1 to 4 (potentiometer inputs) Command value 5 (differential input) Command value 6 (current input) Ramp time external Digital Command value call-ups Ramp call-ups Quadrant recognition Command value inversion Enable Adjustment ranges: Zero balancing (potentiometer Zw) Command value (potentiometers w1 to w4) Ramp times (potentiometers t1 to t5) Step-change height (potentiometers S+ and S) Amplitude attenuator (potentiometers G+ and G) Outputs: Command value signal Actual value signal Measuring point signal (option 5) Ready for operation Regulated voltages Current output stages Oscillator Measuring sockets Type of connection Card dimensions Front panel dimensions: Height Width soldering side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range Storage temperature range Weight Proportional Electronics VO VO(t)max VO(t)min PS I Is 24 VDC + 40 % 20 % 35 V 18 V < 24 VA <2A 2 A M, can be replaced
Vi Vi Ii Vi V V V V V V V V V V
0 to 10 V; Ri > 100 k (reference is M0) 0 to 10 V; Ri > 50 k 4 to 20 mA; load Ri = 100 0 to +10 V; Ri = 10 k (internally raised to +15 V; reference is M0) 8.5 V to VO 0 to 6.5 V 8.5 V to VO 0 to 6.5 V 8.5 V to VO 0 to 6.5 V 8.5 V to VO 0 to 6.5 V 8.5 V to VO 0 to 6.5 V call-up activated; Ri > 100 k no call-up; Ri > 100 k call-up activated; Ri > 100 k no call-up; Ri > 100 k ON; Ri > 100 k OFF; Ri > 100 k ON; Ri > 100 k OFF; Ri > 100 k ON; Ri > 100 k OFF; Ri > 100 k
30 % 0 to 110 % 20 ms to 5 s; can be changed over, 0.2 to 50 s 0 % to 50 % 0 % to 110 % (valid for setting of step-change height to 0 %) V V V V V I V F V 10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA 10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA 10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA > 16 V; 50 mA (in case of fault: U < 1 V; Ri = 10 k) 10 V 2 %; 25 mA; short-circuit-proof 0 to 2.5 A; short-circuit-proof; clocked ca. 5 kHz 5 VSS per output; 10 mA 5.6 kHz 10 % 10 V 2 %; Imax = 2 mA 48-pin male connector, DIN 41 612, form F Euro-card 100 x 160 mm, DIN 41 494 3 HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 TE, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 3 TE 0 to 50 (0 to 122) 25 to 85 (13 to 185) 0.17 (0.38) net 378 Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Analog amplier Model VT-VRPA1-100

Series 1X
Suitable for controlling direct operated proportional pressure control valves with electrical position feedback, type DBETR, Plug-in connections compatible with those of amplier type VT 5003 Power supply with raised zero point Command value signal inputs: 0 to + 6 V; 0 to + 9 V; 0 to + 10 V 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA (plug-in bridges) Potentiometer adjustment on the front plate for the zero point and amplitude attenuation Measurement sockets for the ramp time Enable input and ramp off input Plug-in bridges for switching the maximum ramp times 0.02 to 5 s or 0.2 to 50 s Outputs for command value (0 to + 6 V) and actual value (0 to 6 V) LED display operational Polarity protection
VT-VRPA1-100
Ordering code VT-VRPA1

Amplier for proportional valves with electrical feedback, analog, with one output stage Amplier for proportional pressure valves DBETR1X = 100 1X =
1X V0
*
Further details in clear text Component series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged techncial data and connection allocation)
When replacing the VT 5003 amplier in a rack , a 4TE/3HE blanking plate must be ordered separately. Material no.: R900021004
379
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Functional range Upper limiting value Lower limiting value Power consumption Current consumption Fuse Inputs Command value 1 Command value 2 Command value 3 (differential input) or or Enable Active Not active External ramp switch off Without ramp With ramp Adjustment ranges Zero point Zw Command value attenuation Gw Ramp time up Short (bridge X9 tted) Long (bridge X8 tted) Ramp time down Short (bridge X9 tted) Long (bridge X8 tted) Outputs Output stage Solenoid current/resistance Clock frequency Driver for the inductive position transducer Oscillator frequency Regulated voltage Measurement sockets Command value w Actual value x Upwards ramp t1 Downwards ramp t2 Connection type Card dimensions Front plate dimensions Height Width solder side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range Storage temperature Weight C (F) C (F) kg (lbs.) VB VB(t)max VB(t)min Ps I Is Ve Ve Ve Ie Ie VF VF VR VR 24 VDC + 40 % 5 % 35 V 22 V < 35 W < 1.5 A 2.5 A T 0 V to + 9 V (ref. potential is M0) 0 V to + 6 V (ref. potential is M0) 0 V to + 10 V 0 mA to 20 mA (Ri = 100 ) 4 mA to 20 mA (Ri = 100 ) > 10 V <9V > 10 V <9V 5 % up to max. + 30 % 0 % to 105 % tup 1 tup 2 tdown 1 tdown 2 < 20 ms to 5 s 20 % (Ut1: 0.02 V < 0.2 s to 50 s 20 % (Ut1: 0.02 V < 20 ms to 5 s 20 % (Ut2: 0.02 V < 0.2 s to 50 s 20 % (Ut2: 0.02 V approx. 5 s; 5 V approx. 20 ms) approx. 50 s; 5 V approx. 0.2 s) approx. 5 s; 5 V approx. 20 ms) approx. 50 s; 5 V approx. 0.2 s)
Imax f f V Vw Vx Vt1 Vt2
2.2 A 10 % / R(20) = 10 (VT-VRPA1-100) 2.2 A 10 % / R(20) = 5.4 (VT-VRPA1-150) 2.2 A 10 % / R(20) = 10 (VT-VRPA1-151) Free clocking (approx. 1.5 kHz) 2.5 kHz 10 % 9 V 1% (with a raised zero point); 25 mA externally loadable 0 V to + 6 V (Ri = 1k) 0 V to 6 V (Ri = 1k) 0.02 V up to approx. 5 V (delayed adjustment range) 0.02 V up to approx. 5 V (delayed adjustment range) 32-pin blade connection, DIN EN 60603-2, form D Euro card 100 x 160 mm, DIN 41494 3 HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 TE, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 3 TE 0 to 50 (32 to 122) 25 to 70 (13 to 158) 0.15 (0.33)
380
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electrical amplier for ow control with proportional valves Model VT 5035

Series 1X
VT 5035 ampliers are used for adjusting the ow of variable displacement pumps of types A4VSO and A4VSG (see RE 92050, RE 92076, and RE 92100). Differential input Enable input with LED indicator lamp Ready for operatioan signalled by LED Ramp generator Four command values that can be adjusted by means of a potentiometer; call-up is signalled by LEDs Controller for swivel angle Two clocked current output stages Oscillator and demodulator for inductive position measurement with cable break detection Reverse polarity protectin for power supply
VT 5035
Ordering code VT 5035

Amplier for the ow adjustment of A4VSO and A4VSG variable displacement axial piston pumps
1X/ *
Further details to be written in clear text 1X = Component series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged technical data and pin allocation)
381
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Functional range: Upper limit Lower limit Power consumption Power requirement Fuse Inputs: Command value 1 to 4 Command value 5 Enable active inactive Relay data: Nominal voltage Response voltage Release voltage Coil resistance Ramp time (adjustment range) Outputs: Output stage solenoid current / resistance clock frequency Driver for the inductive position transducer oscillator frequency max. loading voltage amplitude (Vss) Regulated voltage Measurement sockets command value "w" actual swivel angle value "x" Connection model Card dimensions Front plate dimensions: Height Width connector side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range Storage temperature Weight C (F) C (F) kg (lbs.) I IS Ve Ve VF VF V V V R t VB VB(t)max VB(t)min 24 VDC + 40 % 5 % 35 V 22 V < 50 VA <2A 2.5 A T 9 V (reference potential is M0) 0 to 10 V > 8.5 V < 6.5 V operating voltage VB 16.8 V 2.4 V 2150 30 ms to approx. 1 s or 5 s (each 20 %)
Imax f f I Va V Vw Vx
1.8 A 20 %; R(20) = 5.4 , 2.2 A 20 %; R(20) = 10 for pump size 500 clock frequency up to approx. 1.5 kHz 2.5 kHz 10 % 30 mA 5 V per output 9 V 1 %; 25 mA externally loadable 0 to 6 V ( 6 V +100 %; + 6 V 100 %); Ri = 100 0 to 6 V (+ 6 V +100 %; 6 V 100 %); Ri = 100 32-pin blade connector, DIN 41 612, form D Eurocard 3.94 x 6.3 inches (100 x 160 mm), DIN 41 494 3 U, 128 mm (5.1 in.) 1 HP, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 7 HP 0 to 50 (32 to 122) 25 to 85 (13 to 185) 0.15 (0.33)
382
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

External control electronics for the DFE1 control of A10VSO axial piston pumps Model VT 5041
Series 25
Integral part of the SYDFE1 pressure and ow control system (series 1X and 2X) for controlling A10VSO... axial piston units with DFE1 control Implementation of the electronic functions of the DFE1 control; pressure and swivel angle control; optional power limiter Circuitry of the pressure controller can be matched to existing hydraulic uid volumes (actuator plus lines) Differential amplier inputs Controller for valve spool position Minimum value generator for pressure and swivel angle controller Self-clocking output stage Pressure-related leakage compensation (can be switched off) Polarity reversal protection for power supply Switchable actual pressure value input (current, voltage, range) LED lamps on the front panel: Error / no enable H1 Internal supply voltage H2
Model VT 5041-2X/. Indicator instrument for actual swivel angle value on the front panel (optional) Power limiter with internal or external command value feedforward (optional)
Ordering code VT 5041

External control electronics for the DFE1 control of A10VSO axial piston pumps Series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged technical data and pin assignment)
2X /
Additional functions: Without power limiter, without indicator instrument With power limiter, with indicator instrument
1= 3= = 2X
383
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Operating range: Upper limit value Lower limit value Power consumption Current consumption Fuse Inputs: Command values (pressure, swivel angle) Actual value (pressure) Power selection (p a)comm (only with VT 5041-2X/3...) Enable Outputs: Output stage Solenoid current / resistance Drivers for inductive transducers: Oscillator frequency Voltage amplitude (USS) Signal voltages Actual value (pressure, swivel angle) Swivel angle control active Power limiter active (only with VT 5041-2X/3...) Auxiliary voltages Error signal L-active H-active Measuring sockets Pressure command value (pcomm) 1 Actual pressure value (pact) 2 Swivel angle command value (acomml) 3 Actual swivel angle value (aact) 4 Spool position command value (scomm) 5 Actual spool position value (sact) 6 Type of transducer: for pump for valve Type of connection Card dimensions Front panel dimensions: Height Width circuit board conductor side Width component side VT 5041-2X/1... VT 5041-2X/3... VB vB(t)max vB(t)min PS Inom IF Vi Vi Ii Vi Ve 24 VDC + 40 % 10 % 35 V 21 V 35 VA 0.6 A (Imax = 1.25 A) 1.6 A T 0 to 10 V; Re = 100 k 0 to 5 V or 0 to 10 V; Re = 100 k 0 to 20 mA or 4 to 20 mA; Re = 500 0 to 10 V; Re > 100 k > 21 V (use relay with contact for currents < 10 mA)
Imax f Va V V V V Vo Vo V V V V V V
2.5 A; R(20) = 2 ca. 5 kHz 10 V 0 to 10 V Ub 1 V Ub 1 V 15 V 3 %; 10 mA VB 5 V; 10 mA (short-circuit-proof); error at Vo < 1 V < 1 V; error at VB 5 V; 10 mA + 10 V = 100 % + 10 V = 100 % 10 V = 100 % + 10 V = 100 % 10 V = 100 % 10 V = 100 % IW 9 (throttle circuit; 4 mm; 3-wire connection) DM2 (transformer circuit; 0.6 mm; 4-wire connection) 32-pin male connector, DIN 41 612, form D Euro-card 100 x 160 mm, DIN 41 494 3 HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 TE 5 TE 9 TE
384
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electrical amplier for the control of servo valves without electrical position feedback Model VT-SR2
Series 1X
Suitable for controlling single and two-stage servo-valves without electrical position feedback (types 4WS2EM 6, 4WS2EM 10., 4WS2EM 16 Regulator for valve current Dither signal generator Push-pull output stage Enable circuit with relay Measuring instrument for displaying servo-valve current Reverse polarity protection for voltage supply Optional extensions: PID-controller1) with controller changeover Relay with potential-free changeover contact (28 V / 2 A)
VT-SR2-1X/
Ordering code VTSR2 1X / 1 60

Amplier for servo valves without electrical position feedback; models 4WS2EM 6, 4WS2EM 10., 4WS2EM 16., Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchaged technical data and pin allocation) = 1X Valve current 60 mA With voltage regulator 15 V
60 = 1=
385
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltages: With voltage regulator Upper limit Lower limit Without voltage regulator Upper limits Lower limits Power consumption (without valve) at Vo = 24 V 1) Inputs: Command signal 1 (main spool position) Command signal 2 (main spool position) with J9 Enable Changeover of controller Reserved relay Outputs: Regulated output voltage 1) Valve current Valve current command value (with J10) Relay selection voltage Dither signal Relay data: Nominal voltage Response voltage Release voltage Switching time Coil resistance (at 25 C [77 F]) Connection type Card dimensions Front panel dimensions: Height Width soldering side Width component side Permissible ambient temperature range Storage temperature range Weight
1)
VDC Vo(t)max Vo(t)min Vo; VM Vo(t)max; VM(t)max Vo(t)min; VM(t)min I Ve Ve Ve Ve Ve VM Imax Va V f V V V t R
24 VDC 28 VDC 22 VDC 24 VDC; 15,0 VDC 28 VDC; 15,2 VDC 22 VDC; 14,8 VDC <150 mA 0 to 10 V (Ri = 50 k) 0 to 10 V (Ri = 50 k) +24 V with J13; 0 V with J12 (Ri = 700 ; relay circuit) +24 V with J13; 0 V with J12 (Ri = 700 ; relay circuit) +24 V with J13; 0 V with J12 (Ri = 700 ; relay circuit) 15 V 2%; 150 mA 60 mA 10 V + 60 mA (measuring output) +24 V (+Vo) 340 Hz 5% (ISS = 3 mA) +26 V >13 V 1.3 V to 6.5 V <4 ms 700 32 pin terminal connector, DIN 41 612, form D Euro card 100 x 160 mm, DIN 41 494 3 HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 TE, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 7 TE
0 to 50 (32 to 122) 20 to 70 (4 to 158) 0.19 (0.44)
Only for version with voltage regulator
386
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Auxiliary cards & accessories

The following auxiliary cards can be used with an on-board electronic valve or with a valve and amplier combination. Several cards provide closed loop control and others provide set point generation. These auxiliary cards come in two forms: Euro-card (requires card holder) DIN module (mounts on standard DIN rail)
Technical data
Model VT-SWMA3-5-1X/V0/0
1)
Description POTM-RAMP
Material Number 0811405108
See catalog #AKY 013/4 for complete description and performance specications.
387
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

p/Q Ampliers Model VT-VARAP1

Series 2X
Suitable for actuating directly operated and pilot operated servo solenoid valves Analog ampliers in Eurocard format for installation in 19 rack Output stage with closed-loop control Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times Enabling input Short-circuit-proof outputs External control shutoff Open-circuit detection for feedback signal cable and pressure sensor Suitable for pressure sensors (1...6-V, 0...10-V, 4...20 mA) Closed-loop position control with PID action Material numbers: 0811405152 0811405153
VA-VARAP1
Ordering code VT
Hydraulic component (actuation) Axis control Valve type Servo solenoid valve Actuation Analog Function p/Q control Output stages 1 output stage
2X / V0
Customer version Catalog version Series Series 20 to 29 Serial numbers for types 2.7 A solenoid 3.7 A solenoid
V0 = =A 2X = =R =A =P =1 527 = 537 =
388
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
P.C.B. format Plug connector Weight m Power supply VB to z-2 b-2 Smoothing capacitor, separately to b-4, z-4 Valve solenoid A/VA max. Current rating (100 x 160 x approx. 35) mm (B x L x H) Europe format with front panel (7 modular spacings) Connector DIN 41612 F 32 0.25 kg (0.6 lbs.) 24 V DC Battery voltage 2140 V Rectied AC voltage Veff = 2128 V (single-phase, full-wave rectication) 4700 F/63 V DC, only required if VB ripple >10-% 2.7/40 (NG 6) 3.7/60 (NG 10) 1.7 A 2.7 A The current rating can rise at min. VB and long cable length to control solenoid 37 W 55 W b 20: 0...10 V Difference amplier z 20: 0...10 V } (Ri = 100 k) z 12: 0...10 V } Difference amplier z 10: 0 V z 14: 4...20 mA current input b 16: 0...+10 V-/-1...+6 V voltage input b 18: 0 V reference b 10: 6...40 V DC z 24: 24 V/0.1 A max. For applications 30 Hz Potentiometer 10 k, 10 V supply from b 32, z 32 (10 mA) or external signal source To z 16, V = 8.5...40 V, Ri = 100 k , LED (green) on front panel lights up z 6: +15 V/35 mA, Ri ~ 25 b 30: 15 V/25 mA; z 30: +15 V/35 mA b 22: 0 10 V, RL > 10 k/ref. b 24 b 26: 0 10 V, RL > 10 k/ref. b 28 Clocked current regulator Imax. = 3.7 A Imax. = 2.7 A Solenoid cable: up to 20 m 1.5 mm2 20 up to 60 m 2.5 mm2 Position transducer: 4 x 0.5 mm2 (shielded) Pressure sensor: 4 x 0.5 mm2 ( shielded) Green: Enable VB ON Yellow: Position transducer open circuit Red: Supply voltage too low Yellow: Pressure control OFF Yellow: Pressure control working Both yellow LEDs ashing: Pressure sensor open circuit Open-circuit protection for feedback signal cable and pressure sensor Closed-loop position control with PID action Clocked output stage Rapid energizing and de-energizing for fast response times Short-circuit-proof outputs External control shutoff z 22: No fault: +VK; max. 100-mA Fault: 0-V
Power consumption (typical) Input signal (setpoint Q)
Input signal (setpoint p) Feedback signal from pressure sensor
Pressure control OFF External scanning of controller Limit frequency Signal source Output stage enable Sensor power supply Position transducer
Power supply Pilot stage signal Main stage signal
Solenoid output b6b8 Length of amplier to valve cables
LED displays
Special features
Error signal Position transducer open circuit VB too low 15 V stabilization Note: Connect power zero b 2 and control zero b 12, b 14 or z 28 separately to central ground (neutral point). Proportional Electronics 389
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

p/Q Controller Model VT-VACAP

Series 2X
Analog ampliers in Europe card format for installation in 19 rack Suitable for servo solenoid valves with on-board electronics Closed-loop position control with PID action Short-circuit-proof outputs External deactivation for pressure controller Suitable for pressure sensors (1...6-V, 0...10-V, 4...20 mA) Supply for pressure sensors Detection of open circuit to pressure sensors Material number: 0811405157
VT-VACAP
Ordering code VT
Hydraulic component (actuation) Axis control Valve type Controller Actuation Analog Function p/Q control
P 500 2X / V0
Customer version Catalog version Series Series 20 to 29 Serial numbers for types Standard version without valve amplier function
V0 = =A 2X = =C =A =P 500 =
390
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
PCB format Plug connection Power supply VB at z2b2 (100 x 160 x approx. 35) mm (W x L x H), Europe format with front plate (7 modular spacings) Connector DIN 41612-F32 24 V DC nominal Battery voltage 21...40 V Rectied AC voltage Veff = 21...28 V (single phase, full-wave rectication) 4700 F/63 V DC, only if ripple VB > 10-% 0-811-405-157 max. 160 mA (1 channel) 0-811-405-158 max. 220 mA (2 channel) Basis card (1 channel) Pressure sensor (1-...-6 V/0-...-10 V) Pressure sensor (4-...-20 mA) Pressure sensor supply V Pressure setpoint (0-...-10) V External controller deactivation External controller readout Monitor signal pactual External channel selection mode Flow setpoint Potentiometer supply Output Cable: Pressure sensor Valve PLC signals LED displays/channel b26 ref. b28 b24 ref. b28 z6 (+15 V)/b8 (0 V) b12/b14 (0 V) z28: 6-...-40 V DC z26: 24 V DC, max. 20 mA z16: 0-...-10 V DC z30: 6-...-40 V DC z22: 0-...-10 V DC b22: 0 V z32: +10 V, max. 10 mA VAI; b4/b8 (0 V): 0 ... 10 V Load RL > 1 k 4 x 0.5 mm2 (shielded) 5 x 0.5 mm2 (shielded) 0.5 mm2 (shielded) Pressure controller OFF Controller operating Open circuit to pressure sensor (both above-mentioned LEDs ash) Monitoring for open circuit to pressure sensor Test connections for major parameters External deactivation of pressure controller External channel selection mode For use with various pressure sensors VAIl; b6/b8 (0 V): 0 ... 10 V Load RL > 1 k z20: 0-...-10 V DC b22: 0 V z12/z10 (0 V) b10: 6-...-40 V DC z24: 24 V DC, max. 20 mA z18: 0-...-10 V DC Daughter card (2 channel) b16 ref. b18 z14 ref. b18
Smoothing capacitor at z4b2 Current rating
Special features
391
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Analog position controller Model VT-MACAS

Series 1X
Design: Module for snapping onto DIN rails Actuation of valves with on-board electronics Enabling input Open-circuit detection for feedback signal cable Short-circuit-proof interfaces Measurement taps on front panel Deadband compensation can be deactivated Position: PT1 control Velocity control possible in conjunction with a speedometer: PI control Cylinder area ratio adjustment Material number: 0811405139
Ordering code VT
Hydraulic component Axis control Type Controller Actuation Ananlog Function Position control
M
=A
S 500 1X / V0
V0 = Customer version Catalog version Series Series 10 to 19 Serial numbers for types Standard version without valve amplier function
=C =A =S 500 =
1X =
392
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Format/design Fastening/connection Power supply (8), (9) Current rating Signal input (1), (2) Feedback signal (3), (4) Valve signal (5), (6), (7) Deadband compensation Enable signal (10) Fault signal (11) IN POS signal (12) Ramp ranges Area ratio adjustment AK:AR Feedback signal adjustment Type of controller Valve zero Special features VT-MACAS-500-10/V0 VT-MACAS-500-10/V0 (86 x 110 x 95) mm/module DIN rail/connector + terminals VB = 24 Vnom/batt.: 21 ... 40 V DC Single-phase full wave: 21 ... 28 V DCeff Max. 200 mA Vset: 10 V, difference amplier Ri = 100 k Vfeed: 10 V, difference amplier Ri = 100 k VV = 10 V (max. 10 mA) or IV = 4 ... 20 mA (average 12 mA) Can be deactivated, effective in a range of 4 % 8.5 ... 40 V DC No fault: 24 Vnom (VB) max. 50 mA Fault: < 2 V IN POS: 24 Vnom (VB) max. 50 mA Not IN POS: < 2 V I: 0.1 ... 1 s II: 1 ... 10 s Min. 1:1; max. 1:4 Zero: 5 ... 10 % Gain: 50 ... 110 % Position: PT1 Velocity: PI 5% Module can be switched from position to velocity control Position window can be switched over Measurement taps on front panel Short-circuit-proof interfaces
393
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Digital command value and controller card Model VT-HACD-1

Series 1X
Model VT-HACD-1
Ordering code VT-HACD 1 1X / V0 / 1

Digital command value and controller card Standard command value and controller card Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged technical data and pin assignment) =1 = 1X 1= V0 = * Kit includes CD-ROM with BODAC software 0= D= P=
*
0= Without valve output stage Without bus interfacing DeviceNet Probus DP V0 With display Basic device
394
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Operating range: Upper limit value Lower limit value Current consumption Fuse Digital inputs Digital outputs VO vO(t)max vO(t)min Imax IF Signal Signal 24 VDC + 40 % 10 % 35 V 21 V Stand-by current consumption 250 mA 4 AT log 0 = 0 to 5 V log 1 = 15 V to VO log 0 = 0 to 5 V log 1 = 15 V to (VO 3 V) Imax = 30 mA
Analogue inputs A16 Conguration as voltage input Range Input resistance Resolution Non-linearity Conguration as current input Range Input resistance Power loss Resolution Analogue outputs AO 1 conguration as voltage output Output voltage Output current Load Resolution Residual ripple content AO 1 conguration as current output Output current Load Resolution Residual ripple content AO 2 / AO 3 Output voltage Output current Load Resolution Residual ripple content Reference voltage Residual ripple content
V Ri
0 to 10 V or 10 V (can be congured) 100 k, > 10 M for input AI 3 5 mV for range 10 V 2,5 mV for range 0...10 < 10 mV 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA (can be congured) 100 0.15 % (at 500 between pin AI x and 0 V) 5 A
I Re
V Imax Rmin
0 ... 10V or 10 V (can be congured) 20 mA 500 1.25 mV (14 bits) 15 mV (without noise) 0...20 mA or 4...20 mA (can be congured) 500 1.25 A 15 A (without noise) 10 V 10 mA 1 k 10 mV (11 bits) 25 mV (without noise) 10 V 30 mA < 20 mV
I Rmax
V Imax Rmin
V Imax
395
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Scanning time Serial interface Type of connection Card dimensions Front panel dimensions: Height Width soldering side Width component side Permissible operating temperature range Storage temperature range C (F) C (F) t 2 ms RS 232 (front panel), D-Sub socket 64-pin male connector, DIN 41612, form G Euro-card 100 x 160 mm, DIN 41494 3 HE, 128.4 mm (5.1 in.) 1 TE, 5.08 mm (0.2 in.) 7 TE 0 to 50 (32 to 122) 20 to 70 (4 to 158)
Weight kg (lbs.) 0.2 (0.4) Note: For details with regard to environment simulation testing in the elds of EMC (electromagnetic compatibility), climate and stress, see RE 30143-U (declaration on environmental compatibility).
Pin assignment of male connector

Pin 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32
1)
Row z n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. Shield n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. System ground Digital output DO 3 Digital output DO 4 Digital output DO 5 Digital output DO 6 UO: +24 V L0: 0 V
Row b Analogue input AI 3 + Analogue input AI 3 Analogue input AI 2 + Analogue input AI 2 Analogue input AI 1 + Analogue input AI 1 Analogue input AI 4 + Analogue input AI 4 Analogue input AI 5 + Analogue input AI 6 + Analogue input AI 6 Analogue GND 4) 10 V +10 V
1) 1) 3) 3) 1) 1) 1)
Row d Digital input DI 1 Digital input DI 2 Digital input DI 3 Digital input DI 4 Digital input DI 5 Digital input DI 6 Digital input DI 7 Digital input DI 8 Enable Digital output DO 1 OK n.c. Digital output DO 2 n.c. Analogue output AO 1 2) Analogue output AO 2, 10V
Row f Digital output DO 7 SSI clock + SSI clock SSI data +; Inc Ua1 SSI data ; Inc /Ua1 Inc Ua2 Inc /Ua2 Inc Ua0 Inc /Ua0 n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c. n.c.
Analogue input AI 5 1)
1) 1)
Analogue output AO 3, 10V
Inputs AI 2, 4, 5 and 6 can be set to 0...10 V, 10 V, 020 mA or 4...20 mA by means of software. Output AO 1 can be set to 0...10 V, 10 V, 020 mA or 4...20 mA by means of software. This input has an input resistance Ri > 10 M Reference potential for AO 1, AO 2, AO 3, +10 V and 10 V
n.c. ... not assigned in the basic version, but reserved for extensions.
2)
3) 4)
396
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Digital controller for position and pressure/force control Model DMX

Series 2X
Absolute digital input for 24-bit SSD position transducer High resolution input for analog position transducer Accepts 2 pressure transducers or load cell as force feedback Fine Positioning integration for superior accuracy Analog input for external velocity control Active Damping for low natural frequency systems Gain matching for a differential area cylinder Internal tables of stored command values 420 mA, 10 V, or 10 V options for most analog inputs Range checking on analog inputs Outputs 10 Vdc or 420 mA to valve amplier Multifunction analog output to monitor control values Program accessible by pushbuttons with front display WinHost software included for setup and commissioning RS232 communication ports Allen Bradley SLC communication interface Password protection available 24 Vdc powered digital platform Optimizes hydraulic axis for closed loop control Achievable position accuracy of 0.05% with analog feedback, <0.001 in (<25 m) with SSD* Achievable steady state, pressure accuracy of 0.1%* * (typical, but not guaranteed)
Model DMX-2X
Technical data
Power supply voltage: Power requirement: (additional power for sensors) Digital position transducer: Analog inputs and outputs: VDC 21 V to 35 V P 8W SSD 24-bit a gray code increasing 0 V to 10 V 0 to 10 V I/O 4 to 20 mA 200 k or higher 100 1 k 10V 500 420 mA 10 V to 35 V <5 V 1 k 10 V to 35 V (VDC) 500 (50 mA) +10 Vdc, 10 Vdc 400 RS232 4A 64-pin, rows z, b, d, f Eurocard, 100 x 160mm 5.05 in. (128 mm) 1 division 0.20 (5.08 mm) 7 divisions 8 divisions 32 to 122 F (20 to 70 C) 4 to 158 F (20 to 70 C) 0.6 lb (0.27 kg) Section 8
VIN
Ordering code
DMX 2X / 0 Digital Controller for Position and Pressure Regulation Series (20 to 29 externally interchangeable) Valve Type Valve type selected by user See DMX Setup Instructions to select valve codes =0
* current not available on all Input impedance (analog inputs): Voltage inputs RIN Current inputs Minimum load (analog outputs): 10 V RL 420 mA Discrete input voltage: log 0 (high) log 1 (low) Input impedance (discrete inputs): RD Discrete input voltage: Minimum load (discrete outputs): RL Internal reference voltage: VREF Minimum load on 10 V: RL from card 10 V @ 30 mA Serial interface: Fuse (5 mm x 20 mm): Connector type: (DIN 41494, type G) Card dimension: (DIN 41494) Space requirements: Height 3U Conductor side Component side 8HP Face plate Ambient temperature range: T Storage temperature: T Weight: 397
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Analog command value module Model VT-SWMA-1

Series 1X
Suitable for the control of valves with integrated electronics Possibility of realizing basic hydraulic functions via digital controlling Adjustment elements: 1 potentiometer for zero point adjustment (command value offset) 1 potentiometer for command value attenuation (for differential input) 4 potentiometers for command value presets 5 potentiometers for ramp time adjustment Model VT-SWMA-1 LED displays: Command value call-up (4 x) Active ramp time (4 x) Quadrant recognition Polarity reversal Power indication Measurement socket for command value and ramp time Differential input 4 call-up possibilities for each command value and ramp time Ramp generator with 5 ramp times; 4 quadrant recognition Control signal output Power supply without raised zero point Without power part
Ordering code VT-SWMA-1 1X / V0 / 0

Analog command value module Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged technical data and pin assignment) = 1X V0 = 0=
*
Further details to be written in clear text Basic version Basic version
398
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltage Operating range: Upper limit value Lower limit value Power consumption Current consumption Fuse Inputs Command value (differential input with attenuator) Quadrant operation 4-Q active inactive Command value inversion Inv active inactive Command value call-ups 1 to 4 active inactive Adjustment ranges: Zero balancing (potentiometer Z) Amplitude attenuator (potentiometer G) Command values (potentiometers w1 to w4) Ramp times (potentiometers t1 to t5) Outputs: Control variable Measuring socket for control variable w Measuring socket for ramp time t Type of connection Type of mounting Type of protection Dimensions (W x H x D) Permissible operating temperature range Storage temperature range Weight C (F) C (F) kg (lbs.) V Vw Vt VO vO(t)max vO(t)min PS Imax 24 VDC + 40 % 10 % 35 V 18 V 12 VA 0.5 A Thermal overload protection (reactivation when temperature falls below threshold) Vi V4-Q V4-Q VInv VInv V V 0 to 10 V; Ri > 50 k 8.5 V to 35 V; Ri > 50 k 0 to 6.5 V 8.5 V to 35 V; Ri > 50 k 0 to 6.5 V 8.5 V to 35 V; Ri > 50 k 0 to 6.5 V 30 % 0 % to ca. 110 % 0 % to ca. 110 % (factory setting 100 %) 20 ms to 5 s 0 to 10 V; 2 mA; RL > 5 k 0 to 10 V (+ 100 % + 10 V; 100 % 10 V) 0.01 V to + 10 V (tmin = 10 V ca. 10 ms; tmax = 0.01 V ca. 10 s) 12 screw terminals Carrier rail NS 35/7.5 to DIN 50 022 IP 20 to DIN 40 050 40 x 79 x 85.5 mm 0 to 50 (0 to 122) 25 to 85 (4 to 185) 0.13 (0.29)
399
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Plug-in switching amplier Model VT-SSV-1

Series 2X
Suitable for control of switching valves with direct current solenoid operation through signals with low control power Activation can be carried out direct with the switch output signals of an open loop control Output with constant short circuit protection Status indication of switching condition with LED Model VT-SSV-1-2X
Ordering code VT-SSV-1 2X/ *

Plug-in switching amplier Series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: technical data and terminal connection unchanged) = 2X Further details to be written in clear text
Technical data
Operating voltage Output current Output voltage Control voltage: ON OFF Control current Switching frequency Cable connection: Fitting External cable diameter Solenoid connection Connection cable (recommendation) Permisible operating temperature range Storage temperature range Weight C (F) C (F) m V+ Imax Vmax VIN VIN IIN fmax 24 VDC; + 20%; 10% (residual ripple < 15%) 2 A (at 100% duty) V+ 0.2 V (typical at 2 A) 10 to 35 VDC 0 to 6 VDC 3 mA approx. 4 Hz Screw-type terminals max. 1.5 mm2 Pg 11 4 to max. 10 mm Plug-in connector 2-pin + PE; DIN 43650/ISO 4400 (Z5L) Olex 4 x 1.5 mm2 16 AWG (not included in delivery) 25 to +70 (13 to 158) 25 to +70 (13 to 158) approx. 45 g
400
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Card holder for mounting circuit boards of Euro card format Model CH32
Series 1X
Fastens to 35mm DIN rail or directly screws to panel Sturdy base and card guide assembly Circuit board hold downs Ejector buttons smoothly release card Compression screw terminals for wire connections Terminal connections on both sides of card holder Fits Rexroth 32-pin and 64-pin plug-in cards 32-pin card holder, CH32 C-1X
Ordering code CH
Card Holder Mating Connector per DIN 41612, female 32 contacts, type C 64 contacts, type G
1X
1X = Series 10 to 19
= 32C = 64G
Technical data
Mating connector, female per DIN 41612: CH32 Type C 32 contacts (rows a & c, 2 32 even) CH64 Type G 64 contacts (rows f/d/b/z, 2 32 even) Mounting: Clip onto 35mm rail 90 DIN rail adapter included 2 clearance holes, 0.165 in. (4.2 mm) dia. x 3/8 in. (9.5 mm) depth Maximum wire size: 12AWG (4 mm2) Recommended wire size (2 wires per terminal max.): 16AWG or smaller (2 mm2) Recommended box depth with card inserted: 9 or larger (225 mm) Weight: CH32C 0.5 lb. CH64G 0.8 lb.
401
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Card holder for mounting circuit boards of Euro card format Model CH64-G
Series 1X
Fastens to 35mm DIN rail or directly screws to panel Loose adapter included for DIN rail mounting to mount horizontally or vertically Sturdy base and card guide assembly Circuit board hold downs Ejector buttons release card smoothly Compression screw terminals for wire connections Terminal connections on both sides of the cardholder Fits Bosch Rexroth 64-pin type G plug-in Euro card format cards
Ordering code CH 64G PH 1X

Card Holder Mating Connector per IEC 603/DIN 41612 64 contacts, type G PH = = 64G 1X = Series 10 to 19 Style
Technical data
Mating connector, female epr DIN41612 Type G: CH64-G 64 contacts (rows z, b, d & f 2-32 even) Mounting: Guiderail 35 mm (1.38 in.) horizontal or vertical (NS35/7.5) M4 x 30mm or 6-32 x 1-1/4" screws (hole diameter 4.2 mm [0.165 in.]) Tightening torque 0.5 Nm (0.369 lb-ft) Technical data: Conection according to standard IEC/DIN VDE Nominal current In 1A Nominal voltage Un 250V Stripping length 8 mm Connection data in AWG (mm2 [in2]): Minimum conductor cross section rigid Maximum conductor cross section rigid Minimum conductor cross section exible Maximum conductor cross section exible
24 (0.2 [0.0003]) 12 (4.0 [0.0062]) 24 (0.2 [0.0003]) 14 (2.5 [0.0038])
Recommended box depth with card inserted: 228 mm (9 in.) or larger Weight in kg (lbs.): CH64 type G 0.34 (0.75)
402
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 1 987 761 327 / 12.00 (AKY 13/4)

Card Connector
Material Number: 1 834 486 001
Technical data
Clamp voltage to VDE 0110 Current load Cable cross-section Type of connection: Terminal connections: Permissible ambient temperature Weight C (F) kg (lbs.)
2
V I AWG (mm )
max. 125 V AC max. 4 A max. 12 (4) 32-pin spring contact strip, model F, DIN 41 612 even-numbered, row b, z 15 to 70 (4 to 158) 0.5 (1.1)
403
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Card holder Model VT 3002

Series 2X
Card holders allow the simple installation and wiring of individual electronic cards in Euro format, e.g. in switching cabinets Can be screwed on or snapped onto DIN rails Vertical mounting onto a DIN rail, possible with an additional adaptor (included within the scope of supply) Stable base Card locking and releasing by lever operation Connection via screw terminals
Card Holder Model VT 3002-2X/48
Ordering code VT 3002 2X

Card Holder Series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: externally interchangeable) = 2X 32D = 48F =
*
Further details to be written in clear text 32-pin spring contact strip, form D 48-pin spring contact strip, form F
Technical data
Terminal voltage to VDE 0110 C Current loading capacity VT 3002-2X/32D VT 3002-2X/48F Cross-section connection Connection type: (socket connection) Pin allocation: VT 3002-2X/32D VT 3002-2X/48F VT 3002-2X/32D VT 3002-2X/48F Permissible ambient temperature range Weight C (F) kg (lbs.) V I I A Max. 125 VAC 4A 4A Screw terminals max. 4mm2, (form H - 6 mm2) 32-pin spring contact strip, form D DIN 41612 48-pin spring contact strip, form F DIN 41612 Even numbered, rows a/c Even numbered, rows d/b/z 20 to 70 (4 to 158) 0.5 (1.1)
404
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Power supply 24 V and 15 V

Output 24 VDC single polarity models Output 15 VDC or 12 VDC bi-polar models Voltage regulation 0.05% Low output ripple <5 mV peak to peak Short circuit and overload protection Input voltage 100, 120, 220, 230240 VAC Frequency input 47 to 63 Hz UL recognized, CSA certied, also IEC, VDE, BPO, ECMA, CEE
24 V Power Supply Order by Rexroth Part Number Output Voltage 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC 15 VDC 15 VDC
1)
Regulated power supply units are used for proportional ampliers, servos, transducers, and instrumentation. All supply outputs are foldback current limited, if a short circuit or excess load is applied. Output voltage may be adjusted within 5%. The power supplies are open-frame designs that can be panel mounted. Standoffs are generally recommended to allow air circulation.
Output Current 1) 2.4 A 3.6 A 4.8 A 0.8, 0.8 A 1.5, 1.5 A
Material No. R978887102 R978887103 R978887104 R978887105 R978887106
Output current @5863 Hz, derated all by 10% below 58 Hz.
Technical data
Input voltage (supplied as 120, unless noted) VAC 87 110 104.4 132 191.4 242 207 264 47 63 55 2.4 3.6 4.8 0.8, 0.8 1.5, 1.5 % % % 5 0.05 0.05 Output ripple 24 V models 15 V models mVpp C (F) <3 <5 0 to 50 (0 122)
Input frequency Efciency, typical @120 V 60 Hz Output current @5863 Hz* R978887102 (HC24-2.4-A) R978887103 (HN24-3.6-A) R978887104 (HD24-4.8-A) R978887105 (HAA15-0.8-A) R978887106 (HBB15-1.5-A) *derated all by 10% below 58 Hz Output voltage adjustment range Voltage regulation @ 10% line change Voltage regulation @ 50% load change
Hz % Amp
Operating temperature above 50 C (122 F), 12 CFM fan recommended for convection cooling, 50 70 C (122 to 158 F) derate linearly 0 40% Storage temperature Weight R978887102 R978887103 R978887104 R978887105 R978887106
C (F) (HC24-2.4-A) (HN24-3.6-A) (HD24-4.8-A) (HAA15-0.8-A) (HBB15-1.5-A) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.) kg (lbs.)
43 to 55 (47 132) 2.0 (4.4) 3.1 (6.8) 3.6 (7.9) 1.1 (2.5) 2.0 (4.4)
405
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

VT patch cord
Flexible Patch Cords are supplied with a 2 mm diameter plug on one end and a 4 mm diameter plug on the other. They are connected by a 40 inch (100 cm) length of silicone insulated wire (0.55 sq. mm/20 AWG), and are available in red or black color. Typical application: Used for connecting between a VT card faceplate test jack and an analog/digital meter for the purpose of measuring voltage of the amplier card For servicing or trouble-shooting Can also be used with Rexroth test point and systems cards Ordering material number: R978807707 R978807708 (Red version) (Black version) Patch cords for convenient testing
Unit dimensions: dimensions in inches (millimeters)

0.70 (18) 1.14 (29) 0.16 (4) 0.51 (13) 0.16 (4) 1.85 (47)
0.43 (11)
0.61 (15.5)
0.08 (2)
0.08 (2) 0.20 (5)
1.04 (26.5)
0.28 (7)
0.34 (8.6)
406
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Test adapter for measuring voltage and/or current Model MESAP 43650
The new MESAP 43650 test adapter, is installed between the ISO 4400/DIN 43650 A male and female connectors used on the valve. The adapter allows for uninterrupted voltage and/or current measurement in the eld while the valve is in operation. Once installed, the MESAP test xture enables the technician to facilitate servicing or trouble-shooting tests and/or measurements without stopping production. Easy to use Compact design Ampere reading during operation of unit by removing a shorting link Voltage reading between contacts 1 and 2, also during operation of unit One shunt jumper supplied with each tester 4 mm banana jack test leads must be ordered separately. Model MESAP 43650
Ordering information
Order by Material No. R900021194
MESAP 43650 adaptor used in conjunction with a 4 WE6 directional valve Proportional Electronics 407 Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Service case with test unit for proportional and servo valves with integrated electronics Model VT-VETSY-1
Series 1X
The service case contains a test unit as well as optional power supply units, connecting cables and adaptor cables (see ordering code) The test unit can be used for the control and functional testing of proportional and servo valves with integrated electronics and an operating voltage of 15 V or +24 V Simplies commissioning and troubleshooting in hydraulic systems that use proportional and servo valves Service case: Dimensions (W x H x D) 450 x 100 x 350 mm (17.7 x 4.0 x 13.7 in.) Weight Empty 2 kg (4.5 lbs.) Complete 4.3 kg (9.5 lbs.)
Model VT-VETSY-1
Ordering code VT-VETSY-1 1X / 1 1 1 A O

Service case with test unit for proportional and servo valves with integrated electronics Series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged technical data and connection allocation) Test unit Model VT-VET-1-1X Valve connection cable: With 1 off 6-pin connecting cable Model VT-VETK-1-1X Adaptor cable for valve Model 4WSE2EM6-1X: With adaptor cable Model VT-VETAK-1-1X = 1X A= Power supply 15 V; 0.25 A Without power supply Power supply 24 V VT-VETNT-1-1X/G24
0=
=1
=1
=1
408
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Operating voltages "power selector" switch: Switch position "24 V" Switch position " 15 V" Current consumption of the test unit Max. current carrying capacity of pins A and B of input plug ES and output socket AB when testing 24 V proportional or high-response control valves Input: Input plug ES Command values to pins E and D Enable signal to pin C (24 V operation) not active active Output socket AB Actual value to pin F BNC socket Outputs (all short-circuiting links plugged): Input plugES Actual value to pin in F Output socket AB Enable signal to pin C (24 V operation) "setpoint selector" switch Switch position "intern" or "BNC" "enable" switch to position "off" "enable" switch to position "on" Switch position "control" "enable" switch to position "off" "enable" switch to position "on" Command values to pins D and E "setpoint selector" switch Switch position "intern" or "BNC" pin E pin D Switch position "control" Dimensions (W x H x D) Weight pins E and D
VB VB I Imax
24 V; 20 % + 40 % 15 V; 10 % 0.1 A 6A
Vi; Ii VE VE Vi; Ii Vi
according to valve details 0 to 10 V 16 to VB according to the actual value output of the valve 0 bis 10 V
V0; I0
according to the actual value output of the valve
VE VE VE VE
0V UB 0V according to pin C of input plug ES
Vcomm Icomm Vcomm mm (in.) kg (lbs.)
Reference potential 0 to 10 V, falls Ri valve > 500 0 to 20 mA, falls Ri valve < 500 according to input plug ES (pins E and D) 94 x 54 x 160 mm (3.7 x 2.1 x 6.3 in.) 0.36 (0.8)
409
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Generator speed controller Model GSC 1

Series 2X
Self contained controller for driving electrical power generators with a hydrostatic transmission 16 Bit microprocessor based controller 50 or 60 Hz generator operation Tunable PID controller to accommodate a wide range of pump/ motor/generator combinations Fault safety shutdown Simple machine interface
Generator Speed Control GSC-2X Mechanical and electrical "plug-in" compatability with the Rexroth GSC1-1X controller
Ordering code GSC 1 2X 120 M

Generator Speed Controller Series 20 to 29 (20 to 29 externally interchangeable) Running voltage (120 VAC/50-60 Hz) Running voltage (240 VAC/50-60 Hz) =2X M= = 120 = 240 * Mating Connector is included 1= With RFI lter *14 pin MS connector
Technical data
Power supply Output Drive Frequency control range Load response Speed START/STOP change response START/STOP circuit requirements Frequency shutdown Overvoltage shutdown Pulse pickup input LED output Setup interface Communications port Enclosure Ambient temperature Connector Starting Running VDC VAC A Hz + 10 to 35, negative ground 2 Amp maximum 120 to 240, 50/60 Hz 10% 50 VA maximum Up to 2.5 maximum to drive A4V pump solenoid, current controlled, Pulse Width Modulation 80 to 250 Hz 50 or 60 0.5 Hz (10 Hz adjustment) 15 kw load step, 1% Hz error, recovery to steady state typical Input change of 1000 rpm/sec. cause max of 3 Hz frequency change, recovery to steady state Start/stop in 1 sec. typical. Settle to stable speed 2 sec. 3 wire, 12 VDC control, optically isolated inputs, 15 mA max. Selectable up to 30 Hz deviation Selectable 0300 5 to 30 any non-monotonic waveshape 10 nominal, short circuit proof Alpha-numeric display, 4-character, red LED 4 pushbuttons up, down, enter, escape RS-485, 19,200 baud NEMA 12, screw cover plate 18 to 60 (0 to 140) Type GSC /M MS3102E22 - 19P Mating connector MS3106E22 - 19S (solder) 235 x 159 x 99 (9.25 x 6.25 x 3.50) 4.54 (10) Optional
sec. Hz VAC VAC mA
Multiturn
C (F) M mm (in.) kg (lbs)
Size (approximately) Weight (approximately) Mounting position Warning! Do not unplug with power applied!
410
Section 8
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 9 Mobile Electronics
BODEM ................................................................................412 BODAS Controller RC..................................................414 Analog amplier RA ...........................................................418 BODAS Pressure Sensor PR2 ...................................422 Speed sensor DSM ...........................................................424 Hall-effect speed sensor HDD ....................................426 Inductive speed sensor ID ...............................................428 Angle of rotation sensor WS1 ........................................430 Inductive Angle Sensor AN1 ...........................................432 Inductive position sensor PO1........................................434 Draft Sensor KMB..............................................................436 Application software Speed control SPC ........................................................439 Load limiting control LLC ..............................................445 Drive control DRC ..........................................................449 Dual path control DPC ..................................................452 Fan control AFC ..............................................................458
411
411
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

BODEM
PC software, version 24 Adjustment and diagnostic service tool for control units
Features
The BODEM PC software provides a convenient and userfriendly method of executing service functions for the RC control unit in the Rexroth range (see RE 95200). Such functions as setting parameters and displaying process data or errors can now be commanded with a PC or laptop. BODEM is a convenient alternative to the BB-3, VT 12321 control box (see RE 29798 and RE 95080). System requirements PC hardware: IBM-compatible personal computer with Pentium 1 processor (minimum) VGA video adapter or video adapter with higher resolution and at last 256 colours, compatible with the installed version of Microsoft Windows Microsoft mouse or compatible pointer - Minimum 8 MB working storage (RAM) (depends on the operating system used) - One free serial interface COM1...COM4 - One free USB-Hardlock interface (1.1 or 2.0) - Available hard disk capacity > 5 MB Operating system: Windows 95 / 98 / 2000 / XP
Main component parts

CD-ROM USB-Hardlock, to be connected to the PC A connecting cabel between PC interface (RS232) and control unit RC is also required. Special characteristics Extremely user-friendly, with WINDOWS user interface and online assistance Simultaneous display of several parameters for changing settings Graphic or numerical display of current process data Printout facility for all settings and process data for documentation Clear and easy-to-understand display of error messages Datalogger: measured values (process data) are saved on the hard disk The display can be set to German, English, French or Spanish, as preferred. The language of the function-related texts is determined by the application-related programming in the respective control unit.
Mobile Electronics
412
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Program installation
Windows 95 / 98 / 2000 / XP 1. Using the RUN function in the Start menu, start SETUP. EXE in the English/Install directory on the CD-ROM. SETUP. EXE can also be started directly from the CD-ROM with the Explorer. All further instructions are provided on the screen. 2. Using the RUN function in the Start menu, start CBNSETUP.EXE in the English/Install directory on the CD-ROM. CBNSETUP.EXE can also be started directly from the CD-ROM with the Explorer. Select CRYPTOBOX-USB in the online dialogue. All further instructions are provided on the screen. Note: System administrator rights will be needed to install the BODEM software on Windows 2000 and Windows XP. If the software is installed without system administrator rights, the hardlock will not be recognized and the BODEM functions will only work to a limited extent. You may find a present driver fot the dongle in the internet under www.boschrexroth.com/bodem-driver.
Ordering Code
BODEM / 24
Software CD-ROM and Hardlock Version 24 BODEM
Pin Layout
COM1, COM2 COM3 or COM4 2 ) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
RS232 interface RC control unit (see RD 95200)

TxD RxD
Diagnostic BODEMsocket connection cable 3) 1 ) C D B E A must not be used
+UB
1)
Ordering designation for the Diagnostics Socket: Metalock-Bantam UTG012-8S 8-pin socket (Manufacturer: FCI) Mat. No.: 09831291 comprising: FCI Ordering Designation Socket UTG012-8S 8 female contacts RC16M23K Cable clip UTG12PG Dust cap UTP12DCG The diagnostics socket is not included in the supply. Available from Rexroth on request.
Important: When connecting the control unit RC with the PC, please use only the BODEM connecting cable. The BB-3 connecting cable must not be used. Wrong connecting cables or mismatched wiring can lead to destruction of the PC interface. Note: The control unit and the PC must be switched off when connecting or disconnecting the BODEM connecting cable.
2) 3)
Sub-D connector, 9-pin Available from Rexroth on request.
Mobile Electronics
413
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

BODAS Controller RC
Series 2 For open and closed-loop control of hydraulic components
Component of BODAS system for mobile applications Robust design meeting specications for mobile applications High electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Inputs and outputs with fault detection Safety features such as redundant inputs and central safety cut-off for all outputs Pulse-width-modulated (PWM) solenoid currents for minimum hysteresis Closed-loop control of solenoid currents, i.e. not dependent on voltage and temperature Sturdy, sealed alumi num housing Watertight with suitable mating connector
Main components Powerful 16-bit microcontroller module Protected watchdog for program run monitoring Serial data interface for diagnostics, parameterization and display of process variables CAN bus interface Power supply and ground connections for potentiometers and sensors
Mobile Electronics
414
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code and description

Analog voltages in the range 0...5 V, currents from 0...20 mA, frequencies from 0 Hz...10 kHz and switching information are processed as input signals. The inputs are protected against overvoltage and electrical interference. The voltage inputs can be monitored to detect any broken wires or short circuits. The proportional solenoid outputs are pulse-width-modulated (PWM) and optimally adapted for proportional control of axial piston units and valves to ensure high accuracy and minimum hysteresis. The switch outputs are designed for the direct switching of relays, lamps and switch solenoids. The serial interface RS232 permits the connection either of the BB-3 control panel (RE 29 798 and RE 95 080) or a laptop with BODEM software for personal computers (RE 95 085) for service functions such as diagnostics, parameterization or display of process variables. CAN bus interfaces are available with all BODAS Controller RC for exchanging data with other bus users or electronic systems (e.g. RC or RCE, joysticks, diesel engine injection, display). The CAN bus interfaces can each be run with different protocols. BODAS Standard programs are available for the BODAS Controller software. If more extensive functions are required, special program packages for specific applications can also be compiled using a program library and adapted to the application in question with the aid of service tools. Programming with BODAS-design (RE 95 110) is also possible. Combined with pumps, motors, valves, sensors, transducers and actuators from Rexroth, BODAS Controller RC and corresponding software can be used to create complete system solutions. The BODAS CAN-I/O extension module RCE serves to provide an inexpensive I/O extension of a controller, in the event that the number of controller inputs and outputs is insufficient for the intended application. Connection to the master controller is established via a CAN interface using the CANopen protocol. The BODAS CAN-I/ O extension module RCE is delivered with standard software. Parameters can be configured with a default routine in CANopen using Service Data Objects (SDO). Details are available in the electronic datasheet (EDS).
RC
01 02 03
2
04 05
Type 01 BODAS Controller CAN extension module without extension I/O-extension Design 1. digit = no. of proportional outputs 2. digit = no. of 03 switch outputs RC Series 04 Index RC2-2, 4-4, 6-9, 12-18 RCE12-4 RCE
RC
02
2-2 4-4 6-9 12-4 12-18
05
0 2
Note: The BODAS Controller cannot operate without software. BODAS Standard software and programs for specific applications are available from Rexroth.
The BODAS Controller RC are used for the programmable control of proportional solenoids and additional switching functions. They can therefore be used for both simple and complex open and closed-loop control, e.g. for hydrostatic travel drives, work hydraulics or transmission control in mobile machinery. BODAS Controller RC were specially developed for use in mobile machinery, and satisfy the relevant safety requirements with regard to ambient temperature, tightness, resistance to shock and vibration, as well as electromagnetic compatibility (EMC). Internally, BODAS Controller RC comprise a powerful 16-bit microcontroller and all input and output circuitry.
Mobile Electronics
415
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Controller Nominal voltage Residual ripple (DIN 40839, Part 1) Supply voltage, permitted range Current consumption without load with load, max. Fuse internal: external: for switch and proportional solenoid outputs for electronics and sensors Stabilized voltage source e.g. for setpoint potentiometer 1-5 k with current monitoring: with voltage monitoring: Stabilized voltage source e.g. for setpoint potentiometer 1-5 k Analog voltage inputs (may also be used as switch input)1)2) Analog current inputs (may also be used as switch input)1) Analog resistor inputs Switch inputs (may be used as analog voltage input) High active only Switch between high/low active Low active only Frequency inputs (may be used as switch input)1) for DSM 1-10 Proportional solenoid outputs (PWM) Current range Pulse frequency 12 and 24 V max. 2 V 8...32 V mA A RC2-2 250 8 8 1 2 2 2 2 4 2 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 2 RC4-4 400 15 15 1 2 2 5 4 6 6 1 5 3 4 4 4 4 2 2 1 1 2 RC6-9 400 18 20 1 4 2 2 8 4 8 8 2 6 5 6 2 4 6 9 6 3 1 1 2 RC12-18 800 36 2x20 2x1 8 4 4 16 8 12 12 10 12 4 8 12 18 12 6 2 2 2 RCE12-4 400 19 20 1 1 1 1 10 5 2 14 7 7 2 12 12 12 6 2 4 1 1 1
AT AT 5 V 0,1 V 15 mA 20 mA 100 mA 8 V 0,25 V 100 mA 0...5 V 0...8 V 0...20 mA 900 ... 1800 low < 1,5 V; high > 4,5 V low < 1,5 V; high > 4,5 V low < 1,5 V; high > 4,5 V low < 1,5 V; high > 4,5 V 0...10 kHz; > 1 Vrms 0...5 kHz 0...1,8 A 0...2,3 A 100...400 Hz 100, 160 oder 220 Hz 100, 167, 250, 333 Hz max. 20 mA max. 1,3 A max. 2 A max. 2,6 A 0...5 V 0...10 V
Switch outputs (MOSFET)
Analog voltage outputs
Interfaces RS 232 C CAN 2.0 B ISO 11898 red / green LED indicators Fault detection for broken wires and short circuit Analog inputs 3) Proportional solenoid outputs Protection against short circuit to supply voltage and ground for all inputs and outputs 4) Reverse polarity protection supply / battery
Mobile Electronics
416
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical Data
Controller Microcontroller Clock frequency Memory capacities RAM Flash-EPROM EEPROM Software installation download to ash memory Electromagnetic compatibility Spurious interference (motor vehicles directive 95/54/EG) Line-bound interference (ISO 7637-1/-2/-3) Load Dump max. dissipated loss Operating temperature, housing Storage temperature, housing Vibration resistance: Sinusoidal vibration (IEC 60068-2-6) Random vibration (IEC 60068-2-36) Random vibration (IEC 60068-2-64) Shock resistance: Transport shock (IEC 60068-2-27) Continuous shock (IEC 60068-2-29) Resistance to moisture (IEC 60068-2-30Db; Variant 2) Resistance to salt spray (IEC 60068-2-11) (IEC 60068-2-52) Type of protection (DIN / EN 60529) with fitted mating connector Housing material Weight Outer dimensions RC2-2 C164CI 20 128 256 2 RC4-4 C167CS 40 256 512 8 RC6-9 C167CS 40 256 512 8 RC12-18 2xC167CS 40 512 1024 16 Standard software 8,0 RCE12-4
MHz k Byte k Byte k Byte
100 Vrms/m; (Details on request) Values on request max. 70 V W at 32 V -40...85C -40...85C 10 g / 57...2000 Hz 20 Cycles per axis 10 Cycles per axis 0,05g2 / Hz 30 min per axis 0,05g2 / Hz 30 min per axis 15 g / 11 ms 3x in each direction (pos./neg.) and in each axis 25 g / 6 ms 1000x in each direction (pos./neg.) and in each axis 95 % (+25C bis +55C)
8,0
8,0
8,25
16,5
0,5 114 204 45 1
0,7 187 202 45 1
0,7 187 202 45 1 1
1,5 187 202 83 2 2
72 h, 35C, 5% NaCl 72 h, 35C, 5% NaCl IP 65 Diecast aluminum approx. kg Length (in mm) Width (in mm) Height (in mm) 52-pin 28-pin
0,7 187 202 45 1 1
Mating connector
1 2
) switched with supply voltage ) not for RCE 3 ) For RCE with sensor signal 0,5...4,5/7,5 VDC only 4 ) For RCE the frequency inputs are not continuously protected against short circuits to the battery voltage of 24 V
Mobile Electronics
417
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Analog amplier RA
For control of hydraulic components Series 10
The electronic analog amplier activates up to two proportional solenoids and a switching function: Optional deadlock of actuation for proportional solenoids Supply voltage for external setpoint potentiometer Monitoring of setpoint potentiometer for cable breakage and short circuit Externally actuated switching output Error output Separately adjustable time for each rising and falling ramp on solenoid Overload protection, overvoltage protection, conditional shortcircuit protection Separately adjustable Imin and Imax for every solenoid Externally adjustable PWM frequency
Description
The analog amplier activates up to two proportional solenoids. The specied control voltage is processed in the amplier as an input variable. The analog amplier provides a regulated electric current as an output variable for actuation of proportional solenoids. Amplier outputs for proportional solenoids are activated through a deadband of approx. 5% of the maximum setpoint voltage at the input, i.e. the minimum output current is applied. The level of this minimum output current can be adjusted separately for both proportional outputs using a trimming potentiometer. If the setpoint voltage at the input is increased, the output current for each respective proportional solenoid increases linearly. The maximum output current can also be separately adjusted using a trimming potentiometer for the outputs. The gradient of the output curve is inuenced by this. The analog amplier contains time ramp functions which can be used to adjust the period in which the output current can be adapted to match a modied setpoint. The ramp time adjustment range extends from 100 ms to 10 s. The time ramp functions can be adjusted using trimming potentiometers for each solenoid.
Service options
The RA10/10 analog amplier is used to actuate an individual proportional solenoid. The RA21/10 analog amplier can be used to actuate two proportional solenoids in a single device (for example a reversible axial piston unit or a valve section with separate actuation of the proportional solenoids) or to actuate two devices independently of each other (for example two individual axial piston units or valves).
Mobile Electronics
418
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
RA
Type Analog amplier Design 1. digit = no. of proportional outputs 2. digit = no. of switching outputs Series 2-1 1-0 RA
1 Index 0
Material numbers
Analog amplifier RA RA RA 2-1 1-0 / / 10 10 Material number R902091800 R902091900
Mating Connector
Order designation for Bosch 25-pin mating connector consisting of: Designation Handle shell, angled Contact carrier Screw for contact carrier Flat sealing ring for screws Locking piece, lilac color Clamping collar, large 2 screws for clamping collar Sleeve, angled, 18 mm Seal for contact carrier Clamping band for sleeve 25 contacts Material number Bosch 1 928 401 013 Bosch 1 928 400 952 Bosch 1 928 491 082 Bosch 1 928 300 198 Bosch 1 928 401 566 Bosch 1 928 400 890 Bosch 1 928 491 151 Bosch 1 928 300 284 Bosch 1 928 300 191 Bosch 1 928 401 280 AMP 927775-3
The mating connector is not included in supply. It is available from Rexroth with material number R902603063.
Mobile Electronics
419
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
RA1-0 Nominal voltage Residual ripple (DIN 40839, Section 1) Supply voltage, perm. range Current consumption Without load With load, max. Fuse Internal: External: For switching & proportional solenoid outputs and for electronics Potentiometer supply voltage (for setpoint potentiometer 25 k) Voltage input (differential amplifier) (setpoint voltage) Switch input Proportional solenoid outputs (PWM) Current range Pulse frequency Switch output (MOSFET) LED displays: Red Green Yellow Yellow Error detection Potentiometer: For broken wires and short circuit (With exception of wiper) Proportional solenoid outputs: Current overload limit Supply voltage: Undervoltage monitoring Short-circuit resistant To supply voltage and ground for all inputs and outputs (Exception: potentiometer supply 4.0 V to supply voltage) Reverse polarity protection Supply/Battery Electromagnetic compatibility Spurious interference (KFZ-RL95/54/EG Line-bound interference (ISO 7637-1/-2/-3) Load Dump Max. power loss Operating temperature, housing Storage temperature, housing Vibration resistance Sinusoidal vibration (IEC 60086-2-6) Random vibration (IEC 60086-2-36) 12 and 24 V max. 2 V 1032 V mA A RA2-1
P
150 3
P
150 6 7.5
AT 7.2 V8.5 V 4.0 V 08.5 V > 5.0 V 02.3 A 100, 200 or 350 Hz Max. 1 A Error indication Operational status indicator PWM current Channel 1 PWM current Channel 2
P
1 1
P
2 1 2 1
P P P
P P P P P P P P P
P P P P P
100 Vms/m; (Details on request) Values on request Max. 70 V W at 32 V 4085C 4085C 10 g / 572000 Hz 20 cycles per axis 0.05 g2 / Hz 30 min per axis
P P P
P P P
Mobile Electronics
420
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
RA1-0 Shock resistance: Transport shock (IEC 60068-2-27) 15 g / 11 ms 3x in each direction (pos./neg.) and in each axis 25 g / 6 ms 1000x in each direction (pos./neg.) and in each axis 90% (+25C up to +55C) 72 h, 35C, 5% NaCl IP65 Plastic injection molding PA66 GF 35 approx. kg Length (in mm) Width (in mm) Height (in mm)
RA2-1
Continuous shock (IEC 60068-2-29) Resistance to moisture (IEC 60068-2-30Db; Variant II) Resistance to salt spray (IEC 60068-2-11) Type of protection (DIN / EN 60529): With mounted mating connector 1) Housing material Weight Outer dimensions
P P P P
0.3 108 135 42
P P P P
0.3 108 135 42
1)
For suitable routing of connecting cable, see "Installation position"
Curves
For 2 solenoids with interlocked actuation (reversible mode) For 2 solenoids with independent actuation (parallel mode)
ISolenoid Imax
~0.8 x Imax
ISolenoid Imax
~0.8 x Imax
Adjustment range Solenoid 2
Adjustment range Solenoid 1
Adjustment range
~0.06 x Imax 0V 4.0 V
Imin
8.5 V Usetpoint
~0.06 x Imax 4.0 V (0 V)
Imin
8.5 V Usetpoint (4.0 V)
Mobile Electronics
421
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

BODAS Pressure Sensor PR2

Series 1 Thin lm technology sensor to measure pressure
Measuring range to 160, 250, 400, 600 bar Shock and vibration resistant Type of protection IP67 to IP69K Electrical connection versions: male connector or cable Ratiometric output signal Additional versions upon request
Description
This sensor is especially suited for use in mobile hydraulics due to its excellent features. Shock and vibration resistance, type of protection, resistance to pressure peaks, resistance to temperature shock, EMC characteristics (up to 100 V/m). The measuring principle uses a hermetically welded thin lm measuring cell which provides long-term density.
Mobile Electronics
422
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
BODASType Pressure sensor Pressure range 0 160 bar 0 250 bar 0 400 bar 0 600 bar Mechanical connection (pressure side) G 1/4 DIN 3852-E Electric connection AMP Superseal Cable output (upon request) Supply voltage 5 VDC 0.5 VDC Series output signal
PR2
PR2
05
160 250 400 600
S K
0.5 4.5 VDC ratiometr.
05
1 Index 0
Material numbers
Sensors PR2 PR2 PR2 PR2 160 250 400 600 G G G G S S S S 05 05 05 05 / / / / 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 Materials number R902603031 R902603032 R902603033 R902603034 Upon request
Additional versions
Mobile Electronics
423
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Speed sensor DSM

Series 1 Hall effect sensor for contactless speed measurement
Detects direction of speed Diagnostic signals Standstill recognition Critical air gap Critical mounting position Detects even low speeds Specially developed for the tough requirements of mobile applications Automotive quality Easy to install without adjustment work Current interface Degree of protection IP69K
Ordering code DSM

Mobile speed sensor Series Version Part number: R917-000-301
10
Description
The DSM1-10 Hall-effect speed sensor was specially developed for tough use in mobile work machines. The sensor detects the speed signal of ferromagnetic gear wheels or cut panels. In this process, as an active sensor it supplies a signal with constant amplitude independent of the rotational speed. The sensor excels not just in its ability to detect the direction of rotation, but also through additional diagnostic functions, such as: Standstill recognition Critical air gap Critical mounting position
Example: External gear motor with integrated DSM speed sensor Mobile Electronics 424 Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Type Nominal voltage Sensor operating voltage Current consumption Signal current level Ilow Ihigh Signal ratio Ihigh/Ilow Signal frequency Direction of rotation signal Electromagnetic compatibility Stripline (DIN 1145 2-5) 1 MHz 400 MHz Free eld (DIN 1145 2-2) 200 MHz 1 GHz Overvoltage protection Inverse-polarity protection Inverse-polarity current Vibration resistance (IEC 68-2-34) Random vibration Shock resistance (IEC 68-2-27) Saltspray resistance (DIN 50-021-SS) Degree of protection (DIN 40-050-9) Operating temperature Sensor zone Cable zone Storage temperature (IEC 68-2-1 Aa, IEC 68-2-2 Ba) Housing material Weight Mounting position Measuring distance Pressure resistance of measuring surface
DSM1 12-V 4.5 V ... 20.0 V max. 16.8 mA 7 mA 20-% 14 mA 20% 1.9 1 ... 5000 Hz PWM signal (see page 5)
200-V/m 150-V/m 24 V 10--5 min 195 mA Protective circuit must be arranged for in controller or externally! 0.05g2 Hz 20...2000 Hz 1000 m/s2/6 ms 12x in each direction (pos./neg.) 168-h IP69K 40-C ... +150-C 40-C ... +115-C 40-C+50-C Plastic/brass 55-g see page 7 max. 3 mm 5 bar
Example applications
Due to its compact, sturdy design, the sensor is suitable for the following applications, among others In Rexroth external gear motors In the wheel bearing for measuring the wheel speed In power shift transmission In fan drives for buses, trucks and construction machinery from 7 to 20 kW As a vibration drive for road rollers and road construction machinery
Mobile Electronics
425
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hall-effect speed sensor HDD

Series 2
Easy installation without adjustment Detects even low speeds Large temperature range Protection against Short-circuit, reverse polarity protection Pressure-resistant sensor measuring surface O-ring seal High type of protection IP69k Available in a set with A2FM and A6VM/E axial piston motors Due to asymmetrical screw attachment the mounting of the axial piston units is encoded.
Description
The HDD Hall-effect speed sensor is used for contactless speed measurement of even very low speeds of rotation. Two Hall-effect semiconductor elements in the sensor measure a change in magnetic ux caused by a ferromagnetic gear on the sensor. This magnetic ux change is converted into square-wave pulse signals by the built-in electronic system. The frequency f of the square-wave voltage emitted by the sensor is calculated from the number of teeth z on the circumference of the gear wheel and the speed of the drive shaft or PTO shaft, using the following formula: f= zn 60 f in sec-1 n in rpm z = number of teeth
Main components Two integrated Hall semiconductors with permanent magnet and amplier Robust plastic housing Moulded connecting cable
The number of teeth is specied in the catalogue sheet for the relevant axial piston motor. The sensor is suitable for installation in various devices, including the following Rexroth axial piston motors: A2FM ___________________________________see RE 91001 A6VM ___________________________________see RE 91604 A6VE ____________________________________see RE 91606 Before the sensor can be installed, the motors must be prepared for speed measurement by HDD (boss for ange-on connection). The sensor is available in four basic variants. HDD1 delivers a square-wave signal proportional to the speed of rotation and a switch signal that identies the direction of rotation. HDD2 delivers two square-wave signals that are offset with a 90 phase delay suitable for redundant speed detection. Additionally, these signals can be used to calculate the direction of rotation using e.g. a Rexroth MC control unit (RE 95050) or RC control unit (RE 95200). Both variants are available with NPN (default) or PNP output circuit. Mobile Electronics 426 Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
HDD
Type Hall-effect speed sensor Version One frequency output, One output for direction of rotation Two frequency outputs Installation depth 16 mm 32 mm Output circuit NPN PNP Connection HDD 1L16 HDD 1L32 HDD 2L32 N P Core end sleeve DEUTSCH DT04-4P-EP04 male connector Series 2 Index 0
= Available = Not available
HDD
1 2 L16 L32 N P
HDD 2L16 N P

A D
Mobile Electronics
427
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Inductive speed sensor ID

For fequency proportional speed measurement Series 2
No external voltage supply required Easy to install with xed lengths of thread engagement ensured by spacer rings on the hydraulic motors Sealing surface for O-ring seal Main components Permanent solenoid with coil Steel housing, galvanized and corrosion-protected Pressure resistant sensor measuring surface Water-tight plug-in connector
Ordering code
ID
01
R
02
18
03
2
04
0
05
06
Typ 01 Inductive speed sensor Model 02 with circular connector conforming to DIN 72585 Thread 03 M18x1.5 Series 04 Index 05 Length of thread engagement L = 25.0 mm Fixed length of thread 06 engagement L = 40.0 mm
ID Note: Due to the inductive measuring principle, low speeds result in only a low voltage amplitude in the sensor signal. Therefore, in order to record slow speeds, e.g. to detect standstill for travel drives, an HDD Hall-effect speed sensor (see RE 95135) must be used instead of the ID speed sensor. (different installation conditions).
18
2 Material Number for Speed Sensor ID without Mounting Parts 0 Sensors ID R 18/2 0 L 250 L250 L400 ID R 18/2 0 L 400 Material number R902600621 R902600622
Mobile Electronics
428
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Material number for speed sensor ID with mounting parts

Fixed displacement motor A2FM / AA2FM Size Material number Fixed displacement motor A2FE Size Material number Variable displacement motor A6VM Size Material number Variable displacement motor AA6VM Size Material number Variable displacement motor A6VE Size Material number Fixed displacement motor A10FM Size Material number Variable displacement motor A10VM Size Material number Adapter parts Item 1-4 included in the material number Item 1 Inductive speed sensor Item 2 Spacer ring Item 3 O-ring Item 4 O-ring
23-32 R902073689
45-56-63-80-90-107-125 R902065633
160-180 R902063990
45 on request
56-63 on request
80-90-107-125 R902060223
160-180 on request
28-55-80-107 R902033162
140-160-200 R902033161
55-80-107 on request
160-200 R902063854
28-55-80-107-160 R902063767
23-28 R902428802
37-45 R902433368
58-63 R902437556
28 R902428802
45 R902437557
63 R902428802
A2FE, A6VE
A2FM, A6VM, A10F(V)M
Mobile Electronics
429
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Angle of rotation sensor WS1

Series 10 Inductive sensor for angular measurement
Hall-effect semiconductor elements and integrated ampliers Robust plastic housing with moulded plug Metal inner housing and line lter for high electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) Guide lever with xing hole Special features Life span designed for more than 30 million cycles Resistant to shock and vibration Molded-in metal bushing for low-wear on lever arm The angle of rotation sensor is used for measuring rotary movements of an adjusting shaft or the angle positions of levers, e.g. to determine the setting of the injection pump lever of a diesel engine. The sensor has a robust, sealed housing and an integrated electronic system specially developed for automotive applications. The voltage supply for the WS1 angle of rotation sensor can be delivered directly by the control units (MC or RC). As output variable, the WS1 angle of rotation sensor delivers a voltage proportional to the angle of rotation. The sensor contains two internal contact-free measuring systems with a common power supply. For safety-related system solutions, the output signals are partially redundant.
Ordering code
WS1 T
Type Angle of rotation sensor Safety Partially redundant (2 output signals) Version / Measuring range 90 angle of rotation Series WS1 T 90
90
/ 1 0
1 Index 0
Mobile Electronics
430
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Type Supply voltage Ub Input Current Output voltage Ua Linearity of the output voltage Ua WS 1 T 90 / 10 5V DC 0.25 V max. 11 mA 0.5 ... 4.5 V (for 5 V power supply) 0.5 % at 45 15 0.25 % at 15 +15 0.5 % at +15 +45 2% min. 10 k max. 22 nF Supply voltage and earth Supply voltage to earth 200 Veff/m Values on request -40C ... +100C, max. +120C for 1 h -40C ... +100C, max. +130C for 16 h 10 g / 50...500 Hz 4.5 g rms/ 5...500 Hz IP 6k6 IP 6k9k Plastic Approx. 95 g 360 (spinnable) = 45 0.1 Nm any
Accuracy of output voltage Ua at 20C Load impedance to earth Short-circuit resistance of the signal outputs to Polarity mismatch protection Electromagnetic compatibility Broadcast noise (ISO 11452) Line-borne interference (ISO 7637-1) Operating temperature, housing Storage temperature, housing Vibration resistance (IEC 60086-2): Oscillation, sinusoidal Oscillation, noise Protection class (DIN/EN 60529) with connected mating plug Housing material Mass Angle of rotation, mechanical Angle of rotation, measuring range Actuating torque at lever arm Installation position
Mobile Electronics
431
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Inductive Angle Sensor AN1

Series 2 Inductive sensor for angular measurement
Inductive angle sensor element based on the differential-throttle principle Shaft can be turned mechanically Integrated electronics with temperature compensation Output signal ratiometrically proportional to angle Precise balance adjustment for zero point and sensitivity Installation instructions As far as possible, the angle sensor shaft should be coupled to the object to be measured in such a way that it is free of play and tensile force.
Material number
Sensors AN1 AN1 AN1 AN1 AN1 AN1 AN1 AN1 V1 V1 V2 V1 V3 V1 V2 V3 B A A A A A A A 35 41 36 44 28 17 41 41 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 / / / / / / / / 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Material Number R917002690 R917002691 R917002692 R917002693 R917002694 R917002695 R917002696 R917002697
Mobile Electronics
432
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
Specication
The angle sensor AN1 is used for the angular measurement up from 17 till 44. The sensor is supplying a ratiometric voltage, available with increasing curve (positive course) or inverted curve (negative course). This sensor is a typical part of an electronic-hydraulic hitch control (EHR).
AN1
01 02 03 04 Type 01 Inductive Angle Sensor Version without pin 02 with pin to the bottom with pin to the top Characteristics positive course negative course Angles 17 28 04 35 36 41 44
10
05
2
06
0
07
AN1
V1 V2 V3
03
A B
17 28 35 36 41 44
Supply / Signal 05 Usup: 8. . .12V / Signal: 0.25 to 0.75 * Usup Series 06 Index 07
10
Mobile Electronics
433
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Inductive position sensor PO1

Inductive sensor for position measurement Series 2
Axially-adjustable button with spring pretension Inductive position sensor element according to differential throttle measuring principle Integrated electronics with temperature compensation Output signal, ratiometric and proportional to position Zero point and sensitivity matched Housing with M 24x1.5 external thread for fastening and alignment Also available on request with 5 VDC supply voltage
Mobile Electronics
434
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
PO1
Type Mobile position sensor Version Without bellows With bellows Characteristic Standard Inverted Supply voltage 8 12 VDC 5 0.5 VDC (on request) Series 10 05 S 1 2 PO1
10
2 Index 0
Order number
Sensors PO1 PO1 PO1 PO1 PO1 PO1 PO1 PO1 2 1 2 1 2 1 2 1 S S V V S S V V 10 10 10 10 05 05 05 05 / / / / / / / / 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Order number R917001941 R917001942 R917001943 R917001944 On request On request On request On request
Mobile Electronics
435
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Draft Sensor KMB

Sensor for draft measurement Series 3
Draft sensor according to Category 3 rear three-point attachment ISO 730-1 Sensor element with magnetoelastic measuring principle Integrated electronics Output signal ratiometric and proportional to draft Zero point and sensitivity matched
Mobile Electronics
436
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
KMB
Type Draft sensor Load range 25 kN 40 KN 50 KN 60 KN 90 KN 110 KN 150 KN Diameter 37.5 Cable variants Cable without protecting sleeve Cable with spiral protecting sleeve Cable with metal protecting sleeve Cable with plastic protecting sleeve Plug AMP plug; 3-pin Model series A 025 040 050 060 090 110 150 KMB
1 2 3 4
3 Index 0 Cable length 300 mm 800 mm 1000 mm 1500 mm 1600 mm 2700 mm 03 08 10 15 16 27
Mobile Electronics
437
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Description
The draft sensor is designed as a bearing bolt. Shearing stress occurs at the bearing position, which is evaluated as a magnetoelastic effect. In unloaded condition a symmetrical magnetic eld is formed by the primary coil between the poles. If pulling or pressure drafts are induced, then the magnetic properties of the original isotropic material is altered. As a consequence the magnetic eld is rendered asymmetrical. This in turn induces a magnetic potential difference between the secondary poles. This causes a magnetic ux through the secondary circuit so that a voltage is induced in the secondary coils. This voltage is proportional to the acting draft. It is amplied and rectied in an integrated evaluation circuit. The sensor supplies a ratiometric voltage (25% .. 75% of supply voltage). It is available in various measuring ranges and cable versions. This sensor is a typical part of an electronic-hydraulic hitch control (EHR).
Operating principle
1 Primary coil 2 Secondary coil 3 Primary pole surface 4 Secondary pole surface 5 Steel sleeve a Symmetrical magnetic eld b Asymmetrical magnetic eld
Block circuit diagrams / Terminal connections

Supply voltage Usup = 8 12 V Signal voltage Usig = 0.25 0.75 Usup
Ground
Mobile Electronics
438
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Application software Speed control SPC

Electronic speed control and speed regulation for hydraulic drives Version 10
Hydraulic drives are often operated on diesel engines whose speed in operation cannot be kept constant due to different drive profiles. Electronic speed control is an easily configurable software for controlling and/or regulating hydraulic drives. It is used to keep the drive speed constant independently of diesel engine and pump speeds. Three variants are available: Variant A for speed control (SPCA) Variant C for speed regulation (SPCC) Variant D for speed regulation in concrete mixer vehicles (SPCD) The speed control is designed for use with Rexroth hydraulic pumps. The user can easily configure the application software for various combinations of pumps, combustion engines, sensors and equipment. The speed control is suitable for diesel engines with or without a CAN bus interface (SAE J1939 protocol for SPCA). Fault diagnosis and parameter assignment can be carried out using the BODEM PC software or the BB-3 control box.
Mobile Electronics
439
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
AS/ SPC
Type Application software Software SPC speed control Variant A Speed control with speed pick-up in the diesel engine Variant C Speed regulation with speed pick-up in the hydraulic motor Variant D Speed regulation for concrete mixer vehicles Version D C A AS/
10
The AS/SPC application software can only be used with the RC2-2/20 control unit and other add-on components (see page 5 for variant A, page 9 for variant C and page 14 for variant D). When ordering, link the hardware and software type codes with a "+", for example: RC2-2/20+AS/SPCA10
10
In order to keep the speed of hydraulic drives constant and independent of the diesel engine speed and the pump speed, the displacement angle of the hydraulic variable displacement pump is adjusted by electroproportional control.
Variant SPCA
The electronic speed control SPCA is an easily congurable software program for controlling hydraulic drives. These drives usually consist of a hydraulic pump and one or more hydraulic motors. The speed control serves to keep the drive speed constant, irrespective of the speeds of the diesel engine and the pump. The SPCA electronic speed control is designed to control a variable displacement pump in an open or closed hydraulic circuit. The following hydraulic design is used in an open circuit: A variable displacement pump A11VO, A7VO or KVA with electroproportional control EP together with one or more xed displacement motors A2FM, A2FE, A4FM, A10FM or MCR In a closed hydraulic circuit the following design is used: A variable displacement pump A4VG or A10VG with electroproportional control EP together with one or more xed displacement motors A2FM, A2FE, A4FM, A10FM or MCR Two different designs of diesel engine can be used: In the case of diesel engines without a CAN bus interface, the actual speed is sent to the speed control by a speed sensor on the starter gear ring. In diesel engines with a CAN bus interface, the speed control receives the actual speed of the engine via the CAN bus. Mobile Electronics
Speed control
A setpoint generator supplies the reference drive speed. An external speed sensor, or the CAN bus, determines the actual speed of the diesel engine. If the actual speed of the diesel engine exceeds a set minimum speed (start of control), the softwares speed control starts to operate. With further increasing diesel speed, the software reduces the electric control current (PWM signal) to the pump. This reduction is inverse proportional to the increase in diesel speed. This causes the ow rate of the pump to stay constant. The output speed of a hydro motor connected to the pump therefore also stays constant. The SPCA speed control thus holds the output speed to the desired value independently of the diesel engine speed. When the speed control is not active, the pump control uses adjustable time ramps to achieve linear adjustment according to the desired setpoint value. The time ramps are set for the setpoint generator deection (without the intervention of the speed control). SPCA speed control can be used for variable displacement pumps in both open and closed hydraulic circuits. When a pump is used in an open circuit, only one direction can be used for the drive (either forwards or backwards). The speed control can be switched on or off with a switch in the vehicle.
440
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Page 3 of 6
Power supply (24 V) See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers Controller RC2-2 with SPCA software and unit price. Emergency Stop Ignition lock Diagnostics socket RS232 PC software BODEM
RS232
Setpoint generator 1 Setpoint generator 2 Setpoint generator 2 active Speed control on/off Forwards Backwards
CAN bus interface
Control box BB-3
Error lamp
Speed sensor Fixed displacement motor A2FM or A2FE or A4FM or A10FM or MCR
Drive motor
Variable displacement pump A4VG...EP or A10VG...EP
Figure 1: Typical conguration for SPCA, closed hydraulic circuit, diesel engine without CAN bus interface The setpoint generator is in the neutral position if it is positioned within a certain range around the zero position. This range is called the dead band. A xed value has been pre-set in the software and cannot be altered. When the setpoint generator is in the neutral position, the PMW outputs for controlling the proportional solenoids of the pump are switched off (there are two PWM outputs in the closed circuit and one in the open circuit). If the setpoint generator is moved to a position outside the dead band, the current at the relevant PWM output (forwards or backwards) increases depending on the position of the setpoint generator, the direction switch and the time ramp that has been set. The corresponding proportional solenoid of the pump is controlled.
Setpoint denition
The setpoint generator species the drive speed or the volumetric ow. It can be a lever or a simple potentiometer. It is also possible to use two setpoint generators in the vehicle. The second generator can also be a lever or a simple potentiometer. A switch can then be used to switch between the two setpoint generators, for example if there is one potentiometer in the drivers compartment and another on the rear of the vehicle. Switching is only possible when the drive is at a standstill. Two direction switches in the vehicle set the direction of the drive (forwards or backwards).
Working behavior
The working behavior of the drive is controlled by three parameters: The setpoint generator supplies the reference value for the drive speed. The direction switch determines whether the drive runs forwards or backwards. The acceleration behavior selected using the time ramp settings determines how quickly the control is changed at the PWM output to the pump. The time ramps can be set separately for the deection of the setpoint generator (without intervention from the speed control) and for speed control intervention. Mobile Electronics
Safety functions
Various options are available for monitoring working behavior: Start condition The start condition is used to prevent the drive from starting unintentionally. After switching on the control unit (ignition on) the setpoint generator that has been switched to active must be in the neutral position. Additionally the direction switches must be off so that the drive can be started.
441
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Page 4 of 6
See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price. CAN bus interface
Controller RC2-2 with SPCA software Power supply (24 V) Emergency Stop Ignition lock Diagnostics socket RS232 RS232
PC software BODEM
Setpoint generator 1 Setpoint generator 2 Setpoint generator 2 active Speed control off Forwards Backwards
Control box BB-3
Error lamp
Drive motor
Variable displacement pump A11VO or A7VO or KVA
Fixed displacement motor A2FM or A2FE or A4FM or A10FM or MCR
Figure 2: Typical conguration for SPCA, open hydraulic circuit, diesel engine with CAN bus interface To acknowledge faults, the setpoint generator that has been switched to active must be moved to the neutral position and the direction switches must be turned off. Monitoring the diesel engine speed At diesel engine speeds below the idling speed the drive is switched to a xed low output speed. Monitoring the inputs and outputs The lines for reference value inputs and outputs and the proportional solenoid outputs are monitored for wire breaks and short circuits. In the event of a fault, or if the emergency stop switch is actuated, the drive switches off immediately. An external error lamp also lights up if there is a fault (if installed). The acceleration and deceleration times can be set separately for the setpoint generator deection (without the intervention of the speed control) and speed control intervention. A switch in the vehicle can be used to switch the speed control on or off. A speed sensor or the CAN bus determines the actual value of the diesel engine speed. The behavior of the drive is monitored by safety functions such as the starting condition and the diesel engine speed monitor. The inputs and outputs of the control unit (e.g. setpoint generator) are monitored for cable breaks and short circuit. The drive switches off immediately in the event of a fault or if the emergency stop switch is actuated. Faults can be displayed via the error lamp. All faults that occur can be output with protocol SAE J1939 via the CAN bus interface. All faults that occur are stored in the control unit and can also be read out later in plain text using the BODEM or BB-3 diagnostic tools. Section 9
Important features
It is possible to switch between two setpoint generators to set the reference value. Mobile Electronics
442
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variant SPCC
The electronic speed regulator (Speed Control, SPCC) is an easily congurable software program for controlling hydraulic drives. The hydraulic drive consists of a pump and one or more hydraulic motors. The speed control serves to keep the drive speed constant, irrespective of the speeds of the diesel engine and the pump. The SPCC electronic speed regulator is designed to control a variable displacement pump in a closed hydraulic circuit. The following hydraulic design is used: An A4VG or A10VG variable displacement pump with electroproportional control EP together with one or more A2FM, A2FE, A4FM, A10FM or MCR xed displacement motors The following design of diesel engine is used: Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface The SPCC speed regulator does not use the CAN bus. Neither the setpoint speed nor the actual speed of the diesel engine is used for speed regulation. The regulation depends on the setpoint speed and actual speed of the hydraulic motor.
Power supply (12 / 24 V)
Speed regulation
A switch in the vehicle can be used to switch the speed regulator on or off. When the speed regulator is switched on, the following applies: the setpoint speed of the drive is given by the drive potentiometer. The actual speed of the drive is measured by a speed sensor in the hydraulic motor. When the actual speed changes, the output signal to the pump is changed by the software such that the pumps ow rate stays constant. The output speed of a hydraulic motor connected to the pump therefore also stays constant. When the speed regulator is switched off, the pump control adjusts itself in a linear fashion using the set time ramps to reach the desired setpoint value.
Controller RC2-2 with SPCA software Emergency Stop Ignition lock Diagnostics socket RS232 RS232
PC software BODEM
Drive potentiometer Ramp active Speed regulation on/off Forwards Backwards CAN bus interface
Control box BB-3
Special function Start enable
Speed sensor
Drive motor
Variable displacement pump A4VG...EP or A10VG...EP
Figure 5: Typical conguration for the SPCC speed regulator Mobile Electronics 443 Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RE 95 300/04.04 Variant SPCD

The electronic speed regulator (Speed Control, SPCD) is an easily congurable program for controlling hydraulic drives in concrete mixer vehicles. The hydraulic drive consists of a pump and a hydraulic motor. It is used to turn the mixer drum of the vehicle. The SPCD speed regulator is used to keep the hydraulic drive speed constant, irrespective of the speeds of the diesel engine and the pump. The SPCD electronic speed regulator is designed to control a variable displacement pump in a closed hydraulic circuit. The following hydraulic design is used: An A4VTG, A4VG or A10VG variable displacement pump with electroproportional control EP together with an A2FM, A2FE, A4FM, A10FM or MCR xed displacement motor The following design of diesel engine is used: Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface The speed regulator does not use the CAN bus. Neither the setpoint speed nor the actual speed of the diesel engine is used for speed regulation. The regulation depends on the setpoint speed and actual speed of the hydraulic motor.
Speed regulation
The setpoint speed of the drum is set by means of two pushbuttons (right/left) in the vehicle. The actual speed of the drum is measured by a speed sensor in the hydraulic motor. When the actual speed changes, the output signal to the pump is changed by the software such that the pumps ow rate stays constant. The output speed of a hydraulic motor connected to the pump therefore also stays constant. This keeps the drum revolving at a constant speed irrespective of the diesel motor and pump speeds. This is achieved by regulating the displacement angle of the hydraulic variable displacement pump in the closed circuit by electroproportional control. The pump control varies according to the time ramp that has been set for the working behavior. The speed regulation can be switched off or on when starting up. If speed regulation has been switched off on starting up, the pump is controlled in proportion to the setpoint speed and the speed of the diesel engine. All displacement angles are then possible in the range 0 to 100%.
Power supply (12 / 24 V)
Emergency Stop Ignition lock
RS232 Controller RC2-2 with SPCA software
PC software BODEM
Diagnostics socket Left pushbutton Right pushbutton Funnel function Fill level sensor 1
RS232 Control box BB-3
CAN bus interface
Error lamp
Speed sensor
Drive motor
Variable displacement pump A4VTG...EP optional: A4VG...EP or A10VG...EP
Figure 8: Typical conguration for the SPCD speed regulator 444 Section 9
Mobile Electronics
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Application software Load limiting control LLC

Electronic load limiting control system for power management in hydraulic systems Version 10
The electronic load limiting control system is easy-to-customize software for managing power in hydraulic systems. The load limiting control system always matches the power input of an adjustable hydraulic pump with the available power from the internal combustion engine. It prevents overloading of the internal combustion engine. At all times the hydraulic pumps converts the maximum available power. Two variants of the load limiting control system are available: Variant A Universal software and variant B Slew drive mode for controlling slew drive irrespective of the diesel engine speed. The load limiting control system is designed for Rexroth hydraulic pumps. Setting parameters enable the user to easily customize the software for different configurations of pumps, internal combustion engines, sensors and devices. The load limiting control system is suitable for diesel engines with or without a CAN bus interface, protocol SAE J1939 Fault diagnosis and parameter assignment can be carried out using the BODEM PC software or the BB-3 control panel.
Ordering code
AS/ LLC
Type Application software Software Load Limiting Control Variant A Load limiting control for two pumps Option: CAN bus, Option: Constant speed control Variant B Load limiting control for one pump, Option: Slewing gear Option: Power mode (switchable diesel power and speed drop) Version B A LLC AS/
10
10
Mobile Electronics
445
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

The AS/LLC application software must only be used with the RC2-2/20 control unit and other add-on components (Variant A see Page 6, Variant B see Page 9). When placing an order, the hardware and software type codes should be linked by a +. E.g. RC2-2/20+AS/LLCA10
Variant LLCA
Electronic load limiting control LLCA enables the size of the diesel engine in the hydraulic system to be determined by the average power requirement. The power consumption of the individual consumers (pumps) is reduced in the event of overload. Load limiting control thus ensures optimum use of power from the diesel engine with varying loads. Electronic load limiting control supports different hydraulic layouts and different diesel engine designs. These can be used in any combination. The electronic load limiting control system is designed for controlling displacement pumps in an open hydraulic circuit. A distinction is made between the following hydraulic layouts for the purpose of control: With negative ID the hydraulic system includes one or two A11VO displacement pumps or displacement double pumps A8VO or A20VO, with hydraulic power and load limiting controllers (LG1, LE, LA1) respectively. Each pump is adjusted for 100% of the available diesel power. The control unit controls the pump controller (LE) and/or the pressure-reduction valves (DRE) directly; the latter turn down the setting on the pump power controller (LG1, LA1) by means of an increased pilot pressure. With positive ID the hydraulic system includes one or two A10VO displacement pumps with an EP/EK pump controller. The total installed pump capacity exceeds the diesel engine power. The control unit controls the pressure reduction valves (DRE) which in turn override the control pressures at the pumps, thereby reducing the ow rate. A third, uncontrolled pump can be used with both hydraulic layouts. This pump is prioritized in the system, and thus receives the power it requires with no reduction. Whatever power remains available is then divided between pumps 1 and 2. Two different designs of diesel engine can be used: In the case of diesel engines without a CAN bus interface, the control unit receives the diesel engines rated speed from an angle sensor (accelerator pedal position as rated speed) or from a xed speed value set in the control unit. The actual speed is measured using a speed sensor on the starter ring gear. In the case of diesel engines with a CAN bus interface the control unit receives the necessary data for load limiting control (rated and actual speed and/or torque and engine temperature) directly via the CAN bus. It is also possible to use a combination of analog sensors and CAN bus data.
Mobile Electronics
446
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

See Section 16 for applicable RC2-2 control unit Preferred/Spotlight part numbers with LLCA software and unit price. Error lamp BODEM PC software BB-3 control panel
Speed sensor
Angle sensor
Diesel engine without CAN interface
Pumps A8VOLA1 or A11VOLG1 / LE or A20VOLG1 / LE or A10VOEP / EK
Optional third pump
Figure 1: Typical conguration for LLCA without CAN bus interface CAN bus interface
RC2-2 control unit with LLCA software Error lamp
BODEM PC software
BB-3 control panel Optional third pump on power take-off
Diesel engine with CAN interface
Pumps A8VOLA1 or A11VOLG1 / LE or A20VOLG1 / LE or A10VOEP / EK
Figure 2: Typical conguration for LLCA with CAN bus interface Mobile Electronics 447 Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variant LLCB
The LLCB electronic load limiting control system works in basically the same way as the LLCA variant, but is only designed for controlling one pump rather than two. Instead, the valve for the slew drive is controlled in such a way that the ow rate for the slew drive motor is maintained irrespective of the diesel engine speed. As a result the slew drive always turns at the same speed whatever speed the diesel engine is running at. The electronic load limiting control system is designed for controlling displacement pumps in an open hydraulic circuit. The following hydraulic layout can be used for control purposes: The hydraulic system comprises the axial piston pumps A8VO or A11VO with a hydraulic or electrohydraulic power controller and load limiting controller (LA1, LG1, LE) together with a control block (e.g. M7) with a pressure reduction valve (DRE) on the slew drive spool. The RC2-2/20 control unit controls the pump controller and the pressure reduction valve in the control block. The following diesel engine conguration can be used: Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface The control unit receives the rated speed for the diesel engine from an angle sensor (accelerator pedal position as rated speed). The actual speed is measured using a speed sensor on the starter ring gear. The LLCB variant does not evaluate the CAN bus.
Functional Description
The diagram below illustrates how load limiting control works: From the rated and actual speed values the load limiting control system calculates the current speed drop of the diesel engine. Load limiting control compares the current speed drop with the denable limit values. Different limit values can be dened for different rated speeds. As long as the total of the hydraulic power does not exceed the installed diesel power, the speed drop will not exceed the dened limit values. Load limiting control will not intervene. If, however, the diesel engine speed drop exceeds the limit value, then the load limiting controller will intervene and reduce the pump power. The maximum permissible speed drop of the diesel engine can be adjusted in three steps using the power mode switches.
RC2-2 control unit with LLCA software Error lamp BODEM PC software
BB-3 control panel Slew drive spool in control block M7
Speed sensor
Angle sensor Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface
Pumps A8VO... LA1..F.4 or A11VO...LE / LG1
Slewing gear drive GFB
Figure 6: Conguration for LLCB Mobile Electronics 448 Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Application software Drive control DRC

Electronic drive control for managing hydraulic drives Version 10
Electronic drive control is an easy-to-customize software application for managing hydraulic drives. With its integral reversing and hydrostatic braking functions it enables soft start-up, accelerating and reversing operations. Drive control also provides acceleration and deceleration behavior that can be selected and adjusted externally. The integral, adjustable inching function enables the setpoint limitation to be adjusted continuously. Three variants (A, B and C) are available to dene the setpoint and direction. Variant A: Setpoint and direction set by means of joystick Variant B: Setpoint by acceleration pedal, direction by direction switches Variant C: Setpoint dened externally, direction dened externally or using direction switches Drive control DRC is designed for use with Rexroth A4VG and A10VG pumps with electrical adjustment (proportional solenoid). The software can be easily customized by the user. Fault diagnosis and parameter assignment can be carried out using the BODEM PC software or the BB-3 control panel. The control system offers a diagnostic capability via the CAN bus.
Mobile Electronics
449
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Model code AS/ DRC

Type Application Software Software Drive control Variant A Actuation via joystick Variant B Actuation via acceleration pedal with direction switches Variant C Actuation via external voltage with direction switches Version AS/ DRC A B C 10
10 Ordering Information
The AS/DRC application software should only be used with the RC2-2/20 control unit and other add-on components (see page 8). When placing an order, the hardware and software type codes should be linked by a +. Example: RC2-2/20+AS/DRCA10s
How it works
The electronic drive control system is designed to actuate a variable displacement pump in a closed hydraulic circuit. Actuation is based on the following hydraulic conguration: An A4VG or A10VG variable displacement pump with electroproportional (EP) control combined with one or more A2FM, A2FE, A4FM or A10FM xed displacement motors.
Power supply Ignition lock
The following diesel engine conguration can be used: Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface The drive control receives the actual speed from a speed sensor.
RC2-2 control unit with DRC software Diagnostics socket
RS232
PC software BODEM
Joystick HG Two optional direction switches Two optional switches for acceleration behavior Optional speed sensor
RS232 Control box BB-3
CAN bus Interface
Lamp showing operating status Start release signal for starter
Diesel engine Variable displacement pump A4VG...EP or A10VG...EP
Fixed displacement motor A2FM or A2FE or A4FM or A10FM
Figure 1: Typical conguration for drive control
Mobile Electronics
450
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

The purpose of the software is to implement simple, reversible hydraulic drives. Figure 1 shows a typical drive control conguration.
Inching
A second potentiometer can be connected to allow continuously variable setpoint limitation. For Variants A and B, the inching potentiometer is monitored for wire breakage and short-circuit. For Variant C, the values at the input for the inching potentiometer are specied by an external control voltage. In this case safety must be guaranteed by the connected signal source.
Setpoint definition
By dening a setpoint the desired speed and direction of travel are specied. There are three different ways of doing this: Variant A: joystick If the drive is controlled by means of a joystick, then the setpoint and direction of travel are specied using the joystick. The potentiometer for the joystick is monitored for wire breakage and short-circuit. Variant B: acceleration pedal If the drive is controlled using a acceleration pedal, two direction switches must also be connected (for forwards/backwards travel). The setpoint is specied via the acceleration pedal, the travel direction via the direction switches. The potentiometer connected to the acceleration pedal is monitored for wire breakage and short-circuit. Variant C: external control voltage If the drive is controlled using an external voltage, by a PLC for instance, two additional direction switches (for forwards/backwards travel) can also be connected. The setpoint is specied via the external control voltage, the travel direction via a control signal or the direction switches. If the setpoint is specied via an external control voltage, no monitoring is carried out by the drive control. Undened statuses at the inputs can cause the drive to start unintentionally. Safety monitoring must be guaranteed by the connected signal source (e.g. PLC).
Travel Behavior
Travel behavior is controlled by three inputs and parameters. The setpoint is specied via the joystick, the acceleration pedal or the external control voltage (depending on the variant). The control of the PWM output for the specied setpoint is dened in the travel behavior curve. The acceleration behavior selected by the position of the time ramp selection switch determines how quickly the control at the PWM output changes. Figure 2 shows how drive control works. The following is a description of travel behavior for Variant A. The principles are the same for Variants B and C: The joystick is in the neutral position if it is positioned within a user-denable range around the zero position (dead band). If the joystick is in the neutral position, the PWM outputs for the forwards and backwards directions that actuate the proportional solenoids of the pump are switched off. If the joystick is moved to a position outside the dead band, the current at the relevant PWM output (for forwards or backwards travel) increases according to the position of the joystick and the dened curve. The corresponding proportional solenoid is actuated. In addition, the acceleration behavior can be selected via the time ramp selection switch. There is a choice between three different types of acceleration behavior (hard, medium or soft).
Ramp selection (hard, medium, soft)
Joystick Inching
Curves Evaluation joystick inching
Time ramps Evaluation direction
Actuation pump (electric current)
Evaluation special functions, error lamp
Special functions 0V/12V(24V)
Figure 2: How drive control works Mobile Electronics 451 Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Application software Dual path control DPC

Electronic drive control for dual path drives Version 10
The electronic dual path control system is an easily adaptable software package for the drive management of reversible dual path drives. The dual path control system is available in three variants: Variant A for tracked vehicles (DPCA) Variant B for pavers (DPCB) Variant B offers an automatic steering function. Variant C for pavers (DPCC) Variant C offers additional tamper and vibration functions. The dual path control system is designed for use with Rexroth hydraulic pumps and motors. The dual path control system can easily be adapted by the user for different configurations of pumps, internal combustion engines, sensors or instruments, by altering the parameters. The dual path control system is suitable for diesel engines with or without a CAN bus interface (protocol SAE J1939). Diagnostics and parameter setting are carried out with BODEM PC software or the BB-3 control panel.
Ordering code
AS/ DPC
Type Application software Software Dual path control Variant A Use with tracked vehicles: Controlled via joystick, with load limiting control Variant B Used with paver: Controlled via lever, with manual or automatic steering Variant C Used with paver: Controlled via lever, with manual steering, with control of additional drives Version C B A DPC AS/
10
10
Mobile Electronics
452
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

The application software AS/DPC must only be used with the control unit RC6-9/20 and other add-on components (variant A see page 7, variant B/C see page 16). When ordering, link the ordering codes of hardware and software with a "+" symbol. For example: RC6-9/20+AS/DPCA10
Note
You can find a description of variant B/C on page 7.
Variant DPCA
The electronic dual path control system DPCA allows you to control the driving and steering behavior of hydraulic dual path drives of tracked vehicles. The electronic dual path control system is designed to actuate two variable displacement pumps and two variable displacement motors in a closed circuit. Control is based on the following hydraulic configuration: Two variable displacement pumps A4VG or A10VG with electro-proportional (EP) control, combined with two variable displacement motors A6VM, A6VE or A10VM with electro-proportional (EP) control The following diesel engine conguration can be used: Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface The dual path control system receives the actual speed from a speed sensor and the set speed from the throttle potentiometer. The DPCA variant does not evaluate the CAN bus.
Assignment Setpoint
A two-axis joystick is used to define the direction and speed of travel and the steering direction. Setting is carried out redundantly: electronically with an analog value and in parallel via the CAN bus The dual path control system checks to ensure that the values correspond. If there is too great a difference between the analog value and the value sent via the CAN bus, an error message appears.
The swivel angles of two hydraulic variable displacement pumps and two hydraulic variable displacement motors in the closed circuit with electro-proportional control are varied in order to control the driving and steering behavior. One pump and one motor are assigned to each side of the vehicle. Steering is achieved by controlling the pumps differently. The output torque depends on the swivel angle of the motors. At the minimum swivel angle, the speed is highest and the output torque is lowest. A synchronization control and a load limiting control are available for controlling the driving and steering behavior. In addition, the travel behavior can be monitored to increase safety and drive comfort.
Mobile Electronics
453
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price. Control unit RC6-9 with DPCA software
CAN bus
Power supply RS232 PC software BODEM
EMERGENCY STOP Ignition lock
Joystick HG
RS232 Diagnostics socket CAN bus interface Control panel BB-3
Safety switch
Light showing operating statuses Brake Reverse travel warning signal Speed sensor Speed sensors
Set speed
Engine
Variable displacement pumps A4VG...EP or A10VG...EP
Variable displacement motors A6VM...EP or A6VE...EP or A10VM...EP
Figure 1: Typical conguration for DPCA
Travel behavior
Travel behavior is controlled by two variables: The setpoint is dened with the joystick. The acceleration behavior is dened by time ramps. These variable time ramps determine how quickly the actuation at the PWM output is altered. The joystick is in the neutral position in terms of travel direction (forwards or backwards) and steering direction (left or right), if it is positioned within a user-definable range around the zero position. This range is called the dead band. The dead band can be set for both deflection directions separately. When the joystick is in the neutral position, the PWM outputs for the forwards and backwards travel directions for actuating the proportional solenoids of the left and right pumps are turned off. If the joystick is moved forwards or backwards to a position outside the dead band, the current at the relevant PWM outputs (for forwards or backwards travel direction) increases according to the position of the joystick and the chosen time ramp. The corresponding proportional solenoids of the left and right pumps are actuated. The park brake is released. Two pushbuttons are incorporated into the joystick. When deflecting the joystick, these pushbuttons can also be used for very fine stepwise increase or reduction of the maximum travel speed. Pressing the button changes the speed range which corresponds to full deflection of the joystick. When the joystick is returned to the neutral position, the park brake is activated after a user-definable period. When the travel direction is changed, the park brake is not activated. Deceleration and acceleration for the change of travel direction are determined by a common, adjustable time ramp. 454 Section 9
Mobile Electronics
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Parameter setting and diagnostics

The parameters which have to be set for commissioning the DPCA dual path control system can easily be adjusted with the BODEM PC software. For fault diagnosis and troubleshooting, the main process variables and error messages can be displayed with BODEM.
Variant DPCB/C
The electronic dual path control system DPCB/C allows you to control the driving and steering behavior of hydraulic dual path drives of pavers. Variants B and C use the same hydraulic configuration for controlling. Variant B: Two variable displacement pumps A4VG or A10VG with electro-proportional (EP) control, combined with two variable displacement motors A6VM, A6VE or A10VM with electrical two-point actuation (EZ) for the travel drive Variant C: Two variable displacement pumps A4VG or A10VG with electro-proportional (EP) control, combined with two variable displacement motors A6VM, A6VE or A10VM with electrical two-point actuation (EZ) for the travel drive Two variable displacement pumps A4VG or A10VG with electro-proportional (EP) control for the additional functions The following diesel engine conguration can be used: Diesel engine with or without CAN bus interface The dual path control system receives the actual speed from the speed sensors of the two hydraulic motors and the set speed from the speed potentiometer (diesel engine speed is not detected). The DPCB and DPCC variants do not evaluate the CAN bus.
Instead of BODEM, you can also use the BB-3 control panel for defining parameters and diagnostics.
Components Required
The following electronic components are are required: RC6-9/20 control unit with mating connector (RE 95200) AS/DPCA software, Version 10 HG405GF/11-S joystick IDR speed sensor (RE 95130) with mating connector HDD speed sensors (RE 95135) with mating connectors WS1 angle sensor (RE 95140) with mating connector Switch for external start release The following hydraulic components are required: Variable displacement pumps with appropriate control unit A4VGEP (RE 92003) or A10VGEP (RE 92750) Variable displacement motors with appropriate control unit A6VMEP (RE 91604) or A6VEEP (RE 91606) or A10VMEP (RE 91703) The following items are required for commissioning and service: Diagnostics socket (RE 95085) BODEM PC software with BODEM connecting cable (RE 95085), or BB-3 control panel with BB-3 connecting cable (RE 29798 and RE 95080)
The swivel angles of two hydraulic variable displacement pumps and two hydraulic variable displacement motors in the closed circuit are varied in order to control the driving and steering behavior. One pump and one motor are assigned to each side of the vehicle. Steering is achieved by controlling the pumps differently. Either transport or working speed can be selected by switching the displacement of the variable displacement motors to one of two values (minimum and maximum). With variant B, the dual path control system offers automatic steering. With variant C, two additional functions, tamper and vibration, are available. Two additional variable displacement pumps are actuated for this purpose. Speed and steering regulation are available for controlling the driving and steering behavior.
Mobile Electronics
455
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price. Control unit RC6-9 with DPCB software Power supply EMERGENCY STOP Ignition lock PC software BODEM Max. velocity Steering Joystick (with forwards/backwards switch)
Diagnostics socket CAN bus interface Control panel BB-3 Error lamp Speed sensor left Speed sensor right Speed signal
Slip steering Work/transport mode Stop / Go Automatic steering Position of steering sensor Autom. steering (sensor) Additional function 1 (speed) Additional function 2 (speed)
Brake Speed display
Speed sensors
Figure 4: Typical conguration for DPCB
Variable displacement motors A6VM...EZ or A6VE...EZ or A10VM...EZ
Automatic steering
For variant B, automatic steering can be activated by operating a switch on the vehicle. Automatic steering can only be activated in work mode. When automatic steering is switched on, the vehicle is steered automatically via a steering sensor. Another switch on the vehicle indicates whether the sensor is mounted on the left or right side of the vehicle.
Mobile Electronics
456
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Power supply EMERGENCY STOP See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price. Ignition lock Control unit RC6-9 with DPCC software
PC software BODEM
Additional function 1 Additional function 2 Max. velocity Steering Joystick (with forwards/backwards switch)
Diagnostics socket Control panel BB-3 CAN bus interface
Additional functions On/Off Slip steering Stop / Go Work/transport mode
Display DI2/11
Error lamp Additional function 1 (speed) Additional function 2 (speed) Speed signal Brake Speed display
Speed sensors
Variable displacement motors A6VM...EZ or A6VE...EZ or A10VM...EZ
Figure 6: Typical conguration for DPCC
Tamper/Vibration
For variant C, two additional functions are available, namely tamper and vibration. These can be used, for example, when compacting construction material with a paver. Two additional drives are actuated for this purpose. The two additional functions are activated together by means of a switch on the vehicle. They can be operated separately from one Mobile Electronics another, by activating them individually when putting the vehicle into operation. In each case the setpoint is dened with a potentiometer. The acceleration times can be set for each of the two additional functions separately. The current speed of the additional drives can be detected via speed sensors and shown on the connected display. Section 9
457
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Application software Fan control AFC

Electronic fan control for hydrostatic fan drives Version 10
The electronic AFC fan control is an easily adjustable software package for control of hydrostatic fan drives. The electronic control controls one or two fan drives, which relate to up to four temperature values and up to four digital inputs. Improved control quality reduces energy consumption, noise emission, fuel consumption and exhaust values compared with conventional solutions. Digital inputs allow the control behavior to be modied depending on the status. The response behavior can be adjusted using time ramps. The AFC fan control is designed for Rexroth hydraulic pump A10VO with ED electrohydraulic pressure control and an xed displacement motor. Diagnostics and conguration are carried out with BODEM PC software or the BB-3 control panel. The outputs are monitored for wire breakage and short circuits.
Mobile Electronics
458
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Ordering code
AS/
Type Application Software Software Fan Control Version AS/
AFC
10
AFC
10
Order information
The AS/AFC10 application software must only be used with the RC2-2/20 control unit and other add-on components (see page 5). When placing an order, the hardware and software type codes should be linked by a "+". Example: RC2-2/20+AS/AFC10
How it works
The electronic fan control is designed to actuate up to two variable displacement pumps in the open hydraulic circuit with electrohydraulic pressure control. Actuation employs the following hydraulic concept: One or two A10VO variable displacement pumps with ED electrohydraulic pressure control, each in conjunction with one xed displacement motor (A10FE or MZFS)
RC2-2 control unit with AFC software Ignition lock Power supply RS232
BODEM PC software
RS232 Temperature sensor 1 Temperature sensor 2 Digital input 1 Digital input 2 Light for operating states Digital output Diagnostic socket BB-3 control panel
Drive motor
A10VO...ED variable displacement pump
MZFS xed displacement motor with fan
Mobile Electronics
459
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Function
The fan control controls up to two fans independently of each other. Temperature inputs (via sensors) and digital inputs (via switches) are measured separately for each fan. Each fan can be configured according to which of the connected sensors are used to determine the setpoint. The diagram on page 2 illustrates how a fan with two sensors and two digital inputs is actuated. The instructions for a fan are below. The second fan operates in the same way.
Safety Functions
The inputs and outputs are monitored for wire breakage and short circuit. In the event of a fault, the maximum setpoint is set.
Important features
Up to four temperature inputs There are default curves for Bosch temperature sensors. A user-specic characteristic curve can be congured. Up to two independent fan drives Up to four digital outputs to inuence the setpoints via congurable functions Digital output can be actuated via temperature thresholds Inputs and outputs are monitored for short circuits and cable breakage Error lamp displays overtemperature warning and faults Any faults that occur are logged in the control unit and can be read later on using BODEM or BB-3 in plain text.
Setpoint Denition
The fan control determines the fans required power by reading the temperature inputs. For each sensor, you can configure the temperatures at which the different fan power levels are required. This results in a setpoint definition for each temperature input: If a measured value falls below the associated lower temperature threshold, the setpoint denition is set to 0. If a measured value exceeds the associated upper temperature threshold, the setpoint denition is set to its maximum value. Between thresholds, the setpoint denition increases in proportion to the temperature. The fan control controls the fan drive with the highest of all the required outputs.
Main Setting Variables

Sensor curves Time ramps for temperature inputs Temperature thresholds for setpoints Digital input function module Switching threshold for digital output Output time ramps for fans Minimum and maximum solenoid current for pumps
Working Behavior
The working behavior of the fan control is controlled by various variables: The temperature inputs dene the setpoint for the fan power. The digital inputs can be used to inuence this setpoint. The time ramps at all inputs and outputs determine how quickly the fan actuation is modied or how quickly the digital output responds to temperature changes.
Digital output
As well as to actuate the fan, the fan control can also be used to actuate a digital output. To do this, the temperature inputs are compared with set switching thresholds and the switching signal is calculated: If the measured value falls below the lower temperature threshold, the digital output is set to 0. If the measured value exceeds the upper temperature threshold, the digital output is set to 1. The range between the two thresholds is used as the hysteresis.
Mobile Electronics
460
Section 9
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 10 Accessories
Pressure transducers HM 18 ......................................462 Bladder accumulators HAB .........................................464 Diaphragm accumulators HAD ...................................465 Accumulator brackets .......................................................466 Accumulator accessories .................................................466 Accumulator discharge valves AD .............................466 Electronic pressure switch HEDE ..............................467 Direct operated pressure switches HED Piston type.............................................................. 470, 476 Bourdon tube type Fixed switching differential .......................................472 Dual setting ..................................................................474 Gauge isolators / indicators AF6................................478 Cast iron subplates............................................................479
461
461
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure transducer with on-board electronics Model HM 18

Series 1X
Suitable for measuring pressure and converting the measured values into electric signals, e.g. for use in measurement and closed-loop control systems Sensor with thin-lm technology Various line connectors, see catalogue section RE 08008 Accuracy class 0.5 Measuring range up to 350 bar (5100 PSI) max. Connecting thread G1/4 Parts in contact with the pressure medium are of stainless steel Compact design Operational reliability thanks to high bursting pressure and protection against reversed polarity, overvoltage and short circuit CE mark
Technical data
HM 18
Pressure transducer with on-board electronics Unit series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: technical data and terminal assignment unchanged) Measuring ranges up to 210 bar (3045 PSI) up to 350 bar (5100 PSI) = 1X S= B= R= = 210 = 350 C= V=
1X /
/ V0 / 0
0= V0 =
No options Standard version Small cubic connector Large cubic connector 7-pin concentric connector Current output Voltage output 4 20 mA 0 10 V
Accessories
462
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Dynamic overload capacity Static overload capacity Bursting pressure Linearity error incl. hysteresis Zero spread Sensitivity spread Temp. coefcient of zero (typical) Temp. coefcient of sensitivity (typical) Measuring temp. range (compensated) Operating temperature range Storage temperature range Hydr. dead volume Measuring frequency (3 dB) Natural frequency Max. acceleration Connecting piece (hydr.) material Diaphragm material Hydraulic connection Weight Conformity kg (lbs.) C (F) C (F) C (F) bar (PSI) 2 x pnom (up to 20 x 106 load changes) 3 x pnom (up to 10 x 0.5 s each time) > 1,500 (21,800) < 0.5-% < 0.5-% < 0.5-% < 0.2-%/10 C (50F) < 0.25-%/10 C (50F) 10 to 70 (50 to 158) 10 to 80 (14 to 176) 30 to 90 (22 to 194) approx. 0.5 cm3 ~ 11 kHz 10 kHz ~ 25-g (g = 9.81 ms2) X 5 Cr Ni 1810 X 5 Cr Ni Cu Nb 17 4 G1/4 (ISO 228) 0.2 (0.44) EN 61000-6-2 EN 61000-6-3
Accessories
463
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from Catalog 9 535 233 184

Bladder accumulators
Hydraulic bladder accumulators can be used in a variety of applications such as energy storage, emergency power source, compensation for losses due to leakage, damping of periodic shocks and volume variations.
1
3000 PSI (207 bar) and 4800 PSI (330 bar) rated /4 gallon to 14 gallon sizes 3000 PSI (207 bar) has ASME approval 4800 PSI (330 bar) has CE approval
Technical data
Max Pressure (PSI/bar) 3000/207 3000/207 3000/207 3000/207 3000/207 3000/207
Liquid Volume gal (liter) 0.25 (1) 1 (4) 2.5 (10) 5 (20) 10 (35) 14 (50)
Fluid Connection SAE 1-3/16 12UN 2B SAE 1-5/8 12UN 2B SAE 1-7/8 12UN 2B SAE 1-7/8 12UN 2B SAE 1-7/8 12UN 2B SAE 1-7/8 12UN 2B
Bladder Material Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N
SAP Material Number R978700573 R978700584 R978700595 R978700612 R978700617 R978700627
Description HAB1-207-2X/5U12G-2N111-ASME HAB4-207-2X/5U08G-2N111-ASME HAB10-207-2X/5U09G-2N111-ASME HAB20-207-2X/5U09G-2N111-ASME HAB35-207-2X/5U09G-2N111-ASME HAB50-207-2X/5U09G-2N111-ASME
See catalog 9 535 233 184 for complete description and performance specications.
Accessories
464
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Diaphragm accumulators
Hydraulic diaphragm accumulators can be used in a variety of applications such as energy storage, emergency power source, compensation for losses due to leakage, damping of periodic shocks and volume variations. Pressure rating up to 350 bar (5075 PSI) 0.075 L to 2.8 L (4.6 in3 to 170 in3) sizes
Technical data
Liquid Volume liter (gal) 0.075 L (4.6 in ) 0.16 L (10 in ) 0.16 L (10 in ) 0.35 L (21 in3) 0.35 L (21 in3) 0.35 L (21 in ) 0.50 L (31 in ) 0.50 L (31 in3) 0.70 L (43 in3) 0.70 L (43 in ) 0.70 L (43 in ) 0.70 L (43 in3) 1.4 L (85 in3) 1.4 L (85 in ) 2.0 L (122 in ) 2.8 L (170 in3) 2.8 L (170 in3)
3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3
Max Pressure bar (PSI) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 250 (3625) 160 (2320) 207 (3000) 160 (2320) 160 (2320) 211 (3058) 180 (2600) 207 (3000) 207 (3000) 180 (2600) 207 (3000) 207 (3000) 207 (3000) 207 (3000) 207 (3000)
Fluid Connection SAE 9/16-18UNF-2B SAE 9/16-18UNF-2B 3/8-18 NPTF SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B 1/2-14 NPTF SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B 1/2-14 NPTF SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B 1/2-14 NPTF SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B 1/2-14 NPTF SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B 1/2-14 NPTF SAE 3/4-16 UNF-2B
Bladder Material Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N Buna N
Material Number 0531610632 0531600611 0531600600 0531601549 0531601572 0531601533 0531611527 0531611603 0531602560 0531602581 0531602588 0531602553 0531603501 0531603500 0531623500 0531613500 0531613503
Description HAD0.075-250-1X/0U12S2N111-USA HAD0.16-250-1X/0U12S2N111-USA HAD0.16-250-1X/0F02A2N111-USA HAD0.35-160-1X/0U04A2N111-USA HAD0.35-207-1X-0U04A2N111-USA HAD0.35-160-1X/0F08A2N111-USA HAD0.5-180-1X/0U04A2N111-USA HAD0.5-207-1X/0U04A2N111-USA HAD0.7-180-1X/0U04A2N111-USA HAD0.7-207-1X/0F08A2N111-USA HAD0.7-207-1X/0U04C2N111-USA HAD0.7-180-1X/0F08A2N111-USA HAD1.4-207-1X/0U04C2N111-USA HAD1.4-207-1X/0F08C2N111-USA HAD2.0-207-1X/0U04C2N111-USA HAD2.8-207-1X/0F08C2N111-USA HAD2.8-207-1X/0U04C2N111-USA
Accessories
465
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Accumulator brackets
Brackets allow secure, easy installation of accumulator in either vertical position for bladder type or unrestricted orientation for diaphragm type. Brackets can be bolted or welded to the supporting structure. Rubber cushioning on straps helps prevent noise from being transmitted through metal to metal contact. Base bracket available for support of vertical mounting of large sizes.
Technical data
Material Number Description Accumulator Size 1531316017 Bracket 21 in3 1531316016 Bracket 85 122 in3 1531316020 Bracket 170 in3 1531316022 Bracket 1 gal. 1531316026 Bracket 2-1/2 10 gal. 1531316005 Bracket 14 gal. See catalog #9 535 233 184 for complete description, performance specications and charge & test units.
Accumulator accessories
Support bracket / rubber ring for 2-1/2 14 gallon bladder accumulators
6.69 4.84 8.86 Rubber Backring (1530221042) Support Bracket (1531334008) 0.55 1.38 2.95 3.94
7.87 10.24
Accumulator discharge valves

Accumulator discharge valves allow for the safe and efcient discharge of accumulators. 3000 PSI rating 12 to 80 GPM
Technical data
Material Number Description Pressure Rating (PSI) Maximum Flow (GPM) R978715257 AD P1 51F 10 3000 12 R978715255 AD C3 54F 10 3000 40 R978715258 AD C4 58F 10 3000 80 Engineering data G-95, G-100, G-105. See catalog #9 535 233 184 for complete description and performance specications. Accessories 466 Port Size #6 SAE #12 SAE #20 SAE Approximate Weight (lbs) 4 6 12
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Electronic pressure switch with integrated analog output Model HEDE 10

Series 2X
Suitable for measuring pressures and converting the measured values into electrical signal variables in hydraulic systems EMC properties allow the use of this pressure switch also in critical applications Ceramic / capacitive sensor Connecting cable with 4-pin M12 plug on housing Accuracy class 1.0 Connection thread G1/4 Parts in contact with media are made of stainless steel, ceramic and FKM Compact design
Model HEDE 10.../1/ One switching output and one analog output
Ordering data HED E

Hydraulic electrical pressure switch Integrated electronics Component type Hydraulic interface 1/4 Component series Pressure stages 100 bar (1450 PSI) 250 bar (3600 PSI) 400 bar (5800 PSI) 600 bar (8700 PSI) =E = 10 = A1 = 2X = 100 = 200 = 400 = 600 V=
10 A1 2X /
K41 G24 / 1 / V / *
Further details in clear text FKM seals Caution! Observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid used! Supply voltage Plug variant M12, 4-pin as standard
1 = One switching and one analog output G 24 = K41 =
Accessories
467
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Input variables Auxiliary energy Current consumption Measuring range Overload safety Burst pressure Output variables Analog output Switching output Rise time (10 to 90 %) Current carrying capacity Response time Max. switching frequency Characteristic curve deviation: (initial point setting according to DIN16086) Temperature coefcient within nominal temperature range Highest TC of zero point Highest TC of span Hysteresis Repeatability Long-term drift under reference conditions (6 months) Ambient conditions Limit temperature range Storage temperature range Medium temperature range Mechanical data Pressure port Electrical connection G1/4 M12 plug-in connection 20 to +80 C (4 to +176 F) at UO < 32 V 20 to +60C (4 to +140) at UO > 36 V 40 to +100 C (40 to +212 F) 25 to +80 C (13 to +176 F) U 0 to 10 VDC minimum load 2600 I 4 20 mA (max. load [UO 10] x 50 ) t 3 ms l 250 mA t < 3 ms (with response time set to dAP = 3) f 170 Hz (at dAP = 3) < 0.5 % UO 18 to 36 VDC I < 50 mA pN in bar (PSI) pmax in bar (PSI) p in bar (PSI) 100 (1450) 300 (4350) 650 (9400) 250 (3600) 400 (5800) 850 (12000) 400 (5800) 600 (8700) 1000 (14500) 600 (8700) 800 (11600) 1200 (17400)
0.2 % / 10 k 0.2 % / 10 k < 0.1 % 0.1 % 0.05 %
Accessories
468
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Programming options Hysteresis / window; normally open / normally closed; pick-up, drop-out delay; attenuation; display unit / analogue output: voltage or current 100 bar 1 ... 100 (PSI) (14.5 1450) 250 2 ... 250 (293625) 400 4 ... 400 (58 5800) 2 ... 398 (29 5772) 2 (29) 600 6 ... 600 (87 8700) 3 ... 597 (43.5 8658) 3 (43.5)
Pressure stages Switching point SP Release position, rP In increments of Adjustable response time of a switching output and resulting switching frequency Adjustable delay time dS, dr Environmental compatibility Type of protection / housing to IEC 60529 Class of protection EN 50178 Insulation resistance Resistane to shock to IEC 60068-2-27 Resistance to vibration to IEC 60068-2-6 Switching cycles min. Approval EMC EN 61000-4-2 ESD EN 61000-4-3 HF radiated EN 61000-4-4 burst EN 61000-4-5 surge EN 61000-4-6 HF cable-bound IP67 III
bar 0.5 ... 99.5 1 ... 249 (PSI) (7.25 1440) (14.5 3611) bar (PSI) 0.5 (7.25) 1 (14.5) Response time (dAP) ms 3 ... 500 Hz 170 ... 1 s 0.0; 0.2 ... 50.0
M > 100 (500 VDC) g 50 g, 11 ms g 20 g, 10 ... 2000 Hz 100 million / 50 million with pressure stage 600 bar cULus 4 / 8 kV 10 V/m 2 kV 0.5 / 1 kV 10 V EPDM/X (Santoprene); FKM; PBTP (Pocan); PC (Macrolon); V2A (1.4301) V2A (1.4305); ceramic; FKM M12 plug-in connection, gold-plated contacts
Housing material Materials in contact with the medium Connection
Accessories
469
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure switch, piston type switching differential dependent on pressure setting Model HED 1
Series 4X Maximum operating pressure 5075 PSI
Piston type pressure switch Drain port for increased repeatability Optional indicator light SAE straight thread O-ring ports Model HED 1 KA 4X/..
Ordering code HED 1

Pressure switch With drain port Without drain port Threaded connections Series 4X (40 to 49: externally interchangeable) HED 1 K HED 1 O max. adjustable pressure 1450 PSI max. adjustable pressure 5075 PSI max. adjustable pressure 725 PSI max. adjustable pressure 1450 PSI max. adjustable pressure 5075 PSI = HED 1 =K =O =A = 4X = = = = = 100 350 50 100 350 V= 12 = no code =
4X
Further details to be written in clear text SAE threaded connections NBR seals suitable for petroleum oils (HM, HL, HLP) FPM seals suitable for phosphate ester uids (HFD-R) Connection with lights light for 24V (20V to 35V) light for 110V (90V to 130V)
L 24 = L 110 =
Accessories
470
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Switching accuracy (repeatability) Switching frequency HED 1 KA 4X/.. HED 1 OA 4X/.. cycles/min cycles/min PSI < 2% of pressure setting up to 300 up to 50 (briey ... 100) 30 Falling pressure minimum 44 87 145 Falling pressure minimum 29 44 87 maximum 655 1190 4280 51 116 290 maximum 1335 4715 6745 87 145 290 Rising pressure minimum maximum 725 1450 5075 Rising pressure minimum maximum 1450 5075 7250
Pressure at drain connection
Setting ranges for HED 1 KA 4X/.. all values in PSI Pressure rating 1450 5075 7250 Max. operating pressure (briey) 8700 8700 8700
Setting ranges for HED 1 OA 4X/.. all values in PSI Pressure rating 725 1450 5075 Electrical connection Contact loading AC voltage DC voltage Insulation Weight (approx.) kg (lbs.) Max. operating pressure (briey) 1160 5075 5075
Conduit connection max. cable dia. 0.43 in Plug-in connector 460 V; 15 A 40 V; 1.0 A or 125 V; 0.4 A or 250 V; 0.2 A Exceeds NEMA class B 1.2 (2.6)
With higher DC voltages arc suppression is recommended to increase working life
Accessories
471
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Bourdon tube type pressure switch with xed switching pressure differential Model HED 2
Bourdon tube type pressure switch Available with or without light Freewheeling key lock adjustment Highly resistant to contamination SAE straight thread port connection Highly accurate No internal leakage (Bourdon tube) Fixed switching differential, dependent on pressure range
HED 2 OA 2X/..
Ordering code HED 2 OA 2X

Series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: externally interchangeable) Max. adjustment pressure ... 725 PSI Max. adjustment pressure ... 1450 PSI Max. adjustmant pressure ... 2900 PSI Max. adjustment pressure ... 5800 PSI = 2X 12 = = 25 = 100 = 200 = 400 No code = L24 = L110 = No code =
Further details to be written in clear text SAE threaded connections Without light Light for 24V (20V to 35V) light for 110V (90V to 130V) Conduit connection
Accessories
472
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Switching accuracy (repeatability) Setting accuracy (to scale) Switching frequency Setting range Fixed switching differential over complete setting range in PSI 7.3 14.5 22.0 58.0 87.0 Falling pressure in PSI minimum 22 58 87 145 290 maximum 365 915 1450 2900 5800 minimum 29 73 109 203 377 Rising pressure in PSI maximum 370 930 1470 2960 5890 < 1 % of setting range 2 % of max. setting pressure Up to 30 cycles/minute
Pressure rating 365 915 1450 2900 5800
Max. operating pressure in PSI 435 1015 1600 3050 6090
Electrical connection (Parts supplied as loose items) Contact load AC voltage DC voltage Insulation to DIN 40 050 Weight kg (lbs.)
Conduit connection Pg 11 [max. cable dia. 0.43 in (11 mm)] 380 V; 10 A 25 V; 1.0 A or 125 V; 0.2 A or 250 V; 0.1 A Exceeds NEMA class B (IP 65) 1.0 (2.2)
DC voltages with inductive load, arc suppression is recommended to increase service life.
Note for bourdon tube pressure switch application Bourdon tube pressure switches should be shock mounted to avoid mechanical vibrations. To compensate for pump pulsation, we recommend the use of small diameter hose, 0.1" (2 mm) for pressure switch connection, approximately 3.28 ft (1 meter) long.
Accessories
473
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Bourdon tube pressure switch, innitely variable switching pressure differential Model HED 3
Bourdon tube type pressure switch Available with or without light Highly resistant to contamination SAE straight thread port connection Highly accurate No internal leakage (Bourdon tube) Variable pressure differential, selectable via two independent adjustments
HED 3 OA 3X/..
Ordering code HED 3 OA 3X

Series 30 to 39 (30 to 39: externally interchangeable) Max. adjustment pressure ... 365 PSI Max. adjustment pressure ... 915 PSI Max. adjustment pressure ... 1450 PSI Max. adjustment pressure ... 2900 PSI Max. adjustment pressure ... 5800 PSI = 3X = 25 = 63 = 100 = 200 = 400
*
Further details to be written in clear text 12 = No Code = No Code L110 = No Code = = SAE threaded connections Without lockable cap Without light Light for 110V (90V to 130V) Conduit connection
Accessories
474
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Switching accuracy Switching frequency Setting range Fixed switching differential over complete setting range in PSI 14.5 340 29.0 855 43.5 1365 116 2755 175 5510 AC voltage DC voltage Insulation to DIN 40 050 Weight kg (lbs.) Falling pressure in PSI minimum 22 58 87 145 290 380 V; 10 A 25 V; 1.0 A or 125 V; 0.2 A or 250 V; 0.1 A Exceeds NEMA class B (IP 65) 0.8 (1.8) maximum 365 915 1450 2900 5800 minimum 36 87 130 260 365 Rising pressure in PSI maximum 375 945 1495 3015 5975 < 1 % of pressure setting range Up to 30 cycles/minute
Pressure rating 365 915 1450 2900 5800 Contact load
Max. operating pressure in PSI 435 1015 1600 3050 6090
DC voltages with inductive load, arc suppression is recommended to increase service life.
Notes on application of bourdon tube pressure switches Bourdon tube pressure switches should be shock mounted to avoid mechanical vibrations. To compensate for pump pulsation, we recommend the use of small diameter hoses 0.1" (2 mm), approximately 3.28 ft (1 meter) long for pressure switch connection.
Accessories
475
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hydro-electric pressure switch Model HED 8

Component series 2X Max. working pressure up to 630 bar (9100 PSI)
For subplate mounting For in-pipe installation For ange connection, position of ports to ISO 16873 As vertical stacking element, position of ports to DIN 24340 form A In horizontal stacking assemblies Five pressure stages, optional Four adjustment elements, optional: Spindle with hexagon socket, with or without protective cap (protective cap sealable) Spindle with hexagon socket and scale, with or without protective cap Rotary knob with scale Lockable rotary knob with scale
Model HED 8 Cable socket with circuitry (indicator lamp) (separate order)
Ordering data
1)
HED 8
Piston type pressure switch Flange connection (ISO 16873) Subplate mounting In-pipe installation
2)
2X /
K14
*
Further details in clear text Seal material No code = NBR seals V= FKM seals (other seals on enquiry) Caution! Observe compatibility of seals with hydraulic fluid used!
= OH = OP = OA = 2X
Component series 20 to 29 (20 to 29: unchanged installation and connection dimensions) Max. set pressure 50 bar Max. set pressure 100 bar Max. set pressure 200 bar Max. set pressure 350 bar Max. set pressure 630 bar 3)
= 50 = 100 = 200 = 350 = 630
No code = S= A 6) = AS 6) = KS 5; 6) = KW 6) =
Electrical connection Without cable socket = K14 4) Individual connection with component plug to DIN EN 175301-803
1)
Spindle without scale, without protective cap Spindle without scale, with protective cap Spindle with scale, without protective cap Spindle with scale, with protective cap Lockable rotary knob with scale Rotary knob with scale
The HED 8-1X/ product line will be replaced by HED 8-2X/ through year 2006. Current preferred part numbers will be updated to series 2X as applicable. Sandwich plate for vertical stacking assembly, separate order, see pages 11 to 14 Not permitted for vertical stacking assembly Cable sockets, separate order, see page 4 H-key, material no. R900008158, included in scope of supply The switching pressure can only be set exactly with the help of a pressure gauge (scale serves only for orientation)
2) 3) 4) 5) 6)
Accessories
476
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
General Weight Pressure switch Sandwich plate for vertical stacking assembly Installation orientation Ambient temperature range Vibration test to DIN EN 60068-2-6:1996 Shock test to DIN EN 60068-2-27:1993 Hydraulic Maximum operating pressure Hydraulic uid bar (PSI) 630 (9100) Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51524 1); fast bio-degradable hydraulic uids to VDMA 24568 (see also RE 90221); HETG (rape seed oil) 1); HEPG (polyglycols) 2); HEES (synthetic esters) 2); other hydraulic uids on enquiry C (F) 30 to +80 (22 to +176 for NBR seals 20 to +80 (4 to +176 for FKM seals mm2/s (SUS) 10 to 800 (59 to 3700) Class 20/18/15 3) 5 x 106 Plug-in connection to DIN EN 175301-803, 3-pin + PE mm2 (in2) 1.5 (0.06) 1/h 7200 IP 65 with cable socket mounted and locked < 1 % of adjustment range According to VDE 0630/DIN EN 61058 m < 50 Overvoltage category 3 Degree of contamination 3 ON OFF
1) 2) 3)
kg (lbs.) 0.8 (1.76) Size 6 Size 10 kg (lbs.) 0.8 (1.76) plate height 40.5 mm (1.60 in.), see pages 11 and 12 3 (6.61) plate height 120 mm (4.72 in.), see pages 11 and 12 kg (lbs.) 2 (4.41) see pages 13 and 14 Optional 30 to +50 (22 to +122) NBR seals 20 to +50 (4 to +122) FKM seals g 20 (testing time 30 minutes) g 25
Hydraulic uid temperature range Viscosity range
Max. permissible degree of contamination of the hydraulic uid; cleanliness class to ISO 4406 (c) Load cycles Electrical Electrical connection / cable socket Maximum connection cross-section / cable socket Maximum switching frequency Type of protection to EN 60529 IEC Switching accuracy (repeatability) Switch Transfer resistance 1-2; 1-3 Coordination of insulation Contamination Bounce time
ms < 5 ms < 5
Suitable for NBR and FKM seals Suitable only for FKM seals The cleanliness classes specied for components must be adhered to in hydraulic systems. Effective ltration prevents malfunction and, at the same time, prolongs the service life of components. For the selection of lters, see data sheets RE 50070, RE 50076, RE 50081, RE 50086 and RE 50088.
Accessories
477
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Pressure gauge isolator valve Model AF 6

Nominal size 6 Series 4X Maximum operating pressure 4350 PSI
3-way longitudinal valve For subplate mounting Push button operated
Model AF 6 EA4X/XV12
Ordering code A
Isolator valve Spring return Nominal size 6 Single valve For threaded connections =A =F =6 =E =A = 4X X= V= 12 =
4X
12
*
Further details in clear text SAE threaded housing FKM seals (other seals on request)
Attention! The compatibility of the seals and pressure uid has to be taken into account! Without accessories
Technical data
Hydraulic Pressure uid Mineral oil (HL, HLP) to DIN 51 524; Fast bio-degradable pressure uids to VDMA 24 568 (also see RE 90 221); HETG (rape seed oil); HEPG (polyglycol); HEES (synthetic ester); other uids on request C (F) mm2/s (SUS) 15 to 80 (4 to 176) 7.5 to 500 (35 to 2318) Maximum degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 9. We, therefore, recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of 10 75. Port P Port T Pressure gauge indicating range bar (PSI) bar (PSI) bar (PSI) 300 (4350) 10 (145) (actuation force approx. 10 N) Up to 60 (870), up to 100 (1450), up to 160 (2320), up to 250 (3625) and up to 400 (5800)the indicating range should be approx. 30 % above the max. operating pressure.
Pressure uid temperature range Viscosity range Degree of contamination
Max. operating pressure
Accessories
478
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from SUB/BMK/06.98

Subplates to ISO, ANSI B 93.7, and NFPA T 3.5.1 M R1, with SAE ports
Subplate G66/12 G67/12 G154/12 G155/12 G156/12 G174/12 G273/12 G279/12 G341/12 G342/12 G409/12 G411/12 G413/12 G415/12 G461/12 G502/12 G534/12 G546/12
1)
Valve WE10 WE10 WEH22, 25 WEH25 WEH22, 25 WEH16 SE6 FRM10 WE6 WE6 DB205X DB305X DR205X DR305X DZ10DP-4X FRM6 WEH10 DB105X
Port Size SAE-6; 9/16-18 SAE-8; 3/4-16 SAE-20; 1 5/8-20 SAE-16; 1 5/16-12 SAE-24; 1 7/8-20 SAE-16; 1 5/16-12 SAE-6; 9/16-28 SAE-8; 3/4-16 SAE-4; 7/16-20 SAE-6; 9/16-18 SAE-16; 1 5/16-12 SAE-24; 1 7/8-12 SAE-16; 1 5/16-12 SAE-24; 1 7/8-12 SAE-8; 3/4-16 SAE-8; 3/4-16 SAE-12; 1 1/16-12 SAE-8; 3/4-16
Mounting Bolts1) 1/4-20 UNC (4) 1/4-20 UNC (4) 1/2-13 UNC (6) 1/2-13 UNC (6) 1/2-13 UNC (6) 3/8-16 UNC (4), 1/4-20 UNC (2) 1/4-20 UNC (4) 5/16-18 UNC (4) 10-24 UNC (4) 10-24 UNC (4) 5/8-11 UNC (4) 3/4-10 UNC (4) 3/8-16 UNC (4) 3/8-16 UNC (6) 3/8-16 UNC (4) 10-24 UNC (4) 1/4-20unc (4) 1/2-13 UNC (4)
Mounting bolts are not supplied (separate order)
Accessories
479
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Notes
Accessories
480
Section 10
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 11 Manifolds
BM, Bar Manifold D03 and D05 ......................................................................482 ABM, Automotive Bar Manifold D03 .......................................................................................483 SP, Subplates D03 and D05 ......................................................................484 CP, Coverplates D03 and D05 ......................................................................485 TP, Tapping Plates D03 and D05 ......................................................................486 AP, Valve Adaptors D03, D05, and D07...........................................................487 LCB, Logic Control Block 16, 25, 32 ............................................................................488
481
481
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from RA 09 907

Bar manifold Parallel circuit, normal ow

D03 (Size 6) and D05 (Size 10)
Ordering code BM
Nominal Size D03 D05 Parallel Circuit Flow Range Normal (Sizes 6, 10, 16) Revision Number of Station(s) Sizes 6 Sizes 10 Material Aluminum 6061T6, 3000 PSI Ductile Iron1 65-45-12, 5000 PSI
1)
XX /
12 = SAE Threaded Ports Valve Spacing 2.125 (6) 3.25 (10)
= 6 = 10 =P =N = XX = 0108 = 0106 =A =D
2= 3=
Blackened
P
BM6PN shown
P B A GA BA BA
Mounting kit included
Manifolds
482
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Bar manifold Parallel circuit normal ow

D03 (Size 6)
Ordering code ABM

Nominal Size D03 Parallel Circuit Flow Range Normal Revision Number of Station(s) D03 (Size 6) Material Ductile Iron1 65-45-12, 5000 PSI
1)
N XX /
2 01 G M
M= Metric Mounting Bolts Gauge Ports for A & B BSPP Threaded Ports Valve Spacing 2.125 D03 (6) G=
=6 =P =N = XX = 0208 =D 2= 01 =
Blackened
P GB B A GA GB B A GA GB B A GA
ABM6PN shown
Mounting kit inot ncluded
Manifolds
483
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Subplates Bottom or side ported

Ordering code SP
Subplate Size D03 D05 Porting Bottom Ported Side Ported Flow Normal = 6 = 10 =B =S
1)
XX /
12
12 = A= D= Ports SAE Threaded Ports Material Aluminum 6061T6, 3000 PSI Ductile Iron1 65-45-12, 5000 PSI Revision
XX = =N Blackened
T A P B X Y
SP6BN shown
T A P B X Y
Subplate Size SP6 SP10

2)
Mounting Bolts2) (2) 1/420 x 0.75 (4) 3/816 x 1.50 SHCS SHCS
Included in supply
Manifolds
484
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Coverplates Parallel and series circuits

Ordering code CP
Coverplate Size D03 D05 Internal Connections Parallel Circuit (All Ports Blocked) Additional Ports No Ports Revision = 6 = 10 =N
1)
N XX /
12
01 = 12 = A= D= Blackened Mounting Bolts Metric SAE Material Aluminum 6061T6, 3000 PSI Ductile Iron1 65-45-12, 5000 PSI
=N = XX
CP6N shown
Coverplate Size CP6 CP10

2)
Mounting Bolts1) (4) 10-24 x 0.75 (4) 1/4-20 x 1.00 SHCS SHCS
O-Rings2) (4) 2-012 (5) 12 x 2 mm (2) 10 x 2 mm N=
A B P T X Y
Included in supply
Manifolds
485
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Tapping plates
Ordering code TP
Tapping Plate Size D03 D05 Connections Gauge Port Gauge Port Revision P+T A+B = 6 = 10 = GPT = GAB = XX
1)
XX /
12
01 = 12 = A= D= Blackened Port Style BSPP SAE Material Aluminum 6061T6, 3000 PSI Ductile Iron1 65-45-12, 5000 PSI
B
= GPT
B
= GAB
T
TP6 shown
Manifolds
486
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Valve adaptors
Various Sizes
Ordering code AP
Valve Adaptors: D03 D05 D03 D07 D05 D07 Revision = 610 = 616 = 1016 = XX A= D=
1)
XX /
12
Omit = 12 = No Options Mounting Bolts SAE Material Aluminum 6061T6, 3000 PSI Ductile Iron1 65-45-12, 5000 PSI
Blackened
D03 A B
(valve) P T
A D05
(manifold)
AP6101X/ shown
Valve Adaptors AP610 AP616 AP1016

2)
Mounting Bolts1) (4) 1/4-20 x 1.25 (4) 3/8-16 x 1.25 (2) 1/4-20 x 1.50 (4) 3/8-16 x 1.25 (2) 1/4-20 x 1.50 SHCS SHCS SHCS SHCS SHCS
O-Rings2) (5) 12 x 2 mm (4) 22 x 2.5 mm (2) 10 x 2 mm (4) 22 x 2.5 mm (3) 10 x 2 mm
Included in supply
Manifolds
487
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Logic manifold Logic control block
Ordering code LCB

Nominal Size Pressure Range Normal 3000 PSI (Code 61) Revision Material Ductile Iron1 65-45-12
1)
N XX D 1 07
07 = 1= =N = XX =D SAE Flange Number of Cartridge per Block
= 1632
Blackened
Additional Plug congurations available. See RA 09 907 for details.
Size 16 25 32
Position 1, 2, 3, 4 1024 UNC 1/4-20 UNC 1/16-27 NPT
Position 5, 6, 7 1/16-27 NPT 1/16-27 NPT 1/16-27 NPT
LCB16N shown
POS. 1
POS. 2
POS. 3
POS. 4
B POS. 5 PORT 1 POS. 6 PORT 2
POS. 7 PORT 3
A Illustration of standard plug conguration
Manifolds
488
Section 11
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 12 Tie Rod Cylinders
CDT4 NFPA tie rod cylinders (up to 3000 PSI) ................................................................490 CDT3 ISO tie rod cylinders .............................................492 CDT1 NFPA tie rod cylinders (up to 1500 PSI) ................................................................494
489
489
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hydraulic Cylinder, Model CDT4, NFPA Industrial Type

Series 1X Nominal pressure: 3000 PSI Non shock rating: 5000 PSI
Duty, Nominal 3,000 PSI hydraulic, non-shock 5,000 PSI Standards, Meets or exceeds all JIC and NFPA requirements Bore Sizes, 1-1/2" 4" Piston Rods, 5/8" 2" Mountings, 12 standard NPFA mountings Ports, SAE o-ring straight thread ports Stroke, Standard strokes furnished to nearest 1/8". Normal stroke tolerance + 1/16 / 0
Model CDT4
Ordering details CD T4 Z 1X S 1 1 H H M W W *
Further details in clear text W= W= Option 2 Without options Option 1 Without options Seal version Suitable for mineral oil Polyurethane seal system End position cushioning Without Both sides, adjustable Piston rod end 2) Small male thread KK1
Single rod cylinder = CD Series = T4 Mounting types = MX0 Basic version = MP1 Fork clevis mounting = MF1 Rectangular ange at head = MF2 Rectangular ange at cap = ME5 Rectangular ange at head = MT1 Trunnion at head = MT2 Trunnion at cap = MS2 Foot mounting = MS4 Side tapped Extended tie rods, both ends = MX1 = MX2 Extended tie rods, at cap = MX3 Extended tie rods, at head Bore Dia. (AL) 1.50 to 4.00 inch Piston rod (MM) 0.63 to 2.00 inch Stroke length in inches (ex. 12.00) Design principle Head and cap connected by tie rods =Z Series = 1X 10 to 19 unchanged installation and connection dimensions Port connections/ types SAE straight thread port (ISO 11926-1) Remarks:
1) 2)
M= U= D= H= H= 1 1= 1 1= =S
Piston rod version Surface-hardened and hard chromium plated 1) Pipe connection / location at base Viewed on piston rod Pipe connection / location at head Viewed on piston rod
Piston rod 1" to 2", surface hardened and chromium plated. With extreme shock loads the piston rod threads have to be selected, taking the fatigue limits into account. Rod and clevis, installed parts, etc. must always be rmly clamped against the piston rod shoulder. 490
Order Example: CDT4ME5/2.00/1.00/12.00Z1X/S11HHDWW
Note: For complete cylinder prices, use base price plus stroke adder per inch of stroke.
Section 12
Cylinders
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data (for applications outside these parameters, please consult us)
Standards: Meets or exceeds all J.I.C. and NFPA requirements. Nominal Pressure: 3000 PSI Static proof pressure: 5000 PSI With extreme shock loads the mounting styles and piston rod threads have to be considered, taking the fatigue limits into account. Maximum operating pressure up to: 3,000 PSI Static non-shock: 5,000 PSI Installation position: Various Pressure fluid: Mineral oils (HL, HLP) Hydraulic fluid temperature range: (-4F to 176F) Viscosity range: 32 to 1760 SUS Degree of contamination: Max. permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 10. We therefore recommend a lter with a minium retention rate of 10 75. Stroke speed: 20 in/sec (dependent on the connection port) Air bleed standard: Secured against removal Acceptance: Each cylinder is tested to Bosch Rexroth standards. Cylinders, outside the above parameters are also available. See data sheet RA 17 041.
Mounting Type Overview

ME5 MF1 MF2
MP1
MS2
MS4
MT1
MT2
MX0
MX1
MX2
MX3
Cylinders
491
Section 12
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hydraulic cylinder Model CDT3

Series 1X Nominal pressure 160 bar (16 MPa)
ISO 6020/2, DIN 24 554, NF E 48-016 Maximum operating pressure up to 210 bar Ten mounting types Piston : 25 to 100 mm Piston Rod : 12 to 70 mm Stroke lengths up to 1.5 meters Self-adjusting end position cushioning CDT3ME5/...
Ordering code CD T3
Double acting cylinder = CD Series Mounting types Fork clevis mounting Rectangular ange at head Rectangular ange at cap Foot mounting Piston (AL) 25 to 100 mm Piston rod (MM) 12 to 70 mm Stroke length in mm Design principle Head and cap connected by tie rods =Z H= H= 1 11) = 3 D= M= = T3 = MP1 = ME5 = ME6 = MS2 W= W=
Z 1X B 1 H H D M W W *
Further details to be written in clear text Option 2 Without options Option 1 Without options Seal version Suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 HL, HLP and HFA Standard seal system End position cushioning Both sides, self-adjusting
Series = 1X 10 to 19 unchanged installation and connection dimensions Port connections/ types Port threads to ISO 1179-1 Remarks:
1)
Piston rod end 5) Thread (ISO/DIN) for self-aligning clevis CGKA Piston rod version Surface-hardened and hard chromium plated Pipe connection / location at head and base Viewed on piston rod
=B
Location 3 obtained by rotating the cylinder
Order example: CDT3MP1/80/56/350/Z1X/B1HHUMWW
Note: For complete cylinder prices, use Base Price plus Stroke Adder per 100 mm.
Cylinders 492 Section 12
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Standards: The cylinder installation and mounting types conform to the standards ISO 6020/2, DIN 24 554, and NF E 48-016. Nominal pressure: 160 bar Static proof pressure: 240 bar Higher operating pressures, consult factory. Max. operating pressure up to: 210 bar (dependent on cylinder version and the application, suitable for operating pressures up to 210 bar) Installation position: Various Pressure fluid: Mineral oils DIN 51 524 (HL, HLP) Phosphate ester (HFD-R) Hydraulic fluid temperature range: 20 C to +80 C Viscosity range: 2.8 to 380 mm2/s Degree of contamination: Max. permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 10. We therefore recommend a lter with a minimum retention rate of b10 75. Stroke speed: 0.5 m/s (dependent on the connection port) Bleeding standard: Secured against unscrewing (Piston 40 to 100 mm) Acceptance: Each cylinder is tested to Rexroth standards. Cylinders, outside the above parameters are also available, if required. See datasheet RA 17 032.
Mounting type overview

MP1 ISO
ME5 ISO/DIN/ NF E
ME6 ISO/DIN/ NF E
MS2 ISO/DIN/ NF E
Cylinders
493
Section 12
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Hydraulic Cylinder, Model CDT1, NFPA Industrial Type

Series 1X Nominal pressure: 1500 PSI
Duty, up to 1,500 PSI Standards, meets or exceeds all JIC and NFPA requirements Bore Sizes, 1-1/2" 4" Piston Rods, 1/2" 1-3/8" Mountings, 9 standard NFPA mountings Ports, SAE o-ring straight thread ports Stroke, standard strokes furnished in 1/8" increments. Normal stroke tolerance + 1/16" / 0". Closer stroke tolerances available; consult factory.
Model CDT1 Rod End Threads, standard KK1. Other rod end styles optional. Cushions, available for all bore sizes, at both ends.
Ordering code
CD T1
Single rod cylinder = CD Series = T1 Mounting types = MF1 Rectangular ange at head = MF2 Rectangular ange at cap = MP1 Clevis mounting = MS2 Side lug = MS4 Side tapped = MX0 Basic version Extended tie rods, both ends = MX1 = MX2 Extended tie rods, at cap = MX3 Extended tie rods, at head Bore Dia. 1.50 to 4.00 inch Piston rod 0.50 to 1.38 inch Stroke length in inches (ex. 12.00) Design principle Head and cap connected by tie rods Series 10 to 19 unchanged installation and connection dimensions Port connections/ types SAE straight thread port (ISO 11926-1)
Z 1X S 1 1 H H
M W W *
Further details in clear text W= W= Option 2 Without options Option 1 Without options Seal version Suitable for mineral oil to DIN 51 524 HL, HLP and HFA Polyurethane seal system End position cushioning Without Both sides, adjustable Piston rod end 2) Small male thread KK1 Piston rod version Case hardened and hard chromium plated 1) 1 Port connection / location at cap Viewed on piston rod
M= U= D= H= H= = 1X =S 1= 1 1=
=Z
Remarks: 1) Only 1" to 1-3/8" diameter piston rods are case hardened and hard chrome plated. 2) With extreme shock loads the piston rod threads have to be selected, taking the fatigue limits into account. Rod end clevis, installed parts, etc. must always be rmly clamped against the piston rod shoulder. * Consult factory for other bore sizes and mounting options. Cylinders 494
Port connection / location at head Viewed on piston rod
Section 12
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Standards: Meets or exceeds all JIC and NFPA requirements. Nominal pressure: up to 1,500 PSI With extreme shock loads the mounting styles and piston rod threads have to be considered, taking the fatigue limits into account. Maximum operating pressure up to: 1,500 PSI depending on bore size Installation position: Various Pressure fluid: Mineral oils (HL, HLP), Phosphate ester (HFD-R) (4F to 300F), HFA (41F to 131F), Water glycol HFC (4F to 140F) Hydraulic fluid temperature range: (-4F to 176F) Viscosity range: 32 to 1760 SUS Degree of contamination: Max. permissible degree of contamination of the pressure uid is to NAS 1638 class 10. We therefore recommend a lter with a minium retention rate of 10 75. Stroke speed: 20 in/sec (dependent on the connection port) Air bleed standard: Secured against removal, 2" 4" bore sizes only Acceptance: Each cylinder is tested to Bosch Rexroth standards. Cylinders, outside the above parameters are also available. Consult factory
Mounting Type Overview

MF1 MF2 MX2
MS4
MP1
MX0
MX1
MS2
MX3
Cylinders
495
Section 12
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Notes
Cylinders
496
Section 12
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 13 Power Packs
Close-Coupled Motor Pump Groups, 220 HP Axial Piston Variable Displacement................................498 Close-Coupled Motor Pump Groups, 25100 HP Axial Piston Variable Displacement................................499 Fixed Displacement Industrial Hydraulic Power Packs .......................................................................500 Variable Displacement Industrial Hydraulic Power Packs .......................................................................501 Air/Oil Heat Exchangers ...................................................502
497
497
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Close-coupled motor pump groups Axial piston variable displacement

Flow: up to 20 GPM (76 L/min) Electric motor: 220 HP @ 1750 rpm, 230/460 V, 1.15 S.F., TEFC
M
Ordering Code
MPGB XXXH TYZ 46 XX F S X H A10 XXX XXXX K NN 1 XX XXXXX Horsepower: (XXX)H 002 003 005 7.5 010 015 020 2HP 3HP 5HP 7.5HP 10HP 15HP 20HP No. of Poles/Hertz 6 No. Poles 60 Hertz 4 1750 rpm Standard Voltage Options: Std. Volt BF EZ EZ EZ EZ EZ EZ 2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 HP B 50HZ/190/380V F 60HZ/230/460V EZ 60HZ/208-230/460V Windings: F Full Version Efficiency: S Standard Junction Box Location: 1 F1 Mounting Position: H Horizontal Pump: A10 2 HP or 3 HP A10VS018 010 AA10VS010 018 5 HP A10VS018 010 A10VS010 018 028 AA10VS028 7.5 HP or 10HP 010 A10VS010 018 A10VS018 028 AA10VS028 045 AA10VS045 15 HP or 20HP 028 AA10VS028 045 AA10VS045 Control: DR, DFR Shaft: K Keyed NN (No through drive) Pump Suction Port Orientation: 1 Down, Inline with Motor Feet Mounting Rails: NN None Internal Reference Number: * Standard orientation provided with pressure up and suction down, customer can rotate pump if required. Power Packs 498 Section 13
Bold Selections are Preferred
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Close-coupled motor pump groups Axial piston variable displacement

Flow: up to 64 GPM (242 L/min) Electric motor: 25100 HP @ 1750 rpm, 50/60 Hertz 230/460 V, 1.15 S.F., TEFC
M
Ordering Code
Bold Selections are Preferred
MPGB XXXH TYM 4D XX W S X X A10 XXX XXXX X NN X XX XXXXX Horsepower: (XXX)H 025 030 040 050 060 075 100 25HP 30HP 40HP 50HP 60HP 75HP 100HP No. of Poles/Hertz D No. Poles 50/60 Hertz 4 1450/1750 rpm Standard Voltage Options: Std. Volt OP OP PR PR PR PR RS 25 30 40 50 60 75 100 HP O 50HZ/190/380,200/400,208/416V P 60HZ/200/400,208/416,230/460,240/480V R 50HZ/190/380,200/400,208/416,230/460V S 60HZ/230/460,240/480V Windings: W WYE Delta Efficiency: S Standard Junction Box Location: 1 F1 3 F3 2575 HP standard F1, 100 HP standard F3 Mounting Position: H Horizontal Pump: A10 25 HP or 30 HP A10V018 A10V045 018 045 A10V028 A10V071 028 071 40 HP or 50 HP A10V028 A10V071 028 071 A10V045 A10V100 045 100 60 HP, 75 HP or 100 HP A10V045 A10V100 045 100 A10V071 A10V140 071 140 Control: DR, DFR Shaft: S Spline NN (No through drive) Pump Suction Port Orientation: Customer can rotate pump if required. 1 Down, Inline with Motor Feet Mounting Rails: NN None Internal Reference Number:
Power Packs
499
Section 13
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fixed displacement Industrial hydraulic power packs

Pressures up to 3000 PSI (200 bar) Flow: 1.8 to 10 GPM (6.8 to 38 L/min) Fixed displacement pumps Electric Motor: 1/220 HP @ 1750 rpm System Relief Valve and Gauge 20 absolute In-tank return lter/ller/breather Check valve in pressure line In-tank return down line Tank Capacities: 19 L to 76 L (5 to 20 gal.)
Ordering Code PP
Power Pack Reservoir Size 5 Gallon (19.0 L) 10 Gallon (38.0 L) 20 Gallon (76.0 L) Pump Size Pump Model Gear Pump Options Available: Model G2 H2 = =5 = 10 = 20 H3 =
/
Optional Heat Exchanger Air/Oil Type, Sizes 5 Gallon Air/Oil Type, Sizes 10 & 20 Gallon *Optional D03 Bar Manifold with Pressure Gauge and Relief Valve with 1 Station Bar Manifold with 2 Station Bar Manifold with 3 Station Bar Manifold with 4 Station Bar Manifold Relief Valve & Pressure Gauge * Valves not included
Sizes 004 to 022
Motor Horsepower See price list for horsepower (HP based on reservoir & pump size)
BM1 = BM2 = BM3 = BM4 = RV =
Example: PP10/G2005/3BM3
Power Packs
500
Section 13
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable displacement Industrial hydraulic power packs

Pressures up to 3000 PSI (200 bar) max. Flow: 4.2 to 20 GPM (16 to 76 L/min) Variable displacement pumps Electric Motor: 220 HP @ 1750 rpm System Relief Valve and Gauge 20 absolute In-tank return lter/ller/breather In-tank return down line Tank Capacities: 20, 40, & 60 gal. (76, 152, & 227 L)
Ordering Code PPV

Power Pack Variable Reservoir Size 20 Gallon (76 L) 40 Gallon (152 L) 60 Gallon (227 L) Pump Size A10VSO 10 DR A10VSO 10 DFR A10VSO 18 DR A10VSO 18 DFR AA10VSO 28 DR AA10VSO 28 DFR AA10VSO 45 DR AA10VSO 45 DFR 20 Gallon (76 L) 20 Gallon (76 L) 20 Gallon (76 L) 20 Gallon (76 L) 40 Gallon (152 L) 40 Gallon (152 L) 60 Gallon (227 L) 60 Gallon (227 L) RV = = 20 = 40 = 60 =A =B =1 =2 =3 =4 =5 =6
RV
Valve Options Relief Valve and Gauge Motor Horsepower See price list for horsepower (hp based on reservoir & pump size)
Power Packs
501
Section 13
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Air/Oil Heat Exchangers

Heat removal 3120 kW (2.2160 HP) Electric motor 50/60 Hz operation
M
B
Ordering Code
KOL
Design Oil/air cooler Cooling capacity (at qVmax; t = 40 K) 3 kW 5 kW 8 kW 10 kW 20 kW 30 kW 40 kW 45 kW 65 kW 80 kW 120 kW
1)
1X
M
Seal material NBR seals Design Principle Cooler with an axial fan wheel (310 kW) Cooler with a radial fan wheel (20120 kW) Component series 10 to 19 (10 to 19: unchanged installation and connections dimensions) Supply voltage 230 / 265 / 400 V / 460 V 50/60 Hz (3 phases) Ports G 3/4 G 3/4 G 3/4 G 3/4 G 1-1/4 G 1-1/4 G 1-1/4 G 1-1/2 G 1-1/2 G 1-1/2 SAE 2
= KOL = 3 1) = 5 1) = 8 1) = 10 1) = 20 = 30 = 40 = 45 = 65 = 80 = 120 A= R= 1X =
M=
N=
Only in conjunction with a radial fan wheel
KOL3 KOL5 KOL8 KOL10 KOL20 KOL30 KOL40 KOL45 KOL65 KOL80 KOL120
Power Packs
502
Section 13
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 14 Gear Drives
Compact hydrostatic drive, HYDROTRAC GFT, for xed or variable displacement motors .....................504 Compact hydrostatic drive, HYDROTRAC GFT with integrated, Hydraulic two-speed motor A10VT .......................................................................516 Winch drives, HYDROTRAC GFTW, for xed or variable displacement motors .....................521 Swing drives, MOBILEX GFB .........................................533
503
503
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Compact hydrostatic drive HYDROTRAC GFT for xed or variable displacement motors
Output torques from 5160 to 339,100 lb-ft (7000 to 450,000 Nm)
Compact, space saving planetary design Full complement planet gear bearing system Robust main bearing system Easy mounting Comfortable oil changing Integrated multiplate parking brake Low noise running characteristics Many design variants Multiplate Parking Brake As a standard supply feature a spring-loaded hydraulically released multiplate parking brake is arranged on the input end of the gearbox. The parking torque of the brake will suit the respective motor torque. Disconnecting Device If requested, some of the drive systems may also be provided with a mechanical disconnecting device so that, if time is of essence, the equipment can be towed without damaging the hydraulic system. Sealing System An axial mechanical seal is mounted between the stationary and rotating gearbox sections. This prevents moisture and dirt from entering the drive even under extreme operating conditions. Gearbox model GFT 7 is also available with a cartridge seal or shaft seal ring to suit individual application needs. Oil Changes Save for regular oil changes the drives do not require maintenance. Oil changes may conveniently be made from the outside. Recommendations as to lube oils are given in the operating manual. Design Variants Model designations 1000 - 9000 indicate basic size and design variants that are readily available to our customers. To suit specific application requirements other models can also be furnished upon request. Depending on currently furnished units and transmission ratios many drives are available on preferential terms offering favorable prices and improved delivery times. If you are interested, please let us know. To suit the required ratio the garboxes are of two- (T2) or threestage (T3) design. If so requested, gear models 330 and 450 may be provided with an additional preliminary stage and in that case will be of four-stage design (T4). 504 Section 14
Description
Rexroth compact hydrostatic HYDROTRAC GFT drives are the ideal driving components for wheeled or track-laying vehicles and other mobile equipment. They are the perfect choice for every conceivable moving or turning application. The drives are extremely compact and thus may also be installed in space-critical mounting configurations. The drives load capacity and availability is extraordinary thanks to the use of case-hardened gearwheels as well as quenched and tempered, surfacehardened annulus gears. The gearteeth design reflects both standard requirements and in-house operating strength calculations based on our comprehensive know-how and optimally adapted to our modern fabrication processes. The drives feature maximum total efficiency ratings which, inter alia, is due to the use of Rexroth plug-type motors. The drives described in this bulletin are constantly reviewed and advanced. Other design variants with deviating transmission, dimensions and power characteristics are available if so requested for specific applications. Gearbox Design Gearbox design is based on long years of experience and reflects not only the customary standard design regulations but also satisfies operational strength requirements as per DIN 3990, ISO 6336, AGMA, GL or DNV. The output torque values indicated are short-term admissible peak torques meant for excavator travel drive applications. For other applications deviating output torques differing from those specified may apply to the respective gearbox. Even in the project stage we are prepared to offer application specific consultation to customers aimed at finding the optimum drive configuration. Hydraulic Motors Rexroth hydraulic motors are preferably integrated in a spacesaving manner as flanged-on fixed or variable displacement units plugged into the gearbox. Gear Drives
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Technical data
Compact Hydrostatic Drives HYDROTRAC GFT in summary

Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque T 2 max Nm 7000 9500 13000 17000 17000 24000 26000 28000 34000 36000 40000 50000 60000 60000 80000 110000 160000 220000 330000 450000 Ratio i
GFT 0007 T2 GFT 0009 T2 GFT 0013 T2 GFT 0017 T2 GFT 0017 T3 GFT 0024 T3 GFT 0026 T2 GFT 0028 T3 GFT 0034 T2 GFT 0036 T3 GFT 0040 T2 GFT 0050 T3 GFT 0060 T2 GFT 0060 T3 GFT 0080 T3 GFT 0110 T3 GFT 0160 T3 GFT 0220 T3 GFT 0330 T3 GFT 0450 T4
30.9 - 62.6 25.1 - 55.3 16.3 - 37.6 26.4 - 54.0 77.9 - 102.6 90.1 - 137.2 42.9 - 62.0 64.3 - 79.3 42.9 - 50.5 66.9 - 161.0 35.9 - 59.1 73.9 - 146.4 23.0 94.8 - 197.0 76.7 - 185.4 95.8 - 215.0 161.8 - 251.0 188.9 - 365.0 168.9 - 302.4 320.3 - 421.7
For information on our currently available compact hydrostatic HYDROTRAC GFT drives please visit www.boschrexroth.com/gears
Should you need a special driving solution deviating from our standard product range please let us know. Differently sized units and additional design variants can be furnished if so requested.
Gear Drives
505
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
L4 L1
Frame connection
L2 D4 D8
L3
View T A Version
Motor attachment surface
D3
D2
D1
D5
A
L1
L5
L6 L4 L2
B
L3 D6
D3
D1
D2
D5
Frame connection
D4
L5
L6
D8
D7 Version View WB Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 225 225 215 400 400 350 350 450 350 350 250 250 250 200 -
A
Technical Data
Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque Tmax. Nm GFT 0007 T2 6000 GFT 0007 T2 7000/1 7000/2 GFT 0007 T2 9000 GFT 0009 T2 8000 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 T2 T2 T2 T2 4000/1 4000/2 7000/1 7000/2 7000 7000 7000 9000 13000 13000 13000 13000 17000 17000 17000 17000 17000 17000 17000 17000
Ratio i
D6
D7 Hydraulic Motor A10VM 28 45 A10VM 28 45 A10VM 28 45 A10VE 45 A6VE 55 A10VE 63 A10VE 45 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55 A10VE 63/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 28/A2FE 28 32 A10VE 45 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 A10VE 45 A6VE 28/A2FE 28 32 Section 14
30.9 35.8 43.0 51.0 62.6 30.9 35.8 43.0 30.9 35.8 43.0 51.0 62.6 38.3 47.6 16.3 22.6 32.1 37.6 16.3 22.6 32.1 37.6 42.7 60.2 42.7 60.2 26.4 32.1 37.6 45.4 54.0 54.0 77.9 88.2 102.6 77.9 88.2 102.6 77.9 88.2 102.6 92.5 77.9 88.2 102.6 506
GFT 0017 T2 2000 GFT 0017 T2 3000/1 GFT 0017 T2 3000/2 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 Gear Drives T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 2000 7000 9000/2 SL 9000/3 SL
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions, Bearing Load Ratings and Weights

See Section 16 for applicable
Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0007 GFT 0007 GFT 0007 GFT 0007 T2 T2 T2 T2 6000 7000/1 7000/2 9000
D2 D3 part numbers D4 D1 Preferred/Spotlight

and unit price.
D5 mm
D6
D7
D8
178 178 178 178 190 240 240 203 240 250 250 250 240 240 240 250 203.2 240 250
209.5 209.5 209.5 209.5 230 275 275 241.3 275 290 290 290 275 275 275 290 241.3 275 305
240 240 240 240 268 300 300 268 300 320 320 320 300 300 300 320 268 310 330
6x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 6x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 6x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 6x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 12x M16 18x M16 18x M16 8x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 16x M16 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 18x M16 18x M16 18x M16 16x M20 8x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 12x M16 18x M16 (S)
200.2 200.2 200.2 200.2 230 270 270 279.7 279.7 280 280 280 270 270 270 280 280 260 260
241.3 241.3 241.3 241.3 260 305 305 334.95 334.95 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 334.95 300 300
280 280 280 280 284 335 335 370 370 330 330 330 330 330 330 330 370 335 335
9x 5/8in-18UNF-2A 9x M12 9x 5/8in-18UNF-2A 9x 5/8in-18UNF-2A 8x M16 16x M16 16x M16 10x 3/4in-16UNF-2A 10x 3/4in-16UNF-2A 16x M16 16x M16 16x M16 16x M16 16x M16 16x M16 16x M16 10x 3/4in-16UNF-2A 10x M22x1.5 10x M22x1.5
GFT 0009 T2 8000 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 T2 T2 T2 T2 4000/1 4000/2 7000/1 7000/2
GFT 0017 T2 2000 GFT 0017 T2 3000/1 GFT 0017 T2 3000/2 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 2000 7000 9000/2 SL 9000/3 SL
Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0007 GFT 0007 GFT 0007 GFT 0007 T2 T2 T2 T2 6000 7000/1 7000/2 9000
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Weight View kg 325 325 325 325 255 290 290 290 290 142 142 142 142 142 142 142 290 290 290 45 45 45 45 67 85 85 92 92 90 90 90 97.5 95 95 100 105 95 95 W T W W T T T W W T T T T T T T W W T
10 10 10 10 12 8 30 36 44 30 8 30 27 8 43 30 36 5 8
106 106 106 106 60 75 75 104 90 82 82 82 75 75 75 82 104 75 75
109 109 109 109 156 149 149 153 153 152 152 152 181 181 181 174 184.5 184 184
225 225 225 225 228 232 254 292.5 286.5 264 242 264 283 272 299 286 324.5 267 267
84 84 84 84 18 49 49 64 64 78 78 78 71 71 71 78 64 49 49
2 2 2 2 64 54 54 39 39 69 69 69 76 76 76 69 39 54 54
194 194 194 194 132 140 140 140 140 108 108 108 108 108 108 108 140 140 140
GFT 0009 T2 8000 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 T2 T2 T2 T2 4000/1 4000/2 7000/1 7000/2
GFT 0017 T2 2000 GFT 0017 T2 3000/1 GFT 0017 T2 3000/2 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 2000 7000 9000/2 SL 9000/3 SL
Gear Drives
507
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
L4 L1
Frame connection
L2 D4 D8
L3
View T A Version
D3
D2
D1
D5
A
L1
L5
L6
B
L4 L2 L3 D6
D3
D1
D2
D5
Frame connection
D4
L5
L6
D8
D7 Version View WB
A
Technical Data
Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque Tmax. Nm GFT 0024 T3 1000 GFT 0024 T3 9000/4 GFT 0026 T2 1000/1 GFT 0026 T2 1000/2 9000 GFT 0028 T3 9000/3 9000/4 GFT 0034 T2 4000 GFT 0036 T3 3000/1 GFT 0036 T3 3000/2 GFT 0040 T2 1000 1000 SL GFT 0040 T2 2000 SL GFT 0040 T2 9000/1 9000/2 24000 24000 26000 26000 28000 34000 36000 36000 40000 40000 40000
Ratio i
D6
D7 Hydraulic Motor Nm 300 300 715 715 440 715 715 800 800 800 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 80 A6VE 107/A2FE 107 125 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107/A2FE 107 125 A6VE 107 160/A2FE 107 125
Braking Torque TBr max.
90.1 102.6 120.5 137.2 90.1 102.6 120.5 137.2 42.9 50.5 62.0 42.9 50.5 62.0 64.3 72.7 79.3 42.9 50.5 66.9 79.3 99.1 115.0 138.8 66.9 79.3 99.1 115.0 138.8 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1
Gear Drives
508
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0024 T3 1000 GFT 0024 T3 9000/4 GFT 0026 T2 1000/1 GFT 0026 T2 1000/2 GFT 0026 T2 9000 GFT 0028 T3 9000/3 GFT 0028 T3 9000/4 GFT 0034 T2 4000 GFT 0036 T3 3000/1 GFT 0036 T3 3000/2 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 1000 1000 SL 2000 SL 9000/1 9000/2
D2 D3 part numbers D4 D1 Preferred/Spotlight

and unit price.
D5 mm
D6
D7
D8
240 270 270 270 290 330 330 410 270 270 270 270 330 330 380
285 310 310 310 325 370 370 380 310 310 310 310 370 370 425
320 340 350 350 352 400 400 420 350 350 350 350 410 410 460
20x M20 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 16x M18 16x M20 16x M20 20x 18 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 20x M20 20x M20 20x M20
280 320 320 320 355 365 286 325 320 320 350 350 360 360 420
305 350 350 350 370 405 330 381 350 350 400 400 400 400 470
330 375 380 380 405 435 355 420 380 380 440 440 440 440 510
20x M16 20x M16 20x M16 20x M16 24x M18 22x M16 20x M16 12x M22x1.5 20x M16x1.5 20x M16x1.5 16x M20 16x M20 16x A20 ** 16x M20 24x M20
Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0024 T3 1000 GFT 0024 T3 9000/4 GFT 0026 T2 1000/1 GFT 0026 T2 1000/2 GFT 0026 T2 9000 GFT 0028 T3 9000/3 GFT 0028 T3 9000/4 GFT 0034 T2 4000 GFT 0036 T3 3000/1 GFT 0036 T3 3000/2 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 1000 1000 SL 2000 SL 9000/1 9000/2
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Weight View kg 290 290 400 400 400 290 290 806 405 405 425 A 881 B 895 425 425 105 110 145 150 155 140 140 170 165 170 205 205 210 210 215 T T T T T T T W T T T T W T T
30 30 20 30 33 18 18 12 43 10 39.5 15 25 25 18
82 90 90 90 80 100.5 120 151 90 90 82 82 114 90 111
189.5 181.5 220 220 227 208 188.5 226 210 * 210 * 243 279.5 237.5 261.5 253
301.5 301.5 330 340 340 326.5 326.5 389 333 300 364.5 376.5 376.5 376.5 381.5
56 64 58 58 51 39.5 59 60 56.5 56.5 57 45.5 87 38 47
47 39 50 50 57 62 42 62 57 57 54 80 38 73 64
140 140 186 186 186 140 140 399 170 170 212 A 393 B 473 212 212
*L3 = 200 at i = 99.1/115/138.8 ** Wheel nut A20 DIN 74361-8
Gear Drives
509
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers L4 and unit price.
View T L3
L1
Frame connection
L2 D4 D8
D3
D1
D5
D2
L5
L6
A
Technical Data
Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque Tmax. Nm GFT 0050 T3 1000/1 GFT 0050 T3 1000/2 GFT 0050 T3 1000/3 GFT 0050 T3 3000 GFT 0050 T3 9000 SL 9000/1 GFT 0050 T3 9000/2 GFT 0050 T3 9000/3 GFT 0060 T2 7000 GFT 0060 T3 3000/1 GFT 0060 T3 5000 7000/1 GFT 0060 T3 7000/2 GFT 0060 T3 9000 GFT 0080 T3 1000 2000 9000 GFT 0110 T3 1000 9000/1 GFT 0110 T3 9000/3 SL 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 50000 60000
B
Ratio i Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 800 800 800 66.3 73.9 84.2 91.1 99.8 125.7 146.4 800 800 800 800 23,0 1475 725 725 725 725 1025 1025 1100 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 80 107/ A2FE 80 90 107 125 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107/A2FE 107 125 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VM 200 A6VE 80 107/ A2FE 80 90 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107/A2FE 107 125 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 Section 14 Hydraulic Motor
60000 94.8 105.5 119.8 139.9 169.9 60000 94.8 105.5 119.8 139.9 169.9 60000 94.8 105.5 119.8 139.9 169.9 60000 94.8 105.5 119.8 139.9 169.9 80000 110000 110000 76.7 99.0 110.9 126.9 149.9 185.4 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 215.0 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 215.0 510
Gear Drives
D6
D7
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Technical Data, Bearing Load Ratings and Weights

Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 3000 9000 SL 9000/1 9000/2 9000/3
D2 D3 part numbers D4 D1Preferred/Spotlight

and unit price.
D5 mm
D6
D7
D8
270 270 270 330 270 330 330 270 330 330 350 330 330 340 420 380 380 420 380 460 L1
310 310 310 370 310 370 370 310 370 370 400 370 370 380 460 430 430 460 430 520 L2
350 350 350 410 350 408 410 350 410 410 445 410 410 417 500 480 480 500 480 570 L3 mm
20x M20x1.5 16x M20 16x M20 20x M20 16x M20 16x M20 20x M20 16x M20 20x M20x1.5 20x M20x1.5 24x M24x2 20x M20x1.5 20x M20x1.5 20x M20 24x M20 20x M24 20x M24 24x M24 20x M24 24x M30 L4 L5
350 350 350 360 350 365 360 350 400 370 375 400 400 450 460 430 515 460 515 460 L6
400 400 400 400 400 405 400 400 450 410 425 450 450 490 510 480 566 500 566 500
430 430 430 440 440 435 440 430 490 450 466 490 490 529 550 520 614 540 614 540 A+B
16x M20x1.5 16x M20x1.5 16x M20x1.5 16x M20 16x M20 22x M16 16x M20 16x M20x1.5 20x M20x1.5 20x M20 24x M24x2 20x M20x1.5 20x M20x1.5 18x M20 24x M20 20x M24 16x M24 36x M18x1.5 16x M24 36x M18x1.5 Weight View Co kg 425 425 425 425 895 425 425 425 520 520 520 520 520 520 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 220 205 230 240 240 240 260 370 350 405 395 410 505 T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T T
GFT 0060 T2 7000 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 3000/1 5000 7000/1 7000/2 9000
GFT 0080 T3 1000 GFT 0080 T3 2000 GFT 0080 T3 9000 GFT 0110 T3 1000 GFT 0110 T3 9000/1 GFT 0110 T3 9000/3 SL Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 3000 9000 SL 9000/1 9000/2 9000/3
C kN 56.5 56.5 56.5 62 45.5 60.5 38 56.5 55 79 109 55 55 66 108 112 85 107 85 155 54 54 54 48 80 50 73 54 62 38 8 62 62 51 25 18 48 25 48 35 212 212 212 212 393 212 212 212 250 250 250 250 250 250 A 509 B 480 A 509 B 480 710 40 20 40 25 15 25 25 20 20 -11 3 -11 -9 -12 0 22 22 0 22 45 82 82 82 114 82 100.5 90 82 90 114 130 90 90 102 165 148 120 165 120 170 282 281.5 282 276 318 277.5 300 282 276 284 254 308 308 297 300 295 323 305 328 314.5 403 383.5 403 415 415 403 415 383.5 386 423 409 423 418 419 486.5 465 465 491.5 470 529.5
GFT 0060 T2 7000 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 3000/1 5000 7000/1 7000/2 9000
GFT 0080 T3 1000 GFT 0080 T3 2000 GFT 0080 T3 9000 GFT 0110 T3 1000 GFT 0110 T3 9000/1 GFT 0110 T3 9000/3 SL
A 1080 B 950 A 1080 B 950 1560
Gear Drives
511
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
L4 L1
Frame connection
L2 D4 D8
L3
View T A Version
D3
D2
D1
D5
A
L1
L5
L6 L4
B
L3
L2
D5
D6
D2
D1
D7
D6 D4 D8 L5 Version View K C L6
Frame connection
A
Technical Data
Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque Tmax. Nm GFT 0160 T3 1000 9000 160000
Ratio i
Braking Torque TBr max. Nm
D7 Hydraulic Motor A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VM 355 A6VM 200 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A2FE 355 A6VE 250/A2FE 250 A2FE 355 A6VE 250 A2FE 250 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 160 180 A6VE 250/A2FE 250
161.8 210.8 251.0
1020
GFT 0220 T3 2000 9000 SL 9000/1 GFT 0220 T3 9000/2 GFT 0220 T3 9000/3 GFT 0220 T3 9000/4 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 T3 T3 T3 T3 2000 3000/1 3000/2 9000/1 9000/2
220000 220000 220000 220000 330000 330000 330000 330000 330000 450000
188.9 246.1 293.0 365.0 97.7 145.4 97.7 145.4 188.9 246.1 293.0 365.0 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 451.7 839.4 1008.0 1209.7 320.3 347.1 421.7 512
1100 0 1400 1100 2500 2500 2500 2500 625 1450
GFT 0330 T4 3000 GFT 0450 T4 1000 Gear Drives
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0160 T3 1000 GFT 0160 T3 9000 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 2000 9000 SL 9000/1 9000/2 9000/3 9000/4 2000 3000/1 3000/2 9000/1 9000/2
part numbers D4 D2 D3 D1 Preferred/Spotlight and unit price.
D5 mm
D6
D7
D8
450 450 460 580 460 460 460 425 580 580 580 450 450 580 450
510 510 600 640/760 520 520 600 485 680 680 680 515 515 680 515
560 560 650 810 570 570 650 545 735 735 735 568 568 735 568
30x M24x2 20x M30 30x M30 30x M30 24x M30 24x M30 30x M30 30x M30x2 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 32x M30x2 32x M30x2 30x M30 29x M36x3
535 535 610 615 610 610 610 550 660 660 660 570 570 660 570
600 600 680 680/800 656 680 680 595 730 730 730 620 620 730 620
650 650 735 850 712 735 735 640 785 785 785 670 670 785 670
30x M24x2 30x M24x2 24x M30 30x M30 34x M24 24x 33 24x M30 40x M27x2 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 44x M24x2 44x M24x2 30x M30 42x M30x2
GFT 0330 T4 3000 GFT 0450 T4 1000
Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0160 T3 1000 GFT 0160 T3 9000 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 GFT 0330 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 T3 2000 9000 SL 9000/1 9000/2 9000/3 9000/4 2000 3000/1 3000/2 9000/1 9000/2
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Weight View kg 1520 1520 1560 3150 1560 1560 1560 1560 2450 2450 2450 2450 2450 2450 2450 680 660 830 1370 830 830 830 830 1250 1230 1230 1210 1210 1320 1240 T T T T T T T K T T T K K T K
30 30 45 40 45 115 45 12 150 87 47 45 -30 87 13
168 168 170 240 170 170 170 218 125 188 188 255 255 188 255
4) 5)
340 340 350 1) 405 350 1) 350 350 231 2) 400 3) 400 3) 400 3) 410 4) 410 4) 400 5) 512
538 538 565 685 565 635 565 598 675 675 675 710 710 675 810
138 138 155 160 155 155 155 150 190 190 190 180 180 190 175
26 26 35 53 35 35 35 20 25 25 25 35 35 25 19
688 688 710 1460 710 710 710 710 1040 1040 1040 1040 1040 1040 1040
GFT 0330 T4 3000 GFT 0450 T4 1000

1) 2) 3)
L3 = 357 at i = 365:1 L3 = 238 at i = 365:1 L3 = 430 at i = 365:1
L3 = 440 at i = 252 - 302.4 L3 = 430 at i = 1008.0 - 1209.7
Gear Drives
513
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Hydraulic Motors: Dimensions and Weights

Nominal size A5 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 355 Nominal size 16 16 18 18 18 20 20 20 20 20 20 25 30 A6 94 94 109 122 122 127 127 143 143 169 169 * 183 B4 M8x15 M10x17 M10x17 M12x17 M14x19 M14x19 * M14x22 A7 114 114 133 146 146 157 157 178 178 211 211 230 231
Fixed-displacement motor A2FE

A12 A13 mm 91 91 102 107 107 121 121 136 136 149 149 * 148 B5 mm 59 75 75 84 99 99 * 120 106 106 119 130 130 145 145 157 157 188 188 172 199 B1 40.5 40.5 50.8 50.8 50.8 57.2 57.2 66.7 66.7 66.7 66.7 * 66.7 B2 18.2 18.2 23.8 23.8 23.8 27.8 27.8 31.8 31.8 31.8 31.8 * 31.8 B7 40 49 49 60 70 70 * * B3 13 13 19 19 19 25 25 32 32 32 32 * 32 Weight kg 10.5 10.5 15.0 18.0 19.0 23.0 25.0 34.0 36.0 47.0 48.0 * 110.0 A/B SAE 1/2in SAE 3/4in SAE 3/4in SAE 1in SAE 1 1/4in SAE 1 1/4in * SAE 1 1/4in
A13 A12
A5
A6 A7 B3
B6 115 147 147 166 194 194 * *
B1
A
B6 B5
B
B2 B7 View X Ansicht
28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 355
B4
For further technical data see bulletin RE 91008

* dimensions to be indicated on request
Variable-displacement motor A6VE

Nominal size 28 55 80 107 160 250 Nominal size A1 91 123 130 137 171 204 A6 19 19 25 25 32 32 A2 20 24 28 30 34 44 A7 50.8 50.8 57.2 57.2 66.7 66.7 A13 14 16 18 18 20 25 L1 mm 162 151 167 175 200 248 L2 163 111 116 122 154 188 A9 M10x17 M10x17 M12x17 M12x17 M14x19 M14x19 L3 153 179 190 208 245 302 Weight kg 16 26 34 45 64 90 A/B SAE 3/4in SAE 3/4in SAE 1in SAE 1in SAE 1 1/4in SAE 1 1/4in
L2
A8
A2
B5
A9 A6
A/B
A8 mm 23.8 23.8 27.8 27.8 31.8 31.8
L1
A13 A1 L3
28 55 80 107 160 250
Gear Drives
514
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Hydraulic Motors: Dimensions and Weights Variable-displacement motor A10VE

Nominal size 45 63 A1 94 111 A2 125 154 A3 mm 14 18 A4 78 101 A5 87 93 A/B SAE 3/4in SAE 3/4in Weight kg 18 26
A2 A1
A/B
A4
A3
Variable-displacement motor A10VM

Nominal size 28 45 A1 161 175 A2 189 200 A3 mm 12 12 A4 67.5 78 A5 82.8 87 A/B SAE 3/4in SAE 3/4in Weight kg 14 18
A5
A2 A1
A/B
A4
A3
Variable-displacement motor A6VM

Nominal size 200 355 A1 267 322 A2 A3 A4 mm 143 203 A5 209 279 A6 36 49 A/B SAE 1 1/4in SAE 1 1/2in Weight kg 80 170
345 32 432 28
A4 A5 A6
A5
A/B
A3 A1 A2
Gear Drives
515
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Compact hydrostatic drive HYDROTRAC GFT with integrated Hydraulic two-speed motor A10VT
Output torques from 5160 to 29,500 lb-ft (7000 to 40,000 Nm)
Suited for track laying and wheel driven equipment Compact, space saving planetary design Sturdy taper roller bearings Tailored sealing systems Easily mounted as a complete unit For open or closed circuit systems For open circuit systems with complete valving equipment (brake release valve, pressure relief valve) integrated into the motors baseplate For closed circuit systems with external brake release connection. Integrated multiplate parking brake
Description
Rexroth Hydrostatic HYDROTRAC GFT drives comprise a twoor three-stage planetary gear unit and an integrated hydraulic motor. They are used in tracklaying as well as wheeled vehicles. Since the two-speed motor forms an integral part of drive extremely compact units can be built and arranged inside the track or tire of the respective vehicles. The outer contour of the two-speed motor fits into the equipment frame opening enabling the drive to be accommodated as a complete unit. Taper rollerbearings absorb the weight of the equipment and make sure that smooth running characteristics are attained. Depending on drive variant and to suit the respective application, rotating and stationary gear sections are sealed off by means of a radial shaft seal ring, a cartridge seal or an axial mechanical seal. Arranged within the motor and surrounded by hydraulic oil, the spring-loaded multiple plate parking brake is released hydraulically and will safely stop the equipment in the event the pressure falls below the brake release pressure. To enable the equipment to be moved in case of a hydraulic system failure the drives can be equipped with a mechanical disconnecting device put into effect by means of customary tools. The two-speed motor design includes a hydraulic two-position control feature (HZ). By applying external control pressure at port X the operating piston is pressurized via a switching valve thus setting a minimum swashplate angle. The positioning pressure is derived internally from the respective high-pressure side. Basically, the motors can only be operated between Vg max and Vg min.
In case of open-circuit applications the baseplate will accommodate the complete valving system. The required brake release pressure is derived internally from the high-pressure side. In closed-circuit systems the brake is released via port X3 (13 bar < pLft > 300 bar) to which external pressure is to be applied. For GFT 9 T2 with A10VT 45 a mechanical brake release function by means of screw-type cartridge (patented) is available as option for closed-circuit systems. Lube Oil Recommendations and Preservation for the Gear Section The drives are furnished either with or without oil filling. Suitable lube oil brands can be seen from the relevant operating manual. The units are internally preserved with SHELL oil S.7249 SAE 30/50, for external flanges, shaft ends and flange attachment faces TEKTYL 502 is used. Notes on Axial Piston Motor See RE 90220 for the use of hydraulic liquids on mineral oil basis Refer to RE 90223 for the use of HF hydraulic liquids Refer to RE 90270 for installation instructions Hydraulic Two-Position Control Feature HZ Control pressure at port X = 0 bar = Vg max Control pressure at port X = 10 bar = Vg min Design Variants Designations 2000 to 9000 identify dimensional variants, T2 and T3 indicate that the unit has two or three planetary stages.
Gear Drives
516
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Travel Drives for Wheeled Vehicles

These drives have hub studs and are intended for a direct wheel rim attachment. A radial shaft seal or cartridge seal is mounted between rotating and stationary sections to seal off the unit reliably. To enable the equipment to be towed if necessary the gear unit been equipped with a mechanical disconnecting device that can be put into effect using customary tools.
Travel Drives for Tracklaying Vehicles

These drives are intended for attachment to a sprocket. An axial mechanical seal reliably prevents dirt and moisture from entering the unit.
Gear Drives
517
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Wheel Drive (with Hub Studs)

L4 L1 D4 L2 L3 D8
D5
D3
D1
D2
L5
L6
Technical Data
Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque Tmax. Nm GFT 0007 T2 4000/1 7000 30.9 35.8 43.0 51.0 62.6 Ratio i Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 120 A10VT 28 C Hydraulic Motor Circuit Diagram

Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0007 T2 4000/1 D1 D2 D3 D4 mm 177.8 209.55 240 6x 5/8in-11UNC-2B 200.2 241.3 280 9x 5/8"-18UNF-2A D5 D6 D7 D8
Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0007 T2 4000/1
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
D6
D7
A+B o kN
Weight kg 325 60
127
106
109
342
84
194
Gear Drives
518
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Track or Wheel Drive (Sprocket or Rim)

L4 L1 D4 L2 D8 L3
D3
D2
D5 D1 D6 L5 L6
Technical Data
Type/Design Variant GFT Output Torque Tmax. Nm GFT 0007 T2 4000/2 GFT 0007 T2 5000 GFT 0009 T2 2000/1 GFT 0009 T2 2000/2 GFT 0017 T3 1000 GFT 0024 T3 5000 GFT 0032 T2 9000 GFT 0036 T3 3000 GFT 0040 T2 3000 7000 7000 9500 9500 17000 24000 32000 36000 40000 30.9 35.8 43.0 51.0 62.6 30.9 35.8 43.0 51.0 62.6 25.1 38.3 47.6 55.3 25.1 38.3 47.6 55.3 70.2 78.0 88.2 102.6 170.2 137.2 50.7 99.1 115.0 138.8 161.0 61.9 Ratio i Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 120 120 215 215 215 150 215 780 385 780 A10VT 28 A10VT 28 A10VT 45 A10VT 45 A10VT 45 A10VT 45 A10VT 140 A10VT 45 A10VT 140 C A C B B B B B B Hydraulic Motor Circuit Diagram
Gear Drives
519
D7
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service


Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0007 T2 4000/2 GFT 0007 T2 5000 GFT 0009 T2 2000/1 GFT 0009 T2 2000/2 GFT 0017 T3 1000 GFT 0024 T3 5000 GFT 0032 T2 9000 GFT 0036 T3 3000 GFT 0040 T2 3000 D1 D2 D3 D4 mm 200 200 210 210 240 240 330 270 330 240 240 244 244 275 275 370 310 370 264 264 268 268 300 304 400 350 400 12x M14 12x M14 12x M14 12x M14 18x M16 18x M16 16x M20 14x M20 16x M20 230 230 230 230 270 280 456.12 320 350 262 262 260 260 305 305 496 350 400 286 286 284 284 330 330 530 380 440 12x M14 12x M14 16x M16 16x M16 16x M16 20x M16 16x M20 20x M16 x 1,5 16x M20 D5 D6 D7 D8
Type/Design Variant GFT GFT 0007 T2 4000/2 GFT 0007 T2 5000 GFT 0009 T2 2000/1 GFT 0009 T2 2000/2 GFT 0017 T3 1000 GFT 0024 T3 5000 GFT 0032 T2 9000 GFT 0036 T3 3000 GFT 0040 T2 3000
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B o kN
Weight kg 325 325 255 255 142 290 405 405 520 70 70 70 70 98 120 250 310 335
89 104 116 116 119 119 196 104 196.5
68 68 60 60 75 82 109.5 90 100.5
147 147 149 149 181 190 189 200 203
304 319 325 325 375 390.5 494.5 394 500
35 35 18 18 71 56 72.5 56.5 64.7
60 60 64.5 64.5 76 47 60.5 56.5 65.2
194 194 132 132 108 140 170 170 250
Gear Drives
520
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Winch drives HYDROTRAC GFTW for xed or variable displacement motors

Winch drives for rope pull Forces from 50 to 595 kN
Compact, space saving planetary gearbox design Full complement planet gear bearing system Robust bearing system absorbing the forces exerted by the cable pull Simple mounting Easy oil change Integrated multi-disk holding brake Low noise operation
Description
MOBILEX GFT-W hydrostatic winch drives from Rexroth are ideal drive components for winches. They have proven their worth in the most arduous applications and under tough operating conditions. MOBILEX GFT-W winch drives are used in all kinds of winches - mobile and crawler cranes, railroad cranes, shipboard, dockside and container cranes. Due to their extremely compact design, the gear units can be mounted inside the cable drum in a space-saving manner. They are designed for ease of installation and maintenance. High-quality manufacturing processes and the use of case-hardened gear-wheels as well as quenched, tempered and surface-hardened ring gears warrant outstanding load-carrying capacity, operational safety and low-noise running characteristics. The teeth of the gearwheels are designed according to standard specifications and our own strength calculations, which have been developed based on our comprehensive know-how and are optimally adapted to our manufacturing processes. The drives provide optimum total efficiency due to the use of Rexroth hydraulic motors, among other things. The gear units described in this document are subject to constant updating and technical advancement. To suit the specific needs of our customers in terms of dimensions and output characteristics, further variants can be supplied. Thats why we provide advice and support even in the project stage to help you find the most appropriate solution for your requirement. Lubrication The gears and bearings are splash-lubricated. The drive units are maintenance-free save for periodic oil changes, which are convenient to make. Only the oils specified in the operating manual should be used in the gearboxes. The change intervals for different operating conditions are also specified in the operating manual. Brake A spring-loaded, hydraulic released multiple-disk parking brake arranged on the input side is provided. TBr sta. min = 1.6 T1 (input torque) The multiple-disk holding brake is not a service brake, but a static holding brake. Where required, a service or emergency brake should be provided by the equipment supplier/ operator. The static holding torque multiplies in accordance with the transmission ratio selected. Hydraulic Motors The gearbox is designed for direct flange-attachment of a variable or fixed-displacement motor (preferably a Rexroth hydraulic motor). If requested, the motor is supplied with the gearbox.
Gear Drives
521
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
See Section 16 for applicable L4 Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price.
L1
L2
L3
For dimensions of the end supporting bearing see page 16
Frame connection
D4
D8
min. winding diameter 1st layer
D1
D5 D6 D7
D3
D2
Representation A
L5
L6
Dws
Representation B
Technical Data
Type/Design GFT-W Output Torque T2 max. Nm GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000 4000 2000 4000 9500 9500 9500 9500 14000 14000 14000 14000 19000 19000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 Cable Pull max. kN 50 50 50 50 67 67 74 74 99 99 84 84 84 84 84 84 16.3 22.6 32.1 37.6 16.3 22.6 32.1 37.6 16.3 22.6 32.1 37.6 16.3 22.6 32.1 37.6 26.4 32.1 37.6 45.4 26.4 32.1 37.6 45.4 77.9 88.2 102.6 77.9 88.2 102.6 90.1 102.6 120.5 137.2 90.1 102.6 120.5 137.2 42.9 50.5 62.0 42.9 50.5 62.0 42.9 50.5 62.0 42.9 50.5 62.0 42.9 50.5 62.0 42.9 50.5 62.0 Transmission Ratio i Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 460 710 710 710 710 710 710 A6VE 55 A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55 A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80 107/A2FE 80 90 Hydraulic Motor
GFT 0024 W3 2000 GFT 0024 W3 4000 GFT 0026 GFT 0026 GFT 0026 GFT 0026 GFT 0026 GFT 0026 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 6000/1 6000/2
Gear Drives
522
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
Type/Design GFT-W GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000 4000 2000 4000 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 mm 240 240 240 240 250 250 250 250 240 250 270 270 270 270 210 210 275 275 275 275 290 290 290 290 285 290 310 310 310 310 310 310 300 300 300 300 320 320 320 320 320 320 350 350 350 350 350 350 18x M16 18x M16 16x M16 16x M16 16x M20 14x M20 16x M20 14x M20 20x M20 20x M20 16x M20 16x M20 12x M20 14x M20 14x M20 14x M20 270 270 270 270 280 280 280 280 280 280 320 320 320 320 320 320 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 305 350 350 350 350 350 350 335 335 335 335 330 330 330 330 330 330 380 380 380 380 380 380 16x M16 16x M16 16x 17.5 16x 17.5 16x M16 16x 17.5 16x M16 16x 17.5 20x M16 20x 18 20x M16 20x M16 20x 18 20x 18 20x 17.5 20x 17.5 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 385 385 430 430 430 430 430 430 A A B B A B A B A B A A B B B B D6 D7 D8 DWS Repr.
Type/Design GFT GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0013 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 GFT 0017 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W2 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000 4000 2000 4000
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Mass kg 290 290 290 290 142 142 290 290 290 290 400 400 400 400 400 400 85 85 80 80 105 105 115 115 130 130 136 136 136 136 140 140
Repr.
8 30 8 30 30 30 30 30 30 30 20 30 20 30 20 30
75 75 75 75 82 82 82 82 82 82 90 90 90 90 90 90
149 149 149 149 152 152 174 174 189.5 189.5 220 220 220 220 220 220
232 254 232 254 264 264 286 286 301.5 301.5 330 340 330 340 330 340
49 49 49 49 56 56 56 56 56 56 58 58 58 58 58 58
54 54 54 54 47 47 47 47 47 47 50 50 50 50 50 50
140 140 140 140 108 108 140 140 140 140 186 186 186 186 186 186
A A B B A B A B A B A A B B B B
Gear Drives
523
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
L1
L2
L3
Frame connection
D4
D8
D1
D5 D6 D7
D3
D2
Representation A
L5
L6
Dws
Representation B
Technical Data
Type/Design GFT-W Output Torque T2 max. Nm GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 W3 W3 W3 W3 W2 W2 W2 W2 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 26000 26000 26000 26000 27000 27000 27000 27000 37500 37500 37500 37500 42500 42500 42500 42500 Cable Pull max. kN 118 118 118 118 108 108 108 108 150 150 150 150 164 164 164 164 67.0 79.4 99.1 115.0 138.8 67.0 79.4 99.1 115.0 138.8 67.0 79.4 99.1 115.0 138.8 67.0 79.4 99.1 115.0 138.8 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1 35.9 41.0 48.3 59.1 84.2 91.1 99.8 125.6 146.4 84.2 91.1 99.8 125.6 146.4 84.2 91.1 99.8 125.6 146.4 84.2 91.1 99.8 125.6 146.4 86.594.8105.5119.8139.9169.9 86.594.8105.5119.8139.9169.9 63.8 86.5 94.8 63.8 86.5 94.8 Transmission Ratio i Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 680 680 680 680 1080 1080 1080 1080 800 800 800 800 720 720 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 55/A2FE 45 56 63 A6VE 80/A2FE 80 90 A6VE 80 107 /A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107 160 /A2FE 107 125 A6VE 80 107 /A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107 160 /A2FE 107 125 A6VE 80 107 /A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107 160 /A2FE 107 125 A6VE 80 107 /A2FE 80 90 A6VE 107 160 /A2FE 107 125 Hydraulic Motor
GFT 0060 W3 2000 GFT 0060 W3 4000 GFT 0060 W3 6000 GFT 0060 W3 8000
A6VE 80 107 /A2FE 80 90 A6VE 80 107 /A2FE 80 90 A6VM 107 160 200 250/ 1620 A2FM107125160180200250 A6VM 107 160 200 250/ 1620 A2FM107125160180200250
Gear Drives
524
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
Type/Design GFT-W GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 W3 W3 W3 W3 W2 W2 W2 W2 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000 4000 6000 8000 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 mm 270 270 270 270 270 330 270 330 270 330 270 330 330 330 360 360 310 310 310 310 310 370 310 370 310 370 310 370 370 370 405 405 350 350 350 350 350 410 350 410 350 410 350 410 410 410 440 440 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 16x M20 20x M20 17x M20x1,5 18x M20 20x M20x1,5 20x M20 18x M20x1,5 18x M20 20x M20x1,5 20x M20x1,5 12x M24 12x M24 320 320 320 320 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 350 370 370 370 370 350 350 350 350 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 400 410 410 405 405 380 380 380 380 440 440 440 440 430 430 430 430 450 450 440 440 20x M16x1.5 20x M16x1.5 20x 18 20x 18 16x M20 16x M20 16x 22 16x 22 16x M20x1.5 16x M20x1.5 16x 22 16x 22 20x M20x1.5 20x 22 16x 22 16x 22 440 440 440 440 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 500 520 520 520 520 A A B B A A B B A A B B A B B B D6 D7 D8 DWS Repr.
Type/Design GFT GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0036 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0040 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0050 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 GFT 0060 W3 W3 W3 W3 W2 W2 W2 W2 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 2000 4000 6000 8000
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Mass kg 405 405 405 405 425 425 425 425 425 425 425 425 520 520 520 520 155 155 155 155 192 219 192 219 212 238 212 238 230 230 230 230
Repr.
43 10 43 10 39.5 20 39.5 25 39.5 25 39.5 25 - 11 - 11 48.5 48.5
90 90 90 90 82 90 82 108.5 82 109 82 109 114 114 115 115
210 200 210 200 243 261.5 243 243 281.5 281.5 281.5 281.5 284 284 271 271
343 300 343 300 364.5 376.5 364.5 376.5 403 415.5 403 415.5 387 423 434.5 434.5
56.5 56.5 56.5 56.5 56.5 38 57 56.5 62 56.5 56.5 56.5 79 79 84 84
56.5 56.5 56.5 56.5 54 73 54 54 48 54 54 54 38 38 25 25
170 170 170 170 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 212 250 250 250 250
A A B B A A B B A A B B A B B B
Gear Drives
525
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
L1
L2
L3
Frame connection
D4
D8
D1
D5 D6 D7
D3
D2
Representation A
L5
L6
Dws
Representation B
Technical Data
Type/Design GFT-W OutputTorque T2 max. Nm GFT 0080 W3 2000 GFT 0080 W3 4000 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 6000/1 6000/2 8000/1 8000/2 8000/3 67000 67000 67000 67000 67000 67000 67000 100000 100000 100000 100000 100000 100000 100000 100000 100000 Cable Pull max. kN 231 231 231 231 231 231 231 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 300 Transmission Ratio i Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 76.7 99.0 110.0 126.9 149.9 185.4 1020 76.7 99.0 110.0 126.9 149.9 185.4 1020 61.3 79.1 99.0 110.9 149.5 61.3 79.1 99.0 110.9 149.5 61.3 79.1 99.0 110.9 149.5 61.3 79.1 99.0 110.9 149.5 61.3 79.1 99.0 110.9 149.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 215.0 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 215.0 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 79.5 95.8 114.8 128.6 147.2 173.9 526 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1100 750 1100 750 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 1890 A6VE107160/ A2FE107 125 160 180 A6VE107160/ A2FE107 125 160 180 A6VM 160/A2FM 160 180 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A6VM 160/A2FM 160 180 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A6VM 107/A2FM 107 125 A6VE 107 160 A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VE 107 160 A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A2FM 250 A6VM 160/A2FM 160 180 A6VM 107/A2FM 107 125 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A6VM 160/A2FM 160 180 A6VM 107/A2FM 107 125 Section 14 Hydraulic Motor
GFT 0110 W3 2000 GFT 0110 W3 4000 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 6000/1 6000/2 6000/3 6000/4 8000/1 8000/2 8000/3
Gear Drives
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
Type/Design GFT-W GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000 4000 6000/1 6000/2 8000/1 8000/2 8000/3 2000 4000 6000/1 6000/2 6000/3 6000/4 8000/1 8000/2 8000/3 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 mm 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 420 420 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 460 460 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 480 480 470 470 470 470 470 400 500 470 470 470 470 470 470 470 20x M24 18x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 24x M24 24x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 28x M24 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 460 460 490 490 490 490 490 490 490 480 480 460 460 460 460 460 500 500 530 530 530 530 530 530 530 520 520 495 495 495 495 495 540 540 567 567 567 567 567 567 567 20x M24 20x 26 24x 22 24x 22 24x 22 24x 22 24x 22 36x M18x1.5 36x 20 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 600 600 580 580 580 580 580 640 640 650 650 650 650 650 650 650 A B B B B B B A B B B B B B B B D6 D7 D8 DWS Repr.
Type/Design GFT GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0080 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 GFT 0110 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000 4000 6000/1 6000/2 8000/1 8000/2 8000/3 2000 4000 6000/1 6000/2 6000/3 6000/4 8000/1 8000/2 8000/3
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Mass kg 950 950 425 425 425 425 425 A 1080 B 950 425 425 425 425 425 425 425 430 430 430 430 430 430 430 440 440 460 406 515 460 460 460 460
Repr.
22 22 69 69 189 189 168 0 0 69 69 69 61 178 178 168
148 148 120 120 120 120 120 165 165 140 140 140 140 140 140 140
295 295 295 295 295 295 295 305 305 280 280 280 280 280 280 280
465 465 484 484 604 604 583 491.5 491.5 489 489 489 481 598 598 588
112 112 76 76 76 76 76 107 107 96 96 96 96 96 96 96
19 19 19 19 19 19 19 25 25 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2 -2
480 480 212 212 212 212 212 A 509 B 480 212 212 212 212 212 212 212
A B B B B B B A B B B B B B B B
Gear Drives
527
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
L4 L1 L2 L3
Frame connection
D4
D8
D1
D5 D6 D7
D3
D2
Representation A
L5
L6
Dws
Representation B
Technical Data
Type/Design GFT-W Output Torque T2 max. Nm GFT 0160 W3 2000 GFT 0160 W3 4000 GFT 0220 W3 2000/1 GFT 0220 W3 2000/2 GFT 0220 W3 4000/1 GFT 0220 W3 4000/2 GFT 0220 W3 6000/1 GFT 0220 W3 6000/2 GFT 0330 W3 2000 GFT 0330 W3 4000 GFT 0330 W3 6000 140000 140000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 200000 275000 275000 275000 Cable Pull max. kN 373 373 471 471 471 471 471 471 595 595 595 161.8 210.8 251.0 161.8 210.8 251.0 188.9 246.1 293.0 97.7 105.9 143.3 155.4 188.9 188.9 246.1 293.0 97.7 105.9 143.3 155.4 188.9 188.9 246.1 293.0 97.7 105.9 143.3 155.4 188.9 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 168.9 209.9 252.0 302.4 Transmission Ratio i Brake Torque TBr max. Nm 1360 1360 1360 2200 1360 2200 1360 2200 2860 2860 2860 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A6VE 107 160/ A2FE 107 125 160 180 A6VM 200 250/A2FM 200 A6VE 250/A2FE 250 A6VE 250/A2FE 250 A6VE 250/A2FE 250 Hydraulic Motor
Gear Drives
528
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
Type/Design GFT-W GFT 0160 W3 2000 GFT 0160 W3 4000 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 6000/1 6000/2 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 mm 450 450 460 460 460 460 460 460 580 580 580 510 510 600 600 600 600 600 600 680 680 680 560 560 650 650 650 650 650 650 735 735 735 30x M24x2 30x M24x2 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 30x M30 28x M24 28x M24 535 535 610 610 610 610 610 610 660 660 660 600 600 680 680 680 680 680 680 730 730 730 650 650 735 735 735 735 735 735 785 785 785 30x M24x2 30x 30 24x M30 24x M30 24x 33 24x 33 24x 33 24x 33 30x M30 30x 33 30x 33 750 750 850 850 850 850 850 850 925 925 925 A A A A B B B B A B B D6 D7 D8 DWS Repr.
GFT 0330 W3 2000 GFT 0330 W3 4000 GFT 0330 W3 6000
Type/Design GFT GFT 0160 W3 2000 GFT 0160 W3 4000 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 GFT 0220 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 W3 2000/1 2000/2 4000/1 4000/2 6000/1 6000/2
L1
L2
L3 mm
L4
L5
L6 C
A+B Co kN
Mass kg 1520 1520 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 1560 2450 2450 2450 680 680 820 820 820 820 820 820 1380 1380 1380
Repr.
30 30 45 40 45 40 45 40 47 47 47
168 168 170 170 170 170 170 170 188 188 188
340 340 350 350 350 350 350 350 430 430 430
538 538 565 560 565 560 565 560 705 705 705
138 138 155 155 155 155 155 155 190 190 190
26 26 35 35 35 35 35 35 25 25 25
688 688 710 710 710 710 710 710 1040 1040 1040
A A A A B B B B A B B
GFT 0330 W3 2000 GFT 0330 W3 4000 GFT 0330 W3 6000
Gear Drives
529
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

See Section 16 for applicable Preferred/Spotlight part numbers and unit price. Fixed-Displacement
Motor A2FE, Series 61

A7 133 146 146 157 157 178 178 211 211 230 A12 102 107 107 121 121 136 136 149 149 * A13 119 130 130 145 145 157 157 188 188 172 Mass (kg) 15 18 19 23 25 34 36 47 48 *
Nominal Size 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250
A6 109 122 122 127 127 143 143 169 169 *
A13 A12
1)
A6 A7
Nominal Size B1 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 160 180 250 1)
1)
B1
A
B6 B5
B2 23.8 23.8 27.8 31.8 31.8 *
B3 19 19 25 32 32 *
B4 M10x17 M10x17 M12x17 M14x19 M14x19 *
B5 75 75 84 99 99 *
B6 147 147 166 194 194 *
B7 49 49 60 70 70 *
A/B SAE 3/4" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 11/4" SAE 11/4" *
B
B2 B7 cht View XX
50.8 50.8 57.2 66.7 66.7 *
B4
Series 60
* Missing dimensions upon request
For further technical data see RE 91008
Fixed-Displacement Motor A2FM, Series 61

Nominal Size 107 125 160 180 200 1) 250 2) A6 225.5 252 284 288 A7 252 294 309 314 A12 120 134 84 93 A13 159 188 165 172 Mass (kg) 32 32 45 45
A13 A12
X
Ansicht View X X
Nominal Size B1
B2 31.8 31.8 31.8 31.8
B3 32 32 32 32
B4 M14x19 M14x19 M14x19 M14x19
B5 99 99 99 100
B6 194 194 204 210 A/ SAE 1 B 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4"
A6 A7 B5
B4
B
B2
1) 2)
107 125 160 180 200 1) 250 2) Series 63 Series 60
66.7 66.7 66.7 66.7
B1 B6
B3
Gear Drives
530
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable-Displacement Motor A6VE, Series 63

Nominal Size 55 80 107 160 250 A1 123 130 137 171 204 A2 24 28 30 34 44 L1 * 151 167 175 200 248 L2 * 111 116 122 154 188 L3 * 179 190 208 245 302 Mass (kg) 26 34 45 64 90
L2
A8
A2
* Dimensions vary, depending on type of displacement
A7 L1
Nominal Size 55 80 107 160 250 A6 19 25 25 32 32 A7 50.8 57.2 57.2 66.7 66.7 A8 23.8 27.8 27.8 31.8 31.8 A9 M10x17 M12x17 M12x17 M14x19 M14x19 A/B SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 1" SAE 11/4" SAE 11/4"
A6
A9
A;B
A1 L3
Variable-Displacement Motor A6VM, Series 63

Nominal Size 107 160 200 250 A1 220 254 267 287 A2 30 34 36 44 L1 * 175 197 209 248 L2 * 122 137 143 188 L3 * 290 329 345 383 Mass (kg) 47 64 80 90
L2
A8
A2 A6
* Dimensions vary, depending on type of displacement
A7
Nominal Size 107 160 200 250 A6 25 32 32 32 A7 57.2 66.7 66.7 66.7 A8 27.8 31.8 31.8 31.8 A9 M12x1.75 M12x1.75 M12x1.75 M12x1.75 A/B SAE 1" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4"
L1
A+B
A9 A1 L3
Gear Drives
531
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Standard End Supporting Bearing

Gearbox Size D1
H7/j6
D2
D3
H7/j6
D4
D5
L1 L2
L3
D5
D6
GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT
0013 0017 0024 0026 0036 0040 0050 0060 0080 0110 0160 0220 0330
W W W W W W W W W W W W W
140 175 200
115 145 170
90 115 140
157 198 230
12 x 14 12 x 18 12 x 18
225
190
150
260
12 x 22
260
220
180
295
12 x 22
Dimensions upon request
D1 D2 D3
D4
Gearbox Size
D6
L1
L2
L3
Mass appr. (kg) 9 15 21
GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT GFT
0013 0017 0024 0026 0036 0040 0050 0060 0080 0110 0160 0220 0330
W W W W W W W W W W W W W
6x9 6 x 11 6 x 14
76 76 77
13 20 20
10 15 15
6 x 18
91
25
17
30
8 x 18
102
25
20
30
Dimensions upon request
Gear Drives
532
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Swing drives MOBILEX GFB

Output torques from 2950 to 191,770 lb-ft (4 to 260 kNm)
Compact, space saving two or three stage planetary design Easy mounting Integrated multi-disk parking brake Low noise operation High efciency Long service life Convenient oil change
Description
Rexroth MOBILEX GFB planetary gearboxes are hydrostatic swing gears. They are suitable for use in excavators and cranes of all types, in ship unloading equipment, forestry equipment and in all applications where accurate positioning is called for. The drive consists of a two or three-stage gearbox with an integrated multi-disk parking brake, an output pinion as well as a hydraulic motor, preferably from Rexroth. A dedicated team of R&D, design and sales engineers makes sure that the clients wishes and concepts are quickly translated into technically and economically viable solutions. In their work, they are assisted by modern computer software for gearing design and component optimization. The information provided in this bulletin serves to help you select the planetary gearbox best suited for your application. In addition, our field personnel are available to you to provide advisory services even at the project stage. Lubrication The gearteeth and bearings are splash lubricated. Aside from periodic oil changes, the drive units are maintenance-free. Oil changes are easy to do. The oil brands recommended in the operating manual shall be exclusively used. The change intervals for the relevant application conditions are also given in the operating manual. The pinion-side antifriction bearing of the output shaft is grease-lubricated for life. Brake The standard supply scope includes a spring-loaded, hydraulically released multiple-disk parking brake arranged on the input side. The multiple-disk holding brake is not a service brake. Hydraulic Motors The gearbox is designed for direct flange attachment of a variable or fixed displacement motor (preferably a Rexroth hydraulic motor). If requested, the motor can be supplied along with the gearbox. Gearbox Supply Rexroth MOBILEX planetary gearboxes are delivered ready for installation, but without oil filling. The standard gearbox version comes with a priming coat of grey color (similar to RAL 7032) and is internally protected with a temporary corrosion preventive that preserves the gearbox for 24 months, if stored in a dry location. External flanges, shaft extensions and mating faces are protected with TECTYL 502 C. Weights, Oil Volumes, Dimensions The specified weights are average figures. As far as oil volumes are concerned, gearbox operators should rely on oil level readings rather than specified oil volumes. Figures and dimensions are not strictly binding. We reserve the right to make changes in line with technical progress. Further Notes As prescribed by statutory provisions, all rotating parts must be protected by guards against accidental contact. Local safety regulations must be complied with. Commissioning and maintenance of the gearboxes must be performed in line with the instructions given in our operating manual.
Gear Drives
533
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Type of Construction
GFB T2/T3 1000
GFB T2/T3 2000
T2 = 2-stage T3 = 3-stage Version 1000: 2 centering seats Version 2000: 1 centering seat
Ordering Example MOBILEX GFB 0026 T2 1 . . .

Gearbox Type Version e.g. 2 centering seats 2-stage
Swing Drives MOBILEX GFB Overview Swig Drives MOBILEX GFB -Overview
Type/Version GFB Output Torque Excavator T2 max Nm GFB 0009 T2 GFB 0017 T2 GFB 0017 T3 GFB 0024 T3 GFB 0026 T2 GFB 0036 T2 GFB 0036 T3 GFB 0040 T2 GFB 0050 T3 GFB 0060 T2 GFB 0060 T3 GFB 0080 T2 GFB 0084 T2 GFB 0110 T3 GFB 0144 T2 4000 7700 7700 10600 10000 17500 17500 18000 22000 27800 27800 38200 38200 52000 54000 7000 12700 12700 17500 16500 28500 28500 29000 38000 48500 48500 68300 68300 93300 94500 Crane Gear Ratio from/to i
26.10 - 48.60 17.27 - 45.66 78.95 - 105.63 91.13 - 138.20 31.36 - 63.00 20.71 - 28.93 67.96 - 117.55 42.04 - 60.13 126.66 - 147.39 40.41 87.46 - 170.89 62.28 - 186.43 35.13 174.86 49.30
Gear Drives
534
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Classification Examples
Type of Crane (Designation)
See FEM Section I, 3rd Edition, Table T.2.1.3.5.

See Section 16 for applicable Component Preferred/Spotlight part numbers Operated 1) and unit price.
Type of Driver Hoisting Swinging Level Luffing Trolley Travelling Crane Travelling
Erection cranes Loading bridges Loading bridges Workshop cranes Overhead travelling cranes, ram cranes, scrap yard cranes Unloading bridges, container gantry cranes Other gantry cranes (with trolley and/or live ring) Unloading bridges, container gantry cranes (with trolley and/or live ring) Berth cranes, shipyard cranes, dismantling cranes Dockside cranes (slewable, gantry type, ...), floating cranes, floating shearlegs Dockside cranes (slewable, gantry type, ...), floating cranes, floating shearlegs Floating cranes and floating shearlegs for very high loads (normally above 100 tons) Shipboard cranes Shipboard cranes Tower cranes for construction sites Derrick tower gantries Railroad cranes, approved for service on trains Vehicle-mounted cranes hook hook grab or magnet grab or magnet hook hook grab or magnet
M2M3 M2M3 M1M2 M1M2 M2M3 M5M6 M7M8 M6 M4 M6 M4 M4M5 M5M6 M6M7 M7M8 M4 M5
grab or magnet
M8
M6
M6M7 M7M8
hook or spreader
M6M7 M5M6 M3M4 M6M7 M4M5
hook
M4M5 M4M5
M4M5 M4M5
grab or magnet
M8
M5M6 M3M4 M7M8 M4M5
hook
M5M6 M4M5 M4M5 M4M5 M5M6
M6M7 M5M6 M5M6
M3M4
M7M8 M6M7 M6M7
M4M5
M3M4 M3M4 M3M4
M4
M3M4 M3M4
M2
M3
M5M6 M3M4 M3M4 M4M5 M3M4 M4 M5 M4 M3 M3
M2M3 M1M2 M1M2 M3M4 M2M3 M2M3
M3M4 M2M3 M2M3
1) This cloumn shows some typical uses for general information
Gear Drives
535
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
GFB T2/T3 1000
GFB T2/T3 2000
L2
L3
D4 L5
L3
L2
D4 L5 L4 L7 L1 L4
L1
D1 h8 D2 D3
L6
D5
h8 h8
D1
D2 D3
Dimensions and technical data for output torques from 4000 Nm to 10600 Nm for excavators 7000 Nm to 17500 Nm for cranes Technical Data
Type/Version GFB Output Torque Excavator Crane T2 max. Nm GFB 0009 T2 1000/1 GFB 0009 T2 1000/2 GFB 0009 T2 2000/1 GFB 0009 T2 2000/2 GFB 0017 T2 1000 GFB 0017 T2 2000 GFB 0017 T3 1000 GFB 0017 T3 2000 GFB 0024 T3 1000/1 GFB 0024 T3 1000/3 4000 4000 4000 4000 7700 7700 7700 7700 10600 10600 7000 7000 7000 7000 12700 12700 12700 12700 17500 17500 26.1 29.2 33.4 39.3 48.6 26.1 29.2 33.4 39.3 48.6 26.1 29.2 33.4 39.3 48.6 26.1 29.2 33.4 39.3 48.6 17.27 32.47 45.66 17.27 32.47 45.66 78.95 89.21 103.62 105.63 78.95 89.21 103.62 105.63 91.13 103.63 121.5 138.2 91.13 103.63 121.5 138.2 Gear Ratio i
X The gearing of the output pinion (module, number of teeth, tooth width, etc.) is governed by the customers ring gear.
Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 245 245 245 245 390 390 249 249 249 249
Hydraulic Motor
A2FE 28 32 A2FE 45 56 A2FE 28 32 A6VM 55 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 28 32 A2FE 28 32 A2FM 28 32 A2FM 45 56 63
GFB 0024 T3 1000/3 = Identification number for different overall lengths/diameters and motor attachment variants. Gear Drives 536 Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
GFB T2 /T3 1000 Preferred/Spotlight part numbers

and unit price.
GFB T2/T3 2000
L2
L3
D4 L5
L3
L2
D4 L5 L4 L7 L1 L4
L1
D1 h8 D2 D3
L6
D5
h8 h8
D1
D2 D3
Type/Version GFB Output Torque Excavator Crane T2 max. Nm GFB 0026 T2 1000 GFB 0026 T2 2000 GFB 0036 T2 2000 GFB 0036 T3 1000/1 GFB 0036 T3 1000/2 GFB 0036 T3 1000/3 GFB 0036 T3 2000 GFB 0040 T2 1000/1 GFB 0040 T2 1000/2 GFB 0040 T2 1000/3 GFB 0040 T2 1000/4 GFB 0040 T2 1000/5 GFB 0040 T2 2000/1 GFB 0040 T2 2000/2 GFB 0040 T2 2000/3 10000 10000 17500 17500 17500 17500 17500 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 18000 16500 16500 28500 28500 28500 28500 28500 29000 29000 29000 29000 29000 29000 29000 29000 31.36 43.87 51.52 63 31.36 43.87 51.52 63 20.71 24 28.93 67.96 80.36 101.02 117.55 67.96 80.36 101.02 117.55 67.96 80.36 101.02 117.55 67.96 80.36 101.02 117.55 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 42.04 49.28 60.13 Gear Ratio i
Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 332 332 390 332 332 332 332 588 588 588 588 588 588 588 588
Hydraulic Motor
A2FE 80 90 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 107 A2FM 45 A6VM 55 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 107 125 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FM 125 A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 107 125
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
Type/Version GFB D1 D2 D3 mm GFB 0009 T2 1000/1 GFB 0009 T2 1000/2 GFB 0009 T2 2000/1 GFB 0009 T2 2000/2 GFB 0017 T2 1000 GFB 0017 T2 2000 GFB 0017 T3 1000 GFB 0017 T3 2000 GFB 0024 T3 1000/1 GFB 0024 T3 1000/3 170 170 250 175 256 250 256 250 265 265 250 250 310 260 290 305 290 305 315 315 270 270 345 288 320 340 320 340 355 355 16x 13.5 16x 13.5 12x 17.5 12x 17.5 16x 17.5 16x 17.5 16x 17.5 16x 17.5 20x 17.5 20x 17.5 165 165 225 225 230 230 D4 D5 Mass kg 55 80 80 85 130 130 130 130 165 165
Type/Version GFB
L1
L2
L3
L4 mm
L5
L6
L7
GFB 0009 T2 1000/1 GFB 0009 T2 1000/2 GFB 0009 T2 2000/1 GFB 0009 T2 2000/2 GFB 0017 T2 1000 GFB 0017 T2 2000 GFB 0017 T3 1000 GFB 0017 T3 2000 GFB 0024 T3 1000/1 GFB 0024 T3 1000/3
120 120 51 40 200 57 200 57 245 245
259.5 277 303.5 325.5 300 443 325 468 387 394
379.5 397 354.5 365.5 500 500 525 525 632 639
50 50 15 26 6 46 6 46 15 15
36.5 36.5 20 22 38 23 38 23 34 34
14 14 6 6 8 8
46 46 55 55 75 75
Gear Drives
538
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Dimensions
GFB T2Preferred/Spotlight /T3 1000 part numbers
See Section 16 for applicable and unit price.
GFB T2/T3 2000
L2
L3
D4 L5
L3
L2
D4 L5 L4 L7 L1 L4
L1
D1 h8 D2 D3
L6
D5
h8 h8
D1
D2 D3
Type/Version GFB Output Torque Excavator Crane T2 max. Nm GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 T3 T3 T3 T3 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 1000/4 1000/1 1000/2 1000 2000/1 2000/2 22000 22000 22000 22000 27800 27800 27800 27800 27800 38200 38200 38200 38200 38200 52000 52000 54000 38000 38000 38000 38000 48500 48500 48500 48500 48500 68300 68300 68300 68300 68300 93300 93300 94500 126.66 147.39 126.66 147.39 126.66 147.39 126.66 147.39 40.41 40.41 87.46 95.8 140.86 170.89 87.46 95.8 140.86 170.89 87.46 95.8 140.86 170.89 62.28 111.86 186.43 62.28 111.86 186.43 62.28 111.86 186.43 35.13 35.13 174.86 174.86 49.3 Gear Ratio i
Braking Torque TBr max. Nm 332 332 332 332 613 613 613 613 613 975 975 975 1661 1661 588 588 1423
Hydraulic Motor
A2FE 45 56 63 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 107 125 A2FM 63 A2FE 107 125 A2FE 107 125 A2FM 80 90 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 107 125 A2FE 80 90 A2FE 107 125 A2FM 90 A2FM 180 200 A2FM 180 200 A2FE 80 90 A6VM 200 A2FM 180 200
GFB 0080 T3 1000/1 GFB 0080 T3 1000/2 GFB 0080 T3 1000/3 GFB 0084 T2 2000/1 GFB 0084 T2 2000/2 GFB 0110 T3 1000/1 GFB 0110 T3 1000/2 GFB 0144 T2 2000
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Dimensions
Type/Version GFB D1 D2 D3 mm GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 T3 T3 T3 T3 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 1000/4 1000/1 1000/2 1000 2000/1 2000/2 330 330 330 330 400 400 380 340 340 440 440 440 400 400 475 475 460 L1 375 375 375 375 490 490 425 450 450 480 480 480 470 460 520 520 520 L2 411 411 411 411 542 542 462 500 500 530 530 530 510 510 570 570 562 L3 L4 mm GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0050 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 GFB 0060 T3 T3 T3 T3 T2 T2 T3 T3 T3 1000/1 1000/2 1000/3 1000/4 1000/1 1000/2 1000 2000/1 2000/2 290 290 290 290 450 360 485 111 111 331 331 314 64 81 339 371 85 353.5 389.5 427.5 396.5 225 399.5 246 638 676 516.5 552.5 554.5 721 704 513 550 857 643.5 679.5 717.5 686.5 675 759.5 731 749 787 847.5 883.5 868.5 785 785 852 921 942 540 15 15 15 15 25 9 40 98 98 14 14 14 10 10 15 15 55 38 38 38 38 40 32 30 40 40 40 40 40 465 448 30 30 655 40 40 40 40 19 19 4 58 58 41 8 40 75 75 75 75 95 102 129 121 121 121 160 160 Section 14 24x 17.5 24x 17.5 24x 17.5 24x 17.5 16x 22 16x 22 24x 17.5 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 24x 26 L5 300 300 300 300 325 325 300 370 370 370 390 390 L6 D4 D5 Mass kg 315 310 310 315 390 380 425 420 420 120 120 540 515 515 630 680 1050 L7
GFB 0080 T3 1000/1 GFB 0080 T3 1000/2 GFB 0080 T3 1000/3 GFB 0084 T2 2000/1 GFB 0084 T2 2000/2 GFB 0110 T3 1000/1 GFB 0110 T3 1000/2 GFB 0144 T2 2000 Type/Version GFB
GFB 0080 T3 1000/1 GFB 0080 T3 1000/2 GFB 0080 T3 1000/3 GFB 0084 T2 2000/1 GFB 0084 T2 2000/2 GFB 0110 T3 1000/1 GFB 0110 T3 1000/2 GFB 0144 T2 2000 Gear Drives
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Fixed-displacement Motor A2FE, Series 61

Nominal Size 28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125 A6 94 94 109 122 122 127 127 143 143 A7 114 114 133 146 146 157 157 178 178 A12 91 91 102 107 107 121 121 136 136 A13 106 106 119 130 130 145 145 157 157 Mass (kg) 10.5 10.5 15 18 19 23 25 34 36
A13 A12
A6 A7
Nominal Size B1 B2 18.2 23.8 23.8 27.8 31.8 B3 13 19 19 25 32 B4 M8x15 M10x17 M10x17 M12x17 M14x19 B5 59 75 75 84 99 B6 115 147 147 166 194 B7 40 49 49 60 70 A/B SAE 1/2" SAE 3/4" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 11/4"
B1
A
B6 B5
B
B2 B7 Ansicht View X X
28 32 45 56 63 80 90 107 125
40.5 50.8 50.8 57.2 66.7
B4
Fixed-displacement Motor A2FM, Series 61 ( Series 63)

1)
Nominal Size 28 45 56 80 125 180 200 32 63 90
A6 153 166 182 203 225.5 252 284 B2 18.2 23.8 23.8 27.8 31.8 31.8 31.8
A7 173 194 206 233 252 294 309 B3 13 19 19 25 32 32 32
A12 78 89 96 104.5 120 134 84 B4 M8x15 M10x17 M10x17 M12x17 M14X19 M14x19 M14x19 B5 59 75 75 84 99 99 99
A13 106 122 130 145 159 188 165 B6 115 147 147 166 194 194 204
Mass (kg) 9.5 13.5 18 23 32 45 66 A/B SAE 1/2" SAE 3/4" SAE 3/4" SAE 1" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4" SAE 1 1/4"
A13 A12
1)
X
Ansicht View X X
A6 A7 B5
Nominal Size B1 28 45 56 80 125 180 200 32 63 90 40.5 50.8 50.8 57.2 66.7 66.7 66.7
B4
B
B2
B1 B6
B3
1)
For further technical data see RE 91001 Gear Drives 541 Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

Variable-displacement Motor A6VM, Series 63

Nominal Size 55 200 A1 183 267 A2 24 36 L1 * 151 209 L2 * 111 143 L3 * 238 345 Mass (kg) 26 80
* Dimensions vary depending on the displacement
L2
A8
A2
A7
Nominal Size 55 200 A6 19 32 A7 50.8 66.7 A8 23.8 31.8 A9 M10x1.5x17 M14x2x19 A/B SAE 3/4" SAE 1 1/4"
A6
L1
A+B
A9 A1 L3
Driver Groups and Service Time Categories to FEM, Section I, 3rd Edition 1987
Service time category Assumed average service time per day in hours Theoretic service life in hours
Collective load class
T2 0.25 - 0.5 400 800 M1 0.90 M2 0.90 M3 1.05 M4 1.25
T3 0.5 - 1 800 1600 M2 0.90 M3 0.95 M4 1.05 M5 1.30
T4 1-2 1600 3200 M3 0.90 M4 0.95 M5 1.10 M6 1.45
T5 2-4 3200 6300 M4 0.90 M5 1 M6 1.25 M7 1.65
T6 4-8 6300 12500 M5 0.95 M6 1.15 M7 1.40 M8 1.85
T7 8 - 16 12500 25000 M6 1.05 M7 1.30 M8 1.60 M8 2.10
T8 >16 25000 50000 M7 1.2 M8 1.50 M8 1.80 M8 2.40
Driver group with K factor
Collective groups
L1
low
L2 L3 L4
medium high very high
Maximum loads occur only in exceptional cases; low loads are present at all times Low, medium and high loads are present for roughly equal periods of times Loads are always near the maximum Always maximum loads
Gear Drives
542
Section 14
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Section 15 Seal Kits
ISO Tie Rod Type Hydraulic Cylinders, CDT3 ....................................................................................544 NFPA Tie Rod Type Hydraulic Cylinders, CDT4 ....................................................................................545 Variable Displacement Vane Pumps, Model VPV ...........................................................................546
543
543
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

ISO Tie Rod Type Hydraulic Cylinders

CDT3 CDT3 Seal Kits Single Rod
Mineral Oil Seals Seal Kit Part Number M 25 32 40 50 63 80 100 12 18 14 22 18 28 22 36 28 45 36 56 45 70 R900874070 R900874071 R900874072 R900874073 R900874074 R900874075 R900874076 R900874077 R900874078 R900874079 R900874080 R900874081 R900874082 R900874083 $ 459.00 $ 346.00 $ 291.00 $ 242.00 $ 208.00 $ 176.00 List $ 150.00
Piston
Rod
Seal Kits
544
Section 15
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service

NFPA Tie Rod Type Hydraulic Cylinders

CDT4 CDT4 Preferred Product Seal Kit and Cartridge Seal Kits
Piston and Tube Seal Kits* Bore (Inches) 1.500 2.000 2.500 3.250 4.000 Rod (Inches) 0.625 1.000 (1.500" bore) 1.000 (2.000"-2.500" bore) 1.375 (2.000" bore) 1.375 (2.500"-3.250" bore) 1.750 2.000 Cushion Valve Bore Size 1-1/2", 2", 2-1/2" 3-14", 4" M R987053909 R978904325 LIST PRICE $ 33.00 $ 38.00 M R978006830 R978006831 R978006832 R978006833 R978006834 M R978006773 R978006774 R978006775 R978006776 R978006777 R978006778 R978006779 LIST PRICE $ 40.00 $ 47.00 $ 49.00 $ 62.00 $ 84.00 LIST PRICE $ 86.00 $ 99.00 $ 109.00 $ 124.00 $ 138.00 $ 145.00 $ 179.00
Rod Cartridge Seal Kits (w / Rod Bearing)
M = Polyurethane seal system (standard) NOTE: * Piston/Tube Seal Kits include: one (1) double-acting piston seal; two (2) wear bands; two (2) o-rings and two (2) back-up rings Rod Cartridge Seal Kits include: one (1) double-lip wiper set; one (1) u-cup rod seal; one (1) rod bearing; one (1) back-up ring
Seal Kits
545
Section 15
Hydraulics
Pneumatics
Service
Extracted from 9 535 233 797/07.03

Variable Displacement Vane Pumps

Model VPV VPV Repair Kits, Preferred
R978711809 R978711812 R978711814 R978711825 R978711838 R978711840 R978711841 R978711842 R978711849 R978711850 R978711851 R978711852 VPV25/32 SAE PUMP REP KIT 210 VPV16 SAE PUMP REPAIR KIT 210 VPV16 SAE COMBO PUMP KIT 210 VPV25/32 SAE REP KIT P1 210BAR KIT REPAIR VPV45/63 210BAR SAE VPV80 SAE 210 BAR REPAIR KIT KIT REPAIR VPV45/63 210BAR SAE/P1 KIT P1 VPV80 210 BAR PUMP REP. KIT REPAIR VPV100/130 210BAR SAE KIT REPAIR VPV164 210BAR SAE KIT REPAIR VPV100/130 210BAR SAE/P1 KIT REPAIR VPV164 210BAR SAE/P1 $ 1026.00 $ 777.30 $ 848.20 $ 1,070.50 $ 1,268.40 $ 1,903.10 $ 1,531.00 $ 2,300.00 $ 2,537.00 $ 2,883.30 $ 2,775.20 $ 3,302.25
VPV Seal Kits, Preferred

9511230605 9511230597 9511230658 951123065 VPV16 PUMP ORING KIT 210 BAR VPV25/32 ORING KIT ISO/SAE SEAL KIT VPV45/80 SAE/ISO-210 SEAL KIT VPV130/164SAE/ISO-210 $ 139.00 $ 161.80 $ 198.50 $ 222.50
Seal Kits
546
Section 15
Bosch Rexroth Corporation Industrial Hydraulics 2315 City Line Road Bethlehem, PA 18017-2131 Telephone (610) 694-8300 Facsimile (610) 694-8467 www.boschrexroth-us.com
Bosch Rexroth Corporation Mobile Hydraulics 1700 Old Manseld Road Wooster, OH 44691-0394 Telephone (330) 263-3300 Facsimile (330) 263-3333 8 Southchase Court Fountain Inn, SC 29644 Telephone (864) 967-2777 Facsimile (864) 962-5338 551 Telser Road Lake Zurich, IL 60047-6705 Telephone (847) 550-9800 Facsimile (847) 550-6300
Bosch Rexroth Corporation Corporate Headquarters 5150 Prairie Stone Parkway Hoffman Estates, IL 60192-3707 Telephone (847) 645-3600 Facsimile (847) 645-6201 Bosch Rexroth Corporation Electric Drives and Controls 5150 Prairie Stone Parkway Hoffman Estates, IL 60192-3707 Telephone (847) 645-3600 Facsimile (847) 645-6201 Bosch Rexroth Corporation Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies 816 E. Third Street Buchanan, MI 49107 Telephone (269) 695-0151 Facsimile (269) 695-5363 14001 South Lakes Drive Charlotte, NC 28273 Telephone (800) 438-5983 Facsimile (704) 583-0523 Bosch Rexroth Corporation Pneumatics 1953 Mercer Road Lexington, KY 40511-1021 Telephone (859) 254-8031 Facsimile (859) 281-3491
Printed in the United States RA 00 823/07.06 Version 6 Replaces: RA 00 823/08.05 Version 5

Ra00823 0706 SPC

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Ra00823 0706 SPC

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Hydraulics Product Catalog With Preferred & Spotlight Delivery Programs Section

Authorized Distibution Network

The Drive & Control Company

Full-line Bosch Rexroth Hydraulic Distributors

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

The Drive & Control Company

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Section 1 Pumps and Motors

The Drive & Control Company

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

External gear pumps Series F, N, & G

Pumps and Motors

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

Ordering code F series pump

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

Ordering code N series pump

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

Ordering code G series pump

Note: Consult factory for availability

Pumps and Motors

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

Ordering code for multiple pumps

Pumps and Motors

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 10 097/02.06

500 3500 4000

cm3/rev bar bar psi bar psi bar psi

63 63 3.84 400 2300 170 2465 200 2900 230 3335

Pumps and Motors

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 14 025/08.06

External gear motors Series F & N

Ratings and specications

Pumps and Motors

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 14 025/08.06

Ordering code F series motor

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RA 14 025/08.06

Ordering code N series motor

Electric Drives and Controls

Linear Motion and Assembly Technologies

Extracted from RE 10213/04.05